Roland M-380 48-Channel Rack-mountable Digital Mixing Console Owner's Manual

Roland M-380 48-Channel Rack-mountable Digital Mixing Console Owner's Manual
Information
When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as shown below.
AFRICA
CENTRAL/LATIN
AMERICA
ALGERIA / LIBYA / TUNISIA
Roland Iberia, S.L.
Paseo García Faria, 33-35
08005 Barcelona SPAIN
TEL: 93 493 91 00
BRAZIL
Roland Brasil Ltda.
Rua San Jose, 211
Parque Industrial San Jose
Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL
TEL: (011) 4615 5666
SOUTH AFRICA
Paul Bothner(PTY) Ltd.
Royal Cape Park, Unit 24
Londonderry Road, Ottery 7800
Cape Town, SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (021) 799 4900
ASIA
INDONESIA
PT. Citra IntiRama
JL. Cideng Timur No. 15J-15O
Jakarta Pusat
INDONESIA
TEL: (021) 632-4170
CHINA
Roland Shanghai Electronics Co.,Ltd.
5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road
Shanghai 200090, CHINA
TEL: (021) 5580-0800
Roland Systems Group U.S.
425 Sequoia Drive Suite 114,
Bellingham, Washington,
98226 USA
TEL: 360-594-4282
EUROPE
AUSTRIA/BELGIUM/
FRANCE/GERMANY/
HOLLAND/
LUXEMBOURG/
PORTUGAL/SPAIN/
SWITZERLAND
Roland Iberia, S.L.
Paseo García Faria, 33-35
08005 Barcelona SPAIN
TEL: 93 493 91 00
TAIWAN
ROLAND TAIWAN
ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.
Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung Shan
N.Road Sec.2, Taipei, TAIWAN, R.O.C.
TEL: (02) 2561 3339
MuTek
Dorozhnaya ul.3,korp.6
117 545 Moscow, RUSSIA
TEL: (095) 981-4967
FINLAND
Roland Scandinavia As, Filial
Finland
Vanha Nurmijarventie 62
01670 Vantaa
Finland
TEL: (0)9 68 24 020
HUNGARY
Roland East Europe Ltd.
2045 Torokbalint, FSD Park, building 3.
TEL: (23) 511011
NORWAY
Roland Scandinavia Avd.
Kontor Norge
Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95
Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo
NORWAY
TEL: 2273 0074
POLAND
ROLAND POLSKA SP. Z O.O.
ul. Kty Grodziskie 16B
03-289 Warszawa, POLAND
TEL: (022) 678 9512
SLOVAKIA
DAN Acoustic s.r.o.
Povazská 18.
SK - 940 01 Nové Zámky
TEL: (035) 6424 330
MIDDLE EAST
BAHRAIN / CYPRUS /
JORDAN / IRAQ / ISRAEL /
LEBANON / OMAN / QATAR /
KUWAIT / SAUDI ARABIA /
SYRIA / U.A.E / YEMEN
Roland Iberia, S.L.
Paseo García Faria, 33-35
08005 Barcelona SPAIN
TEL: 93 493 91 00
ART-CENTAR
Degenova 3.
HR - 10000 Zagreb
TEL: (1) 466 8493
Roland Scandinavia A/S
SWEDISH SALES OFFICE
Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.
S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN
TEL: (0)8 702 00 20
IRAN
MOCO INC.
No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave.,
Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad
Tehran, IRAN
TEL: (021)-2285-4169
UKRAINE
EURHYTHMICS Ltd.
P.O.Box: 37-a.
Nedecey Str. 30
UA - 89600 Mukachevo, UKRAINE
TEL: (03131) 414-40
UNITED KINGDOM/
IRELAND
Roland (U.K.) Ltd.
Atlantic Close, Swansea Enterprise Park,
Swansea
SA7 9FJ,
UNITED KINGDOM
TEL: (01792) 702701
OCEANIA
AUSTRALIA/
NEW ZEALAND
Roland Corporation
Australia Pty.,Ltd.
38 Campbell Avenue
Dee Why West, NSW 2099
AUSTRALIA
For Australia
TEL: (02) 9982 8266
For New Zealand
TEL: (09) 3098 715
CZECH REP.
CZECH REPUBLIC
DISTRIBUTOR s.r.o
Voctárova 247/16
CZ - 180 00 PRAHA 8,
CZECH REP.
TEL: (2) 830 20270
ROMANIA
FBS LINES
Piata Libertatii 1,
535500 Gheorgheni, ROMANIA
TEL: (266) 364 609
Owner’s Manual
SWEDEN
CROATIA
KOREA
KOREA AVICS CO., LTD.
Unit B-2208, Woolimblue9,
#240-21, Yeomchang-dong,
Gangseo-gu, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 02-322-3264
RUSSIA
Roland Scandinavia A/S
Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,
DK-2100 Copenhagen
DENMARK
TEL: 3916 6200
NORTH AMERICA
CANADA
Roland Canada Ltd.
(Head Office)
5480 Parkwood Way, Richmond B. C.,
V6V 2M4 CANADA
TEL: (604) 270 6626
Roland Canada Ltd.
(Toronto Office)
170 Admiral Boulevard
Mississauga ON L5T 2N6 CANADA
TEL: (905) 362 9707
Owner’s Manual
Roland Shanghai Electronics Co.,Ltd.
(BEIJING OFFICE)
10F. No.18 3 Section Anhuaxili
Chaoyang District Beijing
100011 CHINA
TEL: (010) 6426-5050
Other CENTRAL/ LATIN
AMERICA
DENMARK
U. S. A.
SINGAPORE/
MALAYSIA
Roland Asia Pacific Sdn. Bhd.
45-1, Block C2, Jalan PJU 1/39,
Dataran Prima, 47301 Petaling Jaya,
Selangor, MALAYSIA
TEL: 3-7805-3263
Roland Systems Group U.S.
425 Sequoia Drive Suite 114,
Bellingham, Washington,
98226 USA
TEL: 360-594-4282
As of Aug.1,2009 (RSS)
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “IMPORTANT
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” (p. 2), “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” (p. 3–5), and
“IMPORTANT NOTES” (p. 6–7). These sections provide important
information concerning the proper operation of the unit. Additionally, in
order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature
provided by your new unit, Owner’s manual should be read in its entirety.
The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference.
Copyright © 2009 ROLAND CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form
without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.
For EU Countries
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture.
CAUTION
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the
product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to
constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
ATTENTION: RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the product.
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING - When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with a dry cloth.
Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including
amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with
one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two
blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the
third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug
does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the apparatus.
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified
by the manufacturer.
12. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
unused for long periods of time.
13. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing
is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any
way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid
has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus,
the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does
not operate normally, or has been dropped.
For the U.K.
WARNING:
THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED
IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE.
GREEN-AND-YELLOW: EARTH, BLUE: NEUTRAL, BROWN: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the
letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or GREEN-AND-YELLOW.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Danger of explosion if battery is
incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer.
Discard used batteries according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Apparatus containing
Lithium batteries
ADVARSEL!
VARNING
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved
fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af
samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til
leverandøren.
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en
ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av
apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt
fabrikantens instruktion.
ADVARSEL
VAROITUS
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av
batteri.
Benytt samme batteritype eller en
tilsvarende type anbefalt av
apparatfabrikanten.
Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til
fabrikantens instruks joner.
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on
virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan
laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo
valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
For EU Countries
This product complies with the requirements of EMCD 2004/108/EC and LVD 2006/95/EC.
For the USA
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
For Canada
NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
AVIS
CAUTION: Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with same or equivalent type.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
For C.A. US (Proposition 65)
WARNING
This product contains chemicals known to cause cancer, birth defects and other reproductive harm, including lead.
2
M-380_e1.book 3 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
USING THE UNIT SAFELY
The
symbol alerts the user to important instructions
or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is
determined by the design contained within the
triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for
general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of death or severe
injury should the unit be used
improperly.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of injury or material
damage should the unit be used
improperly.
* Material damage refers
other adverse effects
respect to the home
furnishings, as well
animals or pets.
The
symbol alerts the user to items that must never
be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that
must not be done is indicated by the design contained
within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it
means that the unit must never be disassembled.
to damage or
caused with
and all its
to domestic
The ● symbol alerts the user to things that must be
carried out. The specific thing that must be done is
indicated by the design contained within the circle. In
the case of the symbol at left, it means that the powercord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.
001-50
008a
• Connect mains plug of this model to a mains
socket outlet with a protective earthing
connection.
..........................................................................................................
• The unit should be connected to a power supply
only of the type described in the operating
instructions, or as marked on the rear side of unit.
..........................................................................................................
002a
008e
• Do not open or perform any internal modifications on the unit.
• Use only the attached power-supply cord. Also,
the supplied power cord must not be used with
any other device.
..........................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
003
• Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace parts
within it (except when this manual provides
specific instructions directing you to do so). Refer
all servicing to your retailer, the nearest Roland Service
Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as listed on
the “Information” page.
..........................................................................................................
009
004
• This unit, either alone or in combination with an
amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be
capable of producing sound levels that could
cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for
a long period of time at a high volume level, or at
a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience
any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should
immediately stop using the unit, and consult an
audiologist.
..........................................................................................................
• Never use or store the unit in places that are:
• Subject to temperature extremes (e.g., direct
sunlight in an enclosed vehicle, near a heating
duct, on top of heat-generating equipment); or
are
• Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors);
or are
• Humid; or are
• Exposed to rain; or are
• Dusty; or are
• Subject to high levels of vibration.
..........................................................................................................
• Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord,
nor place heavy objects on it. Doing so can
damage the cord, producing severed elements
and short circuits. Damaged cords are fire and
shock hazards!
..........................................................................................................
010
011
• Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable
material, coins, pins); or liquids of any kind
(water, soft drinks, etc.) to penetrate the unit.
007
• Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is
level and sure to remain stable. Never place it on
stands that could wobble, or on inclined surfaces.
..........................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
3
M-380_e1.book 4 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
012a
101a
• Immediately turn the power off, remove the
power cord from the outlet, and request servicing
by your retailer, the nearest Roland Service
Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as
listed on the “Information” page when:
• The unit should be located so that its location or
position does not interfere with its proper ventilation.
..........................................................................................................
• The power-supply cord or the plug has been damaged;
or
• If smoke or unusual odor occurs
• Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been spilled onto
the unit; or
• The unit has been exposed to rain (or otherwise has
become wet); or
• The unit does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance.
..........................................................................................................
013
• In households with small children, an adult
should provide supervision until the child is
capable of following all the rules essential for the
safe operation of the unit.
..........................................................................................................
014
• Protect the unit from strong impact.
(Do not drop it!)
..........................................................................................................
015
• Do not force the unit’s power-supply cord to
share an outlet with an unreasonable number of
other devices. Be especially careful when using
extension cords—the total power used by all
devices you have connected to the extension
cord’s outlet must never exceed the power rating
(watts/amperes) for the extension cord. Excessive
loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat
up and eventually melt through.
..........................................................................................................
016
• Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult
with your retailer, the nearest Roland Service
Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as
listed on the “Information” page.
..........................................................................................................
020
• Keep lithium batteries out of reach of small
children. If a child has accidentally swallowed a
battery, see a doctor immediately.
..........................................................................................................
102b
• Always grasp only the plug on the power-supply
cord when plugging into, or unplugging from, an
outlet or this unit.
..........................................................................................................
103a
• At regular intervals, you should unplug the
power plug and clean it by using a dry cloth to
wipe all dust and other accumulations away from
its prongs. Also, disconnect the power plug from
the power outlet whenever the unit is to remain
unused for an extended period of time. Any
accumulation of dust between the power plug
and the power outlet can result in poor insulation
and lead to fire.
..........................................................................................................
104
• Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming
entangled. Also, all cords and cables should be
placed so they are out of the reach of children.
..........................................................................................................
106
• Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on
the unit.
..........................................................................................................
107b
• Never handle the power cord or its plugs with
wet hands when plugging into, or unplugging
from, an outlet or this unit.
..........................................................................................................
108a
• Before moving the unit, disconnect the power
plug from the outlet, and pull out all cords from
external devices.
..........................................................................................................
109a
• Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and
unplug the power cord from the outlet (p. 18).
..........................................................................................................
110a
• Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning
in your area, pull the plug on the power cord out
of the outlet.
..........................................................................................................
113
• Lithium batteries must never be recharged,
heated, taken apart, or thrown into a fire or water.
• Use only the specified type (model no. CR2032) of
lithium battery (p. 19). Be sure to insert it as
directed (to ensure correct polarity).
..........................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
• Used lithium batteries must be disposed of in
compliance with whatever regulations for their
safe disposal that may be observed in the region
in which you live.
..........................................................................................................
021
114
026
• Do not put anything that contains water (e.g.,
flower vases) on this unit. Also, avoid the use of
insecticides, perfumes, alcohol, nail polish, spray
cans, etc., near the unit. Swiftly wipe away any
liquid that spills on the unit using a dry, soft
cloth.
..........................................................................................................
027
• Never expose Lithium Battery to excessive heat
such as sunshine, fire or the like.
..........................................................................................................
4
118c
• Keep the USB memory cover, the REAC caps, the
grounding terminal screw, the lithium battery, the
battery panel, the battery panel screws, the power
cord hook, the power cord screws and any fader
knobs you may remove and the included the
REAC connector and the ferrite cores in a safe
place out of children’s reach, so there is no chance
of them being swallowed accidentally.
..........................................................................................................
M-380_e1.book 5 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
120
• Always turn the phantom power off when
connecting any device other than condenser
microphones that require phantom power. You
risk causing damage if you mistakenly supply
phantom power to dynamic microphones, audio
playback devices, or other devices that don’t
require such power. Be sure to check the specifications of any microphone you intend to use by
referring to the manual that came with it.
(This instrument’s phantom power: +48V DC,
14mA Max)
..........................................................................................................
5
M-380_e1.book 6 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
IMPORTANT NOTES
291b
In addition to the items listed under “IMPORTANT
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” and “USING THE UNIT
SAFELY” on pages P. 2 and P. 3, please read and
observe the following:
Power Supply
301
• Do not connect this unit to same electrical outlet that is
being used by an electrical appliance that is controlled by
an inverter (such as a refrigerator, washing machine,
microwave oven, or air conditioner), or that contains a
motor. Depending on the way in which the electrical
appliance is used, power supply noise may cause this unit
to malfunction or may produce audible noise. If it is not
practical to use a separate electrical outlet, connect a
power supply noise filter between this unit and the
electrical outlet.
307
• Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the
power to all units. This will help prevent malfunctions
and/or damage to speakers or other devices.
308
• Although the LCD and LEDs are switched off when the
POWER switch is switched off, this does not mean that the
unit has been completely disconnected from the source of
power. If you need to turn off the power completely, first
turn off the POWER switch, then unplug the power cord
from the power outlet. For this reason, the outlet into
which you choose to connect the power cord’s plug
should be one that is within easy reach and readily accessible.
Placement
351
• Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equipment
containing large power transformers) may induce hum.
To alleviate the problem, change the orientation of this
unit; or move it farther away from the source of interference.
352a
• This device may interfere with radio and television
reception. Do not use this device in the vicinity of such
receivers.
352b
• Noise may be produced if wireless communications
devices, such as cell phones, are operated in the vicinity of
this unit. Such noise could occur when receiving or initiating a call, or while conversing. Should you experience
such problems, you should relocate such wireless devices
so they are at a greater distance from this unit, or switch
them off.
354a
• Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near
devices that radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed
vehicle, or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes.
Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit.
355b
• When moved from one location to another where the
temperature and/or humidity is very different, water
droplets (condensation) may form inside the unit. Damage
or malfunction may result if you attempt to use the unit in
this condition. Therefore, before using the unit, you must
allow it to stand for several hours, until the condensation
has completely evaporated.
360
• Depending on the material and temperature of the surface
on which you place the unit, its rubber feet may discolor
or mar the surface.
You can place a piece of felt or cloth under the rubber feet
to prevent this from happening. If you do so, please make
sure that the unit will not slip or move accidentally.
Maintenance
401a
• For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft, dry cloth
or one that has been slightly dampened with water. To
remove stubborn dirt, use a cloth impregnated with a
mild, non-abrasive detergent. Afterwards, be sure to wipe
the unit thoroughly with a soft, dry cloth.
402
• Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any
kind, to avoid the possibility of discoloration and/or
deformation.
Repairs and Data
452
• Please be aware that all data contained in the unit’s
memory may be lost when the unit is sent for repairs.
Important data should always be backed up on a USB
memory, or written down on paper (when possible).
During repairs, due care is taken to avoid the loss of data.
However, in certain cases (such as when circuitry related
to memory itself is out of order), we regret that it may not
be possible to restore the data, and Roland assumes no
liability concerning such loss of data.
6
M-380_e1.book 7 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
IMPORTANT NOTES
Memory Backup
501b
• This unit contains a battery which powers the unit’s
memory circuits while the main power is off. When this
battery becomes weak, the message shown below will
appear in the display. Once you see this message, have the
battery replaced with a fresh one as soon as possible to
avoid the loss of all data in memory. To have the battery
replaced, consult with your retailer, the nearest Roland
Service Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as
listed on the “Information” page.
Additional Precautions
551
• Please be aware that the contents of memory can be
irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction, or the
improper operation of the unit. To protect yourself against
the risk of loosing important data, we recommend that
you periodically save a backup copy of important data
you have stored in the unit’s memory on a USB memory.
552
• Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the contents
of data that was stored on a USB memory once it has been
lost. Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning
such loss of data.
553
• Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit’s
buttons, sliders, or other controls; and when using its jacks
and connectors. Rough handling can lead to malfunctions.
554
• Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.
556
• When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp the
connector itself—never pull on the cable. This way you
will avoid causing shorts, or damage to the cable’s
internal elements.
557
• A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit during
normal operation.
558b
• To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the unit’s
volume at reasonable levels (especially when it is late at
night).
559a
• When you need to transport the unit, package it in the box
(including padding) that it came in, if possible. Otherwise,
you will need to use equivalent packaging materials.
562
• Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not use
cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit.
The use of such cables can cause the sound level to be
extremely low, or impossible to hear. For information on
cable specifications, contact the manufacturer of the cable.
xxx
• The M-380’s center of gravity is located toward the rear of
the unit. When transporting the M-380, grasp it firmly and
be careful not to let it fall.
Before Using USB memory
Using USB memory
704
• Carefully insert the USB memory all the way in—until it is
firmly in place.
705
• Never touch the terminals of the USB memory. Also,
avoid getting the terminals dirty.
708
• USB memories are constructed using precision components; handle the cards carefully, paying particular note to
the following.
• To prevent damage to the cards from static electricity,
be sure to discharge any static electricity from your
own body before handling the cards.
• Do not touch or allow metal to come into contact with
the contact portion of the cards.
• Do not bend, drop, or subject cards to strong shock or
vibration.
• Do not keep cards in direct sunlight, in closed vehicles, or
other such locations (storage temperature: -25 to 85˚ C).
• Do not allow cards to become wet.
• Do not disassemble or modify the cards.
About USB memory
• Before using USB memory for the M-380, please format
the memory on the M-380.
For details, please refer “Formatting USB memory” (p.
177).
• Some USB memory might not be able to be used on the M380.
If there would be an error message by processing format
in accordance with “Formatting USB memory” (p. 177), it
is not possible to use for the M-380.
• The M-380 supports only USB memory (USB flash
Memory and USB flash drive).
Hard Disk and Memory Card Reader via USB is not
supported.
• USB memory does not work via USB hub.
• When the access lamp of USB memory is lit or blinked,
please do not remove the USB memory.
This might cause some damage to the data of the USB
memory or dificit.
• We recommend to format USB memory before doing
mixing operation on the M-380.
• We recommend to use USB memory exclusively for the M400/M-380 without storing any other files or programs.
xxx
• If the display becomes extremely dim, it is possible that
the display backlight has malfunctioned. If this occurs,
you must contact your dealer or a Roland service center.
xxx
• Due to the nature of the display, there may be screen
pixels that remain lit or that fail to light; please be aware
that this is not a malfunction or a defect.
7
M-380_e1.book 8 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
IMPORTANT NOTES
Regarding the CAT5e cable
Copyright
• In order to keep superb digital transfer quality by REAC,
please make sure to use following optional cables for 100 m
CAT5e cable.
SC-W100S 100M CAT5e cable
• Recording, duplication, distribution, sale, lease, performance, or broadcast of copyrighted material (musical
works, visual works, broadcasts, live performances, etc.)
belonging to a third party in part or in whole without the
permission of the copyright owner is forbidden by law.
W100S-R 100M CAT5e cable with reel
853
851
for 100 m CAT5e cable.
Channel Edit operation
• You might find some noises when you control followings.
However, this is not out of order.
Preamp Gain
4-band EQ
Gate
Comp/Limiter
Channel Link
Library Recall
Multiple connection of REAC
products
• When multiple REAC products are connected to either
REAC A or REAC B on the M-400/M-380 via REAC
splitter or switching hub, please set up REAC mode on
each product correctly.
If you turn on the power of these products with REAC
mode setting incorrectly, there might be some digital
noises happened from REAC products or M-380.
If this would happen, please turn off the power of all
REAC products and set the REAC mode correctly.
8
• Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a
copyright held by a third party. We assume no responsibility whatsoever with regard to any infringements of
third-party copyrights arising through your use of this
unit.
204
* Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
206j
* Windows® is known officially as: “Microsoft® Windows®
operating system.”
* Neutrik and EtherCon are registered trademarks of
Neutrik, Inc
• MMP (Moore Microprocessor Portfolio) refers to a patent
portfolio concerned with microprocessor architecture,
which was developed by Technology Properties Limited
(TPL). Roland has licensed this technology from the TPL
Group.
236
• Fugue © 2009 Kyoto Software Research, Inc. All rights
reserved.
220
* All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
M-380_e1.book 9 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
IMPORTANT NOTES
9
M-380_e1.book 10 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Contents
USING THE UNIT SAFELY......................................................................3
Contents
IMPORTANT NOTES ...............................................................................6
Introduction ...........................................................................................14
Check the included items ........................................................................................................................ 14
Conventions used in this manual........................................................................................................... 14
Basic knowledge about REAC ................................................................................................................ 14
Placement................................................................................................................................................... 16
Turning the power on/off....................................................................................................................... 18
About the internal lithium battery......................................................................................................... 19
À propos de la pile interne au lithium .................................................................................................. 19
About USB memory ................................................................................................................................. 20
Explanation of the panels ....................................................................22
Top panel ................................................................................................................................................... 22
Rear panel .................................................................................................................................................. 30
Basic operation .....................................................................................34
Basic panel operations ............................................................................................................................. 34
Screen operations...................................................................................................................................... 36
Editing a name .......................................................................................................................................... 39
Library operations .................................................................................................................................... 39
Message operations .................................................................................................................................. 41
Input channel operations .....................................................................42
About the input channels ........................................................................................................................ 42
Operations using the CHANNEL EDIT section .................................................................................. 43
Operations in the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen .................................................................................. 46
Stereo-linking channels............................................................................................................................ 50
Specifying a channel name and color label........................................................................................... 51
Copying channel settings to another channel ...................................................................................... 52
Using the channel library ........................................................................................................................ 53
Assigning channels to DCA groups and MUTE groups .................................................................... 54
AUX channel and MAIN L/R channel operations ...............................55
About AUX channels and the MAIN L/R channels ........................................................................... 55
Operations using the CHANNEL EDIT section .................................................................................. 56
Operations in the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen .................................................................................. 58
Stereo-linking AUX channels.................................................................................................................. 62
Specifying a channel name and color label........................................................................................... 63
Copying channel settings to another channel ...................................................................................... 63
Using the AUX/MAIN library ............................................................................................................... 64
Assigning channels to DCA groups and MUTE groups .................................................................... 64
Copying the MAIN mix
(AUX channels only) ............................................................................................................................... 65
MATRIX channel operations ................................................................66
About MATRIX channels ........................................................................................................................ 66
MATRIX channel operations .................................................................................................................. 67
Operations using the CHANNEL EDIT section .................................................................................. 67
Operations in the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen .................................................................................. 68
Stereo-linking MATRIX channels .......................................................................................................... 71
Sending to MATRIX from input channels ............................................................................................ 72
Copying a mix to another MATRIX....................................................................................................... 72
10
M-380_e1.book 11 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Contents
Dynamics ...............................................................................................73
Contents
Gate/expander operations...................................................................................................................... 73
Compressor operations............................................................................................................................ 78
Limiter operations (MAIN L/R, AUX1–AUX16)................................................................................. 82
Four-band EQ ........................................................................................84
Four-band EQ operations........................................................................................................................ 84
AUX send/MATRIX send.......................................................................87
AUX send operations ............................................................................................................................... 87
MATRIX send operations........................................................................................................................ 89
Input/output patchbay ..........................................................................90
Default settings of the input/output patchbay.................................................................................... 90
Patchbay operations ................................................................................................................................. 90
Input patchbay operations ...................................................................................................................... 91
Output patchbay operations ................................................................................................................... 92
Metering .................................................................................................94
About the meters ...................................................................................................................................... 94
Viewing the meters .................................................................................................................................. 94
Viewing the channel strip of the channel layer.................................................................................... 95
Editing the meter settings ....................................................................................................................... 96
Using the analyzer.................................................................................................................................... 96
Listing the channel names and group names....................................................................................... 97
Effects and 31-band GEQ.....................................................................98
About effects ............................................................................................................................................. 98
Effect input/output settings ................................................................................................................. 100
Editing effect parameters ...................................................................................................................... 102
About the 31-band GEQ ........................................................................................................................ 104
Inserting a 31-band GEQ ....................................................................................................................... 105
Editing the 31-band GEQ parameters ................................................................................................. 106
Inserting an external effects device ..................................................111
About inserting an external effects device.......................................................................................... 111
Inserting an external effects device into a channel ............................................................................ 112
DCA groups .........................................................................................114
About DCA groups ................................................................................................................................ 114
DCA group settings ............................................................................................................................... 114
Assigning a channel to a DCA group.................................................................................................. 115
Specifying a name and color label for the DCA group ..................................................................... 115
Using the panel to control DCA groups.............................................................................................. 116
Mute groups ........................................................................................117
About mute groups ................................................................................................................................ 117
Assigning a channel to a mute group.................................................................................................. 117
Specifying a name and color label for a mute group ........................................................................ 118
Talkback/Oscillator .............................................................................119
About talkback and oscillator............................................................................................................... 119
Using talkback......................................................................................................................................... 120
Using the oscillator................................................................................................................................. 121
Monitor/Solo ........................................................................................122
About monitoring................................................................................................................................... 122
Using Monitor ......................................................................................................................................... 123
Using Solo................................................................................................................................................ 124
11
M-380_e1.book 12 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Contents
Scene memory ....................................................................................125
Contents
About scene memory ............................................................................................................................. 125
Operations in the SCENE screen.......................................................................................................... 125
Momentarily displaying the scene list ................................................................................................ 128
Editing the scene list .............................................................................................................................. 129
The Global Scope function .................................................................................................................... 131
Synchronizing scene memories with M-48 memories ...................................................................... 132
LCR SYSTEM.......................................................................................134
About the LCR (Left/Center/Right) SYSTEM................................................................................... 134
Making the LCR SYSTEM setting ........................................................................................................ 135
Operating MAIN C ................................................................................................................................ 138
Sending signals from CH and AUX to MAIN L/R and MAIN C ................................................... 138
Parameter changes when the LCR SYSTEM is on ............................................................................. 139
USB memory recorder........................................................................141
About the USB memory recorder......................................................................................................... 141
Using the USB memory recorder ......................................................................................................... 141
User settings .......................................................................................146
About user settings ................................................................................................................................ 146
Creating and editing user settings ....................................................................................................... 146
Limiting the range of possible operations .......................................................................................... 151
Editing the user preferences ................................................................................................................. 152
Using the user buttons........................................................................................................................... 154
Editing other user preferences.............................................................................................................. 155
REAC applications and settings........................................................157
REAC applications ................................................................................................................................. 157
REAC connection examples .................................................................................................................. 159
REAC settings ......................................................................................................................................... 162
Remote.................................................................................................165
Remote functions .................................................................................................................................... 165
Remote settings....................................................................................................................................... 166
Other settings and functions .............................................................170
Viewing system information and making basic mixer settings....................................................... 170
Saving and loading mixer settings....................................................................................................... 173
Date and time settings ........................................................................................................................... 175
Managing USB memory ........................................................................................................................ 176
Console Lock ........................................................................................................................................... 179
Help function .......................................................................................................................................... 180
System settings........................................................................................................................................ 181
12
M-380_e1.book 13 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Contents
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer ..................................184
Contents
What is the M-48 live personal mixer? ................................................................................................ 184
Connecting M-48 units to the M-380 ................................................................................................... 185
Editing and managing M-48 units ....................................................................................................... 186
Specifying the outputs from the M-380 to the M-48 unit ................................................................. 186
Viewing the connected M-48 units ...................................................................................................... 187
Making settings for an M-48 unit......................................................................................................... 190
Setting the level, pan, and AUX switch for each source
(Source Level/Pan setting).................................................................................................................... 193
Assigning sources to groups (Source Assign settings) ..................................................................... 196
Checking and adjusting the musician’s mix (Group Mix) ............................................................... 198
Copying M-48 settings........................................................................................................................... 200
M-48 memory operations ...................................................................................................................... 201
Using the M-48 library........................................................................................................................... 203
Saving/loading USB memory .............................................................................................................. 205
Appendix..............................................................................................208
User button functions ............................................................................................................................ 208
Error message list ................................................................................................................................... 209
Troubleshooting...................................................................................................................................... 210
Pin configuration diagrams .................................................................................................................. 212
Requirements for switching hubs ........................................................................................................ 212
Main specifications................................................................................................................................. 213
Dimensions.............................................................................................................................................. 216
Reverb ...................................................................................................................................................... 217
Delay......................................................................................................................................................... 222
Modulation .............................................................................................................................................. 225
Pitch shift ................................................................................................................................................. 227
Channel strip ........................................................................................................................................... 227
GEQ .......................................................................................................................................................... 230
Roland vintage effects............................................................................................................................ 231
Index.....................................................................................................237
Screen index........................................................................................240
13
M-380_e1.book 14 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Introduction
Introduction
Check the included items
The following items are included with the M-380. Make sure that all
of them are present.
• The M-380 itself
• Power cord
Basic knowledge about REAC
About REAC
• Channel number sticker
The REAC (Roland Ethernet Audio Communication) interface is the
core of this system. It uses a proprietary protocol based on Ethernet
technology, and allows 40 channels of digital audio to be sent via a
single Cat5e Ethernet cable.
• Ferrite cores (four)
REAC can do the following.
* Use only the power cord that was included with the M-380.
• REAC connector covers (three)
• Owner’s manual (the document you’re reading)
• Send 40 channels of digital audio
Conventions used in this
manual
• Send audio up to 100 meters on one Cat5e cable
• A switching hub or the S-OPT option can be used to extend the
cable.
• Use a switching hub to easily split the signal
The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict
what should typically be shown by the display. Note, however, that
your unit may incorporate a newer, enhanced version of the system
(e.g., includes newer sounds), so what you actually see in the display
may not always match what appears in the manual.
Names
The following input/output units can be connected to the M-380’s
REAC ports.
• S-1608 stage unit
• S-0816 FOH unit
• The transmission delay between REAC devices is extremely
small (approximately 375 microseconds)
When the signal passes through a switching hub, there will be
approximately 200 microseconds of delay for each unit.
About cables
Since Cat5e Ethernet cables are used, it’s very easy to connect REAC
devices to each other. Cat5e Ethernet cables are commonly used for
computer network connections, and have RJ45 plugs.
• S-4000S 40-channel I/O modular rack (Ver. 2.010 and later)
In this manual, we may abbreviate these units as the S-1608, S-0816,
or S-4000S, or may refer to them collectively as input/output units.
Types of Ethernet cable
Text enclosed in square brackets [ ] indicates a button. For example,
the direction to “press [METER]” means that you are to press the
METER button.
There are two types of Ethernet cables. Although both types have the
same exterior appearance, their RJ45 plugs are wired differently, as
follows.
If a secondary name is shown for a button, such as [DISP (BUTTON
ASSIGN)], the text in parentheses indicates the function that the
button has when pressed while holding down [SHIFT].
•
Crossover cable
The internal wiring of the cable is crossed at each RJ45 plug.
This means that the connections of the RJ45 plugs will differ at
each end of the cable.
In the case of function buttons, the function is given in parentheses,
such as [F1 (LINK)].
•
Straight cable
The internal wiring of the cable is the same at each end.
Crossover cables (such as RSS SC-W100S or RSS W100S-R) should be
used when connecting to the REAC ports on this product.
Certain cautions apply if you’re using a conventional
switching hub with this system. For details, refer to “REAC
applications” (p. 157).
14
M-380_e1.book 15 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Introduction
Ethernet connectors
Ethernet cables use RJ45 plugs. REAC equipment provides an RJ45
connector for each REAC port.
REAC connections
Here is a typical example of connections using the S-1608.
In this system, the M-380 is normally set to be the master (FOH
setting), while the input/output units are set to be slaves.
For a more detailed description of connections, refer to “REAC
applications” (p. 157).
RJ45 plug
REAC RJ45 connector
For critically important communication, it is vital to protect the RJ45
plug and connector. For such situations, REAC RJ45 connectors use a
sturdy Neutrik EtherCon plug. Using the EtherCon RJ45 plug allows
a latched-type connector similar to an XLR plug.
Cat5e Ethernet cables up to 100 meters long are supported. If
you need a longer connection, we recommend that you use the
optional S-OPT.
fig.connect-REAC.eps
S-1608
S-1608
Neutrik Corporation provides EtherCon RJ45 plugs as well as The
Neutrik Corporation manufactures EtherCon RJ45 plugs, as well as
EtherCon plugs that can be added to the RJ45 plug of commercially
available Ethernet cable.
SLAVE
SLAVE
Cat5e
REAC A
Cat5e
MASTER
REAC B
MASTER
The RJ45 connectors of REAC ports can accept either RJ45 plugs
or EtherCon plugs.
Cautions for handling Cat5e cables
• Do not apply excessive force to Cat5e cables.
• Do not bundle (bend) a Cat5e cable to a radius less than 25 mm,
or fold it in two.
M-380
• Do not tightly bundle a Cat5e cable.
• Do not place multiple Cat5e cables in parallel for an extended
distance.
• Do not place Cat5e cables near a source of electrical noise
(power supply cord, motor, fluorescent lights, etc.).
Cautions when making REAC
connections
• REAC connections are designed so that noise will not be
produced even if you hot-swap (plug or unplug a live
connection). However in rare cases, noise may occur at the
audio output of the system. To prevent hot-swapping from
causing damage to your speakers or other equipment connected
to the audio outputs, please observe the following points.
• Make REAC connections while holding down the [MUTE ALL
OUTPUTS] of the input/output unit
• Before you make REAC connections, mute the outputs using [F6
(MUTE ALL OUT)] in the MUTE GROUP screen (p. 117).
In some cases, the muted state will continue even after you
release your finger from [MUTE ALL OUTPUTS] of the input/
output unit. In this case, press [MUTE ALL OUTPUTS] once
again to mute, and then release your finger to unmute the unit.
15
Introduction
When connecting REAC devices to each other, the REAC mode of
one device must be set to Master, and the REAC mode of the others
must be set to Slave.
fig.RJ45andREAC-e.eps
M-380_e1.book 16 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Introduction
Introduction
Placement
Attaching the ferrite core
You must attach the ferrite cores before using the M-380. This is for
the purpose of preventing electromagnetic noise; do not remove it.
1.
About the REAC caps
When the M-380 is shipped from the factory, REAC caps are
attached to the REAC ports. In order to use REAC port, you’ll need
to remove the REAC cap. Take care not to lose the REAC caps you
remove.
Spread the tabs, and open the ferrite core.
fig.core1.eps
2.
Attach a ferrite core near the RJ45 plug on the Ethernet
cable, and near the base of the coaxial digital cable.
fig.core2.eps
About the REAC connector covers
When using an Ethernet cable with standard RJ45 plugs, fit the
included REAC connector covers on the REAC ports as shown.
3.
Close the ferrite core until you hear it snap shut.
fig.core3.eps
4.
Connect the plug with the ferrite core to the M-380’s REAC
port.
Remove the REAC connector cover if you’re using an EtherCon
type REAC cable (SC-W100S/W100S-R). Take care not to lose
the REAC connector covers you removed.
16
M-380_e1.book 17 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Introduction
When Installing in a Rack
1.
As shown in the illustration, remove the two screws that
fasten the hook, and detach the power cord hook.
fig.cord-hook1.eps
• Ensure that the location provides good air flow and ventilation.
• Never block the cooling-fan intake port or ventilation port in
the front and rear panel.
• Avoid using the M-380 in sealed-type rack mounts. As this type
of rack does not permit heated air within the rack to be
expelled, the heated air is drawn into the M-380 as a result, thus
preventing adequately efficient cooling.
• If the rack’s rear panel is not removable, ensure that a
ventilation port or exhaust fan is provided at the top of the
rack’s rear panel to expel any accumulated heat.
• If the M-380 is mounted in a portable rack, remove both the
front and rear rack covers before use to ensure that the M-380’s
front and rear panels remain unobstructed.
• When installing the unit on a rack, detach the rubber feet from
the bottom of the unit.
Use due caution when mounting the M-380 in a rack or other
enclosure so you don’t get your fingers wedged or pinched.
AC power connections
2.
As shown in the illustration, fit the power cord hook over
the power cord, and fasten it using the two screws you
removed in step 1.
fig.cord-hook2.eps
Connect one end of the supplied AC power cord to a grounded AC
outlet, and the other end to the AC INPUT connector to provide
power for the M-380’s internal power supply.
Use only the supplied power cords to prevent damage to the
units.
Attaching the power cord clamp
1.
Lower the power cord clamp to fasten the power cord.
fig.cord-cramp2.eps
17
Introduction
This unit can be installed in a rack. When installing the unit in a rack,
to ensure efficient cooling, give attention to the following points.
Attaching the power cord hook
M-380_e1.book 18 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Introduction
Introduction
Turning the power on/off
6.
This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief interval
(a few seconds) after power up is required before the unit will
operate normally.
Turning the power on
Once the connections have been completed, turn on power to
your various devices in the order specified. By turning on
devices in the wrong order, you risk causing malfunction and/
or damage to speakers and other devices.
Turning the power off
1.
Mute the outputs using [F6 (MUTE ALL OUT)] in the MUTE
GROUP screen (p. 117).
2.
Turn off the power of the equipment connected to the audio
outputs of the M-380 and your input/output units.
3.
Turn off the power using the POWER switch located on the
M-380’s rear panel.
4.
Turn off the power of your input/output units.
5.
Turn off the power of the equipment connected to the audio
inputs of the M-380 and your input/output units.
fig.PowerOnOrder.eps
3
Turn on the power of the equipment connected to the audio
outputs of the M-380 and your input/output units.
5
6
INPUT
OUTPUT
Cat5e
4
M-380
Before you turn off the power of the M-380, make sure that it is
not reading/writing USB memory or reading/writing scene
memory or library data. The data may be destroyed if you turn
off the power during such operations.
1.
Connect your input/output units (S-1608, S-0816, S-4000S,
etc.) to the M-380’s REAC port.
2.
Connect your audio equipment to the audio inputs and
audio outputs of the M-380 and your input/output units.
Howling could be produced depending on the location of
microphones relative to speakers. This can be remedied by:
1. Changing the orientation of the microphone(s).
2. Relocating microphone(s) at a greater distance from speakers.
3. Lowering volume levels.
3.
Turn on the power of the equipment connected to the audio
inputs of the M-380 and your input/output units.
4.
Turn on the power using the POWER switch located on the
M-380’s rear panel.
When the power supply has started up, a screen like the
following will appear.
fig.ScrMeter.eps
5.
Turn on the power of your input/output units.
If your input/output unit is the S-1608 or S-0816, use the power
cord included with the unit to connect the AC inlet of the
input/output unit to an electrical outlet.
18
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power
on all devices before making any connections.
M-380_e1.book 19 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Introduction
About the internal lithium
battery
Le M-380 est équipé d’une pile au lithium qui fait fonctionner
l’horloge et préserve les réglages du mélangeur. Si la pile est faible,
l’horloge et la restauration des réglages du mélangeur ne
fonctionnent pas correctement. Si un message contextuel
recommandant de remplacer la pile s’affiche lorsque l’appareil est
mis sous tension, il faut la remplacer comme suit.
Replace the old battery with a CR2032 type lithium
Remplacement de la pile usée par une pile au lithium
de type CR2032. Il faut s’assurer d’obtenir pile au
lithium de type CR2032 du détaillant d’appareils
électroniques.
battery. Ask your consumer electronics dealer for a
“CR2032 type lithium battery.”
1.
Back up the M-380’s mixer settings to USB memory.
1.
For details, refer to “Saving mixer settings to USB memory” (p.
173).
2.
Switch off the M-380’s power, and disconnect the power
cord from the AC outlet.
3.
Remove the two screws that fasten the battery cover as
shown in the illustration, and detach the battery cover.
fig.battery-panel1.eps
Faire une copie de sauvegarde des réglages du mélangeur
interne dans la mémoire USB.
Pour obtenir les détails, se reporter à la rubrique “Saving mixer
settings to USB memory” (p. 173).
2.
Couper l’alimentation du M-380 et débrancher le câble
d’alimentation de la prise de courant.
3.
Comme le montre l’illustration, retirer les deux vis qui
retiennent le couvercle du compartiment de la pile et retirer
le couvercle.
fig.battery-panel1.eps
4.
Remove the old battery, and insert the new battery.
5.
Attach the battery cover as shown in the illustration, and
fasten it using the two screws you removed in step 3.
4.
Retirer la pile usée et insérer la pile neuve.
5.
Remettre en place le couvercle du compartiment de la pile
et le fixer à l’aide des deux vis retirées à l’étape 3.
fig.battery-panel2.eps
fig.battery-panel2.eps
6.
Turn on the power of the M-380, and set the date and time
(p. 175).
7.
Load the previously saved settings (MIXER PARAMETER,
SYSTEM SETTING) from the USB memory to which you
backed up the data in step 1. (p. 174)
6.
Mettre le M-380 sous tension et régler la date et l’heure
(p. 175).
7.
Charger les réglages enregistrés (PARAMÈTRE DU
MÉLANGEUR, RÉGLAGE DU SYSTÈME) dans la
mémoire USB où la copie de sauvagarde a été faite à
l’étape 1. (p. 174)
19
Introduction
The M-380 has an internal lithium battery that backs up the clock
function and the mixer settings. If this battery runs down, the clock
function and the feature that provides for the reinstatement of the
mixer settings that existed prior to switching off the power will no
longer operate correctly. If a popup message recommending that
you replace the battery appears when you turn on the power, replace
the battery as described in the following procedure.
À propos de
la pile interne
au lithium
M-380_e1.book 20 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Introduction
About USB memory
Introduction
The M-380 can use USB memory to store and read a variety of data.
• Record and play WAV files using the USB Memory Recorder
• Save and load user settings files
• Back up and recover internal mixer data
Carefully insert the USB memory all the way in---until it is
firmly in place.
USB memory used with the USB Memory Recorder must
support USB 2.0 (Hi-speed).
About the USB memory cover
The USB memory connector is fitted with a USB memory cover.
When using USB memory, open the USB memory cover. When not
using USB memory, keep the USB memory cover closed.
battery-panel1.eps
20
M-380_e1.book 21 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Introduction
Introduction
21
M-380_e1.book 22 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Explanation of the panels
Top panel
fig.TopPanelGuide.eps
17
Explanation of the panels
10
5
11 13 14
4
6
12
7 8
9
15
16
1
2
3
18
19
22
1
Fader module section
p. 23
2
Layer section
p. 23
3
Main fader module
p. 24
4
CHANNEL EDIT section
p. 24
5
Display
p. 27
6
Function button section
p. 27
7
EFFECTS button
p. 27
8
METER button
p. 27
9
USER section
p. 27
10
USB MEMORY RECORDER section
p. 27
11
SETUP section
p. 28
12
Screen controller section
p. 28
13
TALKBACK/OSC section
p. 28
14
MONITOR section
p. 29
15
GROUP section
p. 29
16
SCENE MEMORY section
p. 29
17
USB MEMORY connector
p. 29
18
PHONES jack
p. 29
19
PHONES LEVEL knob
p. 29
M-380_e1.book 23 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Explanation of the panels
C.
1. Fader module section
Meters
These indicate the signal level of each channel.
fig.FaderModSectGuide.eps
D.
MUTE buttons
These turn muting on/off for each channel. The button will be
lit if mute is active.
E.
Faders
These adjust the signal level of each channel.
C
D
In SENDS ON FADER mode, these adjust the send level from
the channels to AUX.
E
2. Layer section
fig.LayerSectGuide.eps
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
This section lets you control the 12 channels you selected in the
Layer section (p. 23).
A.
SEL buttons
Use these buttons to select the channel that you want to control
in the CHANNEL EDIT section or in the screen. The [SEL]
button of the currently selected channel will light.
If all [SEL] buttons of the top panel are extinguished, a channel
in a different channel layer is selected. The currently selected
channel is also shown in the upper center of the screen.
This section lets you select the channel layer that will be assigned to
the fader module section. The button of the currently assigned
channel layer will be lit.
A.
fig.ScrTBChDisp.eps
For DCA1 through DCA8, selecting "ASSIGN" using the DCA
[SEL] button for user preferences (p. 155) displays the DCA
GROUP ASSIGN popup (p. 115). When "OFF" has been
selected, this button has no effect.
B.
SOLO buttons
These buttons turn solo on/off for each channel. The button will
light when solo is on.
There are two solo modes: LAST mode, in which you can
monitor only the channel for which solo was activated most
recently, or ADD ON mode, in which you can monitor the mix
of all channels for which solo is on. You can switch between
these modes in the monitor screen. For details, refer to “Using
solo” (p. 124).
USER layer button
This switches the USER layer mode on/off.
It also calls up user faders to the fader module section.
For more about user faders, refer to “Editing the user fader
assignments” (p. 152).
B.
AUX13-16/MTX layer button
This assigns AUX13–AUX16 and MATRIX1–MATRIX8 to the
fader module section.
When the USER layer mode is on, this calls up user layer 6 to
the fader module section.
If the user preference AUX/MTX LAYER (p. 155) is set to
“4Auxes + 8DCA,” the AUX13-16/MTX layer button will assign
AUX13–AUX16 and DCA1– DCA8 to the fader module section.
23
Explanation of the panels
The OVER indicator will light when a level that exceeds the
OVER LEVEL specified in the METER screen is detected. For
details, refer to “Editing the meter settings” (p. 96).
A
B
M-380_e1.book 24 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Explanation of the panels
C.
AUX1-12 layer button
This assigns AUX1–AUX12 to the fader module section.
When the USER layer mode is on, this calls up user layer 5 to
the fader module section.
Explanation of the panels
D.
4. CHANNEL EDIT section
fig.ChEditSectGuide.eps
C A H
CH37-48 layer button
This assigns CH37–CH48 to the fader module section.
When the USER layer mode is on, this calls up user layer 4 to
the fader module section.
E.
F.
E
F
CH25-36 layer button
This assigns CH25–CH36 to the fader module section.
D
B
When the USER layer mode is on, this calls up user layer 3 to
the fader module section.
G
CH13-24 layer button
This assigns CH13–CH24 to the fader module section.
When the USER layer mode is on, this calls up user layer 2 to
the fader module section.
G. CH1-12 layer button
This assigns CH1–CH12 to the fader module section.
I
When the USER layer mode is on, this calls up user layer 1 to
the fader module section.
3. Main fader module
fig.MainFaderModGuide.eps
A
B
C
In this section you can operate the main parameters of the currently
selected channel.
A.
SEL button
This button selects the MAIN channel so that it can be
controlled from the CHANNEL EDIT section or in the screen. It
will light if the MAIN channel is selected.
By repeatedly pressing [SEL] you can alternately select the
MAIN L or MAIN R channels.
B.
SOLO button
This button turns solo on/off for the MAIN L/R channels. It
will light if solo is on.
C.
Fader
This adjusts the signal level of the MAIN L/R channels.
24
A.
CH DISP button
This button accesses the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen. It will
light red while this screen is displayed.
B.
TOUCH SELECT button
This button turns the Touch Select function on/off. It will light
if the Touch Select function is on.
The Touch Select function lets you select a channel by touching
its fader.
M-380_e1.book 25 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Explanation of the panels
C.
PREAMP area
fig.ChEdtPreamp.eps
GAIN knob
This adjusts the preamp gain of CH1–CH48.
This adjusts the attenuator of AUX1–AUX16, MATRIX1–
MATRIX8, MAIN L/R and MAIN C.
GATE area
fig.ChEdtGate.eps
In this area you can operate the gate/expander that is provided for
CH1–CH48.
•
DISP button
This accesses the GATE/EXPANDER popup where you can
make detailed settings. The button will light red while the
popup is shown.
When ATT Ctrl (p. 50) at the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen is on,
this always adjusts the attenuator.
You can turn the gate/expander on or off by holding down
[SHIFT] and pressing [DISP].
This control is invalid for the following channels.
• Input channels to which you have not patched an input port
• Input channels to which you’ve patched a port that has no
preamp gain, such as an internal port
These controls are invalid for the following channels.
Invalid controls go dark.
• AUX1–AUX16
• MAIN L/R, MAIN C
D.
• MATRIX1–MATRIX16
FILTER area
fig.ChEdtFilter.eps
F.
COMP area
fig.ChEdtComp.eps
In this area you can operate the filter that is provided for each input
channel.
•
ON button
This button turns the filter on/off. It will light if the filter is on.
•
FREQ knob
This adjusts the frequency of the filter.
These controls are invalid for the following channels.
• AUX1–AUX16
• MAIN L/R, MAIN C
In this area you can operate the compressor that is provided on
CH1–CH48 and the limiter that is provided on AUX1–AUX16,
MAIN L/R and MAIN C.
•
DISP button
This accesses a popup where you can make detailed settings.
This will access the COMPRESSOR popup for CH1–CH48, or
the LIMITER popup for AUX1–AUX16, MAIN L/R, MAIN C.
The button will light red while the popup is shown.
• MATRIX1–MATRIX16
Invalid controls go dark.
You can turn the compressor or limiter on or off by holding
down [SHIFT] and pressing [DISP].
These controls are invalid for the following channels.
• MATRIX1– MATRIX8
25
Explanation of the panels
•
E.
M-380_e1.book 26 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Explanation of the panels
Explanation of the panels
G. EQUALIZER area
I.
fig.ChEdtEQ.eps
fig.ChEdtAux.eps
AUX SENDS area
In this area you can operate the four-band EQ that is provided on
each channel.
•
ON button
•
DISP button
This button turns the EQ on/off. It will light if the EQ is on.
This accesses the EQUALIZER popup where you can make
detailed settings. The button will light red while the popup is
shown.
•
Q knobs (LO-MID, HI-MID)
These adjust the Q of each band.
•
FREQ knobs (LO, LO-MID, HI-MID, HI)
In this area you can adjust the send level from CH1–CH48 or the
MAIN L/R channel to the AUX buses.
•
These adjust the center frequency of each band.
•
These buttons select the AUX bus that will be the target of the
SEND LEVEL knob or the faders in SENDS ON FADER mode.
GAIN knobs (LO, LO-MID, HI-MID, HI)
These adjust the gain of each band.
1–16 buttons
•
DISP button
This button accesses the AUX SENDS popup where you can
make detailed settings. It will light red while the popup is
shown.
These controls are invalid for the following channels.
• MATRIX1– MATRIX8
Invalid controls go dark.
If an AUX channel is selected, or if the MTX SENDS indication
is shown in the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen for MAIN L/R,
this will adjust the send levels to MATRIX1–MATRIX8.
When the GATE/EXPANDER popup, COMPRESSOR popup,
or LIMITER popup is displayed, the parameters of the gate/
expander, compressor, or limiter can be adjusted using the Q
knobs, FREQ knobs, or GAIN knobs. For more information,
refer to "GATE/EXPANDER popup" (p. 74), "COMPRESSOR
popup" (p. 78), or "LIMITER popup" (p. 82).
If a MATRIX channel is selected, this will adjust the send levels
from AUX1–AUX16 to MATRIX.
H. PAN area
You can turn the corresponding send switch on/off by holding
down [SHIFT] and pressing AUX SELECT [1]–[16].
fig.ChEdtPan.eps
•
SEND LEVEL knob
This adjusts the send level to the AUX bus selected by the AUX
SELECT [1]–[16] buttons.
•
PAN knob
For CH1–CH48, this adjusts the pan. For AUX1–AUX16, MAIN
L/R, MATRIX1–MATRIX8, it adjusts the balance.
If AUX buses are stereo-linked, selecting the odd-numbered
AUX bus will let you adjust the send pan, and selecting the
even-numbered AUX bus will let you adjust the send level.
These controls are invalid for the following channels.
• MAIN C
Invalid controls go dark.
26
M-380_e1.book 27 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Explanation of the panels
•
SENDS ON FADER button
This button turns SENDS ON FADER mode on/off. It will blink
if SENDS ON FADER mode is on.
The main fader cannot be used with SENDS ON FADER.
SENDS ON FADER can be used only to adjust the send levels
from CH1–CH48 to AUX.
fig.MeterBtn.eps
Explanation of the panels
When SENDS ON FADER mode is on, you can use the faders of
each channel to adjust the send level to the selected AUX Bus.
Press one of the AUX SELECT [1]–[16] buttons to select the
AUX bus whose send level you want to adjust.
8. METER button
This button accesses the METER screen where you can view the
meters. It will light red while this screen is shown.
9. USER section
fig.UserSectGuide.eps
5. Display
fig.DisplayGuide.eps
A.
DISP button
This button accesses the USER screen where you can change or
edit the user settings. It will light red while the screen is shown.
If you hold down [SHIFT] and press this button, the USER
BUTTON tab of the USER PREFERENCE popup will appear.
This is a convenient way to check the user button settings.
B.
This area shows mixer parameters, system settings, and meters. You
can use the CHANNEL EDIT section, the function button section,
and the screen controller section to perform operations in the
display.
6. Function button section
USER 1–8 buttons
These access the function that is assigned to each button. You
can make function assignments in the USER PREFERENCE
popup. For details, refer to “Editing the user button
assignments” (p. 154).
By holding down [SHIFT] and pressing a USER1–8 button, you
can access the functions assigned to user buttons 9–16.
fig.FunctionSectGuide.eps
10. USB MEMORY RECORDER
section
Use these buttons to operate the function buttons shown at the
bottom of the display, and to operate the tabs that switch between
display screens.
fig.RecorderSectGuide.eps
7. EFFECTS button
fig.EffectsBtn.eps
•
This button accesses the EFFECTS screen where you can control the
effects, 31-band GEQ, and external insert paths. It will light red
while this screen is shown.
DISP button
This button accesses the RECORDER screen where you can
make recorder settings and manage the song list. It will light
red while this screen is shown.
27
M-380_e1.book 28 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Explanation of the panels
C.
HELP button
This button accesses the HELP CONTENTS popup. If you hold
down [HELP] and press another button, an explanation of that
button will appear in the HELP popup. This button will light
red while the popup is shown.
11. SETUP section
Explanation of the panels
fig.SetupSectGuide.eps
For more about using HELP, refer to the “Help function” (p. 180).
D. Cursor buttons
These buttons move the cursor up/down/left/right in the screen.
• PATCHBAY button
This button accesses the PATCHBAY screen where you can
make settings for the input/output patchbay. It will light red
while the screen is shown.
• SYSTEM button
This button accesses the SYSTEM screen where you can make
various system settings. It will light red while the screen is
shown.
12. Screen controller section
fig.GenCtrlSectGuide.eps
A
E. EXIT button
If you press this button while another screen is shown, you will
return to the HOME screen. If you press this button while a popup is
shown, the popup will close.
F. ENTER button
Use this button to turn an on-screen button on/off, or to confirm a
change you’ve made to the settings.
13. TALKBACK/OSC
(talkback/oscillator) section
fig.TalkbackOscSectGuide.eps
B C
A
B
D
E F
A.
B.
Value dial
This adjusts the value of the parameter at which the cursor is
located.
A.
MIC LEVEL knob
This adjusts the preamp gain of the TALKBACK MIC input
over a range of -10dBu–50 dBu.
B.
DISP button
This button accesses the TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR screen,
where you can make talkback settings and oscillator settings. It
will light red while the screen is shown.
C.
TALKBACK button
This button turns talkback on/off. It will blink while talkback is
on.
SHIFT button
This button has the following two functions.
• Some buttons change their function while [SHIFT] is held
down. The function obtained while [SHIFT] is held down is
printed above the button, enclosed by a line.
• You can hold down [SHIFT] to modify the range by which a
value will change when you operate the CHANNEL EDIT
section’s knob or the value dial, allowing you to adjust the
setting in finer detail.
You can use the user preference SHIFT LOCK (p. 155) to change
the behavior of the SHIFT button.
28
C
The way in which you press [TALKBACK] will affect how it
turns on/off.
Pressing and immediately releasing the button will alternately
turn talkback off or on (latched operation).
Pressing and holding the button will cause talkback to remain
on only while you continue holding down the button
(momentary operation).
M-380_e1.book 29 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Explanation of the panels
14. MONITOR section
fig.MonitorSectGuide.eps
16. SCENE MEMORY section
fig.SceneMemSectGuide.eps
B
C
A.
LEVEL knob
This adjusts the monitor output level in a range of -Inf dB –
+10.0 dB.
B.
DISP button
This button accesses the MONITOR screen where you can make
monitor or solo settings. It will light red while the screen is
shown.
C.
•
DISP button
This button accesses the SCENE screen where you can manage
the scene list and make scene settings. It will light red while the
screen is shown.
Holding down [SHIFT] and pressing [DISP] displays the
SCENE QUICKVIEW popup (p. 128).
17. USB MEMORY connector
fig.USBMemoryGuide.eps
SOLO CLEAR button
This button clears (turns off) the solo settings of all channels in a
single operation.
15. GROUP section
You can connect USB memory to this connector.
fig.GroupSectGuide.eps
Before you disconnect USB memory, make sure that data is not
being written to USB memory or being read from it. If you
disconnect USB memory while these operations are occurring,
you risk damaging the data.
18. PHONES jack
A.
B.
DCA button
This button accesses the DCA GROUP screen where you can
control the DCA groups and make settings for them. It will light
red while the screen is shown.
MUTE button
This button accesses the MUTE GROUP screen where you can
control the mute groups and make settings for them. It will light
red while the screen is shown.
You can connect a set of headphones to this jack, and use it to
monitor the MONITOR L/R audio signal.
19. PHONES LEVEL knob
This adjusts the output level to the headphones connected to the
PHONES jack.
29
Explanation of the panels
A
M-380_e1.book 30 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Explanation of the panels
Rear panel
fig.RearPanelGuide.eps
Explanation of the panels
15 17 10
9
8
7
6
5 15 4
15
3
11
1
14
2
13
30
12 16
1
CONSOLE INPUT jacks
p. 31
2
CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks
p. 31
3
REAC ports
p. 31
4
USB connector
p. 31
5
MIDI connectors
p. 32
6
RS-232C/MIDI select switch
p. 32
7
RS-232C connector
p. 32
8
DIGITAL OUT jacks
p. 32
9
TALKBACK MIC IN jack
p. 32
10
STEREO IN jacks
p. 32
11
POWER switch
p. 32
12
Grounding terminal
p. 33
13
AC INPUT connector, power cord clamp
p. 33
14
Cord hook
p. 33
15
Cooling vent
p. 33
16
Theft prevention lock
p. 33
17
BATTERY slot
p. 33
M-380_e1.book 31 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Explanation of the panels
1. CONSOLE INPUT jacks
fig.ConsInJackGuide.eps
3. REAC ports (A,B,SPLIT/BACKUP)
fig.REACPortGuide.eps
•
These are RJ45 connectors for connecting input/output units
such as the S-1608, S-0816, or S-4000S via Cat5e Ethernet cables.
Wiring diagrams for these jacks are shown below. Make
connections after first checking the wiring diagrams of other
equipment you intend to connect.
These connectors support Cat5e Ethernet cables up to 100
meters long. If you need a longer connection, we recommend
that you use the optional S-OPT.
fig.XLRJackInput.eps
•
GND
COLD
For details on backup connections and split connections, refer to
“REAC applications” (p. 157).
By default, the CONSOLE INPUT jacks are patched to CH33–
CH40.
When connection cables with resistors are used, the volume
level of equipment connected to the inputs (CONSOLE INPUT,
STEREO IN, TALKBACK MIC IN) may be low. If this happens,
use connection cables that do not contain resistors.
2. CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks
fig.ConsOutJackGuide.eps
These are balanced XLR-3-32 male output jacks for outputting
analog audio signals.
SPLIT/BACKUP port
This is used as a backup connection for the REAC A port, or for
split connection. You can also use it for multitrack recording on
a PC in which you’ve installed the REAC driver.
+PHANTOM[+48V/14mA]
HOT
REAC A, B ports
The REAC A and B ports and the SPLIT/BACKUP port have REAC
indicators that show the REAC communication status. The state of
the REAC indicator has the following significance.
Status
Unlit
Lit
Blinking
Explanation
No connection with a REAC device has been established.
A backup connection or split connection with a
REAC device has been established.
Connected normally with a REAC device.
4. USB connector
fig.USBPortGuide.eps
Wiring diagrams for these jacks are shown below. Make
connections after first checking the wiring diagrams of other
equipment you intend to connect.
fig.XLRJack.eps
1
2
This USB connector can be connected to your PC to control the M380 remotely. For more about remote operation, refer to “Remote”
(p. 165).
GND
HOT
COLD
By default, AUX1 OUT–AUX6 OUT and MONITOR L/R are
patched to the CONSOLE OUT jacks.
The CONSOLE INPUT jacks and CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks can
also be used as input/output jacks for inserting external effect
processors into channels. For details, refer to “Inserting an
external effects device” (p. 111).
31
Explanation of the panels
These are balanced XLR-3-31 female input jacks for inputting analog
audio signals from microphones or line level equipment.
M-380_e1.book 32 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Explanation of the panels
5. MIDI connectors
Explanation of the panels
fig.MIDIPortsGuide.eps
These connectors are for connection with MIDI equipment. An IN
connector (for reception) and an OUT/THRU connector (for
transmission and “thru”) are provided. You can use the REMOTE
popup to switch between the OUT and THRU functions.
9. TALKBACK MIC IN jack
fig.TbInJackGuide.eps
This is a balanced XLR-3-31 female input jack for connecting a
talkback mic. Make connections after first checking the wiring
diagrams of other equipment you intend to connect.
fig.XLRJackInput.eps
For details, refer to “Remote settings” (p. 166).
6. RS-232C/MIDI select switch
fig.SerialSelSWGuide.eps
+PHANTOM[+48V/14mA]
HOT
GND
COLD
10. STEREO IN jacks
fig.StInJackGuide.eps
On the M-380 you can use either the MIDI connectors or the RS-232C
connector. This switch selects the connector(s) you will use.
You must switch off the M-380’s power before changing the
position of this switch.
These are RCA phono jacks for inputting analog audio signals from
line level equipment. By default they are patched to CH47 and
CH48.
7. RS-232C connector
fig.RS232CPortGuide.eps
11. POWER switch
fig.PowerSwGuide.eps
You can use this RS-232C connector to remotely control the M-380
from an external device.
8. DIGITAL OUT jacks
fig.DigiOutJackGuide.eps
These jacks output a consumer format (IEC-60958 compliant) digital
audio signal. Two types of jacks are provided: coaxial and optical.
The same digital audio signal is output from both jacks. By default,
MONITOR L/R is patched to these jacks.
32
This turns the power on/off.
If you need to turn off the power completely, first turn off the
POWER switch, then unplug the power cord from the power
outlet. Refer to Power Supply (p. 6).
M-380_e1.book 33 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Explanation of the panels
12. Grounding terminal
Use this to connect the M-380 to an electrical ground.
Do not ground the M-380 to locations such as the following.
Water pipe (doing so may cause electrical shock)
•
Gas pipes (doing so may cause fire or explosion)
•
Telephone ground or lightning rod (hazardous if lightning
occurs)
Depending on the circumstances of a particular setup, you may
experience a discomforting sensation, or perceive that the
surface feels gritty to the touch when you touch this device,
microphones connected to it, or the metal portions of other
objects, such as guitars. This is due to an infinitesimal electrical
charge, which is absolutely harmless. However, if you are
concerned about this, connect the ground terminal (see figure)
with an external ground. When the unit is grounded, a slight
hum may occur, depending on the particulars of your
installation. If you are unsure of the connection method, contact
the nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland
distributor, as listed on the “Information” page.
13. AC INPUT connector,
power cord clamp
This cooling vent cools the M-380. When placing the M-380, take care
not to block the cooling vent.
Explanation of the panels
•
15. Cooling vent
16. Theft prevention lock
You can use this with a padlock to secure the M-380 from theft.
17. BATTERY slot
fig.BatterySlotGuide.eps
This slot contains a lithium battery that maintains the M-380’s clock
function and preserves the mixer settings.
If the battery runs down, you’ll need to replace it. For details on
replacing the battery, refer to “About the internal lithium battery”
(p. 19).
fig.ACInletGuide.eps
Connect the included power cord to the AC INPUT connector.
Use the power cord clamp to prevent the power cord from being
accidentally disconnected.
For details on attaching the power cord clamp, refer to
“Attaching the power cord clamp” (p. 17).
Do not connect any power cord to the M-380 other than the
included one.
14. Power cord hook
You can use this power cord hook to prevent the power cord from
being accidentally disconnected. This provides greater security than
the power cord clamp.
For details on attaching the power cord hook, refer to
“Attaching the power cord hook” (p. 17).
33
M-380_e1.book 34 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Basic operation
Basic panel operations
Selecting the channel layer
Operations in the CHANNEL EDIT
section
Here’s how to edit the channel parameters.
1.
fig.LayerBtn.eps
In the fader module section or main fader module, press a
[SEL] button to select the channel that you want to control.
Basic operation
fig.SELBtn.eps
[SEL]
[SEL]
Use the buttons of the Layer section to select the channel layer that
will be controlled by the fader module section. Each channel layer
assigns the following channels to the fader module section.
2.
In the CHANNEL EDIT section, press [CH DISP].
fig.ChDispBtn.eps
Channel layer
AUX13-16/MTX
AUX1-12
CH37-48
CH25-36
CH13-24
CH1-12
Channels
AUX13–AUX16, MATRIX1–MATRIX8
(or AUX13–AUX16, DCA1–DCA8)
AUX1–AUX12
CH37–CH48
CH25–CH36
CH13–CH24
CH1–CH12
CH DISP
3.
If the user preference AUX/MTX LAYER (p. 155) is set to
“4Auxes + 8DCA,” the AUX13-16/MTX layer button will assign
AUX13–AUX16 and DCA1– DCA8 to the fader module section.
The CHANNEL DISPLAY screen will appear. Use the
controllers of the CHANNEL EDIT section to edit the values.
fig.ScrChDisp.eps
For more information about the USER layer button, refer to
“Switching to the user layer” (p. 153).
You can make adjustments in finer increments by holding down
[SHIFT] while you operate the CHANNEL EDIT section’s knobs
or the value dial.
If you want to edit channel parameters that are not shown in the
CHANNEL DISPLAY screen, you can press the [DISP] button
in each area of the CHANNEL EDIT section to access a popup
that lets you make settings in greater detail.
If you’ve selected the CHANNEL SELECT item “CHANNEL
DISPLAY follows CH SELECT button” in User Preference (p.
155), pressing a [SEL] button will cause the CHANNEL
DISPLAY screen of that channel to appear.
34
M-380_e1.book 35 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Basic operation
Accessing a screen
When you press a screen select button that’s lit in green, or a screen select button that has a blue border, the corresponding screen or popup will
appear, and the button will light in red.
The following illustration shows the name of the screen or popup that appears for each button.
fig.DispBtnGuide.eps
METER
screen
EFFECTS
screen
RECORDER
screen
SYSTEM
screen
PATCHBAY
screen
GATE/EXPANDER
popup
COMPRESSOR
LIMITER
popup
TALKBACK/
OSCILLATOR screen
MONITOR screen
HELP CONTENTS
popup
USER screen
EQUALIZER
popup
DCA GROUP screen
MUTE GROUP screen
SCENE screen
AUX SENDS
popup
Popups are displayed on top of the screen. You can close the popup by pressing the button that turned red when you accessed that popup.
Home screen
To return to the Home screen, press the button that turned red when you pressed it to access a screen. (Buttons that access a popup are excepted.)
A user setting lets you choose either the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen or the METER screen as the Home screen.
For details on how to choose the Home screen, refer to “Editing other user preferences” (p. 155).
35
Basic operation
CHANNEL
DISPLAY
screen
M-380_e1.book 36 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Basic operation
2. MAIN level indication
Screen operations
fig.ScrMainMeter.eps
About the screen display
fig.ScrGuide.eps
Basic operation
1
2
3
4
1. Top display area
This shows the output level of the MAIN L/R channels.
fig.ScrTBScrDisp.eps
A
B
C
D
E
3. Main display area
fig.ScrMainArea.eps
This area is always shown in the upper part of the screen.
A.
Screen name
This shows the name of the screen currently shown in the main
display area.
B.
Channel indication
This indicates the currently selected channel’s number, name,
and port name.
C.
Date/time indication
This shows the current date and time.
D.
User setting indication
This shows the current user settings.
E.
Scene indication
This shows the number and name of the currently selected
scene.
36
Most screen operations are performed in this area. The name of the
current screen is shown in the screen name indication of the top
display area. You can use the cursor and function buttons to perform
operations in this area.
M-380_e1.book 37 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Basic operation
3. Sub-display area
This area shows supplementary information. The following
information is shown.
Function button operations
fig.FuncBtnGuide.eps
• Indication of the currently edited parameter value
The function buttons are assigned to the main display area of the
screen or the popup, and are operated using [F1]–[F8]. There are
three types of function buttons, as follows.
When you edit a parameter whose value is not shown in the screen,
or use the controllers of the CHANNEL EDIT section to edit a
parameter, the value is shown here for a short time.
fig.FuncBtnCmd.eps
• Command function buttons
* If you attempt to operate a parameter that has been disabled by a
user setting (p. 152), the following indication will appear.
These execute commands or access popups.
• On/off function buttons
fig.FuncBtnOnOff.eps
• Output mute status
These turn parameters or functions on/off. The button in the screen
is shown in gray when off, or light blue when on.
This indicates that the outputs have been muted by means of [F6
(MUTE ALL OUT)] in the MUTE GROUP screen (p. 117), or by
means of [MUTE ALL OUTPUTS] on the input/output unit.
• Display select tabs
fig.FuncBtnTab.eps
• Oscillator indication
fig.SubDispOsc.eps
These tabs are used to switch between screens.
Cursor operations
This is shown if the oscillator is on.
• Recorder status indication
fig.Cursor.eps
fig.SubDispRcdr.eps
While a song is playing or being recorded, this shows the song name
and time information.
Popup indication
The cursor is indicated by a red frame in the main display area or in
the popup. Use the up/down/left/right keys to move the cursor.
These are popups that are shown overlaid on the main display area.
They provide a cursor and function buttons for performing
operations in the screen.
fig.Popups.eps
While a popup is displayed, cursor and function button
operations are valid only for the popup.
37
Basic operation
fig.SubDispPrm.eps
M-380_e1.book 38 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Basic operation
Button operations
Buttons in the screen are used to turn a function on/off, to execute a
command, or to access a screen. To operate a button, move the
cursor to the desired button and press [ENTER].
Knob operations
fig.Cursor.eps
Basic operation
ON/OFF buttons
fig.BtnOnOff.eps
These are used to turn a parameter or function on/off. The button is
shown in gray when off, or in color (e.g., red, yellow, or blue) when on.
Popup access buttons
fig.BtnPopup.eps
Knobs in the screen can be operated by the knobs of the CHANNEL
EDIT section or by the value dial. To use the value dial, move the
cursor to the desired knob.
You can make more detailed settings by holding down [SHIFT]
while you operate the knobs or the value dial.
Purple knobs in the screen cannot be edited from the
CHANNEL EDIT section.
These are used to access a related popup.
Select buttons
There are the following two types of select buttons.
Fader operations
fig.Fader.eps
• Radio buttons
fig.BtnRadio.eps
These are used to select one of multiple mutually exclusive choices.
Only the last-selected button will be selected.
• Check buttons
fig.BtnSel.eps
Faders in the screen can be operated by the corresponding fader
controller or by the value dial. To use the value dial, move the cursor
to the desired fader.
These are used when it is possible to select more than one of multiple
choices. You can select more than one of these items if desired.
You can make more detailed settings by holding down [SHIFT]
while you operate the value dial.
ALL/CLR buttons
fig.BtnAllClr.eps
List operations
fig.List.eps
These buttons assist you in operating check buttons. Pressing the
ALL button will select all applicable check buttons. Pressing the CLR
button will clear all applicable check buttons.
The selected item in a list is shown highlighted in red. Use the up/
down keys or the value dial to select a different item.
38
M-380_e1.book 39 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Basic operation
Editing a name
Library operations
You’ll use the NAME EDIT popup to edit names.
Library operations are performed in the LIBRARY popups.
Here we’ll explain operations that are common to the NAME EDIT
popup.
LIBRARY popups include the following.
fig.ScrNameEditGuide.eps
1
1.
Name edit field
You can edit the name in this field.
The buttons and dial will have the following functions in the
name edit field.
See page
p. 53
p. 77
p. 81
p. 83
p. 86
p. 102
p. 109
p. 92
p. 93
p. 203
Basic operation
Operations in the NAME EDIT popup
Type
CH LIBRARY
GATE/EXP LIBRARY
COMP LIBRARY
LIMITER LIBRARY
EQ LIBRARY
FX LIBRARY
GEQ LIBRARY
INPUT PATCHBAY LIBRARY
OUTPUT PATCHBAY LIBRARY
M-48 LIBRARY
Here we’ll explain operations that are common to these LIBRARY
popups.
LIBRARY popup
fig.ScrLibGuide.eps
Button/Dial
Left/right buttons
Value dial
[F1 (INSERT)]
[F2 (A/a)]
[F3 (NUM)]
[F4 (DELETE)]
[F7 (CANCEL)]
[F8 (OK)]
Function
Move the cursor location.
Changes the character at the cursor location
Inserts a space at the cursor location. The
text at the right of the cursor location will
move to the right.
Changes the letter at the cursor location
between uppercase and lowercase. If the
character is not an English letter, it will be
changed to the letter “A.”
Converts the character at the cursor location to the numeral “0.”
Deletes the character at the cursor location.
The text at the right of the cursor location
will move to the left.
Cancels any changes and closes the popup.
Confirms the changes and closes the popup.
1
2
1.
Applicable channel/effect indication
This shows the channel or effect to which the library operation
will apply.
2.
Library data list
This lists the library data.
The function buttons have the following operations in a
LIBRARY popup.
There are limitations on the number of characters you can use in
a name. The maximum number of characters will depend on the
screen or popup that uses the NAME EDIT popup.
[F1 (PRESET)]
[F2 (USER)]
If an INSERT operation causes the name to exceed the
maximum number of characters, the excess will be deleted.
[F5 (STORE)]*
[F4 (RECALL)]
[F6 (LOCK)]*
[F7 (NAME EDIT)]*
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Displays the recall-only PRESET library.
Displays the USER library in which you
can store data or recall it.
Recalls the selected library data and closes
the popup.
Stores the current settings into the selected
library data and closes the popup.
Locks the selected USER library data.
Accesses a NAME EDIT popup for you to
edit the name of the selected user library
data.
Closes the popup.
* Available only for the User library.
39
M-380_e1.book 40 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Basic operation
fig.ScrSaveCurrent.eps
Recalling data from a library
1.
Access the LIBRARY popup.
fig.ScrChLib.eps
Basic operation
The LIBRARY STORE popup will appear.
6.
Editing name in name editing field.
For details on operations in the NAME EDIT popup, refer to
“Editing a name” (p. 39).
2.
Make sure that the applicable channel/effect indication
shows the object that you want to recall.
3.
Use [F1 (PRESET)] or [F2 (USER)] to specify whether you
want to recall data from the preset library or user library.
4.
Select the desired library data in the library data list.
5.
Press [F4 (RECALL)].
7.
A message will ask you to confirm the library store operation.
fig.ScrLibRecallConf.eps
8.
A message will ask you to confirm the library recall operation.
6.
Storing data to a library
1.
Access the LIBRARY popup.
fig.ScrChLib.eps
Press [F8 (STORE)] to execute the library store operation
and close the popup.
Alternatively, press [F7 (CANCEL)] to cancel the library store
operation.
You can’t overwrite library data that has been locked. Either
store the data to a different library location, or defeat the Lock
setting before you execute the store operation.
Press [F8 (RECALL)] to execute the library recall operation
and close the popup.
Alternatively, press [F7 (CANCEL)] to cancel the library recall
operation.
If “SCENE/LIB RECALL” in the CONFIRMATION section of
User Preference (p. 155) is not selected, a confirmation message
will not appear in step 4.
Press [F8 (STORE)].
fig.ScrLibStoreConf.eps
If “SCENE/LIB STORE” in the CONFIRMATION section of the
User Preference (p. 155) is not selected, a confirmation message
will not appear in step 7.
Locking or unlocking user library
data
Data in the user library can be locked to prevent it from being
accidentally overwritten. For library data that has been locked, the
indication “LOCK” is shown in the “STATUS” column of the list.
fig.ScrChLib.eps
2.
Verify that the desired channel or effect is shown as the
object of the store operation.
1.
Press [F2 (USER)] to select the user library.
3.
Press [F2 (USER)] to select the user library.
2.
From the library data list, select the desired library data.
4.
Select the desired number in the library data list.
3.
Press [F6 (LOCK)] to lock or unlock the library data.
5.
Press [F5 (STORE)].
40
M-380_e1.book 41 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Basic operation
Editing the name of user library
data
You can assign a name of up to twelve characters to user library
data. Use the NAME EDIT popup to edit the name.
Message operations
• CONFIRMATION message
fig.Confirm.eps
fig.ScrChLib_Name.eps
Basic operation
This message asks you to confirm an operation.
• CAUTION message
fig.Caution.eps
1.
Press [F2 (USER)] to select the user library.
2.
From the library data list, select the desired library data.
You can’t edit library data that has been locked.
3.
Press [F7 (NAME EDIT)] to access the NAME EDIT popup.
4.
Use the NAME EDIT popup to edit the name.
This message cautions you that a problem has occurred during
operation.
• ERROR message
fig.Error.eps
For details on operations in the NAME EDIT popup, refer to
“Editing a name” (p. 39).
5.
Press [F8 (OK)] to finalize the edited name and close the
NAME EDIT popup.
Alternatively, press [F7 (CANCEL)] to discard your edits and
close the NAME EDIT popup.
This message will appear if a fatal error occurs.
• Wait message
fig.Wait.eps
This message is shown while a time consuming process is being
executed. You cannot close this until the process is completed.
41
M-380_e1.book 42 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Input channel operations
About the input channels
The input channels process the audio signals from the input jacks and internal ports, and send them to the MAIN L/R bus and AUX buses.
fig.InBlkDia.eps
MAIN AUX SOLO
INPUT
PATCHBAY
LR 1 2
16 L R
LR 1 2
16 L R
CH 1-48
PREAMP
POST ATT
GATE IN
GATE OUT COMP OUT
Input channel operations
GR
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
EXT FX
FX
INSERT INSERT
PHASE
ATT
FILTER
GATE/
EXP
TO
GATE
KEY-IN
POST FADER
GR
COMP
MUTE
TO
COMP
KEY-IN
GATE
KEY-IN
MAIN
SW
FADER PAN
4BAND
EQ
AUX SEND 1-16
COMP
KEY-IN
SW
PRE EQ
AUX
LINK
SEND
PRE FADER
POST FADER
TO AUX
1, 3...15
PAN
SW
PRE EQ
SEND
TO AUX
2, 4...16
PRE FADER
POST FADER
PFL(L)
AFL(L)
AFL SW
SOLO
PFL(R)
AFL(R)
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
POST FADER
DIRECT OUT
POINT
TO MAIRIX 1-8,
TO OUTPUT PATCHBAY
MAIN AUX SOLO
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
42
INPUT PATCHBAY
This section patches input ports to input channels.
PHASE
This reverses the phase of the audio signal.
ATT (Attenuator)
This adjusts the input level in the digital domain.
FILTER
This is a 12 dB/octave filter that passes or cuts the specified
frequency range.
GATE/EXPANDER
This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a gate or
expander, or for ducking. You can use a maximum of twentyfour units simultaneously.
COMPRESSOR
This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a compressor.
You can use a maximum of twenty-four units simultaneously.
EXT INSERT (External insert)
An external effects processor can be inserted at this point using
the rear panel CONSOLE IN1–IN8 and CONSOLE OUT1–
OUT8 jacks.
FX INSERT (Effect insert)
FX1–FX4 can be inserted at this point.
4 BAND EQ (Four-band EQ)
This is a four-band EQ with LO, LO-MID, HI-MID, and HI
frequency bands.
•
MUTE
This mutes the channel. The signal sent to the MAIN L/R bus,
the AUX buses and the direct out will be muted.
• FADER
This adjusts the send level to the MAIN L/R bus.
• PAN
This adjusts the left/right panning of the audio signal sent to
the MAIN L/R bus.
• MAIN SW (Main switch)
This turns the send to the MAIN L/R bus on/off. It does not
affect the send to the AUX buses.
• AUX SEND
This adjusts the send to the AUX bus.
• DIRECT OUT POINT
This specifies the position from which the direct out signal is
taken.
M-380_e1.book 43 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Input channel operations
Operations using the
CHANNEL EDIT section
2.
The selected channel is shown in the channel indication at
the upper center of the screen.
fig.ScrSelectedCh.eps
Most input channel operations can be performed in the CHANNEL
EDIT section.
Here we will explain input channel operations using the CHANNEL
EDIT section.
If you’ve pressed [TOUCH SELECT] to turn it on (lit), you can
select a channel by touching its fader.
fig.ChEditSection.eps
The arrangement of parameters and the color of knobs in the
CHANNEL EDIT DISPLAY screen is close to that of the CHANNEL
EDIT section, making it easy to check the values.
1.
In the CHANNEL EDIT section, press [CH DISP].
The CHANNEL DISPLAY screen will appear.
fig.ScrChDisp.eps
Even if you don’t access the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen, the
value of the currently-operated parameter is shown in the sub
display area when you operate an dial in the CHANNEL EDIT
section.
fig.SubDispPrm.eps
Selecting the channel to edit
1.
In the fader module section, press a [SEL] button to select
the input channel that you want to edit.
fig.SELBtn.eps
[SEL]
Preamp gain adjustments
Use the PREAMP area of the CHANNEL EDIT section to adjust the
preamp gain.
fig.ChEdtPreamp.eps
1.
Use the GAIN dial to adjust the preamp gain.
43
Input channel operations
Viewing the parameter values
M-380_e1.book 44 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Input channel operations
Filter operations
Use the FILTER area of the CHANNEL EDIT section to operate the filter.
fig.ChEdtFilter.eps
Four-band EQ operations
Use the EQUALIZER area of the CHANNEL EDIT section to operate
the EQ.
Input channel operations
fig.ChEdtEQ.eps
1.
Press [ON] to turn the filter on/off.
2.
Use the FREQ dial to adjust the frequency of the filter.
Gate/expander operations
Use the GATE area of the CHANNEL EDIT section to operate the
gate/expander.
fig.ChEdtGate.eps
1.
Holding down [SHIFT] and pressing [DISP] for the GATE
area switches the gate/expander on or off.
By pressing [DISP] you can access the GATE/EXPANDER popup,
where you can make detailed settings for the gate/expander. For
details, refer to “Gate/expander operations” (p. 73) .
1.
Press [ON] to turn the four-band EQ on/off.
2.
Use the GAIN knobs to adjust the gain of each frequency
band.
3.
Use the FREQ knobs to adjust the center frequency of each
band.
4.
Use the Q knobs to adjust the Q of the LO-MID and HI-MID
bands.
Compressor operations
You can make fine adjustments by holding down [SHIFT] while
you operate the knob.
Use the COMP area of the CHANNEL EDIT section to operate the
compressor.
fig.ChEdtComp.eps
By pressing [DISP] you can access the EQUALIZER popup,
where you can make detailed settings for the four-band EQ. For
details, refer to “Four-band EQ operations” (p. 84).
1.
Holding down [SHIFT] and pressing [DISP] for the COMP
area switches the compressor on or off.
By pressing [DISP] you can access the COMPRESSOR popup,
where you can make detailed settings for the compressor. For
details, refer to “Compressor operations” (p. 78).
Adjusting the pan of the audio
signal sent to the MAIN L/R bus
Use the PAN area of the CHANNEL EDIT section to make these
adjustments.
fig.ChEdtPan.eps
1.
Use the PAN knob to adjust the pan.
You can make fine adjustments by holding down [SHIFT] while
you operate the knob.
44
M-380_e1.book 45 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Input channel operations
Sending the audio signal to the
AUX buses
Use the AUX SENDS area of the CHANNEL EDIT section to perform
these operations.
fig.ChEdtAux.eps
Using the top panel faders
(SENDS ON FADER)
1.
Press AUX SELECT [1]–[16] to select the send-destination
AUX bus.
2.
Press [SENDS ON FADER] so it is blinking.
3.
Use the top panel faders to adjust the amount sent from
each input channel to the selected AUX bus.
Input channel operations
fig.FaderAll.eps
SENDS ON FADER is a convenient function, but involves
the risk of unintended mistakes. Operate the faders with
care while [SENDS ON FADER] is blinking.
By pressing [DISP] you can access the AUX SENDS popup,
where you can make detailed settings for AUX send. For details,
refer to “AUX send operations” (p. 87).
You can adjust the send level in either of two ways: using the SEND
LEVEL knob of the AUX SENDS area, or using the faders of the top
panel.
Using the SEND LEVEL knob
1.
Press AUX SELECT [1]–[16] to select the send-destination
AUX bus.
2.
Use the SEND LEVEL encoder to adjust the amount sent to
the selected AUX bus.
You can make fine adjustments by holding down [SHIFT] while
you operate SEND LEVEL.
You can turn the corresponding send switch on/off by holding
down [SHIFT] and pressing AUX SELECT [1]–[16].
45
M-380_e1.book 46 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Input channel operations
Operations in the CHANNEL
DISPLAY screen
Turn the pad on if the input level is too high even when the
preamp gain is set to the minimum position.
c. Ø (Phase) button
The principal parameters of an input channel can be operated in the
CHANNEL DISPLAY screen.
Input channel operations
CHANNEL DISPLAY screen
This reverses the phase of the audio signal. Turning this on will
reverse the phase of the signal, and turning it off will maintain
the normal phase.
d. GAIN knob
This adjusts the preamp gain in the range of -65 dBu– -10 dBu (if
PAD is on, a range of -45 dBu– +10 dBu).
fig.ScrChDispGuide.eps
1
2
3
7
9
10
e. OL (Overload) indicator
This will light red when the output of the preamp exceeds the
OVER Lev setting specified in the METER SETUP popup (p. 96).
11
4
5
It is felt that it does not change smoothly when it coordinates
the preamp gain, but it is not trouble. In addition, some noises
come out, but it is not trouble.
12
6
For the following channels, the preamp area will show only the
Ø (phase) button.
8
• Channels to which no input port is patched
The principal operations for an input channel can be performed in
the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen.
1.
• Channels to which a port that has no preamp (such as an
internal port) is patched
Preamp
fig.ScrChPreamp.eps
e
a
b
c
2.
Attenuator
fig.ScrChATT.eps
b
d
a
Here you can make settings for the preamp of the input jack that is
patched to the channel.
a. +48V button
This turns the +48V phantom power on/off.
You must turn the phantom power off if you’ve connected
equipment that does not require +48V phantom power.
Mistakenly supplying phantom power to a dynamic
microphone, audio playback device, or any other device that
does not require phantom power will cause malfunctions.
Carefully read the owner’s manual for your microphone or
other device, and make sure of its specifications.
a. ATT knob
This adjusts the input level of the channel in the range of -48.0
dB– +24.0 dB.
b. OL (Overload) indicator
This will light red when the output of the attenuator exceeds the
OVER Lev setting specified in the METER SETUP popup (p. 96).
Normally, you should use the preamp gain to adjust the input
level of the channel, and leave the attenuator at 0 dB. It is
convenient to use the attenuator in the following types of cases.
• When you want to avoid overloading the filter
Since noise will be produced when you switch the phantom
power setting, therefore the output of the channel whose setting
you change will be briefly muted.
b. PAD button
This switches the pad on/off. Turning this on will lower the
input sensitivity of the preamp by 20 dB.
Since noise will be produced when you switch the pad setting,
therefore the output of the channel whose setting you change
will be briefly muted.
46
• When you’ve patched a port that has no preamp gain, such
as an internal port
• When you’ve allowed plenty of head margin to avoid
overloading the preamp’s AD converter, and want to boost
the level at the channel
Filter overload can also be avoided by using the filter ATT
parameter that is shown in the EQUALIZER popup.
M-380_e1.book 47 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Input channel operations
3.
5.
Filter
fig.ScrChFilt.eps
a
Compressor
fig.ScrChComp.eps
c
a
b
c
d
e
b
a. COMP button
b. THRE (Threshold) knob
This turns the filter on/off.
This adjusts the threshold level of the compressor in the range
of -40.0 dB–0.0 dB.
b. FREQ knob
This adjusts the filter frequency in the range of 20 Hz–20.0 kHz.
c. OL (Overload) indicator
This will light red when the output of the filter exceeds the
OVER Lev setting specified in the METER SETUP popup (p. 96).
c. IN meter
This shows the input level of the compressor. For stereo-linked
channels, two meters (L and R) will be shown.
d. GR meter
This shows the amount of gain reduction for the compressor.
By default, HPF (High Pass Filter) is assigned to the filter, and
the FREQ knob will adjust the cutoff frequency.
e. OL (Overload) indicator
This will light red when the output of the compressor exceeds
the OVER Lev setting specified in the METER SETUP popup (p.
96).
Detailed filter settings are made in the EQUALIZER popup. For
details, refer to “Four-band EQ operations” (p. 84).
4.
Up to twenty-four compressors can be turned on.
Gate/expander
fig.ScrChGate.eps
a
c
d
e
b
For detailed compressor settings, refer to “Compressor
operations” (p. 78).
6.
Insert indication
fig.ScrChIns.eps
a
a. GATE button
This turns the gate/expander on/off.
b
b. THRE (Threshold) knob
This adjusts the threshold level of the gate/expander in the
range of -80.0 dB–0.0 dB.
c. IN meter
This shows the input level of the gate/expander. For stereolinked channels, two meters (L and R) will be shown.
d. GR meter
a. EXT FX
If an external effects processor is inserted, this shows the
number of the inserted EXT FX.
By moving the cursor to EXT FX and pressing [ENTER], you can
access the EXT FX 1–4 tab or EXT FX 5–8 tab of the EFFECTS
screen.
This shows the amount of gain reduction for the gate/expander.
e. OL (Overload) indicator
This will light red when the output of the gate/expander
exceeds the OVER Lev setting specified in the METER SETUP
popup (p. 96).
Up to twenty-four gate/expander units can be turned on.
For detailed gate/expander settings, refer to “Gate/expander
operations” (p. 73).
Inserting an external effects processor into a channel is done in
the EFFECTS screen. For details, refer to “Inserting an external
effects device” (p. 111).
b. FX INS
If FX1–FX4 are inserted, the number of the inserted FX is shown
here.
If the number is shown in white, the effect insertion is enabled.
If it is shown in gray, effect insertion is bypassed.
The FX INS number may have an appended “L” or “R.” This
has the following significance.
47
Input channel operations
This turns the compressor on/off.
a. FILT button
M-380_e1.book 48 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Input channel operations
Indication
Number+L
Number+R
Number only
Explanation
The L side of the FX is inserted.
The R side of the FX is inserted.
Both L and R side of the FX are inserted.
The return from the FX is mixed and input to the channel.
Input channel operations
If you move the cursor to FX INS and press [ENTER], the FX 1–4
tab of the EFFECTS screen will appear.
Inserting an effect into a channel is done in the EFFECTS screen.
For details, refer to “Effect input/output settings” (p. 100).
h. GAIN knob (LO, LO-MID, HI-MID, HI)
These adjust the gain of the LO, LO-MID, HI-MID, and HI
bands in the range of -15.0 dB– +15.0 dB.
For detailed settings for the four-band EQ, refer to “Four-band
EQ operations” (p. 84).
8.
You can choose one of the following as the position from which the
channel’s signal is taken as the direct out signal.
Up to four effects can be inserted into one channel. In this case,
they will be inserted in series, in order of the FX number.
7.
Direct out point
fig.ScrChDirGuide.eps
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
POST FADER
Four-band EQ
Take the pre-EQ signal
Take the pre-fader signal
Take the post-fader signal
fig.ScrChEQ.eps
a
c
8.
AUX sends
fig.ScrChSends.eps
b
d
f
e
g
h
a. EQ button
This turns the four-band EQ on/off.
b. Four-band EQ graph
This shows the approximate response of the four-band EQ.
c. OL (Overload) indicator
This will light red when the output of the four-band EQ exceeds
the OVER Lev setting specified in the METER SETUP popup (p.
96).
•
AUX sends 1–16
Here you can adjust the sends from the channel to the AUX1–
AUX16 buses. The AUX sends are organized as follows.
fig.ScrChSendField.eps
a
c
b
d. Q knobs (LO-MID, HI-MID)
These adjust the Q of the LO-MID and HI-MID bands in the
range of 0.36–16. Higher values will produce a sharper curve.
e. LO FREQ knob
This adjusts the center frequency of the LOW band in the range
of 20 Hz–1.00 kHz.
f. FREQ knob (LO-MID, HI-MID)
These adjust the center frequency of the LO-MID and HI-MID
bands in the range of 20 Hz–20.0 kHz.
g. HI FREQ knob
This adjusts the center frequency of the HI band in the range of
1.00 kHz–20.0 kHz.
48
a. AUX number
This indicates the AUX channel number.
b. AUX name
This indicates the AUX channel name.
c. Send level bar
This adjusts the send level to the AUX bus in the range of
-Inf dB– +10.0 dB.
The color of the send level bar indicates the send point and the
status of the send switch as follows.
Send level bar color
Blue
Green
Gray
Status
send point is PRE EQ or PRE FADER
send point is POST FADER
Send switch is off
M-380_e1.book 49 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Input channel operations
•
AUX pan slider
fig.ScrChSendField2.eps
11. Fader
fig.ScrChFader.eps
a
e
b
c
d
For detailed AUX send settings, refer to “AUX send operations”
(p. 87).
Sends to the AUX used by the LCR SYSTEM as MAIN C are
indicated as “MAIN C,” and cannot be operated.
fig.ScrChSendField2.eps
a. Fader
This adjusts the amount sent to the MAIN L/R bus in the range
of -Inf dB– +10.0 dB.
You can make settings in finer increments by operating the
value dial while you hold down [SHIFT].
b. S button
This turns SOLO on/off for the channel.
c. M button
9.
Pan
fig.ScrChPan.eps
This turns MUTE on/off for the channel.
d. MAIN button
This turns the MAIN send on/off.
e. Channel meter
This adjusts the left/right panning of the audio signal sent to
the MAIN L/R bus in the range of L63–R63.
10. Group
This indicates the signal level of the channel. For a stereo-linked
channel, two meters L and R are shown. The level detection
point is according to the setting in the METER screen. For
details, refer to “Editing the meter settings” (p. 96).
The function buttons have the following operations.
fig.ScrChGroup.eps
[F1 (LINK)]
[F2 (NAME EDIT)]
[F3 (COPY)]
This indicates whether the channel is assigned to a DCA group or a
MUTE group.
If you move the cursor to DCA GROUP or MUTE GROUP and press
[ENTER], the GROUP ASSIGN popup will appear, allowing you to
make DCA group or MUTE group assignments.
You can also access the GROUP ASSIGN popup by pressing [F5
(GROUP ASSIGN)].
[F4 (LIBRARY)
[F5 (GROUP ASSIGN)]
[F6 (PEAK CLEAR)]
[F7 (ATT Ctrl)]
[F8 (Patchbay)]
Turns channel link on/off.
Accesses the NAME EDIT popup, where you can specify the
channel name.
Accesses the CH COPY popup,
where you can copy channel settings.
Accesses the CH LIBRARY popup, where you can use the channel library.
Accesses the GROUP ASSIGN
popup, where you can assign the
channel to DCA groups and
MUTE groups.
Clears the level meter’s peak
hold or over indication.
If this is on, the target of the
GAIN knob will change to controlling the channel attenuator.
Accesses the PATCHBAY
screen.
p. 50
p. 51
p. 52
p. 53
p. 54
p. 50
p. 90
49
Input channel operations
If the AUX send destination is stereo-linked, this lets you adjust
the left/right panning of the audio signal in the range of L63–
R63. This is shown in the area of the odd-numbered AUX send.
M-380_e1.book 50 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Input channel operations
The [F7 (ATT Ctrl)] setting is common to all channels CH1–48.
When the M-380 is configured as a Monitor console, it is
convenient to use the GAIN knob as an attenuator over the
shared inputs.
The [F7 (ATT Ctrl)] setting is stored in the M-380 as a system
parameter. It is not saved in scene memory.
Stereo-linking channels
Adjacent odd-numbered and even-numbered channels can be stereolinked so that their parameters will have the same settings. This is
convenient when you’re dealing with stereo sources.
1.
Access the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen for the channel that
you want to stereo-link.
Input channel operations
fig.ScrChDisp.eps
When you press [F8 (Patchbay)] to access the PATCHBAY
screen, the PATCHBAY screen will appear with the currently
selected channel highlighted.
Accessing the CHANNEL DISPLAY
screen
1.
In the fader module section, press [SEL] to select a
channel.
2.
In the CHANNEL EDIT section, press [CH DISP] to access
the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen.
fig.ScrChDisp.eps
2.
Press [F1 (LINK)].
A confirmation message will appear, asking you to confirm the
stereo-link operation.
The function buttons have the following operations.
[F6 (CANCEL)]
[F7 (LINK (L <- R))]
Pressing a different [SEL] while the CHANNEL DISPLAY
screen is shown will switch you to the display for that channel.
If you’ve selected the “CHANNEL DISPLAY follows CH
SELECT” button located in the CHANNEL SELECT area of
User Preference (p. 155), pressing a [SEL] will recall the
CHANNEL DISPLAY screen for that channel.
[F8 (LINK (L -> R))]
3.
Cancels the stereo-link operation
and closes the popup.
The parameters of the odd-numbered channel will be set to the values of the even-numbered channel.
The parameters of the even-numbered channel will be set to the values of the odd-numbered channel.
Press [F7 (LINK (L <- R))] or [F8](LINK (L -> R) ] , the
channels will be stereo-linked.
Stereo-linked parameters
The following parameters are linked by stereo-link.
•
Phase
•
Attenuator
•
Filter parameters
•
Gate/expander parameters other than Key In
•
Compressor parameters other than Key In
•
Four-band EQ parameters
•
Fader parameters
•
AUX send level, send switch and send point
•
Direct out point
When you enable stereo-link, the gate/expander and
compressor will operate in stereo.
50
M-380_e1.book 51 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Input channel operations
C.Color label selection buttons
Use these buttons to select a color label for the channel.
Specifying a channel name
and color label
The function buttons have the following operations.
[F1 (Recall
Template)]
[F2 (HISTORY)]
You can specify a channel name and color label for each input
channel. The channel name can be up to six characters, and you can
select one of eight colors as the color label.
Channel name entry and color label selection are done in the NAME
EDIT popup.
[F3 (INSERT)]
1.
[F4 (A/a)]
Access the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen for the desired
channel.
[F5 (NUM)]
fig.ScrChDisp.eps
[F6 (DELETE)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Up to sixteen names will be remembered in HISTORY.
If HISTORY becomes full, the oldest name will be deleted.
Editing the channel name
2.
Press [F2 (NAME EDIT)] to access the NAME EDIT popup.
fig.ScrChNameEditGuide.eps
1.
Access the NAME EDIT popup for the desired channel.
fig.ScrChNameEdit.eps
A
B
2.
Move the cursor to the name edit field, and edit the channel
name.
Use the cursor left/right buttons to move the cursor location.
Use the value dial to change the character at the cursor location.
C
A.TEMPLATE
Here you can select a name from a list.
•CATEGORY list
Select the category.
3.
Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup.
Choosing a color label
1.
Access the NAME EDIT popup for the desired channel.
fig.ScrChNameEdit.eps
•NAME list
Select a name from within that category.
Choose the CATEGORY first, and then choose a NAME.
B.Name edit field
You can edit the name in this field.
51
Input channel operations
Accessing the NAME EDIT popup
Enters the name selected in the TEMPLATE list into the name edit field.
Successively recalls the channel names
that have been entered since power-up,
starting with the most recent name.
Inserts a space at the cursor location. The
characters to the right of the cursor location will move to the right.
Changes the letter at the cursor location
between uppercase and lowercase. If the
character is not an English letter, it will
be changed to the letter “A.”
Changes the character at the cursor location to the numeral “0.”
Deletes the character at the cursor location. The characters to the right of the
cursor location will move to the left.
Closes the popup.
M-380_e1.book 52 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Input channel operations
2.
3.
Move the cursor to the desired color label select button,
and press [ENTER] to make your selection.
2.
Press [F3 (COPY)] to access the CH COPY popup.
fig.ScrChCopyGuide.eps
A
Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup.
B
Using the template to enter a
channel name
Input channel operations
1.
Access the NAME EDIT popup for the desired channel.
fig.ScrChNameEdit.eps
C
A.Copy-source channel
This indicates the copy-source channel.
2.
Move the cursor to the CATEGORY list in the TEMPLATE
area, and select the category of the name you want to enter.
3.
Move the cursor to the NAME list in the TEMPLATE area,
and select the name that you want to enter.
4.
Press [F1 (Recall Template)].
The selected name will be entered in the name edit field.
5.
Move the cursor to the name edit field, and you’ll be able to
edit the name that was entered.
6.
Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup.
B.Copy parameter select buttons
Here you can select the parameters that will be copied. You
can select the following parameters.
Patch
Phase
ATT
Filter
Gate
Comp
EQ
Sends
Direct
Fader
Pan
LCR
Group
If you enter a name from the template, the name that was
previously in the name edit field will be deleted.
Copying channel settings to
another channel
Input patching
Phase
Attenuator
Filter
Gate/expander
Compressor
Four-band EQ
AUX sends
Direct out point
Fader
Pan
LCR button, Centr*
DCA groups and MUTE groups
* When the LCR SYSTEM is on
C.Copy-destination channel select buttons
Here you can select the copy-destination channel(s).
Channel settings can be copied to another channel. Channel copying
is done in the CH COPY popup.
The function buttons have the following operations.
Copying the channel settings
1.
[F1 (CH1-24)]
Access the CH COPY popup for the desired copy-source
channel.
[F2 (CH25-48)]
fig.ScrChDisp.eps
[F3 (PASTET to CH 1-24)]
[F3 (PASTET to CH 25-48)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
52
Displays CH1–CH24 as the
copy-destination channel select buttons.
Displays CH25–CH48 as the
copy-destination channel select buttons.
Executes the copy.
Closes the popup.
3.
Move the cursor to the desired copy parameter select
button, and press [ENTER] to select it.
4.
Move the cursor to the desired copy-destination channel
select button, and press [ENTER] to select it. You can
select more than one channel.
M-380_e1.book 53 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Input channel operations
5.
Press [F3 (PASTE to CH 1–24)] or [F3 (PASTE to CH 25–48)].
fig.ScrChLibGuide.eps
A
B
C
A confirmation message will appear, asking you to confirm the
Copy operation.
Press [F8 (PASTE)] to execute the Copy.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled.
7.
Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup.
When you execute PASTE, the copy-destination channel select
buttons will be cleared.
Using the channel library
You can recall channel settings from the library, or store the settings
of the current channel in the library.
Channel library operations are performed in the CHANNEL LIBRARY
popup.
Accessing the CHANNEL LIBRARY
popup
1.
Access the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen for the desired
channel.
fig.ScrChDisp.eps
A.Target channel
This indicates the channel that is the target of the CHANNEL
LIBRARY popup.
B.Library data list
This is a list of the library data.
C.Recall parameter select buttons
Use these to select the parameters that will be recalled. You
can select the following parameters.
Phase
ATT
Filter
Gate
Comp
EQ
Sends
Direct Out
Fader
Pan
LCR
Phase
Attenuator
Filter
Gate/expander
Compressor
Four-band EQ
AUX sends
Direct out point
Fader
Pan
LCR button, Centr*
* When the LCR SYSTEM is on
Noise may occur when you execute a library preview or recall,
but this is not a malfunction.
The function buttons have the following operations.
2.
Press [F4 (LIBRARY)] to access the CHANNEL LIBRARY
popup.
[F1 (PRESET)]
[F2 (USER)]
For details on library operations, refer to “Library operations” (p. 39).
[F3 (PREVIEW)]
[F4 (RECALL)]
[F5 (STORE)]*
[F6 (LOCK)]*
[F7 (NAME EDIT)]*
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Displays the recall-only PRESET library.
Displays the USER library, which can
be recalled or stored.
Previews (auditions) the selected library data.
Recalls the selected library data.
Stores the settings of the current channel into the selected library data.
Locks or unlocks the selected library
data.
Accesses the NAME EDIT popup,
where you can edit the name of the selected library data.
Closes the popup.
* Available only for the User library.
53
Input channel operations
6.
M-380_e1.book 54 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Input channel operations
Assigning channels to DCA
groups and MUTE groups
Assigning a channel to a DCA group
1.
Access the GROUP ASSIGN popup for the desired channel.
fig.ScrChGroupAssign.eps
Input channels can be assigned to DCA groups and mute groups.
Input channel operations
Assignments to DCA groups and mute groups are made in the
GROUP ASSIGN popup.
Accessing the GROUP ASSIGN
popup
1.
Access the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen for the desired
channel.
fig.ScrChDisp.eps
2.
Verify that the target channel is correct.
3.
Move the cursor to the desired DCA group select button,
and press [ENTER] to select it.
4.
Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup.
For details on DCA groups, refer to “DCA groups” (p. 114).
Assigning a channel to a MUTE group
1.
2.
Press [F5 (GROUP ASSIGN)] to access the GROUP ASSIGN
popup.
Access the GROUP ASSIGN popup for the desired channel.
fig.ScrChGroupAssign.eps
fig.ScrChGrpAsgnGuide.eps
A
B
C
A.Target channel
This indicates the channel that is the target of the GROUP
ASSIGN popup.
B.DCA group select buttons
Use these to select the DCA group to which the channel will
be assigned.
C.MUTE group select buttons
Use these to select the MUTE group to which the channel will
be assigned.
The function buttons have the following operations.
[F8 (CLOSE)]
54
Closes the popup.
2.
Verify that the target channel is correct.
3.
Move the cursor to the desired MUTE group select button,
and press [ENTER] to select it.
4.
Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup.
For details on MUTE groups, refer to “Mute groups” (p. 117).
M-380_e1.book 55 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
AUX channel and MAIN L/R channel operations
About AUX channels and the MAIN L/R channels
The AUX and MAIN L/R channels process the mixed audio signals from the input channels, and send them to the output ports.
fig.OutBlkDia.eps
MAIN AUX SOLO
LR 1 2
OUTPUT
PATCHBAY
16 L R
MAIN L, R
POST ATT
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
EXT FX
FX
INSERT INSERT
FADER BAL
POST FADER
MUTE
4BAND
EQ
ATT
OUTPUT LEVEL
GEQ
INSERT
MAIN
OUT L
LIMITER
AUX channel and MAIN L/R channel operations
AUX SEND 1-16
SW
PRE EQ
SEND
AUX
LINK
PRE FADER
POST FADER
TO AUX 1, 3...7
PAN
SW
PRE EQ
SEND
MONO
OUT
PRE FADER
TO AUX 2, 4...8
POST FADER
-6dB
MIX
MATRIX SEND 1-8
PRE EQ
MTX
LINK
SW SEND
PRE FADER
TO MTX 1, 3...7
PAN
POST FADER
SW SEND
TO MTX 2, 4...8
MAIN
OUT R
SOLO
TO SOLO
TO MONITOR SELECT
TO REC SELECT
AUX 1-16
POST ATT
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
EXT FX
FX
INSERT INSERT
ATT
FADER BAL
4BAND
EQ
POST FADER
MUTE
OUTPUT LEVEL
GEQ
INSERT
AUX 1-16
OUT
LIMITER
MAIN SEND
SW
PRE EQ
SEND
PAN
PRE FADER
TO MAIN L, R
POST FADER
MATRIX SEND 1-8
PRE EQ
MTX
LINK
SW SEND
PRE FADER
PAN
POST FADER
TO MTX 1, 3...7
SW SEND
TO MTX 2, 4...8
SOLO
TO SOLO L
TO SOLO R
TO MONITOR SELECT
TO REC SELECT
TO FX SOURCE SELECT
LR 1 2
16 L R
MAIN AUX SOLO
•
ATT (Attenuator)
•
EXT INSERT (External insert)
•
This adjusts the input level.
These ports let you use the rear panel CONSOLE IN1–IN8 and
CONSOLE OUT1–OUT8 ports to insert external effects
processors.
•
•
GEQ INSERT
•
LIMITER
•
AUX SEND (MAIN L/R only)
•
MAIN SEND (AUX1–AUX16 only)
•
MATRIX SEND
This port allows you to insert a 31-band GEQ.
This limits the output level.
This adjusts the send to AUX.
FADER
This adjusts the output level.
•
•
4 BAND EQ (Four-band EQ)
This is an EQ with four bands; LO, LO-MID, HI-MID, and HI.
•
This mutes the output of the channel. The post fader sends to
the MAIN L/R bus and AUX buses will also be muted.
FX INSERT (Effect insert)
These ports let you insert FX1–FX4.
BALANCE
MUTE
This adjusts the send to MAIN L/R.
Adjust the send to MATRIX1–MATRIX8.
This adjusts the left/right balance for MAIN L/R or for stereolinked AUX buses.
55
M-380_e1.book 56 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
AUX channel and MAIN L/R channel operations
Operations using the
CHANNEL EDIT section
Most operations for the MAIN L/R channels and AUX channels can
be performed in the CHANNEL EDIT section.
Here we will explain channel operations using the CHANNEL EDIT
section.
The MAIN [SEL] button will alternately select the MAIN L or
MAIN R channel each time you press it.
2.
The selected channel is shown in the channel indication at
the upper center of the screen.
fig.ScrSelectedAux.eps
fig.ChEditSection.eps
AUX channel and MAIN L/R channel operations
If you press [TOUCH SELECT] to turn it on (lit), you’ll be able
to select a channel by touching its fader.
Viewing the parameter values
The CHANNEL DISPLAY screen shows the parameter values that
you can operate in the CHANNEL EDIT section.
The arrangement of the parameters and the color of the knobs in the
CHANNEL DISPLAY screen is similar to the layout of the
CHANNEL EDIT section, making it easy for you to check the values.
1.
In the CHANNEL EDIT section, press [CH DISP].
The CHANNEL DISPLAY screen will appear.
fig.ScrChAux.eps
Even if you operate the knobs of the CHANNEL EDIT section
without accessing the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen, the value of
the currently-operated parameter is shown in the sub-display
area.
Selecting the channel to edit
1.
fig.SubDispPrm.eps
Use the [SEL] buttons of the fader module section to select
the channel that you want to edit.
fig.SELBtn.eps
[SEL]
[SEL]
Attenuator adjustments
Use the PREAMP area of the CHANNEL EDIT section to adjust the
attenuator.
1.
Use the GAIN dial to adjust the attenuator.
fig.ChEdtPreamp.eps
56
M-380_e1.book 57 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
AUX channel and MAIN L/R channel operations
Limiter operations
Adjusting the left/right output balance
This operation is performed in the COMP area of the CHANNEL
EDIT section.
This operation is performed in the PAN area of the CHANNEL EDIT section.
This is valid for the MAIN L/R channels and for stereo-linked AUX channels.
fig.ChEdtComp.eps
fig.ChEdtPan.eps
Holding down [SHIFT] and pressing [DISP] for the COMP
area switches the limiter on or off.
By pressing [DISP] you can access the LIMITER popup where
you can make detailed settings for the limiter. For details, refer
to “Limiter operations (MAIN L/R, AUX1–AUX16)” (p. 82).
Four-band EQ operations
You can perform these operations in the EQUALIZER area of the
CHANNEL EDIT section.
1.
Use the PAN knob to adjust the balance.
You can make fine adjustments by holding down [SHIFT] while
you operate the knob.
Sending the audio signal to an
AUX bus (MAIN L/R channels)
This operation is performed in the AUX SENDS area of the
CHANNEL EDIT section.
fig.ChEdtAux.eps
fig.ChEdtEQ.eps
1.
Press [ON] to turn the four-band EQ on/off.
2.
Use the GAIN knobs to adjust the gain of each band.
3.
Use the FREQ knobs to adjust the center frequency of each
band.
4.
Use the Q knobs to adjust the Q of the LO-MID and HI-MID
bands.
By pressing [DISP] you can access the EQUALIZER popup
where you can make detailed settings for the four-band EQ. For
details, refer to “Four-band EQ operations” (p. 84).
You can make fine adjustments by holding down [SHIFT] while
you operate the knob.
1.
Press AUX SELECT [1]–[16] to select the send-destination
AUX bus.
2.
Use the SEND LEVEL knob to adjust the amount of signal
sent to the AUX bus.
You can make fine adjustments by holding down [SHIFT] while
you operate the knob.
You can’t use SENDS ON FADER to adjust the send amount
from the MAIN L/R channels to an AUX bus.
By pressing [DISP] you can access the AUX SENDS popup
where you can make detailed AUX send settings. For details,
refer to “AUX send operations” (p. 87).
57
AUX channel and MAIN L/R channel operations
1.
M-380_e1.book 58 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
AUX channel and MAIN L/R channel operations
Sending the audio signal to a
MATRIX bus
This operation is performed in the AUX SENDS area of the
CHANNEL EDIT section.
fig.ChEdtAux.eps
Operations in the CHANNEL
DISPLAY screen
The principal parameters of the MAIN L/R channels and AUX
channels can be operated in the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen.
CHANNEL DISPLAY screen
AUX channel and MAIN L/R channel operations
fig.ScrChMainGuide.eps
1
4
7
9
10
11
2
3
fig.ScrChAuxGuide.eps
5
1.
Press AUX SELECT [1]–[8] to select the send-destination
MATRIX bus.
2.
Use the SEND LEVEL knob to adjust the amount of signal
sent to the MATRIX bus.
8
6
You can make fine adjustments by holding down [SHIFT] while
you operate the knob.
1.
Attenuator
fig.ScrMtxATTGuide.eps
You can’t use SENDS ON FADER to adjust the send amount to
an MATRIX bus.
b
a
By pressing [DISP] you can access the MATRIX SENDS popup
where you can make detailed MATRIX send settings.
a. ATT knob
For the MAIN L/R channel, use [F7 ( MTX SENDS)] or
[F7 ( AUX SENDS)] to switch the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen
between the MTX SENDS display and the AUX SENDS display.
The target of operations in the CHANNEL EDIT section’s AUX
SENDS area will also follow the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen.
For the MAIN L/R channel, operations in the AUX SENDS area
are valid only while the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen is shown.
58
This adjusts the channel’s input level in the range of -48 dB–0
dB (6 dB steps).
b. OL (Overload) indicator
This will light red when the output of the attenuator exceeds the
OVER Lev setting specified in the METER SETUP popup (p. 96).
M-380_e1.book 59 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
AUX channel and MAIN L/R channel operations
Inserting a GEQ into a channel is done in the EFFECTS screen.
For details, refer to “Inserting a 31-band GEQ” (p. 105).
Normally, you should leave the attenuator set at 0 dB. It is
convenient to use the attenuator in situations like the following.
• When the input of an output channel is overloaded, and all
sends from the input channel must be lowered
2.
c. FX INS
If FX1–FX4 is inserted, this shows the number of the inserted
FX.
If the number is shown in white, the inserted effect is enabled. If
it is shown in gray, the inserted effect is bypassed.
Limiter
fig.ScrChLim.eps
The character “L” or “R” may be added to the FX INS number.
This has the following significance.
c
d
Indication
Number+L
Number+R
Number
only
a. LIM button
This turns the limiter on/off.
b. THRE (Threshold) knob
This adjusts the limiter’s threshold level in the range of -40.0
dB–0.0 dB.
Explanation
The L side of the FX is inserted.
The R side of the FX is inserted.
Both L and R sides of the FX are inserted. The
return from the FX is mixed and input to the
channel.
By moving the cursor to FX INS and pressing [ENTER], you can
access the FX 1-4 tab of the EFFECTS screen.
c. IN meter
This indicates the input level of the limiter. For stereo-linked
channels, two meters (L and R) are shown.
Inserting an effect into a channel is done in the EFFECTS screen.
For details, refer to “Effect input/output settings” (p. 100).
d. GR meter
This indicates the amount of gain reduction produced by the
limiter.
Up to four effects can be inserted in a channel. In this case, they
are inserted in series in order of the FX number.
e. OL (Overload) indicator
This will light red when the output of the limiter exceeds the
OVER Lev setting specified in the METER SETUP popup (p. 96).
For details on limiter settings, refer to “Limiter operations
(MAIN L/R, AUX1–AUX16)” (p. 82).
3.
4.
Four-band EQ
fig.ScrChEQ.eps
a
c
b
Insert indication
fig.ScrChInsOut.eps
a
b
c
d
f
e
g
a. EXT FX
If an external effects processor is inserted, this shows the EXT
FX number that is inserted.
h
By moving the cursor to EXT FX and pressing [ENTER], you can
access the EXT FX tab of the EFFECTS screen.
a. EQ button
Inserting an external effects processor into a channel is done in
the EFFECTS screen. For details, refer to “Inserting an external
effects device” (p. 111).
b. GEQ INS
If a GEQ is inserted, this shows the number of the GEQ that is
inserted.
If the number is shown in white, the inserted GEQ is enabled. If
it is shown in gray, the inserted GEQ is bypassed.
By moving the cursor to GEQ INS and pressing [ENTER], you
can access the GEQ 1-4 tab of the EFFECTS screen.
This turns the four-band EQ on/off.
b. Four-band EQ graph
This shows the approximate response of the four-band EQ.
c. OL (Overload) indicator
This will light red when the output of the four-band EQ exceeds
the OVER Lev setting specified in the METER SETUP popup (p.
96).
d. Q knobs (LO-MID, HI-MID)
These adjust the Q of the LO-MID and HI-MID bands in the
range of 0.36–16. Higher values produce a sharper curve.
59
AUX channel and MAIN L/R channel operations
e
b
a
M-380_e1.book 60 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
AUX channel and MAIN L/R channel operations
•
e. LO FREQ knob
This adjusts the center frequency of the LO band in the range of
20 Hz–1.00 kHz.
MATRIX pan slider
fig.ScrMtxSendField2.eps
f. FREQ knobs (LO-MID, HI-MID)
These adjust the center frequency of the LO-MID and HI-MID
bands in the range of 20 Hz–20.0 kHz.
g. HI FREQ knob
This adjusts the center frequency of the HI band in the range of
1.00 kHz–20.0 kHz.
If the send-destination is a stereo-linked pair of MATRIX
channels, this slider adjusts the left/right position in the range
of L63–R63. This is shown for the odd-numbered MATRIX
send.
AUX channel and MAIN L/R channel operations
h. GAIN knobs (LO, LO-MID, HI-MID, HI)
These adjust the gain of the LO, LO-MID, HI-MID, and HI
bands in the range of -15.0 dB–+15.0 dB.
For detailed MATRIX send settings, refer to “MATRIX send
operations” (p. 89).
For detailed settings for the four-band EQ, refer to “Four-band
EQ operations” (p. 84).
5.
6.
MTX send
MATRIX send point
fig.ScrMtxSendPoint.eps
fig.ScrMtxSends.eps
These select the point from which signal is sent to MATRIX1–
MATRIX8.
The selected item corresponds to the send point as follows.
PRE EQ
PRE FD
PST FD
7.
Send from the pre-EQ point
Send from the pre-fader point
Send from the post-fader point
AUX send (MAIN L/R only)
fig.ScrChSends.eps
•
MATRIX sends 1–8
These adjust the send from AUX1–AUX16 or MAIN L/R to
MATRIX1–MATRIX8. The MATRIX send area is structured as
follows.
fig.ScrMtxSendField.eps
a
c
b
a. MATRIX number
This indicates the MATRIX channel number.
b. MATRIX name
This indicates the MATRIX channel name.
c. Send level bar
This adjusts the send level to each MATRIX in the range of -Inf
dB–+10.0 dB.
The color of the level bar indicates the send point or status of
the send switch as follows.
Color of the
send level bar
Blue
Green
Gray
Status
send point is PRE EQ or PRE FADER
send point is POST FADER
Send switch is off
• AUX sends 1–16
These adjust the send from MAIN L/R to AUX1–AUX16. The
AUX send area is structured as follows.
fig.ScrChSendField.eps
a
c
b
a. AUX number
This indicates the AUX channel number.
b. AUX name
This indicates the AUX channel name.
60
M-380_e1.book 61 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
AUX channel and MAIN L/R channel operations
c. Send level bar
c. LEVEL knob
This adjusts the send level to each AUX in the range of -Inf dB–
+10.0 dB.
The color of the level bar indicates the send point or status of
the send switch as follows.
Color of the
send level bar
Blue
Green
Gray
d. MAIN send point
These select the point from which the signal is sent to MAIN L/
R.
The selected item corresponds to the send point as follows.
Status
send point is PRE EQ or PRE FADER
send point is POST FADER
Send switch is off
PRE EQ
PRE FD
PST FD
Send from the pre-EQ point
Send from the pre-fader point
Send from the post-fader point
AUX pan slider
fig.ScrChSendField2.eps
If this is set to POST FADER, muting the AUX channel will also
mute the send to the MAIN L/R channel. If this is set to PRE EQ
or PRE FADER, muting the AUX channel will not affect the
send to the MAIN L/R channel.
9.
If the send-destination is a stereo-linked pair of AUX channels,
this slider adjusts the left/right position in the range of L63–
R63. This is shown for the odd-numbered AUX send.
For detailed AUX send settings, refer to “AUX send operations”
(p. 87).
Sends to the AUX used by the LCR SYSTEM as MAIN C are
indicated as “MAIN C,” and cannot be operated.
Balance
fig.ScrChBal.eps
This adjusts the left/right output balance sent from MAIN L/R
or stereo-linked AUX channels in the range of L63–R63.
10. Group
fig.ScrChGroup.eps
fig.ScrChSendField2.eps
8.
By moving the cursor to DCA GROUP or MUTE GROUP and
pressing [ENTER], you can access the GROUP ASSIGN popup
where you can make DCA group and MUTE group
assignments.
TO MAIN (AUX channels only)
fig.ScrChMainSend.eps
a
b
c
d
You can also access the GROUP ASSIGN popup window by
pressing [F5 (GROUP ASSIGN)].
11. Fader
fig.ScrChFaderOut.eps
a
d
These specify the amount of signal that will be sent from the
AUX channel to MAIN L/R, and the send point.
a. ON button
This turns the send to MAIN L/R on/off.
b. PAN knob
This adjusts the left/right pan to MAIN L/R in the range of
L63–R63.
b
c
61
AUX channel and MAIN L/R channel operations
•
This adjusts the send level to MAIN L/R in the range of-Inf dB–
+10.0 dB.
M-380_e1.book 62 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
AUX channel and MAIN L/R channel operations
2.
a. Fader
This adjusts the output level in the range of -Inf dB–+10.0 dB.
In the CHANNEL EDIT section, press [CH DISP] to access
the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen.
fig.ScrChAux.eps
b. S button
This turns SOLO on/off for the channel.
c. M button
This turns MUTE on/off for the channel.
AUX channel and MAIN L/R channel operations
d. Channel meter
This indicates the signal level of the channel. For stereo-linked
channels, two meters (L and R) are shown. The point at which
the signal level is detected will be as specified in the METER
screen. For details, refer to “Editing the meter settings” (p. 96).
The function buttons have the following operations.
[F1 (LINK)]*
[F2 (NAME EDIT)]
[F3 (COPY)]
[F4 (LIBRARY)
[F5 (GROUP ASSIGN)]
[F6 (PEAK CLEAR)]
[F7 (COPY MAIN
MIX)]*
[F7 (
MTX SENDS)]
[F7 (
AUX SENDS)]
[F8 (Patchbay)]
Turns channel link on/off.
Accesses the NAME EDIT
popup where you can specify
the channel name.
Accesses the AUX/MAIN
COPY popup where you can
copy channel settings.
Accesses the AUX/MAIN LIBRARY popup where you can
use the channel library.
Accesses the GROUP ASSIGN
popup where you can make
DCA group and MUTE group
assignments.
Clears the level meter peak
hold or over indication.
Copies the send amount from
each input channel to MAIN
L/R.
Switches between the MTX
SENDS display and the AUX
SENDS display. This exists
only for the MAIN L/R channel.
Accesses the PATCHBAY
screen.
p. 62
p. 51
By pressing a different [SEL] while the CHANNEL DISPLAY
screen is shown, you can switch to the display for that channel.
p. 63
If you’ve selected the “CHANNEL DISPLAY follows CH
SELECT” button located in the CHANNEL SELECT area of
User Preference (p. 155), pressing a [SEL] will recall the
CHANNEL DISPLAY screen for that channel.
p. 64
p. 54
p. 65
Stereo-linking AUX channels
You can stereo-link adjacent odd-numbered and even-numbered
AUX channels so that their parameters will have the same settings.
This is convenient when you want stereo output.
1.
Access the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen for the AUX channel
that you want to stereo-link.
2.
Press [F1 (LINK)].
p. 90
* AUX channels only
A confirmation message will appear, asking you to confirm the
stereo-link operation.
If you press [F8 (Patchbay)] to access the PATCHBAY screen,
the currently selected channel will be highlighted in the
PATCHBAY screen.
The function buttons have the following operations.
[F6 (CANCEL)]
Accessing the CHANNEL DISPLAY
screen
1.
[F8 (LINK (L -> R))]
In the fader module section, press [SEL] to select MAIN L/R
or an AUX channel.
The MAIN L channel or MAIN R channel will be selected
alternately each time you press MAIN [SEL].
62
[F7 (LINK (L <- R))]
3.
Cancels the stereo-link operation
and closes the popup.
The parameters of the odd-numbered channel will be set to the values of the even-numbered channel.
The parameters of the even-numbered channel will be set to the values of the odd-numbered channel.
Press [F7 (LINK (L <- R))] or [F8](LINK (L -> R) ] , the AUX
channels will be stereo-linked.
M-380_e1.book 63 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
AUX channel and MAIN L/R channel operations
2.
About linked parameters
A
Stereo-link will link the following parameters.
•
Attenuator
•
Limiter parameters
•
Four-band EQ parameters
•
Fader parameters
•
MAIN send level, send switch and send point
•
MATRIX send level, send switch and send point
Press [F3 (COPY)] to access the AUX/MAIN COPY popup.
fig.ScrChCopyOutGuide.eps
B
C
When linked, the limiter will operate in stereo.
A.Copy-source channel
This indicates the copy-source channel.
Specifying a channel name
and color label
B.Copy parameter select buttons
Here you can select the parameters that will be copied. You
can select the following parameters.
You can specify a channel name and color label for each AUX
channel and MAIN L/R channel. The channel name can be up to six
characters, and you can select one of eight colors as the color label.
ATT
EQ
MTX Sends
TO Main
Fader
Balance
Limiter
Group
Channel name entry and color label selection are done in the NAME
EDIT popup.
For details on NAME EDIT popup, refer to “Specifying a
channel name and color label” (p. 51).
Copying channel settings to
another channel
C.Copy-destination channel select buttons
Here you can select the copy-destination channel(s).
Channel settings can be copied to another channel. Channel copying
is done in the AUX/MAIN COPY popup.
1.
Access the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen or the desired copysource channel.
fig.ScrChAux.eps
Attenuator
Four-band EQ
MATRIX Sends
To MAIN (AUX channels only)
Fader
Balance
Limiter
DCA groups and MUTE groups
The function buttons have the following operations.
Button
Operation
[F3 (PASTE)]
Executes the copy.
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Closes the popup.
3.
Move the cursor to the desired copy parameter select
button, and press [ENTER] to select it.
4.
Move the cursor to the desired copy-destination channel
select button, and press [ENTER] to select it. You can
select more than one channel.
5.
Press [F3 (PASTE)].
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the Copy
operation.
6.
Press [F8 (PASTE)] to execute the Copy operation.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled.
63
AUX channel and MAIN L/R channel operations
MAIN L/R is always stereo-linked.
M-380_e1.book 64 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
AUX channel and MAIN L/R channel operations
7.
Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup.
When you execute PASTE, the copy-destination channel select
buttons will be cleared.
Using the AUX/MAIN library
AUX channel and MAIN L/R channel operations
You can recall channel settings from the library, or store the settings
of the current channel in the library.
AUX/MAIN library operations are performed in the AUX/MAIN
LIBRARY popup.
Noise may occur when you preview or recall a library item, but
this is not a malfunction.
AUX sends will not be recalled for AUX channels. The MAIN
send will not be recalled for the MAIN L/R channel.
The function buttons have the following operations.
[F1 (PRESET)]
[F2 (USER)]
1.
Access the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen for the desired
channel.
[F3 (PREVIEW)]
fig.ScrChAux.eps
[F4 (RECALL)]
[F5 (STORE)]*
[F6 (LOCK)]*
[F7 (NAME EDIT)]*
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Displays the recall-only PRESET library.
Displays the USER library, which can
be recalled or stored.
Previews (auditions) the selected library data.
Recalls the selected library data.
Stores the settings of the current
channel into the selected library data.
Locks or unlocks the selected library
data.
Accesses the NAME EDIT popup,
where you can edit the name of the
selected library data.
Closes the popup.
* Available only for the User library.
2.
Press [F4 (LIBRARY)] to access the AUX/MAIN LIBRARY
popup.
For details on library operations, refer to “Library operations”
(p. 39).
fig.ScrChLibOutGuide.eps
1
2
3
When you store an AUX channel in the User library, the AUX
sends will be stored with the default values. When you store the
MAIN L/R channel in the User library, the MAIN send will be
stored with the default value.
Assigning channels to DCA
groups and MUTE groups
A.Target channel
This indicates the channel that is the target of the AUX/MAIN
LIBRARY popup.
B.Library data list
This is a list of the library data.
C.Recall parameter select buttons
Use these to select the parameters that will be recalled. You
can select the following parameters.
ATT
EQ
Sends
Fader
Balance
Limiter
64
Attenuator
Four-band EQ
AUX send, MAIN send and MATRIX send
Fader
Balance
Limiter
Output channels can be assigned to DCA groups and MUTE groups.
Assignments to DCA groups and MUTE groups are made in the
GROUP ASSIGN popup.
For details on GROUP ASSIGN popup, refer to “Assigning
channels to DCA groups and MUTE groups” (p. 54).
M-380_e1.book 65 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
AUX channel and MAIN L/R channel operations
Copying the MAIN mix
(AUX channels only)
Access the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen for the AUX channel
to which you want to copy the MAIN mix.
2.
Press [F7 (COPY MAIN MIX)].
AUX channel and MAIN L/R channel operations
1.
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the Copy
operation.
3.
Press [F8 (OK)] to copy the send amount from each input
channel to MAIN.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the Copy operation will be
cancelled.
In the case of stereo-linked AUX channels, the pan from each
input channel to MAIN will also be copied.
65
M-380_e1.book 66 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
MATRIX channel operations
About MATRIX channels
MATRIX channels process a mix of the audio signals from AUX1–AUX16 and MAIN L/R, and send them to an output port. You can also select
any two channels from CH1–CH48 and mix them into a MATRIX channel.
fig.MatrixCh.eps
OUTPUT
PATCHBAY
MATRIX 1-8
TO MTX 1, 3...7
MATRIX SEND
(FROM MAIN)
TO MTX 2, 4...8
POST ATT
PRE FADER
POST FADER
OUTPUT LEVEL
MATRIX channel operations
TO MTX 1, 3...7
MATRIX SEND
(FROM AUX 1-16)
TO MTX 2, 4...8
EXT FX
FX
FADER
BAL
INSERT INSERT
MUTE
GEQ
INSERT
MATRIX 1-8
OUT
ATT
CH SELECT
FROM CH A
SOLO
MTX
LINK
SW SEND
TO SOLO L
PAN
DIRECT OUT 1
TO SOLO R
TO MTX 2, 4...8
DIRECT OUT 48
TO MONITOR SELECT
TO REC SELECT
FROM CH B
Same as the above
TO MTX 2, 4...8
TALKBACK
OSCILLATOR
•
ATT (Attenuator)
•
EXT INSERT (External insert)
•
FX INSERT (Effect insert)
•
FADER
•
BALANCE
•
MUTE
•
GEQ INSERT
This adjusts the input level.
These ports let you use the rear panel CONSOLE IN1–IN8 and CONSOLE OUT1–OUT8 ports to insert external effects processors.
These ports let you insert FX1–FX4.
This adjusts the output level.
This adjusts the left/right balance for stereo-linked MATRIX.
This mutes the output of the channel.
This port allows you to insert a 31-band GEQ.
66
M-380_e1.book 67 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
MATRIX channel operations
MATRIX channel operations
You can perform MATRIX channel operations in the following ways.
• Operations in the METER tab of the METER screen
Select a MATRIX channel by moving the cursor between
MATRIX1–MATRIX8. You can use the value dial to operate the
faders.
fig.ScrMtxSelMeter.eps
Operations using the
CHANNEL EDIT section
You can use the CHANNEL EDIT section to operate the following
parameters of a MATRIX channel.
• ATT
• Balance
• Send levels from AUX1–AUX16 to the MATRIX
fig.ChEditSection.eps
MATRIX channel operations
• Operations in the USER layer
Use the fader modules assigned to MATRIX1–MATRIX8 to
select and operate channels. Before you can do this, you will
need to set the user preference in the USER FADER tab (p. 152)
to assign MATRIX1–MATRIX8 to the fader modules.
• Operations in the AUX13-16/MTX layer
Use fader modules 5–12 to select and operate channels. Before
you can do this, you will need to set the user preference (p. 155)
so that the AUX/MTX Layer select button will select “4Auxes +
8Matrices.”
If a MATRIX channel is selected, pressing the CHANNEL EDIT
section [CH DISP] button will access the CHANNEL DISPLAY
screen for the MATRIX channel.
Selecting a channel to operate
1.
As described in “MATRIX channel operations (p. 67),”
select the MATRIX channel that you want to operate.
2.
The selected channel will appear in the channel display
area in the upper middle of the screen.
fig.ScrSelectedMtx.eps
67
M-380_e1.book 68 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
MATRIX channel operations
1.
Press AUX SELECT [1]–[16] to select the send-source AUX
bus
2.
Use the SEND LEVEL knob to adjust the amount of signal
sent to the MATRIX bus.
Attenuator adjustments
Use the PREAMP area of the CHANNEL EDIT section to adjust the
attenuator.
fig.ChEdtPreamp.eps
You can make fine adjustments by holding down [SHIFT] while
you operate the knob.
You can’t use SENDS ON FADER to adjust the send amount
from AUX channels to an MATRIX bus.
1.
Use the GAIN dial to adjust the attenuator.
MATRIX channel operations
Adjusting the left/right output balance
This operation is performed in the PAN area of the CHANNEL EDIT section.
This is valid for stereo-linked MATRIX channels.
fig.ChEdtPan.eps
Operations in the CHANNEL
DISPLAY screen
The parameters of the MATRIX channels can be operated in the
CHANNEL DISPLAY screen.
CHANNEL DISPLAY screen
fig.ScrChDispMtxGuide.eps
1.
1
Use the PAN knob to adjust the balance.
3
4 5
You can make fine adjustments by holding down [SHIFT] while
you operate the knob.
6
7
Sending the audio signal from an
AUX bus
This operation is performed in the AUX SENDS area of the
CHANNEL EDIT section.
fig.ChEdtAux.eps
8
2
1.
Attenuator
fig.ScrMtxATTGuide.eps
b
a
a. ATT knob
This adjusts the channel’s input level in the range of -48 dB–0
dB (6 dB steps).
b. OL (Overload) indicator
This will light red when the output of the attenuator exceeds the
OVER Lev setting specified in the METER SETUP popup (p. 96).
Normally, you can leave the attenuator at 0 dB. If an input is
overloading, you can avoid the overload by adjusting the
attenuator.
68
M-380_e1.book 69 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
MATRIX channel operations
2.
3.
Insert indication
fig.ScrChInsOut.eps
a
FROM AUX send
fig.ScrFromAux.eps
b
c
a. EXT FX
If an external effects processor is inserted, this shows the EXT
FX number that is inserted.
By moving the cursor to EXT FX and pressing [ENTER], you can
access the EXT FX tab of the EFFECTS screen.
b. GEQ INS
These adjust the send levels from AUX1–AUX16 to MATRIX. The
FROM AUX sends are structured as follows.
fig.ScrFromAux1.eps
If a GEQ is inserted, this shows the number of the GEQ that is
inserted.
If the number is shown in white, the inserted GEQ is enabled. If
it is shown in gray, the inserted GEQ is bypassed.
By moving the cursor to GEQ INS and pressing [ENTER], you
can access the GEQ 1-4 tab of the EFFECTS screen.
a
b
c
a. AUX number
Indicates the AUX channel number.
b. ON button
Inserting a GEQ into a channel is done in the EFFECTS screen.
For details, refer to “Inserting a 31-band GEQ” (p. 105).
Turns the AUX send on/off.
c. LEVEL knob
Adjusts the AUX send level in a range of -Inf dB–+10.0 dB.
c. FX INS
If FX1–FX4 is inserted, this shows the number of the inserted
FX.
The FROM AUX send LEVEL knobs can also be operated from
the CHANNEL EDIT section’s AUX SENDS area (p. 68).
If the number is shown in white, the inserted effect is enabled. If
it is shown in gray, the inserted effect is bypassed.
The character “L” or “R” may be added to the FX INS number.
This has the following significance.
Indication
Number+L
Number+R
Number only
Explanation
The L side of the FX is inserted.
The R side of the FX is inserted.
Both L and R sides of the FX are inserted.
The return from the FX is mixed and input
to the channel.
The send from the AUX used by the LCR SYSTEM as MAIN C
to the MATRIX is indicated as “C.” This can be used as a send
from MAIN C to a MATRIX.
fig.ScrFromAux.eps
By moving the cursor to FX INS and pressing [ENTER], you can
access the FX 1-4 tab of the EFFECTS screen.
Inserting an effect into a channel is done in the EFFECTS screen.
For details, refer to “Effect input/output settings” (p. 100).
Up to four effects can be inserted in a channel. In this case, they
are inserted in series in order of the FX number.
4.
FROM MAIN L/R send
fig.ScrFromMain.eps
a
b
Adjusts the send level from MAIN L/R to MATRIX.
a. ON button
Turns the send from MAIN L/R on/off.
69
MATRIX channel operations
Inserting an external effects processor into a channel is done in
the EFFECTS screen. For details, refer to “Inserting an external
effects device” (p. 111).
M-380_e1.book 70 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
MATRIX channel operations
7.
b. LEVEL knob
Adjusts the send level from MAIN L/R in a range of -Inf dB–
+10.0 dB.
The FROM AUX send and FROM MAIN L/R parameters are
actually parameters of the AUX channels and MAIN L/R
channel. If a MATRIX is stereo-linked, its send pan and send
position can be edited in the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen for
AUX1–AUX16 and MAIN L/R (p. 60).
5.
Group
fig.ScrChGroup.eps
By moving the cursor to DCA GROUP or MUTE GROUP and
pressing [ENTER], you can access the GROUP ASSIGN popup
where you can make DCA group and MUTE group
assignments.
FROM CH send
MATRIX channel operations
fig.Scr.FromCheps
You can also access the GROUP ASSIGN popup window by
pressing [F5 (GROUP ASSIGN)].
a
c
8.
Fader
fig.ScrChFaderOut.eps
b
d
a
d
Here you can select any two channels from CH1–CH48 and mix
them into the MATRIX.
a. MATRIX SOURCE SELECT popup button
This button accesses the MATRIX SOURCE SELECT popup (p.
72) where you can select the channels that will be mixed into the
MATRIX. The name of the currently selected channel is shown
on the button.
b
c
b. PAN knob
This is shown if the MATRIX is stereo-linked. You can adjust
the left/right panning to the MATRIX in a range of L63–R63.
c. LEVEL knob
This adjusts the send level to the MATRIX in a range of -Inf dB–
+10.0 dB.
a. Fader
This adjusts the output level in the range of -Inf dB–+10.0 dB.
b. S button
This turns SOLO on/off for the channel.
c. M button
This turns MUTE on/off for the channel.
For a stereo-linked MATRIX, the channel selection and send
level will be the same for FROM CH A and FROM CH B.
The position at which the signal is taken from CH1–CH48 is the
same as the direct out send position. This setting is made in the
CHANNEL DISPLAY screen for CH1–CH48 (p. 48).
6.
Balance
fig.ScrChBal.eps
This adjusts the left/right output balance sent from stereolinked MATRIX channels in the range of L63–R63.
70
d. Channel meter
This indicates the signal level of the channel. For stereo-linked
channels, two meters (L and R) are shown. The point at which
the signal level is detected will be as specified in the METER
screen. For details, refer to “Editing the meter settings” (p. 96).
M-380_e1.book 71 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
MATRIX channel operations
The function buttons have the following operations.
[F1 (LINK)]
[F2 (NAME EDIT)]
[F5 (GROUP ASSIGN)]
[F6 (PEAK CLEAR)]
[F7 (COPY MIX)]
p. 51
p. 54
Stereo-linking MATRIX
channels
You can stereo-link adjacent odd-numbered and even-numbered
MATRIX channels so that their parameters will have the same
settings. This is convenient when you want stereo output.
1.
Access the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen for the MATRIX
channel that you want to stereo-link.
fig.ScrChDispMtx.eps
p. 72
MATRIX channel operations
[F8 (Patchbay)]
Turns channel link on/off.
Accesses the NAME EDIT popup
where you can specify the channel name.
Accesses the GROUP ASSIGN
popup where you can make DCA
group and MUTE group assignments.
Clears the level meter peak hold
or over indication.
Copies the mix of a MATRIX
channel to another MATRIX
channel.
Accesses the PATCHBAY screen.
p. 90
If you press [F8 (Patchbay)] to access the PATCHBAY screen,
the currently selected channel will be highlighted in the
PATCHBAY screen.
Accessing the CHANNEL DISPLAY
screen
1.
As described in “MATRIX channel operations” (p. 67),
select the MATRIX channel that you want to operate.
2.
In the CHANNEL EDIT section, press [CH DISP] to access
the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen.
2.
Press [F1 (LINK)].
fig.ScrChDispMtx.eps
A confirmation message will appear, asking you to confirm the
stereo-link operation.
The function buttons have the following operations.
[F6 (CANCEL)]
[F7 (LINK (L <- R))]
[F8 (LINK (L -> R))]
3.
Cancels the stereo-link operation
and closes the popup.
The parameters of the odd-numbered channel will be set to the values of the even-numbered channel.
The parameters of the even-numbered channel will be set to the values of the odd-numbered channel.
Press [F7 (LINK (L <- R))] or [F8](LINK (L -> R) ] , the
MATRIX channels will be stereo-linked.
About linked parameters
Stereo-link will link the following parameters.
•
Attenuator parameters
•
Fader parameters
•
The FROM AUX and FROM MAIN L/R send levels and send
switches
•
The FROM CH A/B channel selections, send levels, send
switches, and send pans
71
M-380_e1.book 72 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
MATRIX channel operations
Sending to MATRIX from
input channels
1.
Move the cursor to the MATRIX SOURCE SELECT popup
button (p. 70) and press [ENTER].
The MATRIX SOURCE SELECT popup will appear.
ig.ScrMtxSelGuide.eps
A
B
Copying a mix to another
MATRIX
You can copy the mix from one MATRIX to another MATRIX. Use
the COPY MATRIX MIX popup to perform this operation.
1.
C
Access the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen for the desired
copy-source MATRIX channel.
MATRIX channel operations
fig.ScrChDispMtx.eps
2.
A.Current channel selection indication
This indicates the currently selected channel.
Press [F7 (COPY MIX)] to access the COPY MATRIX MIX popup.
fig.ScrMtxCopyGuide.eps
A
B
B.Target MATRIX indication
This indicates the MATRIX that is the target of operations in
the MATRIX SOURCE SELECT popup.
C.Channel select buttons
These buttons select the channels that will be mixed to the
MATRIX.
In the MATRIX SOURCE SELECT popup, the function buttons
perform the following operations.
[F1 (CH 1–24)]
[F2 (CH 25–48)]
[F5 (SELECT NONE)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Displays CH1–CH24 as the channel select buttons.
Displays CH25–CH48 as the channel select buttons.
Cancels the channel selection.
Closes the popup.
3.
Use [F1 (CH 1-24)] or [F2 (CH 25-48)] to access the desired
channel select buttons.
4.
Move the cursor to the desired channel select button, and
press [ENTER] to select it.
5.
A.Copy-source channel indication
This indicates the copy-source MATRIX channel.
Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup.
B.Copy-destination channel select button
This selects the copy-destination MATRIX channel.
In the COPY MATRIX MIX popup, the function buttons
perform the following operations.
[F3 (PASTE)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Executes the copy.
Closes the popup.
3.
Use the copy-destination select button to select the copydestination MATRIX channel.
4.
Press [F3 (PASTE)].
CopyCHoutonf1.eps
If you decide to cancel your channel selection,
press [F6 (SELECT NONE)].
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the copy
operation.
5.
72
Press [F8 (PASTE)] to copy the mix to the MATRIX channel
you selected in step 3.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled.
M-380_e1.book 73 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Dynamics
Gate/expander operations
A gate/expander is provided on CH1–CH48, and can be used as either a gate, an expander, or a ducking processor. Up to twenty-four gate/
expander units can be turned on.
A gate applies a user-adjustable level of attenuation (RANGE) to input signals that are lower than the threshold level.
fig.GateCurve.eps
INPUT SIGNAL
OUTPUT SIGNAL
ATTACK
HOLD
RELEASE
LEVEL
OUTPUT LEVEL
THRESHOLD
THRESHOLD
Dynamics
RANGE
RANGE
INPUT LEVEL
TIME
An expander applies a user-adjustable ratio of attenuation (RATIO) to input signals that are lower than the threshold level.
fig.ExpCurve.eps
(KNEE=HARD)
INPUT SIGNAL
(RATIO=INF:1)
OUTPUT SIGNAL
THRESHOLD
RELEASE
LEVEL
OUTPUT LEVEL
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RATIO
INPUT LEVEL
TIME
A ducking applies a user-adjustable level of attenuation (RANGE) to input signals that are higher than the threshold level.
fig.GateDuck.eps
LEVEL
INPUT SIGNAL
OUTPUT LEVEL
THRESHOLD
OUTPUT SIGNAL
ATTACK
HOLD
RELEASE
RANGE
THRESHOLD
RANGE
INPUT LEVEL
TIME
Gate/expander operations are performed in the GATE/EXPANDER popup.
73
M-380_e1.book 74 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Dynamics
•GATE
GATE/EXPANDER popup
Knob
fig.PopGateGuide.eps
EQ LO-MID
2 3 4
5
6
EQ HI-MID
Parameter
Q
Blink
Threshold level
FREQ
Blink
ATTACK time
GAIN
Blink
RELEASE time
Q
Blink
RANGE
FREQ
Unlit
Disabled
GAIN
Blink
HOLD time
Q
Blink
Threshold level
FREQ
Blink
ATTACK time
GAIN
Blink
RELEASE time
Q
Blink
RATIO
FREQ
Blink
KNEE
GAIN
Unlit
Disabled
•EXPANDER
Dynamics
1
7
Knob
EQ LO-MID
1.
TYPE select buttons
These select the gate/expander type from the following choices.
GATE
EXPANDER
DUCKING
EQ HI-MID
Gate
Expander
Ducking
Parameter
•DUCKING
2.
3.
4.
KEY-IN meter
This indicates the level of the key-in signal. For stereo-linked
channels, two meters are shown (L and R).
IN meter
This indicates the input level to the gate/expander. For stereolinked channels, two meters are shown (L and R).
Gate/expander graph
This indicates the approximate response of the gate/expander.
6.
OUT meter
This indicates the output level of the gate/expander. For stereolinked channels, two meters are shown (L and R).
7.
KEY-IN SELECT popup button
This accesses the KEY-IN SELECT popup where you can select
the key-in signal. For stereo-linked channels, there will be two
(L and R). The channel currently selected as the key-in signal is
shown on the button.
When the GATE/EXPANDER popup is displayed, the gate/
expander can be adjusted using the EQ area controls for the
CHANNEL EDIT section. The FREQ, and GAIN knobs for EQ
LO and HI are disabled at this time. The parameters that you
can manipulate using the EQ area controls vary according to the
state of the TYPE select buttons, as shown below.
74
EQ LO-MID
EQ HI-MID
GR meter
This indicates the amount of gain reduction produced by the
gate/expander.
5.
Parameter
Knob
Q
Blink
Threshold level
FREQ
Blink
ATTACK time
GAIN
Blink
RELEASE time
Q
Blink
RANGE
FREQ
Unlit
Disabled
GAIN
Blink
HOLD time
In the GATE/EXPANDER popup, the function buttons perform the
following operations.
[F1 (OVERVIEW)]
[F1 (GATE ON)]
[F4 (LIBRARY)
[F5 (PEAK CLEAR)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Accesses the GATE/EXPANDER
p. 76
OVERVIEW popup.
Turns the gate/expander on/off.
Accesses the GATE/EXP LIBRARY p. 77
popup.
Clears the level meter’s peak hold
or over indication.
Closes the popup.
M-380_e1.book 75 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Dynamics
Gate
b. RATIO knob
This adjusts the RATIO in a range of 1.00:1–INF:1 (14 steps).
fig.PopGateGuide2.eps
A
c. KNEE knob
This adjusts the KNEE in a range of HARD or SOFT1–SOFT9
(ten steps). The way in which the expander is applied to the
region near the threshold level can be adjusted between steep
(HARD) and gentle (SOFT9).
B
C
e. RELEASE knob
This adjusts the RELEASE time in a range of 0 ms–8000 ms. This
is the time from when the input signal falls below the threshold
level until the expander effect reaches its maximum.
E
a. THRESH knob
This adjusts the threshold level in a range of -80.0 dB–0.0 dB.
Ducking
fig.PopDuckGuide.eps
b. RANGE knob
This adjusts the RANGE in a range of -Inf dB–0.0 dB.
a
b
c. ATTACK knob
This adjusts the ATTACK time in a range of 0.0 ms–800.0 ms.
This is the time from when the input signal exceeds the
threshold level until the gate opens completely.
c
d. RELEASE knob
This adjusts the RELEASE time in a range of 0 ms–8000 ms. This
is the time over which the gate reaches its maximum effect after
the HOLD time has elapsed.
e. HOLD knob
This adjusts the HOLD time in a range of 0 ms–8000 ms. This is
the time from when the input signal falls below the threshold
level until the gate begins closing.
d
e
a. THRESH knob
This adjusts the threshold level in a range of -80.0 dB–0.0 dB.
Expander
b. RANGE knob
This adjusts the RANGE in a range of -Inf dB–0.0 dB.
fig.PopExpGuide.eps
A
B
c. ATTACK knob
This adjusts the ATTACK time in a range of 0.0 ms–800.0 ms.
This is the time from when the input signal exceeds the
threshold level until the ducking effect reaches its maximum.
C
D
E
d. RELEASE knob
This adjusts the RELEASE time in a range of 0 ms–8000 ms. This
is the time over which the ducking effect disappears after the
HOLD time has elapsed.
e. HOLD knob
This adjusts the HOLD time in a range of 0 ms–8000 ms. This is
the time from when the input signal falls below the threshold
level until the ducking effect begins to disappear.
a. THRESH knob
This adjusts the threshold level in a range of -80.0 dB–0.0 dB.
75
Dynamics
D
d. ATTACK knob
This adjusts the ATTACK time in a range of 0.0 ms–800.0 ms.
This is the time from when the input signal exceeds the
threshold level until the expander effect disappears.
M-380_e1.book 76 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Dynamics
B.Dynamics type indication
This indicates the type of dynamics to which the KEY-IN
SELECT popup applies.
Accessing the GATE/EXPANDER
popup
1.
In the fader module section, press a [SEL] button to select
the desired channel.
2.
In the GATE area of the CHANNEL EDIT section, press
[DISP].
C.Key-in signal select buttons
These buttons select the channel that will be used as the key-in
signal.
In the KEY-IN SELECT popup, the function buttons perform the
following operations.
fig.PopGate.eps
[F1 (CH 1–24)]
[F2 (CH 25–48)]
Dynamics
[F6 (SELECT SELF)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
The GATE/EXPANDER popup will appear.
Selecting the key-in signal for the
gate/expander
2.
Use [F1 (CH 1–24)] or [F2 (CH 25–48)] to view the desired
key-in signal select buttons.
3.
Move the cursor to the desired key-in signal select button,
and press [ENTER] to select it.
4.
Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup.
If you want the channel itself to be its own key-in signal, press
[F6 (SELCT SELF)].
fig.GateKeyInFlow.eps
FILTER
GATE
Displays CH1–CH24 as the key-in
signal select buttons.
Displays CH25–CH48 as the key-in
signal select buttons.
Selects the channel itself as its own
key-in signal.
Closes the popup.
COMP
Listing the GATE/EXPANDER states
To Gate
KEY-IN
Gate
KEY-IN
1.
Access the GATE EXPANDER popup.
fig.PopGate.eps
The key-in signal used by the gate/expander is taken from the postfilter point of CH1–CH48.
Use the KEY-IN SELECT popup to select the key-in signal.
1.
Move the cursor to the KEY-IN SELECT popup button and
press [ENTER].
The KEY-IN SELECT popup will appear.
fig.PopKeyInGuide.eps
A
B
C
2.
Press [F1 (OVERVIEW)] to access the GATE/EXPANDER
OVERVIEW popup.
fig.ScrGateOverviewGuide.eps
A
A.Current key indication
This indicates the current key.
B
76
M-380_e1.book 77 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Dynamics
A.Overview
This shows the overall gate/expander status for CH1–CH48.
Using the gate/expander library
fig.ScrGateOverviewGuide2.eps
You can recall gate/expander settings from the library, or store the
current gate/expander settings in the library.
a
b
c
d
The GATE/EXP LIBRARY popup is used to perform gate/expander
library operations.
1.
Access the GATE/EXPANDER popup.
fig.PopGate.eps
e
f
a.Channel number
Dynamics
b.ON switch
Turns the gate/expander on or off.
c.Type indication
Indicates the currently selected type.
d.Gate/expander graph
Shows the approximate response of the gate/expander.
e.GR meter
Shows the amount of gain reduction for the gate/expander.
2.
Press [F4 (LIBRARY)] to access the GATE/EXP LIBRARY
popup.
fig.PopGateLibGuide.eps
A
B
f.THR knob
Adjusts the threshold level of the gate/expander in a range
of -80.0 dB–0.0 dB.
B.GATE REMAIN indication
Indicates the remaining number of gate/expander units that
can be turned on. If this indicates 0, no further units can be
turned on.
Stereo-linked channels will use two gate/expander units. This
means that if the GATE REMAIN indication is 1, you won’t be
able to turn on the gate/expander for a stereo-linked channel.
If you enable stereo linking for a channel when the GATE
REMAIN indication is 0, and this would cause the number of
gate/expander units to exceed 24, the gate/expander for that
channel will be turned off.
A.Channel indication
This indicates the channel to which the GATE/EXP LIBRARY
popup applies.
B.Library data list
This is a list of the library data.
If you attempt to turn on more than twenty-four gate/expander
units, the following warning message will appear, and no
further units can be turned on.
fig.ScrGateOvMsg.eps
In the GATE/EXPANDER OVERVIEW popup, the function
buttons perform the following operations.
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Closes the popup.
77
M-380_e1.book 78 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Dynamics
[F1 (PRESET)]
[F2 (USER)]
[F3 (PREVIEW)]
[F4 (RECALL)]
[F5 (STORE)]*
[F6 (LOCK)]*
Dynamics
[F7 (NAME EDIT)]*
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Displays the recall-only PRESET library.
Displays the USER library, which
lets you recall or store data.
Previews (auditions) the library data
that is selected in the list.
Recalls the library data that is selected in the list.
Stores settings to the library data that
is selected in the list.
Locks the library data that is selected
in the list.
Accesses the NAME EDIT popup for
editing the name of the user library
data that is selected in the list.
Closes the popup.
Compressor operations
Compressors are provided on CH1–CH48. They apply a useradjustable ratio of attenuation to input signals that exceed the
threshold level. Up to twenty-four compressors can be turned on.
fig.CompCurve.eps
(KNEE=HARD, GAIN=0.0dB, AUTO GAIN=OFF)
THRESHOLD
OUTPUT LEVEL
In the GATE/EXP LIBRARY popup, the function buttons
perform the following operations.
RATIO
* Available only for the User library.
INPUT LEVEL
For details on library operations, refer to “Library operations”
(p. 39).
fig.CompCurve.eps
INPUT SIGNAL
(RATIO=INF:1)
OUTPUT SIGNAL
RELEASE
LEVEL
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
TIME
The COMPRESSOR popup is used to perform compressor
operations.
COMPRESSOR popup
fig.PopCompGuide.eps
1 2 3
4
5
7
8
10
9
11
12
6
1.
78
KEY-IN meter
This indicates the level of the key-in signal. For stereo-linked
channels, two meters (L and R) are shown.
M-380_e1.book 79 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Dynamics
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Knob
EQ LO-MID
GR meter
This indicates the amount of gain reduction produced by the
compressor.
Compressor graph
This indicates the approximate response of the compressor.
OUT meter
This indicates the output level of the compressor. For stereolinked channels, two meters (L and R) are shown.
KEY-IN SELECT popup button
This accesses the KEY-IN SELECT popup window where you
can select the key-in signal. For stereo-linked channels, there are
two buttons (L and R). The channel currently selected as the
key-in signal is shown on the button.
THRESH knob
This adjusts the threshold level in a range of -40.0 dB–0.0 dB.
8.
RATIO knob
This adjusts the RATIO in a range of 1.00:1–INF:1(14 steps).
9.
KNEE knob
This adjusts the KNEE in a range of HARD to SOFT1–SOFT9
(ten steps). The way in which the compressor applies to the
region near the threshold level can be adjusted between steep
(HARD) and gradual (SOFT9).
EQ HI-MID
Parameter
Q
Blink
Threshold level
FREQ
Blink
ATTACK time
GAIN
Blink
RELEASE time
Q
Blink
RATIO
FREQ
Blink
KNEE
GAIN
Blink
GAIN
In the COMPRESSOR popup window, the function buttons perform
the following operations.
[F1 (OVERVIEW)
[F2 (COMP ON)]
[F3 (AUTO GAIN)]
[F4 (LIBRARY)
[F5 (PEAK CLEAR)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Accesses the COMPRESSOR
OVERVIEW popup.
Turns the compressor on/off.
Turn AUTO GAIN on/off.
Accesses the COMP LIBRARY
popup window.
Clears the level meter’s peak
hold or over indication.
Closes the popup.
p. 80
p. 81
If you turn AUTO GAIN on, the output response of the
compressor will be boosted as high as possible while
maintaining 6 dB of headroom.
10. ATTACK knob
This adjusts the ATTACK time in a range of 0.0 ms–800.0 ms.
This is the time from when the input signal exceeds the
threshold level until the compressor reaches its maximum
effect.
The compressor will narrow the dynamic range, since it reduces
the output of incoming signals that exceed the threshold level. If
AUTO GAIN is on, the upper limit of the output level when
ATTACK time is 0 ms will be boosted while maintaining 6 dB of
headroom from clip level (0 dB), thus maximizing the dynamic
range.
11. RELEASE knob
This adjusts the RELEASE time in a range of 0 ms–8000 ms. This
is the time from when the signal falls below the threshold level
until the compressor is no longer applied.
The 6 dB of headroom is maintained in order to prevent the
compressor’s output from clipping during the attack portion of
the input signal when the ATTACK time is set to a longer value.
12. GAIN knob
This adjusts the GAIN in a range of -40.0 dB–+40.0 dB. This
adjusts the output level of the compressor.
If AUTO GAIN is on, the GAIN will have an effective range of 40.0 dB–+6.0 dB. If the GAIN value is outside the effective
range, the value will be shown in red.
When the COMPRESSOR popup is displayed, the compressor
can be adjusted using the EQ area controls for the CHANNEL
EDIT section. The FREQ, and GAIN knobs for EQ LO and HI
are disabled at this time. The parameter that you can
manipulate using the EQ area is as follows.
79
Dynamics
7.
IN meter
This indicates the input level to the compressor. For stereolinked channels, two meters (L and R) are shown.
M-380_e1.book 80 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Dynamics
C.Key-in signal select buttons
Use these to select the channel that will be used as the key-in
signal.
Accessing the COMPRESSOR popup
1.
In the fader module section, press a [SEL] button to select
the desired channel.
2.
In the COMP area of the CHANNEL EDIT section, press
[DISP].
In the KEY-IN SELECT popup, the function buttons perform the
following operations.
fig.PopComp.eps
[F1 (CH 1–24)]
[F2 (CH 25–48)]
[F6 (SELECT SELF)]
Dynamics
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Displays CH1–CH24 as the key-in
signal select buttons.
Displays CH25–CH48 as the key-in
signal select buttons.
Selects the channel itself as its own
key-in signal.
Closes the popup.
2.
Press [F1 (CH 1–24)] or [F2 (CH 25–48)] to view the desired
key-in signal select buttons.
3.
Move the cursor to the desired key-in signal select button,
and press [ENTER] to select it.
4.
Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup.
The COMPRESSOR popup will appear.
Selecting the key-in signal for the
compressor
If you want to use the channel itself as its own key-in signal,
press [F6 (SELECT SELF)].
fig.CompKeyInFlow.eps
FILTER
GATE
Listing the COMPRESSOR states
COMP
1.
To Comp
KEY-IN
Access the COMPRESSOR popup.
fig.PopComp.eps
Comp
KEY-IN
The key-in signal used by the compressor is taken from immediately
after the gate of CH1–CH48.
To select the key-in signal, use the KEY-IN SELECT popup.
1.
Move the cursor to the KEY-IN SELECT popup button, and
press [ENTER].
The KEY-IN SELECT popup will appear.
fig.PopKeyInguide2.eps
A
B
C
2.
Press [F1 (OVERVIEW)] to access the COMPRESSOR
OVERVIEW popup.
fig.ScrCompOverviewGuide.eps
A
A.Current key indication
This indicates the current key.
B.Assigned dynamics indication
This indicates the dynamics to which the KEY-IN SELECT
popup applies.
80
B
A.Overview
This shows the overall compressor status for CH1–CH48.
M-380_e1.book 81 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Dynamics
fig.ScrCompOverviewGuide2.eps
Using the compressor library
a
b
You can recall compressor settings from the library, or store the
current compressor settings in the library.
c
The COMP LIBRARY popup is used to perform compressor library
operations.
d
e
1.
Access the COMPRESSOR popup.
2.
Press [F4 (LIBRARY)] to access the COMP LIBRARY popup.
fig.PopCompLibGuide.eps
a.Channel number
b.ON switch
Turns the compressor on/off.
A
B
Dynamics
c.Compressor graph
Shows the approximate response of the compressor.
d.GR meter
Shows the amount of gain reduction for the compressor.
e.THR knob
Adjusts the threshold level of the compressor in a range of 40.0 dB–0.0 dB.
B.COMP REMAIN indication
Indicates the remaining number of compressor units that can
be turned on. If this indicates 0, no further units can be turned
on.
Stereo-linked channels will use two compressor units. This
means that if the COMP REMAIN indication is 1, you won’t be
able to turn on the compressor for a stereo-linked channel. If
you enable stereo-linking for a channel when the COMP
REMAIN indication is 0, and this would cause the number of
compressor units to exceed 24, the compressor for that channel
will be turned off.
A.Channel indication
This indicates the channel to which the COMP LIBRARY
popup applies.
B.Library data list
This is a list of the library data.
In the COMP LIBRARY popup, the function buttons perform
the following operations.
Button
[F1 (PRESET)]
[F2 (USER)]
[F3 (PREVIEW)]
[F4 (RECALL)]
If you attempt to turn on more than twenty-four compressor
units, the following warning message will appear, and no
further units can be turned on.
[F5 (STORE)]*
fig.ScrCompOvMsg.eps
[F6 (LOCK)]*
[F7 (NAME EDIT)]*
*
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Function
Displays the recall-only PRESET library.
Displays the USER library, which lets
you recall or store data.
Previews (auditions) the library data
that is selected in the list.
Recalls the library data that is selected
in the list.
Stores settings to the library data that
is selected in the list.
Locks the library data that is selected
in the list.
Accesses the NAME EDIT popup for
editing the name of the user library
data that is selected in the list.
Closes the popup.
* Available only for the User library.
In the COMPRESSOR OVERVIEW popup, the function buttons
perform the following operations.
[F8 (CLOSE)]
For details on library operations, refer to “Library operations”
(p. 39).
Closes the popup.
81
M-380_e1.book 82 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Dynamics
Limiter operations (MAIN L/
R, AUX1–AUX16)
Limiters are provided on each AUX channel and MAIN L/R
channel. They attenuate the signal so that the output does not exceed
the threshold level.
2.
GR meter
This indicates the amount of gain reduction produced by the
limiter.
3.
Limiter graph
This indicates the approximate response of the limiter.
4.
OUT meter
This indicates the output level of the limiter. For stereo-linked
channels, two meters (L and R) are shown.
5.
THRESH knob
This adjusts the threshold level in a range of -40.0 dB–0.0 dB.
6.
KNEE knob
This adjusts the KNEE in a range of HARD to SOFT1–SOFT9
(ten steps). The way in which the limiter applies to the region
near the threshold level can be adjusted between steep (HARD)
and gradual (SOFT9).
7.
ATTACK knob
This adjusts the ATTACK time in a range of 0.0 ms–800.0 ms.
This is the time from when the input signal exceeds the
threshold level until the limiter reaches its maximum effect.
8.
RELEASE knob
This adjusts the RELEASE time in a range of 0 ms–8000 ms. This
is the time from when the signal falls below the threshold level
until the limiter is no longer applied.
The LIMITER popup is used to perform limiter operations.
fig.LimCurve.eps
(KNEE=HARD)
Dynamics
OUTPUT LEVEL
THRESHOLD
INPUT LEVEL
fig.LimCurve.eps
OUTPUT SIGNAL
RELEASE
LEVEL
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
When the LIMITER popup is displayed, the limiter can be
adjusted using the EQ area controls for the CHANNEL EDIT
section. The FREQ, and GAIN knobs for EQ LO and HI are
disabled at this time. The parameter that you can manipulate
using the EQ area is as follows.
TIME
LIMITER popup
1 2
Parameter
Knob
fig.PopLmtGuide.eps
3
EQ LO-MID
4
5
7
EQ HI-MID
6
8
Q
Blink
Threshold level
FREQ
Blink
ATTACK time
GAIN
Blink
RELEASE time
Q
Unlit
Disabled
FREQ
Blink
KNEE
GAIN
Unlit
Disabled
In the LIMITER popup, the function buttons perform the following
operations.
1.
IN meter
This indicates the input level of the limiter. For stereo-linked
channels, two meters (L and R) are shown.
Button
[F1 (LIMITER ON)]
[F4 (LIBRARY)
[F5 (PEAK CLEAR)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
82
Function
Turns the limiter on/off.
Accesses the LIMITER LIBRARY popup.
Clears the level meter’s peak hold or over
indication.
Closes the popup.
M-380_e1.book 83 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Dynamics
Accessing the LIMITER popup
1.
In the fader module section, press [SEL] to select the
desired channel.
2.
In the COMP area of the CHANNEL EDIT section, press
[DISP] to access the LIMITER popup.
fig.PopLmt.eps
B.Library data list
This is a list of the library data.
In the LIMITER LIBRARY popup, the function buttons perform
the following operations.
Button
[F1 (PRESET)]
[F2 (USER)]
[F3 (PREVIEW)]
[F4 (RECALL)]
[F6 (LOCK)]*
[F7 (NAME EDIT)]*
Using the limiter library
You can recall limiter settings from the library, or store the current
limiter settings in the library.
The LIMITER LIBRARY popup is used to perform limiter library
operations.
1.
[F8 (CLOSE)]
* Available only for the User library.
For details on library operations, refer to “Library operations”
(p. 39).
Access the LIMITER popup.
fig.PopLmt.eps
2.
Press [F4 (LIBRARY)] to access the LIMITER LIBRARY
popup.
fig.ScrLmtLibGuide.eps
A
B
A.Channel indication
This indicates the channel to which the LIMITER LIBRARY
popup applies.
83
Dynamics
[F5 (STORE)]*
Function
Displays the recall-only PRESET library.
Displays the USER library, which lets
you recall or store data.
Previews (auditions) the library data
that is selected in the list.
Recalls the library data that is selected
in the list.
Stores settings to the library data that
is selected in the list.
Locks the library data that is selected
in the list.
Accesses the NAME EDIT popup for
editing the name of the user library
data that is selected in the list.
Closes the popup.
M-380_e1.book 84 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Four-band EQ
Four-band EQ operations
Four-band EQ is provided on each input channel, the MAIN L/R
channels, and each AUX channel.
The LO and HI bands provide shelving-type filters, and the LO-MID
and HI-MID bands provide peaking-type filters.
LEVEL
fig.EQCurve.eps
LO
LO-MID
HI-MID
HI
B.Filter type selection buttons
These buttons select one of the following filter types.
Type
HI PASS
Explanation
Passes the region higher than the specified
frequency.
Cuts the region at the specified frequency.
Passes the region at the specified frequency.
Passes the region below the specified frequency.
NOTCH
BAND PASS
LO PASS
Q
Q
GAIN
LEVEL
fig.FilterCurve.eps
HI PASS
0dB
FREQ
FREQ
FREQ
Q
FREQUENCY
FREQ
FREQUENCY
FREQ
The EQUALIZER popup is used to perform four-band EQ
operations.
Accessing the EQUALIZER popup
1.
In the fader module section, press a [SEL] button to select
the desired channel.
2.
In the EQUALIZER area of the CHANNEL EDIT section,
press [DISP].
The EQUALIZER popup will appear.
LEVEL
NOTCH
Q
FREQUENCY
FREQ
fig.PopEQGuide.eps
G
H
I
LEVEL
BAND PASS
Q
A
F
B
C
D
E
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
FREQUENCY
FREQ
LEVEL
Four-band EQ
GAIN
Filter (input channels only)
LO PASS
Q
In the EQUALIZER popup for an input channel, you can adjust
filter operations as well as four-band EQ operations.
A.OL (Overload) indicator
This indicates that the filter’s output is overloading.
Use the METER SETUP popup to specify the level at which the
overload indicator will light. For details, refer to “Editing the
meter settings” (p. 96).
84
FREQ
FREQUENCY
C.Q knob
This adjusts the filter’s Q in a range of 0.36–16. Higher values
produce a sharper curve.
D.FREQ knob
This adjusts the frequency in a range of 20 Hz–20.0 kHz.
M-380_e1.book 85 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Four-band EQ
E.FT ATT knob
This adjusts the filter’s attenuator in a range of -48.0 dB–+15.0
dB.
Normally, you should leave FT ATT at 0.0 dB. Adjust this only
when the filter is overloading.
Four-band EQ
F.EQ ATT knob
This adjusts the EQ input level in a range of -48.0 dB–+15.0 dB.
In the EQUALIZER popup, the function buttons perform the
following operations.
[F1 (FILTER ON)]*
[F2 (EQ ON)]
[F4 (LIBRARY)
[F5 (PEAK CLEAR)]
[F6 (FLAT)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Normally, you should leave EQ ATT at 0.0 dB. Adjust this only
when the four-band EQ is overloading.
Turns the filter on/off.
Turns the four-band EQ on/
off.
Accesses the EQ LIBRARY popup.
Clears the level meter’s peak
hold or over indication.
Sets the four-band EQ to flat response.
Closes the popup.
p. 86
p. 86
* CH1 - CH48 only
Four-band EQ
G.IN meter
This indicates the input level of the four-band EQ. For stereolinked channels, two meters (L and R) are shown.
H.Four-band EQ graph
This indicates the approximate response of the four-band EQ.
I.OUT meter
This indicates the output level of the four-band EQ. For stereolinked channels, two meters (L and R) are shown.
J.Q knob (LO-MID)
K.Q knob (HI-MID)
These adjust the Q of the LO-MID and HI-MID bands in a
range of 0.36–16. Higher values produce a sharper curve.
L.FREQ knob (LO)
This adjusts the center frequency of the LO band in a range of
20 Hz–1.00 kHz.
M.FREQ knob (LO-MID)
N.FREQ knob (HI-MID)
These adjust the center frequency of the LO-MID and HI-MID
bands in a range of 20 Hz–20.0 kHz.
O.FREQ knob (HI)
This adjusts the center frequency of the HI band in a range of
1.00 kHz–20.0 kHz.
P.GAIN knob (LO)
Q.GAIN knob (LO-MID)
R.GAIN knob (HI-MID)
S.GAIN knob (HI)
These adjust the gain of the LO, LO-MID, HI-MID, and HI
bands in a range of -15.0 dB–+15.0 dB.
Noise may occur when you operate the filter or four-band EQ,
but this is not a malfunction.
85
M-380_e1.book 86 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Four-band EQ
Using the EQ library
For details on library operations, refer to “Library operations”
(p. 39).
You can recall four-band EQ and filter settings from the library, or
store the current four-band EQ and filter settings to the library.
The EQ LIBRARY popup is used to perform EQ library operations.
1.
Access the EQUALIZER popup.
2.
Press [F4 (LIBRARY)] to access the EQ LIBRARY popup.
Noise may occur when you preview or recall a library item, but
this is not a malfunction.
When you store the EQ settings of the MAIN L/R channels or
an AUX channel into the User library, the default filter values
will be stored.
fig.PopEQLibGuide.eps
A
B
C
Setting the four-band EQ to a flat
state
Four-band EQ
1.
Access the EQUALIZER popup.
fig.PopEQ.eps
A.Channel indication
This indicates the channel to which the EQ LIBRARY popup
applies.
B.Library data list
This is a list of the library data.
C.Recall parameter select buttons
These select the section that will be recalled.
2.
Press [F6 (FLAT)].
fig.ScrEQFlatConf.eps
If you’re recalling to the MAIN L/R channels or AUX channels,
filter data will not be recalled.
In the EQ LIBRARY popup, the function buttons perform the
following operations.
[F1 (PRESET)]
[F2 (USER)]
[F3 (PREVIEW)]
[F4 (RECALL)]
[F5 (STORE)]*
[F6 (LOCK)]*
[F7 (NAME EDIT)]*
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Displays the recall-only PRESET library.
Displays the USER library, which
lets you recall or store data.
Previews (auditions) the selected library data.
Recalls the selected library data.
Stores settings to the selected library
data.
Locks the selected library data.
Accesses the NAME EDIT popup for
editing the name of the selected user
library data.
Closes the popup.
* Available only for the User library.
86
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the operation.
3.
Press [F8 (FLAT)]; the gain of the LO, LO-MID, HI-MID, and
HI bands will be set to 0.0 dB.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled.
M-380_e1.book 87 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
AUX send/MATRIX send
AUX send operations
The AUX sends are used to send audio signals from input channels or the MAIN L/R channels to AUX1–AUX16.
fig.InBlkSends.eps
AUX SENDS (CH1 - CH48)
MAIN AUX SOLO
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
MUTE
LR 1 2
16 L R
LR 1 2
16 L R
POST FADER
MAIN
SW
FADER PAN
4BAND
EQ
AUX SEND 1-16
SW
PRE EQ
AUX
LINK
SEND
PRE FADER
POST FADER
TO AUX
1, 3...15
PAN
SW
PRE EQ
SEND
TO AUX
2, 4...16
PRE FADER
POST FADER
AUX send/MATRIX send
MAIN AUX SOLO
fig.MainBlkSends.eps
AUX SENDS (MAIN L/R)
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
FADER BAL
4BAND
EQ
POST FADER
MUTE
OUTPUT LEVEL
GEQ
INSERT
LIMITER
AUX SEND 1-16
PRE EQ
SW
SEND
AUX
LINK
PRE FADER
POST FADER
PRE EQ
PAN
SW
TO AUX 1, 3...7
SEND
PRE FADER
POST FADER
TO AUX 2, 4...8
The AUX SENDS popup is used to perform AUX send operations.
1.
In the fader module section, press a [SEL] button to select
the desired channel.
2.
In the AUX SENDS area of the CHANNEL EDIT section,
press [DISP].
The AUX SENDS popup will appear.
fig.PopAuxSends.eps
You can use the tabs in the AUX SENDS popup to switch
between two display pages: sends to AUX1–AUX8 (SENDS 1-8)
or sends to AUX9–AUX16 (SENDS 9-16).
•
AUX sends 1–8, AUX sends 9–16
These adjust the sends from the CH to AUX. The AUX send
area is structured as follows.
fig.PopAuxSendFieldGuide.eps
A
B
C
D
E
A.AUX number and name
This indicates the AUX channel number and name.
B.Send level bar
This adjusts the send level to AUX in a range of -Inf dB–+10.0
dB.
87
M-380_e1.book 88 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
AUX send/MATRIX send
The color of the send level bar indicates the send point or the
status of the send switch, as follows.
Color of the
send level bar
Blue
Green
Gray
Status
PRE EQ or PRE FADER send point
POST FADER send point
Send switch is off
C.ON button
This turns the send switch on/off. The send switch turns the
signal from the channel to AUX on/off.
Setting all AUX send points in a
single operations
1.
Press the [SEL] button of any channel CH1–48 to select an
input channel.
2.
In the CHANNEL EDIT section’s AUX SENDS area, press
[DISP] to access the AUX SENDS popup.
fig.ScrAuxSends.eps
AUX send/MATRIX send
D.send point select buttons
These select the point from which the CH signal is sent to
AUX, from the following choices.
PRE EQ
PRE FD
POST FD
Send from the pre-EQ point.
Send from the pre-fader point.
Send from the post-fader point
E.AUX LINK switch
This turns linking of adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered
AUX channels on/off. If this is on, the adjacent AUX channels
will be linked.
3.
Press [F6 (ALL CH POINTS)] to access the ALL CH SEND
POINTS popup.
fig.ScrSendPoints.eps
If AUX is stereo-linked, the following parameters will be
shown for the odd-numbered AUX send.
fig.PopAuxSendField2Guide.eps
a
b
a.AUX pan slider
A
This adjusts the left/right panning of the signal sent to the
stereo-linked AUX channels in a range of L63–R63.
A.Send point select buttons 1–16
These buttons select the send point for AUX1–AUX16 from the
following choices.
b.PAN LINK button (input channels only)
This turns the PAN LINK switch on/off. If PAN LINK is on,
the pan from the channel to MAIN L/R will be linked with
the pan from the channel to the stereo-linked AUX channels.
In the AUX SENDS popup, the function buttons perform the
following operations.
Button
[F1 (SENDS 1-8)]
[F2 (SENDS 9-16)]
[F3 (ALL ON)
[F4 (ALL OFF)
[F5 (UNITY)
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Function
Displays the sends to AUX1–AUX8.
Displays the sends to AUX9–AUX16.
Turns on all send switches for each send field.
Turns off all send switches for each
send field.
Sets the send level to 0.0 dB for the send
field at the cursor location.
Closes the popup.
Selection
Explanation
Keep
Maintains the current setting.
PRE EQ
Specifies pre-EQ.
PRE FD
Specifies pre-fader.
POST FD
Specifies post-fader.
4.
Use the send point select buttons to select the desired send
point.
5.
Press [F8 (OK)]; the AUX send points you selected in step 4
will be assigned for all channels CH1–CH48 in a single
operation, and the popup will close.
Pressing [F7 (CANCEL)] will cancel the operation and close the
popup.
When the LCR SYSTEM is turned on, a send to AUX used as
MAIN C is displayed as "MAIN C," and no operation is
possible.
88
M-380_e1.book 89 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
AUX send/MATRIX send
MATRIX send operations
The MATRIX sends are used to send audio signals from AUX1–AUX16 or MAIN L/R to MATRIX1–MATRIX8.
ffig.OutBlkMtxSends.eps
MATRIX SENDS (AUX 1-16, MAIN L/R)
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
POST FADER
FADER BAL
MUTE
4BAND
EQ
OUTPUT LEVEL
GEQ
INSERT
LIMITER
MATRIX SEND 1-8
PRE EQ
MTX
LINK
SW SEND
PRE FADER
PAN
POST FADER
TO MTX 1, 3...7
SW SEND
TO MTX 2, 4...8
1.
2.
In the fader module section, press a [SEL] button to select
the desired channel.
Select from AUX1–AUX16 or MAIN L/R.
In the AUX SENDS area of the CHANNEL EDIT section,
press [DISP].
The MATRIX SENDS popup will appear.
D.MATRIX LINK switch
This turns linking of adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered
MATRIX channels on/off. If this is on, the adjacent MATRIX
channels will be linked.
If MATRIX is stereo-linked, the following parameters will be
shown for the odd-numbered MATRIX send.
fig.PopMtxSendField2Guide.eps
a
fig.PopMtxSendFieldGuide.epsˆ
A
B
C D
E
a.MATRIX pan slider
This adjusts the left/right panning of the signal send to the
stereo-linked MATRIX channels in a range of L63–R63.
E.Send point select buttons
These select the point from which the AUX or MAIN signal is
sent to MATRIX, from the following choices.
A.MATRIX number and name
This indicates the MATRIX channel number and name.
B.Send level bar
This adjusts the send level to MATRIX in a range of -Inf dB–
+10.0 dB.
The color of the send level bar indicates the send point or the
status of the send switch, as follows.
Color of the
send level bar
Blue
Green
Gray
Status
PRE EQ or PRE FADER send point
POST FADER send point
Send switch is off
PRE EQ
PRE FD
POST FD
Send from the pre-EQ point.
Send from the pre-fader point.
Send from the post-fader point.
In the MATRIX SENDS popup, the function buttons perform
the following operations.
Button
[F3 (ALL ON)
[F4 (ALL OFF)
[F5 (UNITY)
[F7( MTX SENDS)]
[F7( AUX SENDS)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Function
Turns on all send switches for each
send field.
Turns off all send switches for
each send field.
Sets the send level to 0.0 dB for the
send field at the cursor location.
Switch to the MATRIX SENDS
popup or the AUX SENDS popup.
This exists only for the MAIN L/R
channel.
Closes the popup.
C.ON button
This turns the send switch on/off. The send switch turns the
signal to MATRIX on/off.
89
AUX send/MATRIX send
The MATRIX SENDS popup is used to perform AUX send
operations.
M-380_e1.book 90 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Input/output patchbay
Default settings of the
input/output patchbay
Default settings of the input
patchbay
When the M-380 is in its default state, the input patch bay is set as
follows.
Patchbay operations
You can change the settings of the input/output patchbays. Use the
PATCHBAY screen to perform patchbay operations.
Accessing the PATCHBAY screen
1.
In the setup section of the top panel, press [PATCHBAY].
The PATCHBAY screen will appear.
fig.ScrPatchGuide.eps
A
Input/output patchbay
Input channel
CH1–CH16
CH17–CH32
CH33–CH40
CH41–CH42
CH43–CH44
CH45–CH46
CH47–CH48
Patching of the effect outputs and the output from the USB
memory recorder is done in the EFFECTS screen and the
RECORDER screen, respectively. For details, refer to “Effect
input/output settings” (p. 100) and “Specifying the output
destination for the USB memory recorder” (p. 143).
Default settings of the output
patchbay
When the M-380 is in its default state, the output patchbay is set as
follows.
Output port
REAC A OUT1–OUT6
REAC A OUT7–OUT8
REAC B OUT1–OUT6
REAC B OUT7–OUT8
CONSOLE OUT1–OUT6
CONSOLE OUT7–OUT8
DIGITAL OUT
B
Input port
REAC A IN1–IN16
REAC B IN1–IN16
CONSOLE IN1–IN8
FX3 OUT L, R
FX4 OUT L, R
RECORDER L, R
STEREO IN L, R
Output
AUX1–AUX6
MAIN L, R
AUX9–AUX14
MAIN L, R
AUX1–AUX6
MONITOR L, R
MONITOR L, R
C
A.Current Assign indication
For the input patchbay, this indicates the physical input
source that is patched to the channel at the cursor location.
For the output patchbay, this indicates the channel that is
patched to the physical output at the cursor location.
B.Device indication
This indicates the input/output unit that is connected to the
REAC port currently selected by the function buttons, or
indicates the M-380 itself.
C.Patchbay grid
This grid lets you make patchbay settings.
fig.ScrPatGridGuide.eps
b
a
c
d
a.Channel indication
This indicates the channel number and name.
90
M-380_e1.book 91 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Input/output patchbay
b.Jack indication
This indicates the jack number. For the input patchbay, this
also indicates the signal level at the input jack.
The color indicates the signal level as follows.
Color
Black
Green
Yellow
Red
Input patchbay operations
Editing the input patching
Level
Below -48 dB
Between -48 dB and -18 dB
Between -18 dB and 0 dB
Above 0 dB
1.
Access the PATCHBAY screen.
fig.ScrPatchIn1608.eps
c.Patch symbol
A patch symbol is shown where the currently patched
channel and jack intersect. To change the patching, move the
cursor to the location where the desired channel and jack
intersect, and press [ENTER].
2.
Press [F1 (INPUT)] to access the INPUT tab.
3.
d.Unavailable jack area
The number area is shown in gray for jacks that cannot be
used with the currently connected input/output unit.
Press [F3 (REAC A)], [F4 (REAC B)], or [F5 (CONSOLE)] to
select the desired location for the input jack.
4.
Move the cursor to the intersection of the desired channel
and jack, and press [ENTER].
fig.ScrPatchInChgConf.eps
The function buttons perform the following operations.
[F1 (INPUT)]
[F2 (OUTPUT)]
[F3 (REAC A)]
[F4 (REAC B)]
[F5 (CONSOLE)]
[F6 (LIBRARY)
Displays the INPUT tab,
where you can set the input
patch bay.
Displays the OUTPUT tab,
where you can set the output
patchbay.
Allows you to make patch
bay settings for the REAC A
input jacks.
Allows you to make patch
bay settings for the REAC B
input jacks.
Allows you to make patch
bay settings for the M-380’s
rear panel input/output
jacks, and for internal ports
such as the effect output and
the USB memory recorder
output.
Accesses the IN PATCHBAY
LIBRARY or OUT PATCHBAY LIBRARY popup.
p. 91
p. 92
If an input port is already patched to the channel, a message
will ask you to confirm the input patching change.
Press [F8 (ASSIGN)] to change the input patching.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the input patching change will be
cancelled.
If the “PATCHBAY CHANGE” item in the CONFIRMATION
section of User Preference (p. 155) is unselected, no confirmation
message will appear in step 4.
If you attempt to patch a CONSOLE IN that an EXT FX is using,
a caution message such as the following will appear.
fig.ScrInPatchExtFx.eps
p. 92
p. 93
Press [F8 (DISABLE)] to disable the corresponding EXT FX and
continue with the patching change.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the patching change will be
cancelled.
A maximum of 40 input jacks each can be handled for the REAC
A port and the REAC B port, respectively.
91
Input/output patchbay
You can make user preference settings to specify whether or not
a confirmation message appears when you attempt to change
the patching. For details, refer to “Editing other user
preferences” (p. 155).
M-380_e1.book 92 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Input/output patchbay
Using the input patchbay library
The input patchbay library lets you store the current input patchbay
settings for later recall.
The INPUT PATCHBAY LIBRARY popup is used to perform input
patchbay library operations.
1.
Access the PATCHBAY screen.
Output patchbay operations
Editing the output patching
1.
Access the PATCHBAY screen.
ig.ScrPatchIn1608.eps
fig.ScrPatchIn1608.eps
Input/output patchbay
2.
2.
Press [F1 (INPUT)] to access the INPUT tab.
3.
Press [F6 (LIBRARY)] to access the INPUT PATCHBAY
LIBRARY popup.
Press [F2 (OUTPUT)] to access the OUTPUT tab.
fig.ScrPatchOut1608.eps
fig.ScrInPatLibGuide.eps
A
3.
Press [F3 (REAC A)], [F4 (REAC B)], or [F5 (CONSOLE)] to
select the desired location for the output jack.
4.
Move the cursor to the intersection of the desired channel
and jack, and press [ENTER].
fig.ScrPatchOutChgConf.eps
A.Library data list
This lists the library data.
The function buttons perform the following operations.
[F1 (PRESET)]
[F2 (USER)]
[F4 (RECALL)]
[F5 (STORE)]*
[F6 (LOCK)]*
[F7 (NAME EDIT)]*
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Displays the recall-only PRESET library.
Displays the USER library, which lets
you recall or store data.
Recalls the library data that is selected
in the list.
Stores settings to the library data that
is selected in the list.
Locks the library data that is selected
in the list.
Accesses the NAME EDIT popup for
editing the name of the user library
data that is selected in the list.
Closes the popup.
* Available only for the User library.
For details on library operations, refer to “Library operations”
(p. 39).
92
If a channel is already patched to the output port, a message
will ask you to confirm the output patching change.
Press [F8 (ASSIGN)] to change the output patching.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)] the output patching change will be
cancelled.
If the “PATCHBAY CHANGE” item in the CONFIRMATION
section of User Preference (p. 155) is unselected, no
confirmation message will appear in step 4.
M-380_e1.book 93 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Input/output patchbay
3.
If you attempt to patch to a CONSOLE OUT that an EXT FX is
using, a caution message such as the following will appear.
Press [F6 (LIBRARY)] to access the OUTPUT PATCHBAY
LIBRARY popup.
fig.ScrOutPatLibGuide.eps
A
fig.ScrOutPatchExtFx.eps
Press [F8 (DISABLE)] to disable the corresponding EXT FX and
continue with the patching change.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the patching change will be
cancelled.
A.Library data list
This lists the library data.
A maximum of eight output jacks can be handled by the REAC
A port. In contrast, a maximum of forty output jacks can be
handled by the REAC B port.
LCR SYSTEM OFF
[F1 (PRESET)]
[F2 (USER)]
[F4 (RECALL)]
LCR SYSTEM ON
[F5 (STORE)]*
[F6 (LOCK)]*
fig.PB_Guide.eps
Using the output patchbay library
The output patchbay library lets you store the current output
patchbay settings for later recall.
The OUTPUT PATCHBAY LIBRARY popup is used to perform
output patchbay library operations.
1.
Access the PATCHBAY screen.
2.
Press [F2 (OUTPUT)] to access the output patchbay.
[F7 (NAME EDIT)]*
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Displays the recall-only PRESET library.
Displays the USER library, which lets
you recall or store data.
Recalls the library data that is selected
in the list.
Stores settings to the library data that
is selected in the list.
Locks the library data that is selected
in the list.
Accesses the NAME EDIT popup for
editing the name of the user library
data that is selected in the list.
Closes the popup.
* Available only for the User library.
For details on library operations, refer to “Library operations”
(p. 39).
fig.ScrPatchOut1608.eps
93
Input/output patchbay
The channel that is “MAIN MONO” when LCR SYSTEM is off
will change to “MAIN C” when LCR SYSTEM is on.
The function buttons perform the following operations.
M-380_e1.book 94 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Metering
About the meters
Viewing the meters
The M-380 provides meters on the top panel and in the screen.
Here we will explain the METER screen, which shows the levels of
the channels.
METER tab
Accessing the METER screen
1.
To view the meters for all channels, use the METER tab of the
METER screen.
fig.ScrMeterGuide.eps
Press the top panel [METER] button.
The METER screen will appear.
2
fig.ScrMeter.eps
1
4
3
Metering
6
1.
AUX/MAIN/MATRIX meters
These indicate the level and fader position for AUX1–AUX16,
MATRIX1–MATRIX8, MONITOR L/R, and MAIN L/R.
2.
AUX/MAIN/MATRIX meter point
This indicates the point at which the AUX/MAIN/MATRIX
meters are detecting the level.
3.
CH meters
This indicates the level and fader position for CH1–CH48.
4.
CH meter point
This indicates the point at which the CH meters are detecting
the level.
5.
Panel layer indication
The frame indicates the channel layer that is selected in the
layer section of the top panel.
The content shown in the METER screen changes when you
switch tabs.
In the METER screen, the function buttons perform the
following operations.
[F1 (METER)]
[F2 (LAYER VIEW)]
[F3 (Analyzer)]
[F4 (NAME LIST)]
[F5 (PEAK CLEAR)]
[F6 (METER SETUP)]
Accesses the METER tab,
which shows the levels of
all channels.
Accesses the LAYER
VIEW tab, which shows
the levels of the same
channels as the top panel
channel layer.
Displays the Analyzer tab,
which shows the 31-band
realtime analyzer.
Displays the NAME LIST
tab, which lists the channel
names and group names.
Clears the level meter’s
peak hold or over indications.
Accesses the METER SETUP popup.
5
The panel layer indication is not shown if the USER layer is
selected.
p. 96
6.
Cursor
This indicates the currently selected channel. You can use the
value dial to adjust the fader of the channel at the cursor
location.
When you press [SEL] to change the selected channel, the cursor
in the screen will move. When you move the cursor in the
screen, the [SEL] indication of the top panel will likewise move.
If the “CHANNEL DISPLAY follows CH SELECT button” item
in the CHANNEL SELECT section of User Preference (p. 155) is
selected, pressing a [SEL] will cause the CHANNEL DISPLAY
screen of that channel to appear.
94
M-380_e1.book 95 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Metering
Viewing the channel strip of
the channel layer
You can view the channel strip of all of the input channels or output
channels in the current layer of the top panel.
To view the channel strips, use the LAYER VIEW tab of the METER
screen.
2.
PAD button (CH1–CH48)
This is an on/off switch for the pad of the input jack that is
patched to the channel. If this is on, the input sensitivity of the
preamp will be lowered by 20 dB.
3.
ø (phase) button (CH1–CH48)
This inverts the phase of the audio signal. The phase will be
inverted if this is on, and will be normal if this is off.
4.
Preamp gain knob
This adjusts the preamp gain for the input jack patched to the
channel, in a range of -65 dBu– -10 dBu (or a range of -45 dBu–
+10 dBu if PAD is on).
LAYER VIEW tab
fig.ScrMeterLayerGuide.eps
1
It is felt that it does not change smoothly when it coordinates
the preamp gain, but it is not trouble. In addition, some noises
come out, but it is not trouble.
5.
G meter (CH1–CH48),
C meter (CH1–CH48) / L meter (AUX1–AUX16)
The G meter indicates the amount of gain reduction produced
by the gate/expander.
2
1.
Channel strip
This shows the level and principal parameters of the channels.
2.
Meter point indication
This shows the point at which the level is detected for the CH
meters and AUX/MAIN/MATRIX meters.
6.
Four-band EQ graph
This indicates the approximate response of the four-band EQ.
7.
S button
This turns SOLO on/off for the channel.
8.
M button
This turns MUTE on/off for the channel.
9.
Meter
This indicates the level of the channel.
Channel strip operations
10. Pan/balance knob
This adjusts the pan of the channel. For stereo-linked AUX
channels and MATRIX channels, this adjusts the left/right
output balance.
You can move the cursor to the buttons, knobs, and faders of the
channel strip, and use the value dial to edit them.
11. Fader
This adjusts the fader of the channel.
fig.ScrMeterStripGuide.eps
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1.
+48V button (CH1–CH48)
This turns +48V phantom power on/off for the input jack that is
patched to the channel.
95
Metering
The C meter indicates the amount of gain reduction produced
by the compressor, and the L meter indicates the amount of
gain reduction produced by the limiter.
M-380_e1.book 96 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Metering
E.HOLD TIME knob
This sets the duration that the meter’s peak hold or OVER
indication will stay lit, in a range of 1 sec–4 sec or
CONTINUE.
Meter peak hold is enabled only when the PEAK HOLD
button is on.
Editing the meter settings
In the METER SETUP popup you can change the level detection
point of the meter, and make peak hold settings.
Accessing the METER SETUP popup
1.
If CONTINUE is selected, the indication will remain until you
execute the PEAK CLEAR operation (by pressing a function
button) in the METER screen, etc.
Press [METER] to access the METER screen.
fig.ScrMeter.eps
In the METER SETUP popup, the function buttons perform the
following operations.
Closes the popup.
Metering
[F8 (CLOSE)]
2.
The METERING POINT setting you make in the METER SETUP
popup will apply to the top panel meters, the meters in the
METER screen, the channel meters in the CHANNEL DISPLAY
screen, the MONITOR screen, and the meters in the
TALKBACK/OSC screen.
Press [F6 (METER SETUP)] to access the METER SETUP
popup.
fig.ScrMeterSetupGuide.eps
A
B
D
Using the analyzer
1.
Press [METER] to access the METER screen.
fig.ScrMeter.eps
C
E
A.CH METERING POINT selection buttons
Use these to select the level detection point for the CH meters.
You can also make the setting for changing the level detection
point from a USER button (p. 154).
B.AUX/MAIN/MATRIX METERING POINT selection buttons
Use these to select the level detection point for the AUX/
MAIN/MATRIX meters.
2.
Press [F3 (Analyzer)] to access the Analyzer tab.
fig.ScrMeterRTA_Guide.eps
B
C
D
E
F
If you select PRE EQ, the level at the pre-fader position will be
shown for MATRIX channels.
A
You can also make the setting for changing the level detection
point from a USER button (p. 154).
C.OVER Lev knob
This adjusts the level at which the OVER indication of the
meter will light, in a range of -18 dB–0 dB.
D.PEAK HOLD button
This turns the meter’s peak hold function on/off.
96
A.Analyzer display
This shows a 31-band realtime analyzer and the source level.
M-380_e1.book 97 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Metering
B.SRC (source)
This selects the source for the analyzer.
C.WINDOW
Here you can move the analyzer’s vertical display region in a
range of 0 dB – -48 dB.
D.AVG (average)
Here you can select the averaging method for the analyzer.
AVG value
Explanation
OFF
Averaging will not be performed.
NRM
Averages evenly by the number specified in
AVG TIMES.
EXP
Recent times will be weighted more heavily in
the calculation.
Listing the channel names
and group names
NAME LIST tab
fig.ScrMeterList_Guide.eps
1
E.AVG TIMES (average time)
This specifies the value (1–128) by which the analyzer’s
display will be averaged.
7. Use SRC to select the source for the analyzer.
• If the analyzer display is too large or too small, use WINDOW
to adjust the vertical display area.
• As desired, use AVG and AVG TIMES to make settings for
averaging.
1.
Name list
This lists the names of each channel and group.
Metering
F.PEAK HOLD button
When this is on, the analyzer’s peaks will be held.
The Hold time is specified by the HOLD TIME setting of the
METER SETUP popup.
FIG.List_Compo_Guide.eps
Name Link indication
•Name
This is the name of the channel or group. If you move the
cursor to the name of a channel, that channel will become the
selected channel.
•Link indication
If an input channel is selected, its direct out will be the source
for the analyzer.
If an output channel is selected, its output will be the source for
the analyzer.
If you select MONITOR L or MONITOR R, you can use [SOLO]
to conveniently switch the channel that’s being sent to the
analyzer.
If the M-380 and M-380RCS (software that remotely controls the
M-380 from a PC) attempt to display the analyzer
simultaneously, display on the M-380 will take priority. In this
case, the analyzer levels will not be shown in the M-380RCS
window.
fig.RCSOccupyRTA.eps
This indicates the link status of the channel.To change the
link status of a channel, move the cursor to the name of the
desired channel, and press [F5 (LINK)] to turn link on/off.
In the NAME LIST tab, the function buttons perform the following
tasks.
Button
Operation
[F1 (METER)]
Displays the METER tab, which shows the
levels of all channels.
[F2 (LAYER VIEW)]
Displays the LAYER VIEW tab, which shows
the levels of the channels in the currently selected channel layer.
[F3 (Analyzer)]
Displays the Analyzer tab, which shows the
31-band realtime analyzer.
[F4 (NAME LIST)]
Displays the NAME LIST tab, which lists the
channel names and group names.
[F5 (LINK)] *1
Turns link on/off for the channel at the cursor location.
[F6 (NAME EDIT)]
Accesses the NAME EDIT popup, where you
can edit the name at the cursor location.
[F7 (COPY)] *2
Accesses the COPY popup, with the channel
at the cursor location as the copy-source.
*1 This is unavailable if the cursor is at MAIN L, MAIN R, DCA1–8, or
MUTE1–8.
*2 This is unavailable if the cursor is at DCA1–8 or MUTE1–8.
97
M-380_e1.book 98 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Effects and 31-band GEQ
The M-380 provides four effects (FX1–FX4) and four 31-band GEQ processors (GEQ1–GEQ4).
The EFFECTS screen is used to operate the effects and 31-band GEQs.
Accessing the EFFECTS screen
1.
Press the top panel [EFFECTS] button.
The EFFECTS screen will appear.
fig.ScrFxRack.eps
You can switch tabs to change the content shown in the EFFECTS screen.
Effects and 31-band GEQ
In the EFFECTS screen, the function buttons perform the following operations.
[F1 (FX 1–4)]
[F2 (GEQ 1–4)]
[F3 (EXT FX 1–4)]
[F4 (EXT FX 5–8)]
Accesses the FX 1–4 tab.
Accesses the GEQ 1–4 tab.
Accesses the EXT FX 1–4 tab.
Accesses the EXT FX 5–8 tab.
p. 99
p. 104
p. 112
p. 112
About effects
fig.EffectDia.eps
FX
INPUT
SELECT
CH 1 FX INSERT OUT
IN LEVEL
FX 1
CH 48 FX INSERT OUT
FX
OUTPUT
SELECT
OUT LEVEL
To CH 1 FX INSERT IN
To CH 48 FX INSERT IN
EFFECT
AUX 1 FX INSERT OUT
AUX 16 FX INSERT OUT
To AUX 1 FX INSERT IN
31 BAND GEQ
To AUX 16 FX INSERT IN
31 BAND GEQ
MATRIX 1 FX INSERT OUT
MATRIX 8 FX INSERT OUT
MAIN L FX INSERT OUT
MAIN R FX INSERT OUT
To MATRIX 1 FX INSERT IN
FX 2
Same as the above
FX 3
Same as the above
AUX 1 OUT
FX 4
AUX 16 OUT
Same as the above
To MATRIX 8 FX INSERT IN
To MAIN L FX INSERT IN
To MAIN R FX INSERT IN
To INPUT PATCHBAY
The M-380 contains four internal effects (FX1–FX4), each of which allows you to select from 11 different effect types including reverb and delay, or
to use them as a dual 31-band GEQ.
You can use effects by inserting them into a channel, or in a send/return configuration using an AUX channel in combination with an input
channel as the FX return.
The FX 1–4 tab of the EFFECTS screen is used to perform effect operations.
98
M-380_e1.book 99 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Effects and 31-band GEQ
•
FX 1–4 tab
Dual mono
fig.ScrFxTypeMM.eps
fig.ScrFxRack.eps
This allows the effect to be used as two monaural effects. These
effects are used mainly for insertion in a channel.
•
Stereo-in/Stereo-out
fig.ScrFxTypeSS.eps
This is a stereo-input/stereo-output type effect. These effects
can be inserted into a stereo channel, or used in a send/return
configuration with stereo-linked AUX channels.
•
FX1–FX4
5.
OUT meters
These indicate the output level from the effect.
6.
LR LINK button
This links the parameters of the effect between the L and R
sides.
fig.ScrFxRackGuide.eps
1
2
3
4
5 6 7
8
The following effect types support LR LINK.
• Dual GEQ
This area indicates the status of FX1–FX4. It is organized as follows.
Effect number indication
This indicates the effect number.
2.
FX INSERT/SOURCE SELECT popup button
This selects the input source for the effect. The current input
source is shown on the button. When you move the cursor to
the button and press [ENTER], the FX INSERT/SOURCE
SELECT popup will appear. This can be set separately for the L
and R channels.
If you’ve selected insertion into a channel in the FX INSERT/
SOURCE SELECT popup, the channel insert will be used as
both the input and output of the effect. In this case, the
corresponding FX DESTINATION SELECT button will be
unavailable.
3.
IN meters
These indicate the input level to the effect.
4.
Effect name indication
The upper line shows the library name, and the lower line
shows the effect type name. The icon indicates the input/output
configuration for the effect.
•
Mono-in/Stereo-out
fig.ScrFxTypeMS.eps
This is a monaural-input/stereo-output type effect. These
effects are used mainly in a send/return configuration.
If you specify two input sources, the two inputs will be mixed
to mono before being input.
• P.SHIFTER x2
• CH STRIP x2
• SDE-3000 x2
• SPH-323 x2
7.
BYPASS L, R buttons
These buttons bypass the effect. When these are on, the effect
will be bypassed, and the input signal will be “thru-ed” to the
output. Separate buttons are provided for the L and R channels.
You can also make the setting for switching bypass on or off
from a USER button (p. 154).
8.
FX DESTINATION SELECT popup buttons
These select the output destination for the effect. The current
output source is shown on the button. When you move the
cursor to the button and press [ENTER], the FX DESTINATION
SELECT popup will appear. This can be set separately for the L
and R channels.
If you select insertion into a channel in the FX INSERT/
SOURCE SELECT popup, the corresponding FX
DESTINATION SELECT button will be unavailable. If you want
to re-enable the FX DESTINATION SELECT button, select an
input source other than Insert in the corresponding FX
INSERT/SOURCE SELECT popup.
The function buttons specific to the FX 1–4 tab have the following
operations.
[F5 (EDIT FX1)]
[F6 (EDIT FX2)]
[F7 (EDIT FX3)]
[F8 (EDIT FX4)]
Accesses the FX EDIT popup (p. 102)
Accesses the FX EDIT popup (p. 102)
Accesses the FX EDIT popup (p. 102)
Accesses the FX EDIT popup (p. 102)
for FX1.
for FX2.
for FX3.
for FX4.
99
Effects and 31-band GEQ
1.
• DELAY x2
M-380_e1.book 100 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Effects and 31-band GEQ
In the FX INSERT/SOURCE SELECT popup, the function
buttons perform the following operations.
Effect input/output settings
The FX INSERT/SOURCE SELECT popup and the FX
DESTINATION SELECT popup are used to select the input source
and output destination for the effect.
[F1 (CH 1–24 INSERT)]
[F2 (CH 25–48 INSERT)]
Accessing the FX INSERT/SOURCE
SELECT popup
1.
[F3 (BUS INSERT)]
Access the EFFECTS screen, and display the FX 1–4 tab.
[F4 (AUX OUT)]
fig.ScrFxRack.eps
FX INSERT/SOURCE SELECT popup button
[F6 (SELECT NONE)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Displays CH1–CH24 as the insertdestination channel select buttons.
Displays CH25–CH48 as the insert-destination channel select buttons.
Displays AUX1–AUX16,
MATRIX1–MATRIX8, MAIN L/R
and MAIN C as the insert-destination channel select buttons.
Displays AUX1–AUX16 as the input-source channel select buttons.
Clears the input-source selection.
Closes the popup.
Accessing the FX DESTINATION
SELECT popup
1.
Access the EFFECTS screen, and display the FX 1–4 tab.
fig.ScrFXOutSelBtn.eps
Effects and 31-band GEQ
FX DESTINATION SELECT popup button
2.
Move the cursor to the FX INSERT/SOURCE SELECT popup
button L or R of the desired effect, and press [ENTER].
The FX INSERT/SOURCE SELECT popup will appear.
fig.ScrFXInSelGuide.eps
C
A
B
2.
Move the cursor to the FX DESTINATION SELECT popup
button L or R of the desired effect, and press [ENTER].
The FX DESTINATION SELECT popup will appear.
fig.ScrFXOutSelGuide.eps
B
A
C
A.Applicable effect indication
This indicates the effect to which the FX INSERT/SOURCE
SELECT popup applies.
B.Insert-destination/Input-source channel select buttons
Here you can select the insert-destination channel or the
input-source channel for the effect.
C.Current insert-destination/input-source channel
indication
This indicates the current insert-destination channel or the
input-source channel for the effect.
100
A.Applicable effect indication
This indicates the effect to which the FX DESTINATION
SELECT popup applies.
M-380_e1.book 101 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Effects and 31-band GEQ
B.Output channel select buttons
These select the output-destination channel for the effect.
4.
Move the cursor to the AUX15 input-source channel select
button, and press [ENTER] to select it.
C.Current output-destination indication
This indicates the current output-destination channel.
5.
Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup.
6.
In the same way as you did in steps 1 through 5, select
AUX15 as the input source for the R side of FX3.
In the FX DESTINATION SELECT popup, the function buttons
perform the following operations.
[F1 (CH 1–24)]
[F2 (CH 25–48)]
[F6 (SELECT NONE)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Displays CH1–CH24 as the outputdestination channel select buttons.
Displays CH25–CH48 as the output-destination channel select buttons.
Clears the output-destination selection.
Closes the popup.
Specifying the effect return channel
1.
Access the EFFECTS screen, and press [F1 (FX 1–4)] to
display the FX 1–4 tab.
2.
Move the cursor to the FX DESTINATION SELECT popup
button L for FX3, and press [ENTER].
The FX DESTINATION SELECT popup will appear.
3.
Press [F2 (CH 25–48)] to access the CH 25–48 tab.
fig.ScrFXOutSel2.eps
Using an effect via send/return
Effects such as reverb and delay are typically used in a send/return
configuration.
Specifying the effect input source
1.
Access the EFFECTS screen, and press [F1 (FX 1–4)] to
display the FX 1–4 tab.
2.
Move the cursor to the FX INSERT/SOURCE SELECT popup
button L for FX3, and press [ENTER].
fig.ScrFXInSel.eps
4.
Move the cursor to the CH41 output-destination select
button, and press [ENTER] to select it.
5.
Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup.
6.
In the same way as you did in steps 1 through 5, select
CH42 as the output destination for the R side of FX3.
Inserting an effect into a channel
Here we will explain the procedure for inserting the L side of FX1
into CH1.
1.
Access the EFFECTS screen, and press [F1 (FX 1–4)] to
display the FX 1–4 tab.
2.
Move the cursor to the FX INSERT/SOURCE SELECT popup
button L for FX1, and press [ENTER].
The FX INSERT/SOURCE SELECT popup will appear.
3.
Press [F1 (CH 1–24 INSERT)] to access the CH 1–24 INSERT
tab.
The FX INSERT/SOURCE SELECT popup will appear.
3.
Press [F4 (AUX OUT)] to access the AUX OUT tab.
fig.ScrFXInSel2.eps
fig.ScrFXInSel.eps
101
Effects and 31-band GEQ
Here we will explain the procedure for using FX3 as a send/return
type effect using AUX15 and CH41 and CH42.
M-380_e1.book 102 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Effects and 31-band GEQ
4.
Move the cursor to the CH1 input-source channel select
button, and press [ENTER] to select it.
5.
Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup.
[F1]–[F6]
[F6 (TEMPO)]
If you want to insert the effect into both channels of a stereolinked pair, make insert settings for both the L and R sides.
[F7 (LIBRARY)]
Editing effect parameters
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Switch the display in the effect
parameter field. The number
of tabs will depend on the effect type.
Accesses the TEMPO popup.
This exists only for delay-type
effects.
Accesses the FX LIBRARY
popup.
Closes the popup.
p. 103
p. 102
The FX EDIT popup is used to edit the effect parameters.
You can also make the setting for accessing the popup from a
USER button (p. 154).
Accessing the FX EDIT popup
1.
Access the EFFECTS screen, and press [F1 (FX 1–4)] to
display the FX 1–4 tab.
Editing effect parameters
1.
fig.ScrFxRack.eps
Access the FX EDIT popup for the desired effect.
Effects and 31-band GEQ
fig.ScrFxEdit.eps
2.
According to the FX that you want to use, press [F5 (EDIT
FX1)]–[F8 (EDIT FX4)].
The FX EDIT popup will appear.
fig.ScrFxEditGuide.eps
2.
Use [F1]–[F6] to switch between tabs to view the
parameters you want to edit.
3.
Move the cursor to the desired parameter, and use the
value dial to change the value.
4.
Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup.
Using the effect library
The effect library is used to select the effect type. You can recall effect
settings from the library, and store the current effect settings in the
library.
Effect library operations are performed in the FX LIBRARY popup.
A
1.
Access the FX EDIT popup for the desired effect.
fig.ScrFxEdit.eps
A.Effect parameter field
In this field you can edit the effect parameters. The contents of
this field will depend on the effect type.
In the FX EDIT popup, the function buttons perform the
following operations.
2.
102
Press [F7 (LIBRARY)].
The FX LIBRARY popup will appear.
M-380_e1.book 103 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Effects and 31-band GEQ
fig.ScrFxLibGuide.eps
A
B
For details on library operations, refer to “Library operations”
(p. 39).
Setting the tempo
C
From the FX EDIT popup for delay-type effects, you can access the
TEMPO popup, which lets you set the tempo used for delay-type
effects.
This tempo is used in common by FX1–FX4.
1.
Access the FX EDIT popup for a delay-type effect.
fig.ScrDelayx2.eps
D
A.Applicable effect indication
This indicates the effect to which the FX LIBRARY popup applies.
2.
Press [F6 (TEMPO)].
The TEMPO popup will appear.
Effects and 31-band GEQ
B.Library data list
This is the list of library data. If you’ve used the MODE select
buttons to select DUAL GEQ, the GEQ library (p. 109) will be
shown.
fig.ScrTempoGuide.eps
A
B
C.MODE select buttons
These select the effect mode from the following choices.
Item
EFFECT
DUAL GEQ
Explanation
Use as a conventional effect.
Use as a dual 31-band GEQ.
D.Applicable GEQ select buttons
When the effect type is dual 31-band GEQ, these buttons select
whether the A side or B side will be the target of FX LIBRARY
operations.
In the FX LIBRARY popup, the function buttons perform the
following operations.
[F1 (PRESET)]
[F2 (USER)]
[F3 (PREVIEW)]
[F4 (RECALL)]
[F5 (STORE)]*
[F6 (LOCK)]*
[F7 (NAME EDIT)]*
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Accesses the recall-only PRESET library.
Accesses the USER library, which allows you to recall or store data.
Previews (auditions) the library data
that is selected in the list.
Recalls the library data that is selected in the list.
Stores the current settings in the library item that is selected in the list.
Locks the library data that is selected
in the list.
Accesses the NAME EDIT popup,
where you can edit the name of the
user library data selected in the list.
Closes the popup.
A.TEMPO knob
Sets the tempo (BPM) in a range of 5.0–300.0.
B.SLAVE TO MIDI CLOCK select button
If this is selected, the tempo will synchronize to MIDI clock
messages received from the M-380’s rear panel MIDI
connector or USB connector. In this case, you won’t be able to
use the TEMPO knob or the tap tempo function using [F1
(TAP)] or a user button.
[F1 (TAP)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Specifies the tempo (BPM) as the average
interval at which the button is pressed
(Tap Tempo).
Closes the popup.
You can assign TAP TEMPO as a function for a user button (p.
154). This allows you to use USER [1]–[8] to enter the tempo via
tap tempo.
* Available only for the User library.
103
M-380_e1.book 104 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Effects and 31-band GEQ
About the 31-band GEQ
fig.GEQDia.eps
GEQ
INPUT
SELECT
IN LEVEL
OUT LEVEL
GEQ 1
AUX 1 GEQ INSERT OUT
To AUX 1 GEQ INSERT IN
31 BAND GEQ
AUX 16 GEQ INSERT OUT
To AUX 16 GEQ INSERT IN
GEQ 2
MATRIX 1 GEQ INSERT OUT
Same as the above
MATRIX 8 GEQ INSERT OUT
GEQ
OUTPUT
SELECT
To MATRIX 1 GEQ INSERT IN
To MATRIX 8 GEQ INSERT IN
GEQ 3
Same as the above
MAIN L GEQ INSERT OUT
MAIN R GEQ INSERT OUT
GEQ 4
Same as the above
To MAIN L GEQ INSERT IN
To MAIN R GEQ INSERT IN
The M-380 provides four 31-band GEQ processors, GEQ1–GEQ4. You can insert a 31-band GEQ processor into the MAIN L/R channel, into an
AUX channel or into an MATRIX channel.
GEQ 1–4 tab
Effects and 31-band GEQ
fig.ScrGEQRack.eps
6.
BYPASS button
This bypasses the GEQ. If this is on, the GEQ will be bypassed
and the input signal will be output without modification.
7.
LINK button
This links adjacent odd-numbered and even-numbered GEQ
processors. If they are linked, the GEQ settings will be identical.
When you activate LINK, the odd-numbered unit’s settings will
be applied to the even-numbered processor.
fig.ScrGEQRackGuide.eps
1 2
3
4
5 6
7
The function buttons specific to the GEQ 1–4 tab have the
following operations.
[F5 (EDIT GEQ1)]
[F6 (EDIT GEQ2)]
[F7 (EDIT GEQ3)]
[F8 (EDIT GEQ4)]
This shows GEQ1–GEQ4. This area is organized as follows.
1.
GEQ number indication
This indicates the GEQ number.
2.
GEQ INSERT SELECT popup button
This selects the channel into which the GEQ will be inserted.
The selected channel is shown on the button. When you move
the cursor to the button and press [ENTER], the GEQ INSERT
SELECT popup will appear.
3.
IN meter
This indicates the level of the signal being input to the GEQ.
4.
GEQ fader indication
This indicates the state of the GEQ. The GEQ cannot be
operated in this screen.
5.
OUT meter
This indicates the level of the signal being output from the GEQ.
104
Accesses the GEQ EDIT popup for GEQ1.
Accesses the GEQ EDIT popup for GEQ2.
Accesses the GEQ EDIT popup for GEQ3.
Accesses the GEQ EDIT popup for GEQ4.
p. 106
p. 106
p. 106
p. 106
M-380_e1.book 105 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Effects and 31-band GEQ
Inserting a 31-band GEQ
Use the GEQ INSERT SELECT popup to select the destination into
which you want to insert a 31-band GEQ.
Accessing the GEQ INSERT SELECT
popup
1.
Inserting the 31-band GEQ to
MAIN L/R
This section describes the procedure for inserting linked GEQ1 and
GEQ2 into the MAIN L/R channels.
1.
Access the EFFECTS screen, and press [F2 (GEQ 1–4)] to
display the GEQ 1–4 tab.
fig.ScrGEQRack.eps
Access the EFFECTS screen, and press [F2 (GEQ 1–4)] to
display the GEQ 1–4 tab.
fig.ScrGEQRack.eps
Move the cursor to the GEQ INSERT SELECT popup button
for the desired GEQ, and press [ENTER].
The GEQ INSERT SELECT popup will appear.
Move the cursor to the LINK button located at the right of
GEQ1 and GEQ2, and press [ENTER] to turn the button on.
3.
Move the cursor to the GEQ INSERT SELECT popup button
for GEQ1, and press [ENTER].
fig.ScrGEQInsSel.eps
fig.ScrGEQInsSelGuide.eps
C
A
B
The GEQ INSERT SELECT popup will appear.
A.Applicable GEQ indication
This indicates the GEQ to which the GEQ INSERT SELECT
popup applies.
4.
Move the cursor to the MAIN L insert-destination channel
select button, and press [ENTER] to select it.
5.
Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup.
6.
In the same way as you did in steps 1 through 5, select
MAIN R as the insert destination for GEQ2.
B.Insert-destination channel select buttons
These buttons select the channel into which the GEQ will be
inserted.
C.Current insert destination indication
This indicates the current insert destination.
In the GEQ INSERT SELECT popup, the function buttons
perform the following operations.
[F6 (SELECT NONE)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Clears the insert-destination selection.
Closes the popup.
105
Effects and 31-band GEQ
2.
2.
M-380_e1.book 106 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Effects and 31-band GEQ
9.
Editing the 31-band GEQ
parameters
LINK button
This links adjacent odd-numbered and even-numbered GEQ
units. If units are linked, their GEQ settings will be identical.
10. BYP button (bypass)
This bypasses the GEQ. If this is on, the GEQ will be bypassed,
and the input signal will be output without change.
The GEQ EDIT popup is used to edit the 31-band GEQ.
GEQ EDIT popup
You can also make the setting for switching bypass on or off
from a USER button (p. 154).
31-band GEQ
ffig.ScrGEQEdit_Guide.eps
2
3
4
5
6
1
7
Effects and 31-band GEQ
8
9
10
Noise may occur when you operate the GEQ faders, but this is
not a malfunction.
11
12. EQ MODE select buttons
Here you can select either 31-band GEQ or 8-band parametric
EQ.
12
13
1.
Analyzer display
This shows a 31-band realtime analyzer, and the source level.
2.
SRC (source)
This selects the source for the analyzer.
3.
4.
11. GEQ faders
For each frequency band, these adjust the amount of boost or
cut in a range of -15.0 dB – +15.0 dB.
The value of the fader you operate is shown in the sub-display
area.
WINDOW
Here you can move the analyzer’s vertical display region in a
range of 0 dB – -48 dB.
AVG (average)
Here you can select the averaging method for the analyzer.
Choice
Explanation
31-BAND GEQ
Use the EQ as a 31-band GEQ.
8-BAND PEQ
Use the EQ as an 8-band parametric EQ.
13. EQ ATT (EQ attenuator)
This adjusts the input level to the 31-band GEQ or 8-band
parametric EQ in a range of -42.0 dB – +15.0 dB.
In the GEQ EDIT popup (31-band GEQ), the function buttons
perform the following operations.
[F4 (FLAT)]
AVG value
Explanation
OFF
Averaging will not be performed.
NRM
Averages evenly by the number specified in
AVG TIMES.
EXP
Recent times will be weighted more heavily in
the calculation.
5.
AVG TIMES (average time)
This specifies the value (1–128) by which the analyzer’s display
will be averaged.
6.
PEAK HOLD button
When this is on, the analyzer’s peaks will be held.
The Hold time is specified by the HOLD TIME setting of the
METER SETUP popup.
7.
IN meter
This indicates the level of the signal input to the GEQ.
8.
OUT meter
This indicates the level of the signal output from the GEQ.
106
[F5 (LIBRARY)]
[F6 (GEQ ON FADER)]
[F7 (FADER RANGE)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Sets the 31-band GEQ to a
flat response.
Accesses the GEQ LIBRARY
popup.
Performs GEQ operations
using the faders on the top
panel.
Switches the band for performing operations using
the faders on the top panel.
Closes the popup.
p. 109
p. 108
p. 108
M-380_e1.book 107 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Effects and 31-band GEQ
8-band parametric EQ
For the 8-band parametric EQ, you can switch the analyzer between
visible and hidden. Use [F6 (Analyzer)] to show or hide the analyzer.
fig.ScrPEQEdit_Guide.eps
fig.ScrGEQEdit_PEQ_Graph.eps
1
2
1.
EQ graph
This indicates the approximate characteristics of the 8-band
parametric EQ.
2.
Parametric EQ
Here you can adjust the filter for each band.
If the analyzer is hidden, the EQ graph’s vertical axis will be shown
larger.
Accessing the GEQ EDIT popup
1.
fig.PEQ_Guide.eps
ON button
TYPE
Q
FREQ
GAIN
Access the EFFECTS screen, and press [F2 (GEQ1 - 4)] to
access the GEQ 1 - 4 tabs.
fig.ScrGEQRack.eps
Turns the filter on/off for each band.
• TYPE
Selects one of the following filter types. Q or GAIN may not be
valid for some types.
FREQ GAIN
TYPE
Operation
Q
PEAK
(Peaking)
Peaking type filter.
Valid Valid Valid
LSV
(Low Shelving)
Low shelving type filter. –
Valid Valid
HSV
High shelving type filter. –
(High Shelving)
Valid Valid
LPF1
1st order low pass filter. –
(Low Pass Filter)
Valid –
HPF1
1st order high pass filter. –
(High Pass Filter)
Valid –
2.
Press [F5 (EDIT GEQ1)] – [F8 (EDIT GEQ4)] depending on
the GEQ you want to use.
fig.ScrGEQEdit.eps
• Q
Adjusts Q in a range of 0.36–16.00.
• FREQ
Adjusts the center frequency in a range of 20 Hz–20.0 kHz.
The GEQ EDIT popup will appear.
• GAIN
Adjusts the gain in a range of -15.0 dB – +15.0 dB.
In the GEQ EDIT popup (8-band parametric EQ), the function
buttons perform the following operations.
[F4 (FLAT)]
[F5 (LIBRARY)]
[F6 (Analyzer)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Sets the 8-band parametric
EQ to a flat response.
Accesses the GEQ LIBRARY
popup.
Displays/hides the analyzer.
Closes the popup.
You can also make the setting for accessing the popup from a
USER button (p. 154).
p. 109
107
Effects and 31-band GEQ
• ON button
M-380_e1.book 108 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Effects and 31-band GEQ
Using the top panel faders to
control the GEQ
You can use the top panel faders to control the GEQ.
1.
Access the GEQ EDIT popup for the desired GEQ.
2.
Press [F6 (GEQ ON FADER)] to switch it on.
You can accomplish GEQ operations using the faders on the top
panel.
Using the 8-band parametric EQ
1.
Access the desired GEQ EDIT popup.
fig.ScrGEQEdit.eps
fig.ScrGEQFaderGuide.eps
2.
3.
The range of corresponding faders is displayed on the
screen.
4.
Press the layer buttons in the LAYER section (p. 23) to
select the band to manipulate.
The bands that correspond to the layer buttons are as indicated
below.
Use the EQ MODE select button to select 8-BAND PEQ.
fig.ScrChgEQ_Conf.eps
Effects and 31-band GEQ
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the operation.
USER layer button
Disabled
AUX13-16/MTX layer button
Disabled
AUX1-12 layer button
Disabled
CH37-48 layer button
Disabled
CH25-36 layer button
2.0k-20kHz
CH13-24 layer button
200-2.5kHz
CH1-12 layer button
20-250Hz
3.
Press [F8 (CHANGE)] to switch to the 8-band parametric
EQ.
fig.ScrGEQEdit_PEQ_3.eps
The band manipulated using the faders on the top panel
changes even if [F7 (FADER RANGE)] is pressed.
If you’ve enabled top panel fader control of the GEQ, touching a
fader with your hand will cause the cursor to move to the
corresponding GEQ fader in the screen. By lightly touching the
fader before you move it, you can verify the frequency band
that you’ll be operating.
The operation will be cancelled if you press [F7 (CANCEL)].
4.
Move the cursor to the desired parameter, and use the
value dial to edit the value.
If you want to see a larger EQ graph, turn [F6 (Analyzer)] off.
If a fader’s position is anything other than 0 dB, the
corresponding [MUTE] will blink. When you press the blinking
[MUTE], the fader will be reset to the 0 dB position.
108
M-380_e1.book 109 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Effects and 31-band GEQ
Using the analyzer
1.
Access the GEQ EDIT popup for the desired GEQ.
fig.ScrGEQEdit.eps
Using the GEQ library
You can recall 31-band GEQ settings from the library, and store the
current 31-band GEQ settings in the library.
GEQ library operations are performed in the GEQ LIBRARY popup.
1.
Access the GEQ EDIT popup for the GEQ unit that is the
target of GEQ LIBRARY operations.
ig.ScrGEQEdit.eps
If using the 8-band parametric EQ, turn [F6 (Analyzer)] on to
display the analyzer.
2. Use SRC to select the source for the analyzer.
• If you select SELF, the source will be the output of the channel
in which the EQ is inserted.
• If the analyzer display is too large or too small, use WINDOW
to adjust the vertical display area.
2.
Press [F5 (LIBRARY)].
The GEQ LIBRARY popup will appear.
fig.ScrGEQLibGuide.eps
B
• As desired, use AVG and AVG TIMES to make settings for
averaging.
If an input channel is selected, its direct out will be the source
for the analyzer.
If an output channel is selected, its output will be the source for
the analyzer.
If you want to see the response of the sound that is actually
being produced from the speakers, set up a measurement mic,
patch it to an input channel of the M-380, and select that
channel as the source.
If the M-380 and M-380RCS (software that remotely controls the
M-380 from a PC) both attempt to display the analyzer
simultaneously, display on the M-380 will take priority. In this
case, the analyzer levels will not be shown in the M-380RCS
window.
fig.RCS_OccupyGEQ.eps
A.Applicable GEQ indication
This indicates the effect to which the GEQ LIBRARY popup applies.
B.Library data list
This is a list of the library data.
In the GEQ LIBRARY popup, the function buttons perform the
following operations.
[F1 (PRESET)]
[F2 (USER)]
[F3 (PREVIEW)]
[F4 (RECALL)]
[F5 (STORE)]*
[F6 (LOCK)]*
[F7 (NAME EDIT)]*
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Accesses the recall-only PRESET library.
Accesses the USER library, which allows you to recall or store data.
Previews (auditions) the library data
that is selected in the list.
Recalls the library data that is selected
in the list.
Stores the current settings to the library item that is selected in the list.
Locks the library data that is selected
in the list.
Accesses the NAME EDIT popup,
where you can edit the name of the
user library data selected in the list.
Closes the popup.
* Available only for the User library.
109
Effects and 31-band GEQ
A
M-380_e1.book 110 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Effects and 31-band GEQ
For details on library operations, refer to “Library operations”
(p. 39).
Effects and 31-band GEQ
The GEQ library is shared by GEQ1 -GEQ4 and by the DUAL
GEQ of FX1 - FX4. GEQ1 - GEQ4 will not recall the delay
parameter of the DUAL GEQ. When you store GEQ1 - GEQ4
into the User library, the delay parameter of DUAL GEQ will be
stored with the default value.
110
M-380_e1.book 111 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Inserting an external effects device
About inserting an external effects device
fig.ExtInsDia.eps
EXT
INSERT
OUT
EXT
INSERT
IN
CONSOLE INPUT 1-8
CH 1 EXT FX INSERT OUT
To CH 1 EXT FX INSERT IN
CH 48 EXT FX INSERT OUT
AUX 1 EXT FX INSERT OUT
AUX 16 EXT FX INSERT OUT
To CH 48 EXT FX INSERT IN
SEND
LEVEL
SEND
LEVEL
RETURN
RETURN LEVEL
EXT FX 1-8
LEVEL
To AUX 1 EXT FX INSERT IN
To AUX 16 EXT FX INSERT IN
MATRIX 1 EXT FX INSERT OUT
To MATRIX 1 EXT FX INSERT IN
MATRIX 8 EXT FX INSERT OUT
To MATRIX 8 EXT FX INSERT IN
MAIN L EXT FX INSERT OUT
MAIN R EXT FX INSERT OUT
CONSOLE OUTPUT 1-8
To MAIN L EXT FX INSERT IN
To MAIN R EXT FX INSERT IN
You can use the CONSOLE IN 1–8 and CONSOLE OUT 1–8 jacks located on the M-380’s rear panel to insert up to eight external effects devices
into channels.
The eight external effects devices are shown virtually as an EXT FX1–EXT FX8 rack, allowing you to adjust the input levels and insert them into
channels.
EXT FX1–EXT FX8 use the following input/output jacks.
Output jack
CONSOLE OUT 1
CONSOLE OUT 2
CONSOLE OUT 3
CONSOLE OUT 4
CONSOLE OUT 5
CONSOLE OUT 6
CONSOLE OUT 7
CONSOLE OUT 8
Input jack
CONSOLE IN 1
CONSOLE IN 2
CONSOLE IN 3
CONSOLE IN 4
CONSOLE IN 5
CONSOLE IN 6
CONSOLE IN 7
CONSOLE IN 8
Inserting an external effects device
External effect
EXT FX1
EXT FX2
EXT FX3
EXT FX4
EXT FX5
EXT FX6
EXT FX7
EXT FX8
To insert external effects devices into channels, you’ll use the EXT FX 1–4 tab and EXT FX 5–8 tab of the EFFECTS screen.
111
M-380_e1.book 112 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Inserting an external effects device
EXT FX 1–4 tab, EXT FX 5–8 tab
When you’re using it for insertion of an external effects device,
the CONSOLE IN jack’s nominal input level is fixed at +4 dBu.
The ReturnLev knob adjusts the input level in the digital
domain.
fig.ScrEXT.eps
7.
IN meter
This indicates the level of the signal being input from the
external effect.
The function buttons specific to the EXT FX 1–4 tab and EXT FX 5–8
tab perform the following operations.
[F6 (PEAK CLEAR)]
•
Clears the level meter’s peak hold or over
indication.
EXT FX1–EXT FX8
fig.ScrExtRackGuide.eps
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
This area indicates the status of EXT FX1–EXT FX8. This area is
organized as follows.
Inserting an external effects device
1.
External effect number
This indicates the number of the external effect.
2.
ENABLE button
This enables or disables the EXT FX.
If you turn the ENABLE button on, you’ll be able to use the
corresponding CONSOLE IN jack and CONSOLE OUT jack to
insert your external effects device into the assigned channel,
and the buttons, knobs, and meters 3–7 described below will be
shown.
Inserting an external effects
device into a channel
To insert an external effects device into a channel, connect the
CONSOLE IN jack and CONSOLE OUT jack to your external effects
device, and insert the corresponding EXT FX into the desired
channel.
The EXT FX INSERT SELECT popup is used to insert an EXT FX into
a channel.
Accessing the EXT FX INSERT
SELECT popup
1.
Access the EFFECTS screen.
fig.ScrFxRack.eps
If you turn the ENABLE button off, the corresponding
CONSOLE IN jack and CONSOLE OUT jack can be used as
conventional input/output jacks, and the following buttons,
knobs, and meters 3–7 will not be shown.
3.
EXT FX INSERT SELECT popup button
This selects the channel into which the external effect will be
inserted. The selected channel is shown on the button. When
you move the cursor to the button and press [ENTER], the EXT
FX INSERT SELECT popup will appear.
4.
Send Lev knob
This adjusts the output level to the external effect in a range of
-Inf dB–+6.0 dB.
2.
Press [F3 (EXT FX 1–4)] or [F4 (EXT FX 5–8)] to access the
EXT FX 1–4 tab or EXT FX 5–8 tab.
fig.ScrEXT.eps
The CONSOLE OUT jack is fixed at a nominal output level of
+4 dBu. The Send Lev knob adjusts the output level in the
digital domain.
5.
OUT meter
This indicates the level of the signal being output to the external
effect.
6.
ReturnLev knob
This adjusts the input level from the external effect in a range of
-Inf dB–+6.0 dB.
112
M-380_e1.book 113 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Inserting an external effects device
3.
Move the cursor to the EXT FX INSERT SELECT popup
button for the desired EXT FX, and press [ENTER].
The EXT FX INSERT SELECT popup will appear.
fig.ScrEXTInsSelGuide.eps
C
A
B
Inserting an EXT FX into a channel
Here we’ll explain how to connect your external effects device to
CONSOLE IN1 and CONSOLE OUT1, and insert it into CH1.
1.
Access the EFFECTS screen, and press [F3 (EXT FX 1–4)]
to display the EXT FX 1–4 tab.
fig.ScrEXT.eps
A.Target EXT FX indication
This indicates the EXT FX to which the EXT FX INSERT
SELECT popup applies.
B.Insert-destination channel select buttons
These buttons select the channel into which the EXT FX will be
inserted.
2.
Move the cursor to the ENABLE button for EXT FX1, and
press [ENTER] to select it.
3.
Connect your external effects device to CONSOLE IN1 and
CONSOLE OUT1.
fig.ExtFxConnect.eps
CONSOLE IN 1
CONSOLE OUT 1
In the EXT FX INSERT SELECT popup, the function buttons
perform the following operations.
INPUT
OUTPUT
External effects device
[F1 (CH 1–24 INSERT)]
[F2 (CH 25–48 INSERT)]
[F3 (BUS INSERT)]
[F6 (SELECT NONE)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Displays CH1–CH24 as the insert-destination channel select
buttons.
Displays CH25–CH48 as the insert-destination channel select
buttons.
Displays AUX1–AUX16,
MATRIX1–MATRIX8, MAIN L/
R and MAIN C as the insert-destination channel select buttons.
Clears the insert-destination selection.
Closes the popup.
If you connect your external effects device while the EXT FX
ENABLE button is off, the input and output may loop.
If the EXT FX insert destination is already specified when you
connect your external effects device, noise may be heard in the
channel.
4.
Move the cursor to the EXT FX INSERT SELECT popup
button for EXT FX1, and press [ENTER].
fig.ScrEXTInsSel.eps
The EXT FX INSERT SELECT popup will appear.
5.
Move the cursor to the CH1 insert-destination channel
select button, and press [ENTER] to select it.
6.
Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup.
113
Inserting an external effects device
C.Current insert destination indication
This indicates the current insert destination.
M-380_e1.book 114 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
DCA groups
About DCA groups
DCA group settings
DCA grouping is a function that lets you make relative adjustments
to the output level of channels so that the level of multiple channels
belonging to a group can be controlled together.
fig.DCAGuide.eps
Faders assigned to DCA
The DCA GROUP screen is used to make DCA group settings.
f
Accessing the DCA GROUP screen
1.
DCA Fader
In the GROUP section, press [DCA].
The DCA GROUP screen will appear.
ig.ScrDCAGroupGuide.eps
-3dB
A
DCA groups
A.DCA group 1–8 faders
These adjust the levels of DCA groups 1–8 in a range of -Inf
dB–+10.0 dB.
-3dB offset to each channel
A channel can belong to more than one DCA group. This is
convenient when grouping drums or instruments.
In the DCA GROUP screen, the function buttons perform the
following operations.
[F6 (DCA 1-8
ON FADER)
[F7 (NAME EDIT)]
[F8 (ASSIGN)]
If this is on, the top panel
fader modules 5–12 will control DCA groups.
Accesses the NAME EDIT
popup.
Accesses the DCA GROUP
ASSIGN popup.
p. 115
p. 115
The functions of the fader modules when [F6 (DCA1-8 ON
FADER)] is switched on are as described below.
Controller
Operation
[SEL]
Accesses the DCA GROUP ASSIGN popup
[SOLO]
Solos the DCA group.
[MUTE]
Mutes the DCA group.
Fader
Adjusts the level of the DCA group.
When you access the DCA GROUP ASSIGN popup, the [F6
(DCA1-8 ON FADER)] function will be temporarily disabled.
114
M-380_e1.book 115 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
DCA groups
Assigning a channel to a
DCA group
The DCA GROUP ASSIGN popup is used to assign a channel to a
DCA group.
Assigning a channel to a DCA
group
1.
Access the DCA GROUP ASSIGN popup for the desired
DCA group.
fig.ScrDCAGroupAssign.eps
You can also use the GROUP ASSIGN popup of the CHANNEL
DISPLAY screen to assign a channel to a DCA group. For
details, refer to “Assigning channels to DCA groups and MUTE
groups” (p. 54).
Accessing the DCA GROUP ASSIGN
popup
1.
In the GROUP section, press [DCA] to access the DCA
GROUP screen.
2.
Move the cursor to the DCA group fader of the desired DCA
group, and press [F8 (ASSIGN)].
The DCA GROUP ASSIGN popup will appear.
2.
Verify that the target DCA group is correct.
3.
Move the cursor to the desired channel select button, and
press [ENTER] to select it.
4.
Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup.
fig.ScrDCAGroupAssignGuide.eps
A B
When the DCA GROUP ASSIGN popup is displayed, you can
press a top panel [SEL] to turn on/off the corresponding
channel’s assignment to the DCA group.
You can specify a name and color label for each DCA group. A name
of up to six characters can be specified, and you can choose one of
eight colors as the color label.
The NAME EDIT popup is used to edit the name and select a color label.
A.Target DCA group indication
This indicates the DCA group to which the settings in the
DCA GROUP ASSIGN popup will apply.
B.Channel select buttons
Here you can select the channels that will be assigned to the
DCA group.
In the DCA GROUP ASSIGN screen, the function buttons
perform the following operations.
[F1 (CH 1–24)]
[F2 (CH 25–48)]
[F3 (AUX/MAIN/MARIX)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Displays CH1–CH24 as the
channel select buttons.
Displays CH25–CH48 as the
channel select buttons.
Displays AUX1–AUX16,
MATRIX1–MATRIX8, MAIN
L/R and MAIN C as the
channel select buttons.
Closes the popup.
For details on name editing, refer to “Specifying a channel name
and color label” (p. 51).
Accessing the NAME EDIT popup
1.
Access the DCA GROUP screen.
2.
Move the cursor to the DCA group fader of the desired DCA
group, and press [F7 (NAME EDIT)].
fig.ScrChNameEdit.eps
The NAME EDIT popup will appear.
You can use [SEL] to access the DCA GROUP ASSIGN popup
even from the AUX13-16/MTX layer or the user layer.
115
DCA groups
Specifying a name and color
label for the DCA group
M-380_e1.book 116 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
DCA groups
Using the panel to control
DCA groups
You can use the AUX13-16/MTX layer of the fader module section to
control DCA groups from the panel.
The user preference AUX/MTX LAYER select button (p. 155)
must be set to “4Auxes + 8DCA.”
1.
In the layer section, press [AUX13-16/MTX] to access the
AUX13-16/MTX layer.
DCA groups
fig.LayerBtn.eps
2.
Use the faders of fader module 5 (DCA1)–12 (DCA8) to
adjust the level of the DCA groups.
3.
By pressing [SOLO], you can operate the solo settings of all
channels belonging to the corresponding DCA group.
4.
By pressing [MUTE], you can operate the mute settings of
all channels belonging to the corresponding DCA group.
116
M-380_e1.book 117 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Mute groups
About mute groups
Mute grouping is a function that lets you control the mute status of
multiple channels belonging to a mute group.
A channel can belong to more than one mute group.
Assigning a channel to a
mute group
The MUTE GROUP ASSIGN popup is used to assign a channel to a
mute group.
The MUTE GROUP screen is used to make mute group settings.
You can also use the GROUP ASSIGN popup of the CHANNEL
DISPLAY screen to assign a channel to a mute group. For
details, refer to “Assigning channels to DCA groups and MUTE
groups” (p. 54).
Accessing the MUTE GROUP screen
1.
In the GROUP section, press [MUTE].
The MUTE GROUP screen will appear.
1.
fig.ScrMUTEGroupGuide.eps
In the GROUP section, press [MUTE] to access the MUTE
GROUP screen.
fig.ScrMUTEGroup.eps
A
2.
Move the cursor to the MUTE group button of the desired
mute group, and press [F8 (ASSIGN)].
The MUTE GROUP ASSIGN popup will appear.
fig.ScrMUTEGroupAssignGuide.eps
A
B
You can also make the setting for switching MUTE groups on or
off from a USER button (p. 154).
In the MUTE GROUP screen, the function buttons perform the
following operations.
[F1 (MUTE1)]
[F2 (MUTE2)]
[F3 (MUTE3)]
[F4 (MUTE4)]
[F6 (MUTE
ALL OUT)]
[F7 (NAME EDIT)]
[F8 (ASSIGN)]
Turns MUTE group 1 on/off.
Turns MUTE group 2 on/off.
Turns MUTE group 3 on/off.
Turns MUTE group 4 on/off.
Mutes all outputs of the M380 and input/output units.
Accesses the NAME EDIT
popup.
Accesses the MUTE GROUP
ASSIGN popup.
p. 118
p. 117
Output muting controlled by [F6 (MUTE ALL OUT)] cannot be
stored in a scene memory. When the M-380 is started up,
muting caused by [F6 (MUTE ALL OUT)] will be turned off.
A.Target mute group indication
This indicates the mute group to which the settings in the
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN popup will apply.
B.Channel select buttons
Here you can select the channels that will be assigned to the
mute group.
In the MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen, the function buttons
perform the following operations.
117
Mute groups
A.MUTE group 1–8 buttons
These buttons turn mute groups 1–8 on/off. When you turn
on a mute group, the channels belonging to that group will be
muted.
M-380_e1.book 118 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Mute groups
[F1 (CH 1–24)]
[F2 (CH 25–48)]
[F3 (AUX/MAIN/MARIX)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Displays CH1–CH24 as the
channel select buttons.
Displays CH25–CH48 as the
channel select buttons.
Displays AUX1–AUX16,
MATRIX1–MATRIX8,
MAIN L/R and MAIN C as
the channel select buttons.
Closes the popup.
3.
Move the cursor to the desired channel select button, and
press [ENTER] to select it.
4.
Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup.
When the MUTE GROUP ASSIGN popup is displayed, you can
press a top panel [SEL] to turn on/off the corresponding
channel’s assignment to the mute group.
Specifying a name and
color label for a mute group
You can specify a name and color label for each mute group. A name
of up to six characters can be specified, and you can choose one of
eight colors as the color label.
The NAME EDIT popup is used to edit the name and select a color
label.
For details on name editing, refer to “Specifying a channel name
and color label” (p. 51).
Accessing the NAME EDIT popup
1.
Access the MUTE GROUP screen.
fig.ScrMUTEGroup.eps
Using mute groups
1.
Access the MUTE GROUP screen.
Mute groups
fig.ScrMUTEGroup.eps
2.
Move the cursor to the MUTE group button of the desired
mute group, and press [F7 (NAME EDIT)].
fig.ScrChNameEdit.eps
2.
Move the cursor to the desired mute group button, and
press [ENTER] to turn it on/off.
You can also make the setting for switching MUTE groups on or
off from a USER button (p. 154).
The NAME EDIT popup will appear.
118
M-380_e1.book 119 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Talkback/Oscillator
About talkback and oscillator
fig.TB-OSCFlow.eps
MAIN AUX SOLO
OSC
LEVEL
OSCILLATOR
PINK NOISE
WHITE NOISE
SINE WAVE
TALKBACK
PHANTOM
GAIN
OSC
LEVEL
16 L R
LR 1 2
16 L R
MAIN L, R, AUX 1-16,
MATRIX 1-8 SW
SW
TO MAIRIX 1-8
TO OUTPUT PATCHBAY
TALKBACK
LEVEL
TALKBACK
LEVEL
+48V
TALKBACK MIC
OSC
ON
LR 1 2
TALKBACK
ON
MAIN L, R, AUX 1-16,
MATRIX 1-8 SW
SW
A/D
TO MAIRIX 1-8
TO OUTPUT PATCHBAY
MAIN AUX SOLO
Talkback is a function that sends the input of a mic connected to the TALKBACK MIC IN on the rear panel jack to an AUX bus, MATRIX bus,
MAIN L/R bus or MAIN C bus. This is useful when the mixer operator needs to convey instructions to performers on stage or to staff.
Oscillator is a function that generates pink noise, white noise, or a sine wave, and sends it to an AUX bus, MATRIX bus, MAIN L/R. or MAIN C.
This is useful when you need to measure the acoustical response of a hall, or when checking the connections of external devices.
You can also output the talkback or the oscillator directly via the output patchbay without routing the signal through a bus.
Talkback/Oscillator section
Talkback and oscillator operations are performed in the Talkback/Oscillator section.
fig.TalkbackOscSectGuide.eps
A
Talkback/Oscillator
B
C
A.
MIC LEVEL knob
This adjusts the preamp gain of the TALKBACK MIC input.
B.
DISP button
This accesses the TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR screen, where you can make talkback settings and oscillator settings.
C.
TALKBACK button
This turns talkback on/off. It will be lit when talkback is on.
119
M-380_e1.book 120 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Talkback/Oscillator
[F1 (TALKBACK)]
Using talkback
Talkback settings are made in the TALKBACK tab of the
TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR screen.
1.
Connect your mic to the TALKBACK MIC IN jack located on
the rear panel.
2.
In the talkback/oscillator section, press [DISP] to access
the TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR screen.
3.
Press [F1 (TALKBACK)] to access the TALKBACK tab.
ffig.ScrTalkbackGuide.eps
[F2 (OSC)]
Accesses the TALKBACK tab,
where you can make talkback
settings.
Accesses the OSC tab, where
you can make oscillator settings.
p. 120
p. 121
4.
In the talkback/oscillator section, use the MIC LEVEL knob
to adjust the input gain of the mic.
If you’ve connected a mic that requires +48V phantom power,
use the on-screen +48V button to turn on +48V phantom power.
5.
Use the talkback output destination select buttons to select
the bus to which the talkback signal will be sent.
6.
In the talkback/oscillator section, press [TALKBACK] to
send the talkback signal to the bus you selected in step 5.
A
If talkback is on, [TALKBACK] will lit in the talkback/oscillator
section.
B
C
The way in which [TALKBACK] turns on/off will depend on
how you press the button.
If you press and immediately release the button, the button will
operate in Latch mode, alternately turning talkback on or off.
Talkback/Oscillator
D
A.Meters
This area shows the talkback input level, the AUX channel
levels, and the MATRIX channel levels.
B.+48V button
This turns +48V phantom power on/off for the TALKBACK
MIC IN jack.
You must turn off phantom power if you’ve connected a device
that does not require +48V phantom power. Inadvertently
supplying phantom power to a dynamic microphone, audio
playback device, or any other device that does not require
phantom power will cause malfunctions. Carefully read the
owner’s manual included with the microphone or other device
you’re using, and check its specifications.
C.LEVEL knob
This adjusts the level at which the signal of the TALKBACK
MIC IN is sent to the AUX buses, MAIN L/R bus, MAIN C
bus, MATRIX buses or Output patchbay, in a range of -Inf dB–
+10.0 dB.
D.Talkback output destination select buttons
These buttons select the buses to which the talkback signal
will be sent.
In the TALKBACK tab, the function buttons perform the
following operations.
120
If you press and hold down the button, the button will operate
in Momentary mode, and talkback will remain on only while
you continue holding down the button.
M-380_e1.book 121 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Talkback/Oscillator
[F1 (TALKBACK)]
Using the oscillator
Oscillator settings are made in the OSC tab of the TALKBACK/
OSCILLATOR screen.
1.
In the talkback/oscillator section, press [DISP] to access
the TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR screen.
2.
Press [F2 (OSC)] to access the OSC tab.
[F2 (OSC)]
[F3 (OSC ON)]
p. 120
p. 121
4.
Use the oscillator type select buttons to select the type of
signal you want to generate.
5.
Use the oscillator output destination select buttons to
select the bus to which the oscillator will be sent.
6.
When you press [F3 (OSC ON)] to turn it on, the oscillator
signal will be sent to the bus you selected in step 4.
ffig.ScrOscGuide.eps
A
Accesses the TALKBACK
tab, where you can make
talkback settings.
Accesses the OSC tab, where
you can make oscillator settings.
Turns the oscillator on/off.
You can also make the setting for switching the oscillator on or
off from a USER button (p. 154).
B
C
D
E
A.Meters
This area shows the oscillator output level, the AUX channel
levels and the MATRIX channel levels.
PINK NOISE
WHITE NOISE
SINE WAVE
Talkback/Oscillator
B.Oscillator type select buttons
You can select the type of signal generated by the oscillator
from the following choices.
Pink noise will be generated.
White noise will be generated.
A sine wave will be generated.
C.OSC LEVEL knob
This adjusts the level at which the signal generated by the
oscillator is sent to the AUX buses, MAIN L/R bus, MAIN C
bus, MATRIX buses or Output patchbay, in a range of -Inf dB–
0.0 dB.
D.SINE FREQ knob
When the oscillator type is SINE WAVE, this adjusts the
frequency of the sine wave in a range of 20 Hz–20 kHz.
E.Oscillator output destination select buttons
These buttons select the buses to which the oscillator will be
sent.
In the OSC tab, the function buttons perform the following
operations.
121
M-380_e1.book 122 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Monitor/Solo
About monitoring
fig.MonitorFlow.eps
SOLO
OUTPUT
PATCHBAY
LR
MONITOR
SOLO
LEVEL
MONITOR
LEVEL
MONITOR
SELECT
AUX 1 OUT
AUX 16 OUT
SOLO
LOGIC
MONITOR
LEVEL
MAIN OUT L
MAIN OUT R
MAIN MONO OUT
MONITOR OUT L
MONITOR OUT R
PHONES
LEVEL
MATRIX 1 OUT
MATRIX 8 OUT
D/A
PHONES
OUT
REC OUT L
REC OUT R
LR
SOLO
Monitoring is a function by which the AUX channel, MATRIX channel, MAIN L/R, or USB memory recorder signal that you select as the monitor
source can be sent from the output jacks or headphone jack. This is used mainly by a mixing engineer to monitor the signals.
The monitor output is split to the MONITOR OUT L/R and PHONES OUT, and the level of these two can be adjusted independently. You can use
the output patchbay to patch MONITOR OUT L/R to any desired output jacks.
Solo is a function by which the channel you select using a [SOLO] button is sent from the MONITOR OUT L/R or PHONES OUT jacks. This is
used to monitor a channel temporarily.
Monitor/Solo
Normally, the monitor signal will be output to MONITOR OUT L/R and PHONES. Solo is enabled when you turn on Solo for a channel; the
signal of the channel for which Solo was turned on will be automatically sent to the Monitor output.
Operations in the MONITOR section
The top panel MONITOR section is used to perform Monitor/Solo operations.
fig.MonitorSectGuide.eps
A
B
C
A.
LEVEL knob
This adjusts the monitor output level in a range of -Inf dB–+10.0 dB.
B.
DISP button
This accesses the MONITOR screen, where you can make monitor and solo settings.
C.
SOLO CLEAR button
This turns off the solo settings of all channels.
It will blink if any channels are currently being soloed.
122
M-380_e1.book 123 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Monitor/Solo
In the MONITOR screen, the function buttons perform the
following operations.
Accessing the MONITOR screen
1.
In the top panel MONITOR section, press [DISP].
The MONITOR screen will appear.
[F1 (CH SOLO AFL)]
fig.ScrMonitorGuide.eps
A
[F8 (M-48 MANAGER)]
Selects the point from which the
signal will be sent from the input
channel to solo. If this is on, the
post-pan signal of the channel
will be sent. If this is off, the prefader signal will be sent.
This accesses the M-48 MANAGER popup
Using Monitor
B
1.
C
In the top panel MONITOR section, press [DISP].
fig.ScrMonitor.eps
E
D
A.Meters
These indicate the level of the MONITOR, AUX channels and
MATRIX channels.
B.SOLO MODE select buttons
These select the solo mode from the following choices.
ADD ON
LAST
Channels whose [SOLO] are on will be mixed
for monitoring.
Only the channel whose [SOLO] was turned on
most recently will be monitored.
The MONITOR screen will appear.
Use the monitor source select buttons to select the desired
monitor source.
The monitor signal will be output from the output jacks to
which MONITOR OUT L/R are patched, and from the
PHONES jack.
3.
Use the MONITOR section’s LEVEL knob or the PHONES
LEVEL knob to adjust the monitor output level.
C.SOLO Lev knob
This adjusts the solo level in a range of -Inf dB–+10.0 dB.
The solo output level is affected not only by the SOLO Lev
knob, but also by the LEVEL knob in the monitor section or by
the LEVEL knob of the PHONES jack.
D.Monitor source select buttons
These select the monitor source.
By default, MONITOR L/R is patched to CONSOLE OUT 7/8
and to DIGITAL OUT. You can use the output patchbay to
change the output destination. For details, refer to “Output
patchbay operations” (p. 92).
You can also assign monitor source selections to the USER
buttons (p. 154).
When the LCR SYSTEM is turned on, "MAIN L/C/R" is shown
for the monitor source select button. This indicates the stereo
mix of MAIN L/R and MAIN C.
E.MONITOR SOURCE follows SENDS ON FADER button
If this has a check mark, the monitor source will change in
tandem with SENDS ON FADER. When SENDS ON FADER
mode is turned off, the monitor source will return to its
previous setting.
123
Monitor/Solo
2.
M-380_e1.book 124 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Monitor/Solo
Using Solo
1.
In the top panel MONITOR section, press [DISP].
fig.ScrMonitor.eps
Monitor/Solo
The MONITOR screen will appear.
2.
Use the SOLO MODE select buttons to select the desired
solo mode.
3.
Use [F1 (CH SOLO AFL)] to select the point from which the
input channel signal will be sent to solo.
4.
On the top panel, press [SOLO] for the desired channel.
The signal of that channel will be sent to Solo, and output from
the output jacks to which MONITOR OUT L/R are patched,
and from the PHONES jack.
5.
Use the SOLO Lev knob to adjust the solo level.
6.
Use the MONITOR section’s LEVEL knob or the PHONES
LEVEL knob to adjust the monitor output level.
If the solo mode is ADD ON, soloing will be controlled so that
input channels, output channels (AUX channels, MATRIX
channels and MAIN L/R channels), and DCA groups are not
soloed at the same time. If the Solo mode is ADD ON, the
selection will be controlled so that the solo signal does not
include both input channels and output channels (AUX
channels and MAIN L/R channel). For example, if an input
channel is soloed, and you turn on Solo for an AUX channel, the
solo setting of the input channel will be defeated and Solo will
be turned on for the AUX channel.
124
M-380_e1.book 125 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Scene memory
About scene memory
1.
Scene memory is a function that lets you store mixer parameters as a
scene, and recall them when desired. Scene memory is a function
that lets you store and recall mixing parameters as “scenes.” The M380 can store 300 scenes in its internal memory, and you can assign a
sixteen-character name to each scene.
The current mixer parameters are referred to as the current
scene. The scene number that was most recently recalled or
stored is called the “current scene number.”
The following scene functions are also provided.
•
Lock
2.
Scene name
This indicates the name of the currently selected scene. The
scene name is not shown for a blank scene (a scene in which
nothing has been stored).
3.
E symbol
This will be shown if the mixer parameters have been edited
after the scene was recalled or stored.
Prohibits overwriting, deletion, renaming, or editing for the
scene. (p. 127)
•
Recall Filter function
Specifies the parameters that will be recalled for each scene.
(p. 127)
•
Global Scope function
Specifies the region (channels, parameters) that will be recalled
for all scenes. (p. 131)
Since this means that the mixer parameters no longer match the
data in scene memory, you’ll need to store them into a scene
memory if you want to keep them.
The following mixer parameters are stored in a scene.
• Preamp (input/output unit, and the M-380’s CONSOLE INPUT)
4.
• Input patchbay
Scene number
This indicates the number of the currently selected scene. If the
number is blinking, a number other than the current scene
number is selected.
• Output patchbay
• CH1–CH48
LOCK symbol
This indicates whether the currently selected scene is locked.
You cannot store to a locked scene or delete it.
• AUX1–AUX16, MATRIX1–MATRIX8, MAIN L/R, MAIN C
• Effects
• Talkback/Oscillator
• DCA groups, MUTE groups
• USB memory recorder
Operations in the SCENE
screen
The SCENE screen is used to edit the scene list and make various
scene settings.
The following parameter are not stored in a scene.
•The status of the TALKBACK button.
•The position of the TALKBACK MIC LEVEL knob.
•The setting of the monitor.
•The statuses of the SOLO buttons.
•The recorder status (eg, playing or recording) of the USB
1.
Scene memory
•The status of the TALKBACK phantom power.
Accessing the SCENE screen
In the SCENE MEMORY section, press [DISP].
The SCENE screen will appear.
fig.ScrSceneListGuide.eps
A
memory recorder.
•The playback mode of the USB memory recorder.
•The song selection of the USB memory recorder.
About the scene indication in the
top display area
fig.ScrTBSceneDispGuide.eps
1 3 4
2
A.Scene list
This lists the scenes. The current scene is shown in green.
The list shows the following items.
Basic information about the scene is shown in the top display area.
125
M-380_e1.book 126 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Scene memory
Item
NO.
NAME
TIME
STATUS
RECALL
PARAMETERS
M-48
Explanation
Scene number.
Scene name.
Date and time at which the scene was stored.
If the scene is locked or if the Recall Filter is
turned on, this area will indicate LOCK or
FILT, respectively.
A check mark is shown for parameters that
will be recalled as specified by the Recall Filter settings.
Indicates the memory number that the M-48
recalls.
Storing the mixer parameters into
scene memory
1.
In the SCENE MEMORY section, press [DISP].
The SCENE screen will appear.
2.
Select the scene number to use as the destination for the
store operation.
3.
Press [F2 (STORE)].
The RECALL PARAMETERS items are as follows.
Item
IN
OUT
PRE
CH
BUS
FX
GRP
REC
TB
Explanation
Input patchbay settings
Output patchbay settings
Preamp settings
(gain, +48V phantom power, pad)
Input channel settings
AUX channel, MAIN L/R channel, MAIN C
channel, and MATRIX channel settings
Effect, 31-band GEQ, and external effects device insertion settings
DCA group and MUTE group settings
USB memory recorder settings
Talkback and oscillator settings
The SCENE STORE popup will appear.
4.
Use the name edit field to edit the name of the scene name.
For details on name editing, refer to “Editing a name” (p. 39).
5.
Press [F8 (STORE)].
Scene memory
In the SCENE screen, the function buttons perform the
following tasks.
Button
Operation
[F1 (RECALL)]
This recalls the mixer parameters from the currently selected scene number.
This stores the current mixer parameters into the currently selected scene
number.
Accesses the SCENE LIST
EDIT popup where you
can edit the scene list.
Accesses the RECALL PARAMETER EDIT popup
where you can edit the Recall Filter for the scene selected in the scene list.
Clears the contents of the
scene selected in the scene
list, making it a blank
scene.
Accesses the GLOBAL
SCOPE popup.
Locks or unlocks the scene
selected in the scene list.
Undoes (cancels) the lastperformed recall.
[F2 (STORE)]
[F3 (LIST EDIT)]
[F4 (PARAM EDIT)]
[F5 (CLEAR)]
[F6 (GLOBAL SCOPE)]
[F7 (LOCK)]
[F8 (UNDO RECALL)]
126
See
page
p. 127
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the scene
storage operation.
6.
Press [F8 (STORE)] to execute the Store operation.
The operation will be cancelled if you press [F7 (CANCEL)].
p. 126
If the “SCENE/LIB STORE” button located in the
CONFIRMATION area of User Preferences (p.161) is not
selected, no confirmation message will appear in step 5.
p. 129
p. 127
p. 130
p. 131
p. 127
If “LOCK” is indicated next to the scene number, that scene is
locked, and you can’t store to it. Use the SCENE screen if you
want to unlock the scene. For details, refer to “Locking or
unlocking a scene” (p. 127).
Storing a scene memory can also be accomplished from the
SCENE QUICKVIEW popup (p. 128).
You can also make the setting for performing store operations
from a USER button (p. 154).
M-380_e1.book 127 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Scene memory
Recalling a scene memory to the
mixer parameters
1.
In the SCENE MEMORY section, press [DISP].
The SCENE screen will appear.
2.
Select the scene number you want to recall.
3.
Press [F1 (RECALL)]
Using the Recall Filter function
1.
In the SCENE MEMORY section, press [DISP].
fig.ScrSceneList.eps
The SCENE screen will appear.
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the scene recall
operation.
4.
2.
Press [F8(RECALL)] to execute the Recall operation.
In the scene list, select the desired scene and press
[F4 (PARAM EDIT)].
The RECALL PARAMETER EDIT popup will appear.
fig.ScrRecallParam_Guide.eps
The operation will be cancelled if you press [F7 (CANCEL)].
A
If the “SCENE/LIB RECALL” button located in the
CONFIRMATION area of User Preferences (p.161) is not
selected, no confirmation message will appear in step 3.
B
C
Noise may occur when you recall a scene, but this is not a
malfunction.
A.Scene indication
This indicates the scene that will be the object of the RECALL
PARAMETER EDIT popup.
You can’t recall a blank scene.
B.M-48 MEMORY
fig.ScrM48MemRecall_Guide.eps
You can also make the setting for recalling scene memories from
a USER button (p. 154).
RECALL button
Memory number
•RECALL button
Add a check mark here if you also want M-48 memory
recall to occur when you recall the scene.
Locking or unlocking a scene
1.
•Memory number
In the SCENE MEMORY section, press [DISP].
This specifies the M-48 memory number that will be
recalled for all connected M-48 units.
fig.ScrSceneList.eps
C.RECALL PARAMETERS select buttons
These buttons specify the parameters that will be recalled if
the recall filter is turned on.
The RECALL PARAMETERS select buttons consist of the
following items
.
The SCENE screen will appear.
2.
Select the desired scene from the scene list.
3.
Press [F7 (LOCK)] to lock or unlock the scene.
Item
INPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
PREAMP
CH1-48
Explanation
Input patchbay setting
Output patchbay settings
Preamp settings
(gain +48V phantom power, pad)
Input channel settings
127
Scene memory
Recalling a scene memory can also be accomplished from the
SCENE QUICKVIEW popup (p. 128).
M-380_e1.book 128 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Scene memory
Item
BUS
EFFECTS
DCA/MUTE
GROUP
Recorder
Talkback/OSC
Explanation
AUX channel, MAIN L/R channel,
MAIN C channel, and MATRIX channel settings
Effect, 31-band GEQ, and external effect insertion settings
DCA group and MUTE group settings
USB memory recorder settings
Talkback and oscillator settings
Momentarily displaying the
scene list
While carrying out other operations, you can temporary display the
scene list and perform scene memory operations.
1.
Hold down [SHIFT] and press [DISP] in the SCENE
MEMORY section.
The SCENE QUICKVIEW popup is accessed.
A
In the RECALL PARAMETER EDIT popup, the function
buttons perform the following tasks.
Button
Operation
[F1 (RECALL FILTER)] Turns the recall filter on/off.
[F7 (CANCEL)]
Cancels the changes and closes the
popup.
[F8 (OK)]
Finalizes the changes and closes the
popup.
3.
Press [F1 (RECALL FILTER)] to turn it on.
4.
Use the RECALL PARAMETERS select buttons to add a
check mark to the parameters that you want to recall.
5.
Press [F8 (OK)] to finalize the changes and close the popup.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], your changes will be cancelled and
the popup will close.
A.Scene list
This lists the scenes. The current scene is shown in green.
The items listed are the same as for the SCENE screen (p. 125).
The functions of the function buttons on the SCENE
QUICKVIEW popup are as shown below.
Button
Operation
[F1 (RECALL)]
This recalls the mixer parameters from the currently selected scene number.
This stores the current mixer parameters into the currently selected scene
number.
Clears the contents of the
scene selected in the scene
list, making it a blank
scene.
Locks or unlocks the scene
selected in the scene list.
Undoes (cancels) the lastperformed recall.
Closes the popup.
[F2 (STORE)]
Scene memory
[F4 (CLEAR)]
[F6 (LOCK)]
[F7 (UNDO RECALL)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
See
page
p. 127
p. 126
p. 130
p. 127
You can also make the setting for accessing the popup from a
USER button (p. 154).
128
M-380_e1.book 129 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Scene memory
Editing the scene list
The SCENE LIST EDIT popup is used to edit the scene list.
Function
[F1 (NAME EDIT)]
Accesses the NAME
EDIT popup, where you
can edit the scene name.
Copies the scene selected in the scene list.
Cuts (removes) the
scene selected in the
scene list.
Pastes the copied or cut
scene to the selected
number.
Inserts the copied or cut
scene to the selected
number.
Erases the content of the
scene selected in the
scene list, returning it to
a blank scene.
Locks or unlocks the
scene that’s selected in
the scene list.
Closes the popup.
[F2 (COPY)]
Accessing the SCENE LIST EDIT
popup
1.
Button
[F3 (CUT)]
Access the SCENE screen.
[F4 (PASTE)]
fig.ScrSceneList.eps
[F5 (INSERT)]
[F6 (CLEAR)]
[F7 (LOCK)]
2.
Press [F3 (LIST EDIT)].
The SCENE LIST EDIT popup will appear.
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Reference
page
p. 129
p. 130
p. 130
p. 130
p. 130
p. 130
fig.ScrSceneListMoveGuide.eps
A
When you use [F2 (COPY)] or [F3 (CUT)], the contents of the
selected scene will be temporarily saved in the clipboard. [F4
(PASTE)] or [F5 (INSERT)] paste or insert the contents that were
saved in the clipboard. The contents of the clipboard will
disappear when you close the SCENE LIST EDIT popup.
Editing the name of a scene
A.Scene list
This is a list of the scenes.
In the SCENE LIST EDIT popup, the function buttons perform
the following operations.
You can assign a name of up to sixteen characters to each scene.
1.
Access the SCENE LIST EDIT popup.
2.
From the scene list, select the scene whose name you want
to edit.
3.
Press [F1 (NAME EDIT)].
fig.ScrNameEdit.eps
The NAME EDIT popup will appear.
4.
Move the cursor to the name edit field, and edit the scene
name.
5.
Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup.
For details on name editing, refer to “Editing a name” (p. 39).
You can’t edit the name of a scene that is locked.
129
Scene memory
In the SCENE LIST EDIT popup you can edit the scene names,
and copy, cut, paste, insert, or clear scenes in the list.
M-380_e1.book 130 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Scene memory
Copying a scene to another
number
1.
Access the SCENE LIST EDIT popup.
2.
From the scene list, select the copy-source scene, and
press [F2 (COPY)].
Cutting a scene
1.
Access the SCENE LIST EDIT popup.
fig.ScrSceneListMove.eps
fig.ScrSceneListMove.eps
A message will ask you to confirm the Copy operation.
Press[F8 (COPY)] to save the selected scene in the clipboard.
2.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled.
3.
Select the desired copy-destination scene from the scene
list.
4.
Press [F4 (PASTE)] or [F5 (INSERT)] to copy the scene.
If you press [F4 (PASTE)], a message will ask you to confirm the
Paste operation.
From the scene list, select the scene that you want to cut,
and press [F3 (CUT)].
A message will ask you to confirm Cut operation.
Press [F8 (CUT)] to carry out the Cut operation. The selected
scene will be cut, and the numbers that follow the selected scene
number will be renumbered downward by one.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled.
Scene memory
Press [F8 (PASTE)] to carry out the Paste operation. The scene
you selected in step 2 will be overwritten onto the number you
selected in step 3.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled.
If you press [F5 (INSERT)], a message will ask you to confirm
the Insert operation.
Press [F8 (INSERT)] to carry out the Insert operation. The scene
you selected in step 3 and all subsequent scene will be
renumbered upward by one, and the scene you copied in step 2
will be copied to the number you selected in step 3.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be canceled.
Following step 2, you can use [F4 (PASTE)] or [F5 (INSERT)] to
paste or insert the cut scene to any desired scene number.
Erasing the contents of a scene
1.
Access the SCENE LIST EDIT popup.
2.
From the scene list, select the scene whose contents you
want to erase.
3.
Press [F6 (CLEAR)].
A message will ask you to confirm the Clear operation.
Press [F8 (CLEAR)] to carry out the Clear operation. The
contents of the scene you selected in step 2 will be erased.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled.
If a scene exists at scene number 299, you won’t be able to use
[F5 (INSERT)] to insert a scene.
You can’t paste to a scene that’s locked.
130
You can’t erase a scene that is locked.
M-380_e1.book 131 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Scene memory
The Global Scope function
• For AUX/MAIN/MATRIX
Item
ATT
EQ
Sends
LCR
Fader
Balance
Limiter
Global Scope is a function that lets you limit the channels and
parameters that will be recalled; its settings apply to all scenes.
The GLOBAL SCOPE popup is used to make settings for the Global
Scope function.
GLOBAL SCOPE popup
2.
fig.ScrRecallSafeGuide.eps
1
2
Setting
Attenuator
Four-band EQ
AUX/MAIN sends
LCR button, Centr
Faders
Balance
Limiter
Channel recall scope buttons
These buttons specify the channels that will be included in the
recall scope.
Select the channels that you want to include in the scope of
recall, and de-select the channels that you don’t want to be
recalled.
3.
Select the DCA/MUTE groups that you want to include in the
scope of recall, and de-select the DCA/MUTE groups that you
don’t want to be recalled.
fig.ScrRecallSafeGuide2.eps
3
DCA/MUTE group recall scope buttons
These buttons specify the DCA/MUTE groups that will be
included in the recall scope.
4
4.
OTHER parameter recall scope buttons
Use these to specify other parameters that will be included in
the scope of recall.
Select the parameters that you want to include in the scope of
recall, and de-select the parameters that you don’t want to be
recalled.
In the GLOBAL SCOPE popup, the function buttons perform the
following operations.
Parameter recall scope buttons
(CH 1–24, CH 25–48, AUX/MAIN/MATRIX tab)
These buttons specify the scope of the parameters that will be
recalled for the channels selected by the channel recall scope
buttons.
Button
[F1 (CH 1–24)]
Select the parameters that you want to include in the scope of
recall, and de-select the parameters that you don’t want to be
recalled.
[F3 (AUX/MAIN/
MATRIX)]
[F2 (CH 25–48)]
[F4 (OTHER)]
The parameter recall scope buttons correspond to the following
parameters.
[F8 (CLOSE)]
• For CH1–CH48
Item
Preamp
Phase
ATT
Filter
Gate
Comp
EQ
Sends
Direct
Fader
Pan
LCR
Function
Displays CH1–CH24 as the channel recall
scope buttons.
Displays CH25–CH48 as the channel recall
scope buttons.
Displays AUX1–AUX16, MATRIX1–
MATRIX8, MAIN L/R and MAIN C as the
channel recall scope buttons.
Displays the DCA/MUTE group recall
scope buttons and the OTHER parameter
recall scope buttons.
Closes the popup.
Explanation
Preamp gain, pad, and +48V phantom power
Phase
Attenuator
Filter
Gate/Expander
Compressor
Four-band EQ
AUX sends
Direct out point
Faders
Pan
LCR button, Centr
131
Scene memory
1.
M-380_e1.book 132 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Scene memory
Using the Global Scope function
1.
In the SCENE MEMORY section, press [DISP].
The SCENE screen will appear.
2.
Press [F6 (GLOBAL SCOPE)].
Synchronizing scene
memories with M-48
memories
fig.ScrRecallSafe.eps
Synchronizing M-48 store
operations
If desired, M-48 memories can be stored simultaneously when a
scene memory is stored on the M-380.
The current memory of each M-48 unit will be stored to the
specified memory number (except for M-48 units whose
MEMORY SAFE function (p. 189) is on).
The GLOBAL SCOPE popup will appear.
Scenes stored by this operation are set so that when they are
recalled, the memories of the M-48 units will also be recalled.
For details, refer to “Synchronizing M-48 recall operations” (p.
133).
3.
Use the channel recall scope buttons of [F1 (CH 1–24)] and
[F2 (CH 25–48)] to specify the channel recall scope.
4.
Specify the scope of parameters that will be recalled for the
channels you selected in step 3 using the channel recall
scope buttons.
1.
In the SCENE MEMORY section, press [DISP].
The SCENE screen will appear.
Use the channel recall scope buttons of [F3 (AUX/MAIN/
MATRIX)] to specify the channel recall scope.
2.
Select the scene number to use as the destination for the
store operation.
3.
Press [F2 (STORE)].
5.
fig.ScrRecallSafeOut.eps
Scene memory
fig.ScrSceneStore2.eps
The SCENE STORE popup will appear.
6.
Specify the scope of parameters that will be recalled for the
channels you selected in step 5 using the channel recall
scope buttons.
7.
Use the DCA/MUTE group recall scope buttons of [F4
(OTHER)] to specify the DCA/MUTE groups that will be
recalled.
fig.ScrRecallSafeOther.eps
4.
Verify the scene name shown in the name edit field, and edit
it if desired.
The M-48 memory will be stored with the same name.
5.
In the M-48 MEMORY section, add a check mark to the
STORE button and specify the memory number.
fig.ScrM48MemStore_Guide.eps
STORE button
Memory number
By holding down [SHIFT] and pressing [ ] or [ ], you can
quickly move the cursor between the name edit field and M-48
MEMORY.
8.
Use the OTHER parameter recall scope buttons of [F4
(OTHER)] to specify the other parameters that will be
recalled.
132
You can press [F6 (MEMORY LIST)] to access the M-48
MEMORY LIST popup, where you can view the M-48’s
memory names.
M-380_e1.book 133 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Scene memory
6.
Press [F8 (STORE)].
Synchronizing M-48 recall
operations
fig.ScrSceneStore_Conf.eps
For each scene memory, you can specify whether M-48 memories
will be recalled, and also specify the memory number that the M-48
units will recall.
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the Store
operation.
If the user preference CONFIRMATION select button “SCENE/
LIB STORE” is unchecked, the Store operation will be executed
without showing the confirmation message.
When you recall the scene that contains this setting, each M-48
will recall its memory (except for M-48 units whose MEMORY
SAFE function (p. 189) is on).
1.
Access the RECALL PARAMETER EDIT popup for the
desired scene.
fig.ScrRecallParam.eps
7.
Press [F8 (STORE)] to execute the Store operation.
The operation will be cancelled if you press [F7 (CANCEL)].
If you want to exclude a specific M-48 unit from the memory
store operation, use the M-48’s MEMORY SAFE function (p.
189).
M-48 MEMORY LIST popup
2.
In the M-48 MEMORY area, add a check mark to the RECALL
button and specify the memory number.
fig.ScrM48MemRecall_Guide.eps
To access the M-48 MEMORY LIST popup, press the SCENE STORE
popup’s [F6 (MEMORY LIST)] button. Here you can verify the
memory name of the M-48’s storage destination.
RECALL button
Memory number
fig.ScrM48MemList_Guide.eps
1
2
3.
Press [F8 (OK)] to finalize the change and close the popup.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], your changes will be cancelled and
the popup will close.
1.
Unit indication
This indicates the M-48 unit that is the object of the M-48
MEMORY LIST popup.
2.
Memory store
This indicates the memory number and name.
The memory of the current memory number is shown in green.
In the M-48 MEMORY LIST popup, the function buttons perform the
following tasks.
Button
Operation
[F1 ( PREV UNIT)]
Change the target unit.
[F2 (NEXT UNIT )]
[F7 (MEMORY SAFE)]
Turns the MEMORY SAFE function on/off
for the target M-48 unit.
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Closes the popup.
133
Scene memory
If you want to exclude the memory of a specific M-48 unit from
recall, use the M-48’s MEMORY SAFE function (p. 189).
M-380_e1.book 134 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
LCR SYSTEM
About the LCR (Left/Center/Right) SYSTEM
By using one of the AUX channels as the MAIN C (Center) channel, this function lets you use three main outputs: MAIN L/R and MAIN C. For
each of the send channels, you can choose to either individually turn on/off the sends to MAIN L/R and MAIN C, or to pan across the three
outputs MAIN L, MAIN C, and MAIN R.
On the M-380 this function is called the LCR SYSTEM.
fig.LCR_CH_Dgm.eps
MAIN
INPUT
PATCHBAY
AUX
SOLO
LR
1 2 (C) 16 LR
LR
1 2 (C) 16 LR
CH 1–48
PREAMP
POST ATT GATE IN GATE OUT COMP OUT
GR
PRE EQ PRE FADER
C SW
EXT FX
FX
INSERT INSERT
PHASE ATT
FILTER
GATE/
EXP
TO
GATE
KEY-IN
POST FADER
GR
MUTE FADER
4BAND
EQ
COMP
LR SW
PAN
CENTER
TO
COMP
KEY-IN
GATE
KEY-IN
COMP
KEY-IN
PAN
(LCR)
LCR
MAIN SW
AUX SEND 1–16
AUX
LINK
SEND SW
PRE EQ
Up to 24 GATE / EXP units are available.
PRE FADER
Up to 24 COMP units are available.
POST FADER
TO AUX
1, 3...15
PAN
SEND SW
PRE EQ
TO AUX
2, 4...16
PRE FADER
POST FADER
PFL(L)
AFL(L)
PFL(R)
AFL(R)
AFL SW
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
SOLO
DIRECT OUT
POINT
TO MAIRIX 1–8,
TO OUTPUT PATCHBAY
POST FADER
MAIN
AUX
fig.LCR_Out_Dgm.eps
MAIN
LR
AUX
SOLO
OUTPUT
PATCHBAY
1 2 (C) 16 LR
MAIN L, R, C
POST ATT
PRE EQ PRE FADER
EXT FX
FX
INSERT INSERT
FADER
BAL
POST FADER
MUTE
4BAND
EQ
ATT
OUTPUT LEVEL
GEQ
INSERT
MAIN
OUT L
LIMITER
AUX SEND 1–16
PRE EQ
SW
AUX
LINK
SEND
PRE FADER
POST FADER
PRE EQ
SW
MAIN
TO AUX 1, 3...7 OUT R
PAN
SEND
PRE FADER
TO AUX 2, 4...8
LCR SYSTEM
POST FADER
MAIN
OUT C
MATRIX SEND 1–8
PRE EQ
MTK
LINK
SW SEND
PRE FADER
TO MTX 1, 3...7
PAN
POST FADER
SW SEND
TO MTX 2, 4...8
SOLO
TO SOLO
TO MONITOR SELECT
TO REC SELECT
AUX 1–16 (One of the AUX is used as MAIN C)
POST ATT
PRE EQ PRE FADER
EXT FX
FX
INSERT INSERT
ATT
FADER
4BAND
EQ
BAL
POST FADER
MUTE
OUTPUT LEVEL
GEQ
INSERT
AUX 1–16
OUT
LIMITER
MAIN SEND
C SW
SEND PAN
PRE EQ
LR SW
LCR
PRE FADER
TO MAIN L
POST FADER
TO MAIN C
MAIN SW
TO MAIN R
PAN
(LCR) CENTER
MATRIX SEND 1–8
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
SWSEND
PAN
POST FADER
MTK
LINK
TO MTX 2, 4...8
SWSEND
TO MTX 2, 4...8
SOLO
TO SOLO L
TO SOLO R
TO MONITOR SELECT
TO REC SELECT
TO FX SOURCE SELECT
LR
MAIN
134
1 2 (C) 16 LR
AUX
SOLO
SOLO
M-380_e1.book 135 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
LCR SYSTEM
LCR SYSTEM settings
The LCR SYSTEM provides the following settings.
• LCR SYSTEM on/off
• Selection of the AUX that will be used as MAIN C by the LCR
SYSTEM
Making the LCR SYSTEM
setting
The LCR SYSTEM setting is made in the SYSTEM screen.
fig.ScrSystem_LCR_Guide.eps
These settings are collectively called the LCR SYSTEM settings.
If you turn LCR SYSTEM off, the system will function as a
conventional system with two main outputs, MAIN L/R.
LCR SYSTEM settings and scene
memories
LCR SYSTEM settings are stored in the M-380’s system parameter
area. Recalling a scene memory will not change the LCR SYSTEM
settings.
1
2
1.
LCR SYSTEM button
This button turns the LCR SYSTEM on/off. A check mark is
shown when the setting is on.
The LCR SETUP popup will appear when you switch LCR
SYSTEM from off to on.
2.
LCR SETUP popup button
This indicates the AUX that is used by the LCR SYSTEM as
MAIN C. Move the cursor here and press [ENTER] to access the
LCR SETUP popup.
When storing a scene
Some parameters will be ignored depending on whether LCR
SYSTEM is on or off.
LCR SYSTEM
Parameters that are ignored
OFF
All parameters for MAIN C
Sends to MAIN C
ON
All parameters of the AUX being used as MAIN C
Sends to the AUX being used as MAIN C
These parameters are initialized when you switch LCR SYSTEM on/
off or when you change the AUX that is being used as MAIN C.
These unused parameters are stored in the scene memory together
with the other parameters.
The LCR SYSTEM on/off status is also shown by the number of
meters representing MAIN levels.
fig.MainMeters_LCR.eps
LCR SYSTEM OFF
LCR SYSTEM ON
LCR SYSTEM
When recalling a scene
If the LCR SYSTEM setting differs between when storing and when
recalling, the mixing state at the time of storing will not be
reproduced completely.
For this reason, a confirmation message like the following will
appear when you recall a scene memory whose LCR SYSTEM setting
differs.
fig.ScrLCRRecallConf.eps
Press [F8 (RECALL)] to execute the recall.
Pressing [F7 (CANCEL)] will cancel the recall operation.
135
M-380_e1.book 136 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
LCR SYSTEM
5.
Turning the LCR SYSTEM on
1.
Make sure that the MAIN level indication shows two MAIN
meters, L and R.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled and
you will return to the LCR SETUP popup.
If the MAIN level indication shows three meters L, C, and R,
then the LCR SYSTEM is already turned on. The following steps
will not be necessary.
2.
Press [F8 (CHANGE)].
The AUX you selected in step 3 will be changed to MAIN C,
and the LCR SYSTEM will turn on.
This operation will initialize the following parameters.
• All parameters of the AUX you selected in step 3
In the SETUP section, press [SYSTEM] to access the
SYSTEM screen.
• Sends from CH1–48 and MAIN L/R to the AUX you
selected in step 3 (send point, send level, send switch)
fig.ScrSystem_LCR_Off.eps
Changing the AUX used as MAIN C
1.
Make sure that the MAIN level indication shows three MAIN
meters, L, C, and R.
If the MAIN level indication shows only the two meters L and
R, then the LCR SYSTEM is turned off. Turn the LCR SYSTEM
on as described in “Turning the LCR SYSTEM on” (p. 136)
3.
Move the cursor to the LCR SYSTEM button and press
[ENTER].
The LCR SETUP popup will appear.
2.
In the SETUP section, press [SYSTEM] to access the
SYSTEM screen.
fig.ScrSystem_LCR_On.eps
fig.ScrLCRSetup_Guide.eps
LCR SYSTEM
A
A.AUX select buttons
This button selects the AUX that the LCR SYSTEM will use as
MAIN C.
4.
Use the AUX select buttons to select the AUX that you want
to use as MAIN C, and press [F8 (OK)].
3.
Move the cursor to the LCR SETUP popup button and press
[ENTER].
fig.ScrLCRSetup.eps
fig.ScrLCRSysConf.eps
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the operation.
In this example, AUX14 has been selected.
You can press [F7 (CANCEL)] to cancel the operation and close
the popup.
136
The LCR SETUP popup will appear.
M-380_e1.book 137 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
LCR SYSTEM
4.
Use the AUX select buttons to select the AUX that you want
to use as MAIN C, and press [F8 (OK)].
fig.ScrLCRSysConf3.eps
fig.ScrLCRSysConf2.eps
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the operation.
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the operation.
In this example, AUX13 has been selected.
You can press [F7 (CANCEL)] to cancel the operation and close
the popup.
5.
Press [F8 (CHANGE)].
The AUX used as MAIN C will be changed to the AUX you
selected in step 4.
4.
Press [F8 (TURN OFF)] to turn the LCR SYSTEM off.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled.
This operation will initialize the following parameters.
• All parameters of the MAIN C
• LCR button, C button, and Centr for CH1–48 and AUX1–16
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled and
you will return to the LCR SETUP popup.
This operation will initialize the following parameters.
• All parameters of the AUX you selected in step 4
• Sends from CH1–48 and MAIN L/R to the AUX you
selected in step 3 (send point, send level, send switch)
Turning the LCR SYSTEM off
1.
Make sure that the MAIN level indication shows the three
meters L, C, and R.
LCR SYSTEM
If the MAIN level indication shows only the two meters L and
R, then LCR SYSTEM is already turned off. The following steps
are not necessary.
2.
In the SETUP section, press [SYSTEM] to access the
SYSTEM screen.
fig.ScrSystem_LCR_On.eps
3.
Move the cursor to the LCR SYSTEM button, and press
[ENTER].
137
M-380_e1.book 138 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
LCR SYSTEM
Operating MAIN C
MAIN C fader operations
To operate the MAIN C fader, you need to use the fader module of
the AUX you specified in step 4 of “Turning the LCR SYSTEM on”
(p. 136). We refer to this as the MAIN C fader module.
Sending signals from CH
and AUX to MAIN L/R and
MAIN C
You’ll use the CHANNEL DISPLAY screen to send signals from
CH1–48 and AUX1–16 to MAIN L/R and MAIN C.
fig.ScrChDispGuide.eps
CH1–CH48
You can operate [SEL], [SOLO], [MUTE] and the fader of this
module.
1
2
Operation of the MAIN C fader is independent of the MAIN
fader, unless you link them as described below.
Operations in the MAIN C
CHANNEL DISPLAY screen
When you press the MAIN C [SEL] button, the MAIN C’s
CHANNEL DISPLAY screen will appear.
3 4
fig.ScrMainc.eps
AUX1–AUX16
3 4
1
2
LCR SYSTEM
MAIN C has parameters that are equivalent to MAIN L/R.
If you turn [F1 (LINK to MAIN L/R)] on, you’ll be able to use the
MAIN fader to control MAIN C while maintaining the fader balance
between MAIN L/R and MAIN C.
1.
Even if [F1 (LINK to MAIN L/R)] is on, you can adjust the
MAIN L/R fader by itself (i.e., without affecting MAIN C) by
touching the MAIN C fader while you move the MAIN fader.
Since this function utilizes fader touch sensitivity, the SYSTEM
screen’s fader touch sensitivity setting must be set
appropriately for this to work.
LCR button
This button specifies how signals are sent from the channel to
MAIN L/R and MAIN C.
LCR
Explanation
button
OFF
The signals sent to MAIN L/R and MAIN C can
be individually turned on/off by using the LR
button and C button.
ON
PAN will operate across the three outputs MAIN
L, MAIN C, and MAIN R. The convergence of the
sound to MAIN C can be adjusted by Centr. The
signals sent to MAIN L/R and MAIN C can be collectively turned on/off by the MAIN button. *
*
138
The MAIN button appears at the position of LR button and C button
when the LCR button is turned on.
M-380_e1.book 139 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
LCR SYSTEM
2.
Centr (center)
This specifies the proportion of the signal that is sent to MAIN
C when PAN is at C (center) as a value in the range of 0%–100%.
Centr
Explanation
0%
No signal will be sent to MAIN C.
100%
When PAN is set to C, the signal will be sent only to
MAIN C.
Parameter changes when
the LCR SYSTEM is on
Added choices related to LCR SYSTEM
(when the LCR SYSTEM is on)
• MAIN C
fig.Pan_LCR.eps
Center 0%
Center 50%
Center 100%
fig.SELMainC.eps
R
L
HT
to R
IG
LEVEL
LEVEL
T
C
PAN
N
C E TE
LEF
L
o
to
ER
R
C
NT
C
PAN
to
E
L
o
G
RI
HT
t
FT
t
to
RI
to L
E
LEVEL
T
GHT
R
to L E
F
C
PAN
This is valid only when the LCR button is on.
3.
LR button
This turns on/off the signal that is sent from the channel to
MAIN L/R. The left/right panning is specified by PAN.
This is shown only if the LCR button is off.
4.
C button
This turns on/off the signal that is sent from the channel to
MAIN C. This signal is not affected by PAN.
This is shown only if the LCR button is off.
R
“MAIN C” is shown as a choice of channel in the following
screens and popups.
Screen/Popup
Location added
AUX/MAIN
Copy-destination channel select butCOPY
ton
FX INSERT/
Insert-destination channel select butSOURCE SELECT
ton
GEQ INSERT SEInsert-destination channel select butLECT
ton
EXT FX INSERT
Insert-destination channel select butSELECT
ton
DCA GROUP ASChannel select button
SIGN
MUTE GROUP
Channel select button
ASSIGN
TALKBACK/OSTalkback output-destination select
CILLATOR
button
Oscillator output-destination select
button
MONITOR
Monitor source select button
RECORDER
Input-source channel select button
SOURCE SELECT
GLOBAL SCOPE
Channel recall scope select button
USER LEVEL
Channel operation scope select button
USER FADER ASAssign channel select button
SIGN
• LCR
“LCR” is shown as a choice of parameter in the following
popups. The two parameters LCR button and Centr are shown.
Screen/Popup
Location added
CH COPY
Copy parameter select button
CH LIBRARY
Recall parameter select button
GLOBAL SCOPE
Parameter recall scope button
USER LEVEL
Parameter operation scope button
• MAIN L/C/R
fig.SELMainLCR.eps
“MAIN L/C/R” is shown for the MONITOR screen’s monitor
source select button. This indicates the stereo mix of MAIN L/R
and MAIN C.
139
LCR SYSTEM
fig.SELLCR.eps
M-380_e1.book 140 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
LCR SYSTEM
• MAIN L+C, MAIN R+C
Output patchbay
LCR SYSTEM OFF
LCR SYSTEM ON
fig.SELMainL_C_R_C.eps
“MAIN L+C” and “MAIN R+C” are shown for the input-source
channel select button of the RECORDER SOURCE SELECT
popup. These respectively indicate a mono mix of MAIN L and
MAIN C, and a mono mix of MAIN R and MAIN C.
How invalid choices are displayed
fig.InvalidSel.eps
Choices (channels or parameters) that would be invalid because of
the LCR SYSTEM setting are shown with a blank name of “---.”
AUX SEND indication
fig.invalidSend.eps
Sends to the AUX used by the LCR SYSTEM as MAIN C are
indicated as “MAIN C,” and cannot be operated.
LCR SYSTEM
FROM AUX send indication in MATRIX
fig.FromMainC.eps
The send from the AUX used by the LCR SYSTEM as MAIN C
to the MATRIX is indicated as “C.” This can be used as a send
from MAIN C to a MATRIX.
140
fig.PB_Guide.eps
The channel that is “MAIN MONO” when LCR SYSTEM is off
will change to “MAIN C” when LCR SYSTEM is on.
M-380_e1.book 141 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
USB memory recorder
About the USB memory
recorder
The M-380 provides a two-track recorder function that uses USB
memory. This function allows you to choose any two sources from
AUX1–AUX16, MATRIX1–MATRIX8, MAIN L, MAIN R, MAIN
MONO, MAIN L+C and MAIN R+C and record the audio signal to
USB memory as a WAV file, or to play back a WAV file from USB
memory.
About WAV files
About USB memory
The USB memory used by the USB memory recorder must be
able to read or write data with sufficient speed when used with
the M-380. To check the speed of USB memory, use the SYSTEM
screen USB MEMORY popup (p. 176).
Using the USB memory
recorder
USB memory recorder settings are made in the RECORDER screen.
The recorded WAV files will be in the following formats.
The sampling frequency of the recorded WAV file will be the same
as the sampling frequency of the M-380.
Sampling frequency
48 kHz
44.1 kHz
Bit depth
16 bits
16 bits
Number of channels
2 channels
2 channels
Accessing the RECORDER screen
1.
In the USB MEMORY RECORDER section, press [DISP].
The RECORDER screen will appear.
fig.ScrRecorderGuide.eps
A
WAV files in the following formats can be played.
If the sampling frequency of the WAV file differs from the sampling
frequency of the M-380 itself, the file will be resampled and played
back.
Sampling frequency
48 kHz
48 kHz
44.1 kHz
44.1 kHz
Bit depth
16 bits
16 bits
16 bits
16 bits
Number of channels
1 channel
2 channels
1 channel
2 channels
The M-380 cannot display filenames that use multi-byte
characters such as Japanese.
Location of the WAV files
fig.RcdrFiles.eps
USB MEMORY
RSS
SONGS
WAV FILE1
WAV FILE2
WAV FILEn
Do not disconnect the USB memory or power-off the M-380
while data is being saved to USB memory. Doing so may
damage the data saved on USB memory.
F
G
A.Song list
This area shows the WAV files in the SONGS folder. The
WAV file currently being recorded or the WAV file selected
for playback will be underlined.
NO.
M-400
E
NAME
TIME
FORMAT
LENGTH
Indicates the alphabetical order of the WAV
files.
Indicates the name of the WAV file.
Indicates the date and time that the WAV file
was last edited.
Indicates the format of the WAV file.
Indicates the time length of the WAV file.
To select songs in the song list, use [F1 (
the USB MEMORY RECORDER section.
)] and [F2 (
] of
)
You can also make the setting for making song selections from a
USER button (p. 154).
141
USB memory recorder
WAV files will be recorded in the “/RSS/M-400/SONGS” folder of
the USB memory, and WAV files in the same folder can be played.
B C D
The USB memory recorder plays WAV files located in the “/
RSS/M-400/SONGS” folder of USB memory in the order of
their name.
M-380_e1.book 142 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
USB memory recorder
B.RECORDER SOURCE SELECT popup buttons
These buttons access the RECORDER SOURCE SELECT
popup, where you can select the input source for the USB
memory recorder. The current input source channel is shown
on the button. This can be set separately for the L and R
channels.
C.RecLev knob
This adjusts the recording level of the USB memory recorder
in a range of -Inf dB–+10.0 dB.
D.REC meter
This indicates the recording level of the USB memory
recorder.
E.Recorder display
fig.ScrRcdrDisp.eps
b
a
fig.RptIconAllOnce.eps
Play to the last song
fig.RptIconAllRpt.eps
Repeat all songs
F.PLAY meter
This indicates the playback level of the USB memory recorder.
G.RECORDER DESTINATION SELECT popup buttons
These buttons access the RECORDER DESTINATION
SELECT popup, where you can select the output destination
for the USB memory recorder. The current output destination
channel is shown on the button. This can be set separately for
the L and R channels.
e
The PLAY meter will not work if no output destination for the
USB memory recorder has been specified by the RECORDER
DESTINATION SELECT popup buttons.
In the RECORDER screen, the function buttons perform the
following operations.
c
d
[F1 (
)]
[F2 (
)]
a.WAV file name
This indicates the name of the WAV file currently being
recorded or currently selected for playback.
b.Recorder status
This indicates the recording or playback status of the USB
memory recorder.
fig.TportIconPlay.eps
[F3 (
)]
Playing
[F4 (REC)]
fig.TportIconRec.eps
Record-ready or recording
USB memory recorder
[F5 (NAME EDIT)]
c.Time indication
This indicates time information for the WAV file currently
being recorded or played.
[F6 (DELETE SONG)]
[F7 (PLAY MODE)]
d.REMAIN
If a WAV file is playing, this indicates the remaining
playback time of the WAV file.
During recording, this indicates the remaining amount of
time that can be recorded to USB memory.
e.Playback mode
This indicates the playback mode. The following playback
modes are provided.
fig.RptIconOnce.eps
Play one song
fig.RptIconRpt.eps
Repeat one song
142
[F8 (PEAK CLEAR)]
Selects the previous WAV
file.
Holding this down during
playback rewinds the WAV
file being played.
Selects the next WAV file.
Holding this down during
playback fast-forwards the
WAV file being played.
Plays the WAV file selected
using the song list.
Puts the USB memory recorder into recording standby.
Accesses the NAME EDIT
popup, where you can edit
the name of the WAV file.
Deletes the WAV file that’s
selected in the song list.
Cycles through the available playback modes.
Clears the level meter’s
peak hold or over indication.
p. 144
p. 144
p. 145
p. 145
M-380_e1.book 143 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
USB memory recorder
Specifying the input source for the
USB memory recorder
By default, the input of the USB memory recorder are specified as
follows.
Input
RECORDER IN L
RECORDER IN R
Input source
MAIN L
MAIN R
The RECORDER SOURCE SELECT popup is used to specify the input.
1.
In the USB MEMORY RECORDER section, press [DISP].
fig.ScrRecorderPlay.eps
Specifying the output destination
for the USB memory recorder
By default, the output of the USB memory recorder are specified as
follows.
Output
RECORDER OUT L
RECORDER OUT R
Output destination
CH45
CH46
The RECORDER DESTINATION SELECT popup is used to specify
the output.
1.
In the USB MEMORY RECORDER section, press [DISP].
fig.ScrRecorderPlay.eps
The RECORDER screen will appear.
2.
Move the cursor to the L channel of the RECORDER
SOURCE SELECT popup button, and press [ENTER].
The RECORDER SOURCE SELECT popup will appear.
fig.ScrRcdrSrcSelectGuide.eps
A
B
The RECORDER screen will appear.
2.
Move the cursor to the L channel of the RECORDER
DESTINATION SELECT popup button, and press [ENTER].
The RECORDER DESTINATION SELECT popup will appear.
fig.ScrRcdrDestSelectGuide.eps
B
A
B.Input source channel select buttons
Use these to select the input source channel for the USB
memory recorder.
When the LCR SYSTEM is turned on, "MAIN L+C" and "MAIN
R+C" are shown for the input source channel select button.
These respectively indicate a mono mix of MAIN L and MAIN
C, and a mono mix of MAIN R and MAIN C.
3.
Move the cursor to the channel that you want to use as the
input source, and press [ENTER] to select it.
4.
Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup.
5.
Make settings for the R channel in the same way.
A.Current destination indication
This indicates the current output-destination channel.
B.Output destination channel select buttons
Use these to select the output destination channel for the USB
memory recorder.
The function buttons perform the following operations.
[F1 (CH 1–24)]
[F2 (CH 25–48)]
[F6 (SELECT NONE)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Displays CH1–CH24 as the outputdestination channel select buttons.
Displays CH25–CH48 as the outputdestination channel select buttons.
Clears the output-destination selection.
Closes the popup.
143
USB memory recorder
A.Current source indication
This indicates the current input source.
M-380_e1.book 144 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
USB memory recorder
3.
Move the cursor to the channel that you want to use as the
output destination, and press [ENTER] to select it.
4.
Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup.
5.
Make settings for the R channel in the same way.
Playing WAV files from USB memory
1.
In the USB MEMORY RECORDER section, press [DISP].
fig.ScrRecorderPlay.eps
Recording to USB memory
1.
In the USB MEMORY RECORDER section, press [DISP].
fig.ScrRecorderPlay.eps
The RECORDER screen will appear.
2.
Press [F1 (
)] or [F2 (
)] to select a WAV file.
The selected WAV file is shown in the sub-display area.
3.
Press [F3 (
)].
The selected WAV file will play.
The sub-display area shows the playback time.
The RECORDER screen will appear.
2.
Press [F4 (REC)].
The USB memory recorder will be in record-ready condition.
3.
Press [F3 (
)].
Recording to USB memory will begin, and the sub-display area
will indicate the recording time.
fig.SubDispRcdr.eps
Pressing and holding [F1 (
)] during playback rewinds the
playback, and pressing and holding [F2 (
)] fast-forwards
it.
Pressing [F4 (REC)] during recording lets you split the WAV
file.
You can also make the settings for assigning the functions of
[F1 (
(p. 154).
You can also make the settings for assigning the functions of [F3
(
To stop recording, press [F3 (
USB memory recorder
4.
)] and [F4 (REC)] to USER buttons (p. 154).
144
))].
4.
)], [F2 (
)] to USER buttons
)], and [F3 (
To stop playback, press [F3 (
)].
M-380_e1.book 145 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
USB memory recorder
Renaming a WAV file
1.
Access the RECORDER screen.
Deleting a WAV file
1.
Access the RECORDER screen.
fig.ScrRecorderPlay.eps
fig.ScrRecorderPlay.eps
2.
From the song list, select the desired WAV file.
2.
3.
From the song list, select the WAV file that you want to
delete.
Press [F5 (NAME EDIT)].
3.
Press [F6 (DELETE SONG)].
fig.ScrNameEdit.eps
fig.ScrDelWavConf.eps
The NAME EDIT popup will appear.
4.
Use the name edit field to edit the file name.
5.
Press [F8 (OK)] to finalize the name you edited and close
the popup.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], your edits will be discarded and
the popup will close.
A message will ask you to confirm that you want to delete the
WAV file.
4.
Press [F8 (DELETE)] to delete the WAV file you selected in
step 2.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the WAV file will not be deleted.
For details on name editing, refer to “Editing a name” (p. 39).
USB memory recorder
145
M-380_e1.book 146 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
User settings
About user settings
Each user who uses the M-380 can have their own individual user
settings. These settings can be used according to the level of the user
to restrict the range of channels and parameters that can be operated,
and to customize the user buttons, user faders, and preference
settings to the user’s liking. User settings include the following
items.
•
User name
•
Password
A name of up to eight characters.
The password that will be required in order to use the user
settings.
•
User level
This setting specifies whether the user has privileges to manage
the M-380, and specifies the range of channels and parameters
that can be operated.
The privileges to manage the M-380 are called ADMIN
privileges.
•
User preferences
This includes user fader, user button, and other preference
settings.
Multiple USERs can be created on separate USB memory
devices so that the USB memory can be used as a physical user
authentication key, or multiple USERs can be created on a
single USB memory device, with passwords used to
authenticate users.
On the M-380, one setting is in use at all times. The user setting is
remembered even when the power is turned off, and the same user
settings will be active the next time the power is turned on.
The user password will not be requested when the power is
turned on. If you want to ensure that the user settings are not
used by unauthorized persons, switch to GUEST before you
turn off the power.
In the default condition, the M-380 will start up with the
ADMIN settings without any password.
Creating and editing user
settings
The USER screen is used to create and edit user settings.
Types of user settings
User settings consist of the following two types of settings.
• User level (p. 152)
There are three types of user settings as follows.
•
ADMIN
These are user settings of a user who manages the M-380. The
settings are stored in internal memory. There are no limitations
to operation; the GUEST user settings can be edited and users
can be created and edited. A password can be specified.
•
GUEST
User settings
This user setting can be used by anyone. The settings are stored
in internal memory. The features available to the GUEST are
specified by an ADMIN user. A password cannot be specified.
A user who can use user settings with ADMIN privileges is
referred to as an ADMIN user.
A GUEST cannot be given ADMIN privileges.
•
USER
These are user settings that an ADMIN user creates on USB
memory. A name of up to eight characters can be assigned. The
user level is specified by an ADMIN user. A password can be
specified.
Any user can make their own user preference settings.
Do not disconnect the USB memory or switch off the M-380’s
power while data is being saved to USB memory. Doing so may
destroy the data saved in USB memory.
146
This specifies whether the user has ADMIN privileges, and
specifies the range of channels and parameters that the user is
allowed to manipulate.
• User preferences (p. 152)
These include user fader, user button, and other preference
settings.
M-380_e1.book 147 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
User settings
Accessing the USER screen
1.
Switching user settings
1.
In the USER section, press [DISP].
The USER screen will appear.
In the USER section, press [DISP].
fig.ScrUser.eps
fig.ScrUserGuide.eps
A
B C
The USER screen will appear.
A.Current user indication
This shows the current user name.
2.
From the user list, select the desired user.
3.
Press [F1 (CHANGE USER)].
If a password has been specified, the ENTER PASSWORD
popup will appear.
fig.ScrUserPasswdGuide.eps
B.C.User list
This lists the user settings saved in internal memory and in
USB memory.
A B
The following items are shown.
FILE NAME
TIME
STATUS
Indicates the name of the user settings.
Indicates the date and time at which the settings were last changed.
If a password has been specified, the indication PASSWORD appears here. In the case of
a user who has ADMIN privileges, ADMIN
is indicated.
In the USER screen, the function buttons perform the following
operations.
[F1 (CHANGE USER)]
[F3 (SAVE CURRENT)]
[F4 (DELETE USER)]
[F5 (USER LEVEL)]
[F6 (USER PREF)]
[F7 (NAME EDIT)]
[F8 (CHANGE
Password)]
p. 147
p. 148
B.Password entry field
Enter the password in this field.
Use the left/right cursor buttons to move the cursor, and use
the value dial to change the character at the cursor position.
“*” is shown for characters not at the cursor position.
p. 149
In the ENTER PASSWORD popup, the function buttons
perform the following operations.
p. 149
[F1 (A/a)]
p. 152
p. 152
[F2 (NUM)]
p. 149
[F3 (DELETE)]
[F7 (CANCEL)]
[F8 (OK)]
Changes the letter at the cursor location between uppercase and lowercase. If the character is not a letter, it will be replaced by the
letter “A.”
Changes the character at the cursor location to
“0.”
Deletes the character at the cursor location.
The characters to the right of the cursor location will be moved toward the left.
Cancels password entry and closes the popup.
Finalizes password entry and closes the popup.
p. 150
147
User settings
[F2 (CREATE USER)]
Switches to the user settings selected in the list.
Creates a new user in
USB memory.
Saves the user settings
temporarily held in internal memory to USB memory.
Deletes the user selected
in the USB MEMORY
user list.
Edits the user level setting.
Edits the user preference
settings.
Accesses the NAME EDIT
popup, where you can edit
the name of the user settings selected in the USB
memory user list.
Changes the password
for the user settings selected in the list.
A.Applicable user indication
This indicates the user settings to which the ENTER
PASSWORD popup applies.
M-380_e1.book 148 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
User settings
4.
When you enter the password and press [F8 (OK)], you will
switch to the user settings you selected in step 2.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the user change will be cancelled.
If the password you entered was incorrect, the following error
message will appear. Press [F8 (OK)] to return to the ENTER
PASSWORD popup.
fig.ScrUserPwdErr.eps
Creating user settings
You can create user settings if the current user setting has ADMIN
privileges.
User settings are created on USB memory.
1.
Connect USB memory to the USB memory connector.
2.
In the USER section, press [DISP].
fig.ScrUser.eps
Switching to user settings in USB memory is performed as
follows.
• The user settings in USB memory are copied to internal
memory.
• Operation will switch to the user settings that were copied to
internal memory.
This means that the current user settings will become the user
settings in internal memory.
The USER screen will appear.
3.
fig.UserLogin.eps
INTERNAL MEMORY
USER
Press [F2 (CREATE USER)].
fig.ScrCreateUser.eps
CHANGE
USER
COPY
USB MEMORY
The CREATE NEW USER popup will appear.
USER
User settings
This allows user settings to be used even after the USB memory
has been exchanged; for example, in order to use the USB
MEMORY recorder. The user settings copied to internal
memory are temporary, and will disappear if you switch to
other user settings.
For this reason, a confirmation message like the following will
appear when you switch to other user settings, suggesting that
you save to USB memory.
4.
Use the name edit field to edit the user name.
For details on name editing, refer to “Editing a name” (p. 39).
5.
Press [F8 (CREATE)] to create user settings.
The user settings will be created in USB memory.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled.
The created user settings will be as follows:
•User level will be all operations permitted, without ADMIN
privileges
fig.ScrUserChgnSave.eps
•User preferences will be the default condition
In this confirmation message, the function buttons perform the
following operations.
[F6 (DON’T SAVE)]
[F7 (CANCEL)]
[F8 (SAVE)]
148
Discards the user settings in internal
memory and switches the user settings.
Cancels the change in user settings.
Saves the user settings from internal
memory to USB memory, and then
switches the user settings.
M-380_e1.book 149 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
User settings
Saving the current user settings in
USB memory
Deleting user settings
Here’s how to delete user settings from USB memory.
Here’s how to save the current user settings in USB memory. This
can be done if the current user setting is other than ADMIN or
GUEST.
You can delete user settings if the current user setting has ADMIN
privileges.
1.
Connect USB memory to the USB memory connector.
fig.ScrUser.eps
2.
In the USER section, press [DISP].
1.
In the USER section, press [DISP].
fig.ScrUser.eps
The USER screen will appear.
2.
From the USB memory user list, select the user that you
want to delete.
3.
Press [F4 (DELETE USER)].
The USER screen will appear.
3.
Press [F3 (SAVE CURRENT)].
fig.ScrCreateUser.eps
fig.ScrUserDelConf.eps
A message will ask you to confirm that you want to delete the
user settings.
The SAVE CURRENT USER popup will appear.
4.
Use the name edit field to edit the user name.
4.
For details on name editing, refer to “Editing a name” (p. 39).
5.
To save the settings, press [F8 (SAVE)].
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], saving to USB memory will be
cancelled.
Editing the name of user settings
You can edit the name of a user. A name of up to eight characters can
be specified.
fig.UsrExists.eps
1.
In the USER section, press [DISP].
fig.ScrUser.eps
To save and overwrite the old data, press [F8 (REPLACE)].
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], saving to USB memory will be
cancelled.
The USER screen will appear.
149
User settings
If you save to identically named user settings in USB memory, a
caution message will caution you that the previous data will be
overwritten.
When you press [F8 (DELETE USER)], the user settings you
selected in step 2 will be deleted.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], deletion of the user settings will be
cancelled.
M-380_e1.book 150 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
User settings
2.
From the user list, select the desired user.
3.
Press [F7 (NAME EDIT)].
A.Applicable user indication
This indicates the user name to which the CHANGE
PASSWORD popup applies.
fig.ScrNameEdit.eps
B.PASSWORD entry field
Specify the password in this field.
Use the left/right cursor buttons to move the cursor, and use
the value dial to change the character at the cursor position.
The characters at other than the cursor position are displayed
as “*.”
The NAME EDIT popup will appear.
4.
Use the name edit field to edit the user name.
5.
Press [F8 (OK)] to finalize the name you edited and close
the popup.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the name edit will be cancelled and
the popup will close.
C. CONFIRM field
This field is used to confirm the entry in the PASSWORD field.
Enter the same password as you did in the PASSWORD field.
If the contents entered in the PASSWORD field and the
CONFIRM field do not match, the following error message
will appear.
fig.ScrUserPwdMatchErr.eps
For details on name editing, refer to “Editing a name” (p. 39).
Changing the password of user
settings
You can change the password for ADMIN or USER settings.
If you have specified a password, an ENTER PASSWORD popup
will appear when you switch user settings.
In the CHANGE PASSWORD popup, the function buttons
perform the following operations.
If you don’t specify a password, you won’t need to enter a password
when you switch users.
[F1 (A/a)]
Editing the password for users other than the current one can be
done only by a user who has ADMIN privileges.
1.
[F2 (NUM)]
In the USER section, press [DISP].
fig.ScrUser.eps
[F3 (DELETE)]
User settings
[F5 (CLEAR Password)]
[F7 (CANCEL)]
[F8 (OK)]
4.
Enter the desired password in password entry fields 1
and 2.
If you don’t want to specify a password, press [F5 (CLEAR
Password)].
5.
Press [F8 (OK)] to finalize the password you specified and
close the popup.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the password edit will be cancelled
and the popup will close.
The USER screen will appear.
2.
From the user list, select the desired user name.
3.
Press [F8 (CHANGE PASSWORD)].
The CHANGE PASSWORD popup will appear.
fig.ScrUserPasswdChgGuide.eps
A B C
150
Changes the letter at the cursor
location between uppercase and
lowercase. If the character is not
a letter, it will be replaced by the
letter “A.”
Changes the character at the cursor location to “0.”
Deletes the character at the cursor location. The characters to
the right of the cursor location
will be moved toward the left.
Clears the password.
Cancels password entry and
closes the popup.
Finalizes password entry and
closes the popup.
M-380_e1.book 151 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
User settings
D.Parameter access permission buttons
These buttons select the parameters that the user will be able
to operate for the channels selected by the channel access
permission buttons. The parameters that are selected here will
be operable.
Limiting the range of
possible operations
You can limit the range of operations that are possible by editing the
user levels to correspond to the user settings.
You edit the user level at the USER LEVEL popup.
•
OTHER tab
fig.ScrUserAccessOthGuide.eps
E
Accessing the USER LEVEL popup
1.
In the USER section, press [DISP].
fig.ScrUser.eps
E.Other parameter access permission buttons
These buttons select other parameters that the user will be
able to operate. The parameters that are selected here will be
operable.
The USER screen will appear.
2.
From the user list, select the desired user.
You can’t specify the user level for ADMIN.
3.
Press [F5 (USER LEVEL)].
The USER LEVEL popup will appear.
This has four tabs: [F1 (CH 1–24)], [F2 (CH 25–48)], [F3 (AUX/
MAIN/MATRIX)], and [F4 (OTHER)].
•
The “TALKBACK” button in the OTHER PARAMETER
ACCESS PERMISSION section enables or disables operation of
the talkback output destination select button (p. 120).
The “OSCILLATOR” button in the OTHER PARAMETER
ACCESS PERMISSION section enables or disables operation of
the oscillator output destination select button (p. 121).
CH 1–24, CH 25–48, AUX/MAIN/MATRIX tabs
fig.ScrUserAccessGuide.eps
A B
C
D
In the USER LEVEL popup, the function buttons perform the
following operations.
[F8 (OK)]
Accesses the CH 1–24 tab.
Accesses the CH 25–48 tab.
Accesses the AUX/MAIN/MATRIX
tab.
Accesses the OTHER tab.
Cancels the changes and closes the
popup.
Confirms the changes and closes the
popup.
A.Applicable user indication
This indicates the user settings to which the USER LEVEL
popup applies.
B.ADMIN button
Select this option if you want to give ADMIN privileges to the
user.
C.Channel access permission buttons
These buttons select the channels that the user will be able to
operate. The channels that are selected here will be operable.
151
User settings
[F1 (CH 1–24)]
[F2 (CH 25–48)]
[F3 (AUX/MAIN/
MATRIX)]
[F4 (OTHER)]
[F7 (CANCEL)]
M-380_e1.book 152 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
User settings
Editing the user level
Editing the user preferences
The USER LEVEL popup is used to edit the user level.
Editing the user fader assignments
You can’t specify the user level for ADMIN.
1.
In the USER section, press [DISP].
1.
In the USER section, press [DISP].
fig.ScrUser.eps
fig.ScrUser.eps
The USER screen will appear.
2.
From the user list, select the desired user.
3.
Press [F5 (USER LEVEL)].
fig.ScrUser.eps
The USER screen will appear.
2.
From the user list, select the desired user.
3.
Press [F6 (USER PREF)].
The USER PREFERENCE popup will appear.
4.
Press the button from [F1 (LAYER 1/2)] through [F3 (LAYER
5/6)] that matches the user layer whose settings you want
to make, displaying the LAYER tab.
ig.ScrUserFaderGuide.eps
B
A
User settings
The USER LEVEL popup will appear.
4.
Use the ADMIN button to specify whether the user will have
ADMIN privileges.
5.
Use [F1 (CH 1–24)] or [F2 (CH 25–48)] to access the CH 1–24
or CH 25–48 tabs, and specify the channels and parameters
to which the user will have access.
6.
Press [F3 (AUX/MAIN/MATRIX)] to access the AUX/MAIN/
MATRIX tab, and specify the channels and parameters to
which the user will have access.
7.
Press [F4 (OTHER)] to access the OTHER tab, and specify
the parameters to which the user will have access.
8.
Press [F8 (OK)] to finalize the changes and close the popup.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the changes will be cancelled and
the popup will close.
If a user who does not have ADMIN privileges attempts to
access the USER LEVEL popup, an ENTER PASSWORD popup
will appear, requesting that the ADMIN password be entered.
• Enter the ADMIN password and press [F8 (OK)] to access
the USER LEVEL popup, where you can edit the user level.
• If you press [F7 (CANCEL], the USER LEVEL popup will
appear in view-only mode. In view-only mode you can’t
edit the user level.
152
C
A.Applicable user indication
This indicates the user settings to which the USER
PREFERENCE popup applies.
B.User layer display
This indicates the user layer number.
C.User fader assign 1–12
This area indicates the channels that are assigned to user
faders 1–12
In the USER PREFERENCE popup, the function buttons
perform the following operations.
M-380_e1.book 153 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
User settings
[F1 (LAYER 1/2)]
[F2 (LAYER 3/4)]
[F3 (LAYER 5/6)]
[F4 (BUTTON 1-8)]
[F5 (BUTTON 9–16)]
[F6 (OTHER)]
[F7 (CANCEL)]
[F8 (OK)]
5.
Accesses the LAYER 1/2 tab.
Accesses the LAYER 3/4 tab.
Accesses the LAYER 5/6 tab.
Accesses the BUTTON 1–8 tab.
Accesses the BUTTON 9–16 tab.
Accesses the OTHER tab.
Cancels the changes and closes the
popup.
Confirms the changes and closes the
popup.
7.
Move the cursor to the desired channel, and press [ENTER]
to select it.
8.
Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to finalize the changes and close the
USER FADER ASSIGN popup.
9.
Press [F8 (OK)] to finalize the changes and close the USER
PREFERENCE popup.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the changes will be cancelled and
the USER PREFERENCE popup will close.
Move the cursor to the desired user fader assignment, and
press [ENTER].
As an alternative to pressing [ENTER] in step 5, you can use the
value dial to edit the user fader assignment.
fig.ScrUserFdrAsgn.eps
B
A
C
Switching to the user layer
1.
Press the USER layer button in the LAYER section (p. 23).
The USER layer button flashes, and the USER layer mode is
activated.
2.
Press the layer button that corresponds to the user layer
you want to switch to.
The selected layer button flashes.
The layer buttons correspond to the user layers as shown below.
The USER FADER ASSIGN popup will appear.
A.Applicable user fader
This indicates the user fader to which the USER FADER
ASSIGN setting applies.
B.Current assignment
This indicates the channel that is currently assigned to the
user fader.
C.Assignment channel select buttons
Here you can select the channel that will be assigned to the
user fader. The selected channel will be assigned to the user
fader.
3.
AUX13-16/MTX layer button
User layer 6
AUX1-12 layer button
User layer 5
CH37-48 layer button
User layer 4
CH25-36 layer button
User layer 3
CH13-24 layer button
User layer 2
CH1-12 layer button
User layer 1
Press the USER layer button.
The USER layer mode is switched off.
User settings
In the USER FADER ASSIGN popup, the function buttons
perform the following operations.
[F1 (CH 1–24)]
[F2 (CH 25–48)]
[F3 (AUX/MAIN/
MATRIX)]
[F4 (DCA)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
6.
Displays CH1–CH24 as the assignment channel select buttons.
Displays CH25–CH48 as the assignment channel select buttons.
Displays AUX1–AUX16,
MATRIX1–MATRIX8, MAIN C as
the assignment channel select buttons.
Displays DCA1–DCA8 as the assignment channel select buttons.
Confirms the changes and closes
the popup.
Use [F1 (CH 1–24)], [F2 (CH 25–48)], [F3 (AUX/MATRIX)], or
[F4 (DCA)] to access the tab that contains the desired
channel.
153
M-380_e1.book 154 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
User settings
Using the user buttons
[F1 (LAYER 1/2)]
[F2 (LAYER 3/4)]
[F3 (LAYER 5/6)]
[F4 (BUTTON 1-8)]
[F5 (BUTTON 9–16)]
[F6 (OTHER)]
[F7 (CANCEL)]
The user buttons are a function for assigning desired functions to the
USER 1 through 8 buttons (p. 27). You can make settings for 16 user
buttons. You can operate user buttons 1 through 8 using the USER 1
through 8 buttons, and you can operate user buttons 9 through 16 by
holding down [SHIFT] and pressing the USER 1 through 8 buttons.
[F8 (OK)]
Editing the user button assignments
1.
Access the USER screen.
5.
fig.ScrUser.eps
Accesses the LAYER 1/2 tab.
Accesses the LAYER 3/4 tab.
Accesses the LAYER 5/6 tab.
Accesses the BUTTON 1–8 tab.
Accesses the BUTTON 9–16 tab.
Accesses the OTHER tab.
Cancels the changes and closes the
popup.
Confirms the changes and closes the
popup.
Move the cursor to the desired user button assignment, and
press [ENTER].
fig.ScrUserBtnAsgn.eps
B
2.
From the user list, select the desired user.
3.
Press [F6 (USER PREF)].
The USER PREFERENCE popup will appear.
4.
C
The USER BUTTON ASSIGN popup will appear.
A.Applicable user button
This indicates the user button to which the USER BUTTON
ASSIGN popup applies.
Press [F4 (BUTTON 1–8)] (or [F5 (BUTTON 9–16)]) to access
the BUTTON 1–8 tab (or the BUTTON 9–16 tab.)
fig.ScrUserBtnGuide.eps
B.FUNCTION list
You can select a function from this list.
A
User settings
A
C.PARAMETER 1 and 2 lists
Here you can select the parameters of the function you’ve
selected in the FUNCTION list.
6.
In the FUNCTION list, select the desired function.
7.
Next, use the PARAMETER 1 list and PARAMETER 2 list to
select the parameters.
For a list of the functions that can be assigned, refer to “User
button functions” (p. 208).
B
8.
Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to finalize the changes and close the
USER BUTTON ASSIGN popup.
A.Applicable user indication
This indicates the user settings to which the USER
PREFERENCE popup applies.
9.
Press [F8 (OK)] to finalize the USER PREFERENCE changes
and close the popup.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the changes will be cancelled and
the USER PREFERENCE popup will close.
B.User button assign 1–8 (or User button assign 9–16)
This area indicates the functions that are assigned to user
buttons 1–8.
In the USER PREFERENCE popup, the function buttons
perform the following operations.
154
M-380_e1.book 155 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
User settings
Editing other user preferences
1.
Access the USER screen.
fig.ScrUser.eps
D.CHANNEL SELECT operation select buttons
These buttons choose the way in which channel selection will
occur. The channel selection mode whose button is selected
will be used.
You can choose one of the following three channel select
modes.
Channel SELECT follows
SOLO button
Channel SELECT changes with Layer Selection
CHANNEL DISPLAY
follows CH SELECT
button
2.
From the user list, select the desired user.
3.
Press [F6 (USER PREF)].
The USER PREFERENCE popup will appear.
4.
Press [F6 (OTHER)] to access the OTHER tab.
DE A
G
F H
These select the channels that will be assigned to the fader module
section when you press the AUX13-16/MTX layer button (p. 23).
4Auxes + 8DCA
4Auxes + 8Matrices
ON
ONCE
SCENE/LIB STORE
SCENE/LIB RECALL
PATCHBAY CHANGE
Scene or library store operations
Scene or library recall operations
Changes to the input/output
patchbay
C.HOME SCREEN select buttons
Use these to select the Home screen (p. 35). You can choose
one of the following.
CHANNEL DISPLAY
METER
The CHANNEL DISPLAY screen
will be the home screen.
The METER will be the home
screen.
SHIFT will be on only while you hold down
[SHIFT].
SHIFT will alternately turn on or off each time
you press [SHIFT].
SHIFT will turn on when you press [SHIFT], and
will turn off when you execute a function associated with SHIFT.
G.STARTUP OPTION select buttons
This makes the setting for the state in effect on powerup. The
selection items are as indicated below.
Recall SCENE
Selecting this check box causes the scene of
the specified number to be recalled on powerup.
USER LAYER
Selecting this check box causes the user layer
of the specified number to be selected.
H.DCA [SEL] select buttons
This selects the operation that pressing [SEL] performs when
DCA1 through 8 has been called up to the top panel's fader
module section (p. 23). The selection items are as indicated
below.
OFF
[SEL] is disabled.
ASSIGN
The DCA GROUP ASSIGN popup (p. 115) is
accessed.
In the USER PREFERENCE popup, the function buttons
perform the following operations.
155
User settings
B.CONFIRMATION select buttons
These buttons select the operations for which a CONFIRM
popup will appear. When you perform an operation for which
the corresponding button is selected here, a CONFIRM popup
will appear, asking you to confirm the operation.
This area contains the following items.
AUX13–AUX16, DCA1–DCA8
AUX13–AUX16,
MATRIX1–MATRIX8
F.SHIFT LOCK select buttons
These change the behavior of the SHIFT button. [SHIFT] will
light if SHIFT is on.
OFF
A.Applicable user indication
This indicates the user settings to which the USER
PREFERENCE popup applies.
The selected channel for each
layer is remembered, and button operations in the layer section will change the
selected channel.
Pressing [SEL] will access the
CHANNEL DISPLAY screen.
E.AUX/MTX LAYER select buttons
fig.ScrUserPrefGuide.eps
B C
[SOLO] will select the channel.
M-380_e1.book 156 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
User settings
[F1 (LAYER 1/2)]
[F2 (LAYER 3/4)]
[F3 (LAYER 5/6)]
[F4 (BUTTON 1-8)]
[F5 (BUTTON 9–16)]
[F6 (OTHER)]
[F7 (CANCEL)]
[F8 (OK)]
Accesses the LAYER 1/2 tab.
Accesses the LAYER 3/4 tab.
Accesses the LAYER 5/6 tab.
Accesses the BUTTON 1–8 tab.
Accesses the BUTTON 9–16 tab.
Accesses the OTHER tab.
Cancels the changes and closes the
popup.
Confirms the changes and closes the
popup.
Move the cursor to the desired item, and press [ENTER] to
change it.
6.
Press [F8 (OK)] to finalize the USER PREFERENCE changes
and close the popup.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the changes will be cancelled and
the USER PREFERENCE popup will close.
User settings
5.
156
M-380_e1.book 157 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
REAC applications and settings
REAC applications
This chapter explains more advanced ways to use REAC.
For basic information about REAC, refer to “Basic knowledge about
REAC” (p. 14).
REAC splitting
By connecting a REAC splitter between the REAC master and slave,
you can split the output from the master REAC device and distribute
it to multiple split REAC devices.
fig.REACsplit.eps
connection between the M-380 and an S-4000S (p. 158). If you
connect an input/output unit to these ports, please observe the
following points.
• You cannot connect multiple master REAC devices or multiple
slave REAC devices to a single REAC system. For example, you
cannot connect a slave REAC device to both the REAC A port
and the SPLIT/BACKUP port.
• When receiving input from a REAC device connected to the
SPLIT/BACKUP port, it will be treated as input from REAC A.
• The same forty channels will be output from the M-380 to the
REAC A port and to the SPLIT/BACKUP port.
The output of REAC A port and SPLIT/BACKUP
port
SLAVE
SPLIT
SPLIT
If the M-380’s REAC setting is FOH or BACKUP(p. 162), the output
to REAC A and the output to SPLIT/BACKUP will include the
following signals.
SPLIT
a. 8 channels of output from the output patchbay to REAC A
b. The inputs from the input/output unit connected to REAC A
c. The inputs from the input/output unit connected to REAC B
REAC SPLITTER
MASTER
To assign a REAC device to operate in split mode, you must set its REAC
mode to Split. The split REAC device will function solely to receive
signals from the master REAC device.
These will be assigned to the REAC A output in the order of “a,” “b,”
and “c,” up to maximum total of 40 channels.
fig.ReacAOuts.eps
(a) OUTPUT PATCHBAY
8ch
1
REAC A OUT
Caution when using a REAC splitter
For a REAC splitter, you can use either the S-4000-SP or an Ethernet
switching hub. Switching hubs that meet the following conditions
can be used with the M-380.
•
1000BASE-T compatible device (IEEE 802.3ab, Gigabit
Ethernet) that supports 100 BASE-TX (IEEE 802.3u, Fast
Ethernet)
•
Full duplex communication (simultaneous bidirectional
communication)
8
9
(c) REAC B INPUT
40
40ch
fig.REACsplit2.eps
BROADCAST BROADCAST MONITOR
CONSOLE 2 CONSOLE 1 CONSOLE
About the M-380’s REAC functionality
SPLIT
SPLIT
SPLIT
S-1608(A)
S-1608(B)
SLAVE
SLAVE
REAC applications and settings
The network transmission time between REAC devices is
approximately 375 microseconds, but if the signal passes through a
REAC splitter (S-4000-SP or an Ethernet switching hub),
approximately 200 microseconds of delay will occur for each device.
A maximum of four REAC splitters can be connected in series.
SPLIT/BACKUP OUT
(b) REAC A INPUT
fig.REACSystem.eps
REAC A SYSTEM
REAC B SYSTEM
REAC SPLITTER
SPLIT
/BACKUP
REAC A
REAC SPLITTER
REAC B
REAC A port, SPLIT/BACKUP port
The REAC A port and SPLIT/BACKUP port belong to the same
REAC A system. From the SPLIT/BACKUP port, you can take the
same output as the REAC A port, or create a redundant REAC
SPLIT
/BACKUP
REAC A
MASTER
REAC B
MASTER
FOH CONSOLE
157
M-380_e1.book 158 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
REAC applications and settings
You can split the outputs assigned to REAC A output by connecting
a REAC splitter between the REAC A master and slave.
To the SPLIT/BACKUP port, you can either connect the split REAC
device directly, or connect a REAC splitter to distribute the REAC A
output to multiple split REAC devices.
Possible uses include using the REAC A port splits for
distribution in the stage area, and SPLIT/BACKUP port for
distribution in the FOH (Front Of House) area.
REAC B port
The REAC B port belongs to the REAC B system, which is separate
from the REAC A port and SPLIT/BACKUP port. The REAC B port
always operates as the master REAC.
REAC B port output
Redundant REAC connections using
the REAC A port and SPLIT/
BACKUP port (Backup Connection)
To create a redundant REAC connection between the M-380 and an
S-4000S, set the M-380’s REAC setting to BACKUP (p. 162). Connect
the M-380’s REAC A port to the S-4000S’ MAIN REAC port, and
connect the SPLIT/BACKUP port to the S-4000S’ BACKUP REAC
port. With these connections, even if the REAC A port –– MAIN
REAC port cable should be broken, the connection will
automatically be switched to the SPLIT/BACKUP port–BACKUP
REAC port cable, and the audio will continue nearly without
interruption.
fig.ReacS4000S.eps
S-4000S
SLAVE
The forty channels from the output patchbay are output to the REAC
B port.
fig.ReacBOuts.eps
OUTPUT
PATCHBAY
BACKUP
MAIN
SPLIT
/BACKUP
REAC A
1
REAC B OUT
8
9
40
40ch
MASTER
REAC applications and settings
If you connect a REAC splitter to the M-380’s REAC B port and
split REAC B, the signals received by the split REAC devices
will be the forty channels of output from the M-380’s output
patchbay to REAC B.
158
M-380_e1.book 159 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
REAC applications and settings
REAC connection examples
Here we show some examples of REAC setups and connections. For
details on REAC settings for the M-380, refer to “REAC settings” (p.
162).
By using the S-1608 and S-4000S-3208 as input/output units,
you’ll be able to receive forty-eight channels of input from the
stage. In this case, the following signals will be received by the
monitor console and broadcast console.
• REAC A port: S-4000S-3208, REAC B port: S-1608
FOH console setup
fig.REAC3208_type1.eps
fig.REACsplit2_2.eps
To Monitor / Broadcast Console
To Monitor / Broadcast Console
S-1608 (A)
SLAVE
S-1608
SLAVE
SLAVE
S-1608 (B)
SLAVE
REAC SPLITTER
REAC SPLITTER
S-4000S-3208
REAC SPLITTER
REAC SPLITTER
FOH CONSOLE
FOH CONSOLE
Set the M-380’s REAC setting to FOH (p. 162). The M-380’s REAC A
and REAC B will both be the master. Connect the REAC A port split
to the monitor console, and connect the SPLIT/BACKUP port to the
broadcast console.
• REAC A port: S-1608, REAC B port: S-4000S-3208
fig.REAC3208_type2.eps
The REAC A (split REAC) of the monitor console and the broadcast
console will receive the following signals.
REAC A INPUT 1–8
FOH console REAC A OUTPUT 1–8
REAC A INPUT 9–24 S-1608(A) INPUT 1–16
REAC A INPUT 25– 40 S-1608(B) INPUT 1–16
REAC SPLITTER
S-1608
S-4000S-3208
SLAVE
SLAVE
REAC applications and settings
If a slave REAC device is not connected to the REAC A port of
the FOH console, you cannot connect a split REAC device to the
SPLIT/BACKUP port.
To Monitor / Broadcast Console
REAC SPLITTER
FOH CONSOLE
159
M-380_e1.book 160 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
REAC applications and settings
Monitor console setup
Broadcast console setup
fig.ReacMonitor_2.eps
fig.ReacBcast_2.eps
S-1608(B)
SLAVE
S-1608(A)
REAC SPLITTER
SLAVE
FOH CONSOLE
S-1608(A) S-1608(B)
SLAVE
SLAVE
SLAVE
SLAVE
MONITOR CONSOLE
FOH CONSOLE
Set the M-380’s REAC setting to MONITOR/BROADCAST A (p.
162). REAC A will be the split, and REAC B will be the master. The
FOH console’s REAC A port split is received by the monitor
console’s REAC A (split). The input/output unit connected to REAC
B port and the rear panel CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks are used as the
outputs of the monitor console.
Set the M-380’s REAC setting to MONITOR/BROADCAST A (p.
162). The M-380’s REAC A will be the split and REAC B will be the
master. The FOH console’s SPLIT/BACKUP port is connected to the
broadcast console’s REAC A port (split). The input/output unit
connected to REAC B port and the rear panel CONSOLE OUTPUT
jacks are used as the outputs of the broadcast console.
The monitor console’s REAC A will receive the following signals.
The broadcast console’s REAC A will receive the following signals.
REAC A INPUT 1–8
FOH console REAC A OUTPUT 1–8
REAC A INPUT 9–24 S-1608(A) INPUT 1–16
REAC A INPUT 25–40 S-1608(B) INPUT 1–16
REAC applications and settings
BROADCAST CONSOLE
REAC A INPUT 1–8
FOH console REAC A OUTPUT 1–8
REAC A INPUT 9–24 S-1608(A) INPUT 1–16
REAC A INPUT 25–40 S-1608(B) INPUT 1–16
You can connect an S-4000S, S-1608, or S-0816 to the REAC B
port as input/output units. Connection of an S-4000H FOH unit
is not supported.
You can connect an S-4000S, S-1608, or S-0816 to the REAC A
port as input/output units. Connection of an S-4000H FOH unit
is not supported.
The sampling frequency of the monitor console must match the
sampling frequency of the FOH console.
The sampling frequency of the monitor console must match the
sampling frequency of the FOH console.
If the M-380’s REAC is set to MONITOR/BROADCAST A, the
SPLIT/BACKUP port cannot be used.
If the M-380’s REAC is set to MONITOR/BROADCAST A, the
SPLIT/BACKUP port cannot be used.
160
M-380_e1.book 161 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
REAC applications and settings
Backup connections with the S-4000S
fig.Reac_Backup_2.eps
S-4000S-3208
S-1608
SLAVE
BACKUP
SPLIT
SLAVE
MAIN
Outputting the FOH split as analog
audio signals or AES/EBU
An S-4000S in which a total of ten output modules (SO-DA4 or
SOAES4) have been installed (giving it forty output channels) can be
connected as a split REAC device, allowing the FOH console’s REAC
A port split or the SPLIT/BACKUP port output to be output as
analog audio signals (SO-DA4) or in AES/EBU format (SO-AES4).
fig.REACAES-EBU_2.eps
SPLIT
S-4000S
(40 output channels)
REAC SPLITTER
S-1608(A)
S-1608(B)
SLAVE
SLAVE
REAC SPLITTER
SPLIT
FOH CONSOLE
Set the M-380’s REAC A to master, and the S-4000S to slave. Connect
the M-380’s REAC A port to the MAIN REAC port of the S-4000S,
and connect the M-380’s SPLIT/BACKUP port to the BACKUP
REAC port of the S-4000S.
With these connections when a REAC splitter is connected between
the M-380 and the S-4000S, and a split REAC device is connected, the
split REAC device will receive the following signals.
REAC INPUT 1–8
REAC INPUT 9–40
M-380 REAC A OUTPUT 1–8
S-4000S INPUT 1–32
(when you use S-4000S-3208)
FOH CONSLE
In this case, the S-4000S will output the following signals.
REAC INPUT 1 - 8
REAC INPUT 9- 24
REAC INPUT 25 - 40
FOH console REAC A OUTPUT 1-8
S-1608(A) INPUT 1 -16
S-1608(B) INPUT 1 - 16
REAC applications and settings
161
M-380_e1.book 162 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
REAC applications and settings
Recording to a PC via the SPLIT/
BACKUP port
You can use a REAC driver with SONAR DAW software to record
from the M-380’s SPLIT/BACKUP port to your computer.
For details, refer to the following website.
http://www.cakewalk.com/
REAC settings
The REAC CONFIG popup of the SYSTEM screen is used to make
REAC settings.
The SETUP tab of the REAC CONFIG popup is used to make REAC
settings for the M-380.
1.
In the SETUP section, press [SYSTEM] to access the
SYSTEM screen.
fig.ScrSystem.eps
DIGITAL IN
S-1608
S-1608
SLAVE
SLAVE
PC
to Ethernet connector
2.
Press [F2 (REAC CONFIG)].
The REAC CONFIG popup will appear.
3.
Press [F1 (SETUP)] to access the SETUP tab.
fig.ScrSysReacConf1Guide.eps
A
FOH CONSOLE
B
fig.REACAES-EBU_2.eps
S-4000S
SLAVE
PC
to Ethernet connector
A.REAC SETUP select buttons
These buttons select REAC settings appropriate for the
desired application.
REAC applications and settings
B.Setup indication
This area shows the content of the REAC SETUP select buttons
at cursor location, and the types of connections.
4.
FOH CONSOLE
Move the cursor to the REAC SETUP select buttons, select
the desired application, and press [ENTER].
You can choose from the following applications.
FOH
MONITOR/
BROADCAST A
BACKUP
(S-4000S)
Use the M-380 as a FOH (Front Of House)
console. Normally, you should choose
this setting.
Use the M-380 as a monitor console or
broadcast console. The split (distribution)
from FOH will be received at REAC A.
Connect the S-4000S using backup connections.
For details on example connections for various applications,
refer to “REAC connection examples” (p. 159).
162
M-380_e1.book 163 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
REAC applications and settings
5.
Use the setup display area to check the input/output unit
connections, REAC mode settings for the input/output
units, and the signal flow.
For basic knowledge about REAC, refer to “Basic knowledge
about REAC” (p. 14).
For more advanced applications of REAC, refer to “REAC
applications” (p. 157).
In some cases, a message like the following may appear after
you select MONITOR/BROADCAST A in step 4.
Checking the devices connected to
REAC A and REAC B
To view information about the devices connected to REAC A and
REAC B, you can use the REAC A tab and REAC B tab of the REAC
CONFIG popup.
1.
In the SETUP section, press [SYSTEM] to access the
SYSTEM screen.
2.
Press [F2 (REAC CONFIG)].
fig.ScrSysReacConf1.eps
This confirmation message will appear if there is a difference in
sampling frequency between the FOH console (master) and the
MONITOR/BROADCAST console (split).
If you press [F8 (SET)], the cutoff frequency of the MONITOR/
BROADCAST console will be set to match that of the FOH
console.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the current sampling frequency
will be maintained. If you cancel, it will not be possible to
receive the split from the FOH console.
The REAC CONFIG popup will appear.
3.
Press [F2 (REAC A)] (or [F3 (REAC B)]) to access the REAC
A tab (or the REAC B tab).
fig.ScrSysReacConfABGuide.eps
A
B
Firmware Version
REAC Version
Firmware version
REAC version
B.List of displayed information
This lists the information that can be viewed for the device
connected to REAC A or REAC B. If the S-4000S is connected,
you’ll be able to view the modules that are installed in SLOT1
- SLOT10.
4.
Note the information for the connected REAC device in the
device indication and the list of displayed information.
163
REAC applications and settings
A.Device indication area
This area shows information on the devices connected to
REAC A or REAC B.
The name of the connected device, the number of inputs and
outputs, and the following information are shown.
M-380_e1.book 164 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
REAC applications and settings
Checking the output to the SPLIT/
BACKUP port
You can use the SPLIT tab of the REAC CONFIG popup to check the
output to the SPLIT/BACKUP port.
1.
In the SETUP section, press [SYSTEM] to access the
SYSTEM screen.
2.
Press [F2 (REAC CONFIG)].
fig.ScrSysReacConf1.eps
The REAC CONFIG popup will appear.
3.
Press [F4 (SPLIT)] to access the SPLIT tab.
fig.ScrSysReacConfSpGuide.eps
A
A.SPLIT output indication
This area shows the signals that are being output to the
SPLIT/BACKUP port.
In the SPLIT output indication area, verify the outputs for
the SPLIT/BACKUP port.
REAC applications and settings
4.
164
M-380_e1.book 165 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Remote
This chapter explains remote functionality and settings.
USB MIDI
Remote functions
By connecting the rear panel USB port to a PC, you can use USB
MIDI to remotely control the M-380.
USB MIDI can transmit and receive the following messages.
MIDI
You can use the rear panel MIDI IN/OUT connectors to remotely
control the M-380 from an external device, or control an external
device from the M-380. You can use either MIDI or RS-232C, not
both. If you want to use MIDI, set the rear panel RS-232C/MIDI
select switch to the MIDI position.
Always make sure to switch off the M-380’s power before you
change the setting of the MIDI/RS-232C select switch.
MIDI can transmit and receive the following messages.
Message
Explanation
Control change
Control of channel faders
and mute
Recall scene memories
Program change
System exclusive
MMC
Control of mixer parameters
Control of the USB memory recorder
Transmitted/
Received
Transmitted/
Received
Transmitted/
Received
Transmitted/
Received
Received only
V-LINK
If you connect a V-LINK compatible video device such as the V440HD to the rear panel MIDI IN connector, you’ll be able to use
your video device to control the volume of specific channels.
The M-380 allows up to eight audio sources to be controlled via VLINK.
The following V-LINK compatible video devices can be connected to
the M-380.
V-440HD (Ver. 2.07 or later)
V-44SW (Ver. 1.07 or later)
V-8
Explanation
Control change
Control of channel faders
and mute
Recall scene memories
Program change
System exclusive
MMC
Control of mixer parameters
Control of the USB memory recorder
Transmitted/
Received
Transmitted/
Received
Transmitted/
Received
Transmitted/
Received
Received only
You’ll need to install the USB MIDI driver on the PC that’s to be
connected to the M-380 using USB. Download the USB MIDI
driver from the Roland website below.
http://www.rolandsystemsgroup.net/
The M-380 can be remotely controlled from M-380RCS via its
rear panel USB connector. M-380RCS is application software
that runs on Microsoft® Windows® XP or Microsoft® Windows
Vista™. It allows you to edit M-380 project files and to remotely
control the M-380. You can obtain the “M-380RCS” software
and the “M-380RCS Users Guide” (PDF version) from the
Roland website listed below. For details on using M-380RCS,
refer to the “M-380RCS Users Guide.”
http://www.rolandsystemsgroup.net/
RS-232C
You can use the RS-232C connector located on the rear panel to
control the M-380 from an external computer or other device. For
details on the RS-232C commands, refer to the “M-380 RS-232C
Reference” (PDF version), which you can obtain from the Roland
website listed below.
Remote
LVS-800
Message
http://www.rolandsystemsgroup.net/
In order to use V-LINK, the MIDI/RS-232C select switch must
be set to the MIDI position.
The M-380 can use MIDI and USB MIDI simultaneously. If the
same message is received via both MIDI and USB MIDI, the
last-received message will be used.
165
M-380_e1.book 166 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Remote
This shows the status of the rear panel MIDI/RS-232C select
switch.
The functionality of the selected connector(s) is active.
Remote settings
The REMOTE popup of the SYSTEM screen is used to make remote
settings.
MIDI
RS-232C
MIDI is selected.
RS-232C is selected.
MIDI settings
The MIDI tab of the REMOTE popup is used to make MIDI settings.
1.
Always make sure to switch off the M-380’s power before you
change the setting of the MIDI/RS-232C select switch.
In the SETUP section, press [SYSTEM] to access the
SYSTEM screen.
C.RECEIVE select buttons
Here you can select the items of MIDI data that the M-380 will
receive.
fig.ScrSystem.eps
FADER, MUTE Change
(CC)
SCENE Change (PC)
Sys Ex
MMC
2.
Faders and mute changes
(control changes)
Scene changes
(program changes)
System exclusive
MMC for the USB memory recorder
D.SEND select buttons
Here you can select the items of MIDI data that the M-380 will
transmit.
Press [F4 (REMOTE)].
fig.ScrSysRemote.eps
FADER, MUTE Change (CC)
SCENE Change (PC)
Sys Ex
Fader and mute changes
(control changes)
Scene changes
(program changes)
System exclusive
E.MIDI OUT/THRU select buttons
These select the function of the rear panel MIDI OUT/THRU
connectors.
The REMOTE popup will appear.
3.
OUT
THRU
Press [F1 (MIDI)].
Use as a MIDI OUT connector.
Use as a MIDI THRU connector.
fig.ScrSysRemoteGuide.eps
C D
E
Remote
AB
The MIDI tab will appear.
A.Dev ID knob
This sets the M-380’s device ID in a range of 1–32. This setting
is common to the MIDI tab, USB MIDI tab, and V-LINK tab.
B.MIDI/RS-232C selection indication
166
If you select THRU, the settings of the SEND buttons will have
no effect.
4.
In the MIDI/RS-232C select indication, verify the status of
the rear panel MIDI/RS-232C select switch.
5.
Move the cursor to the Dev ID knob and specify the device
ID.
6.
Move the cursor to the RECEIVE select buttons for each
item that you want MIDI to receive, and press [ENTER] to
select the button.
7.
Move the cursor to the SEND select buttons for each item
that you want MIDI to transmit, and press [ENTER] to select
the button.
8.
Move the cursor to the desired MIDI OUT/THRU select
button, and press [ENTER] to select it.
M-380_e1.book 167 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Remote
C.SOURCE field 1–8
Here you can specify the channels that will correspond to VLINK sources 1–8, and the maximum level and minimum
level for each channel.
V-LINK settings
To make V-LINK settings, use the V-LINK tab of the REMOTE
popup.
1.
fig.ScrSysRmtVLSrcGuide.eps
b
In the SETUP section, press [SYSTEM] to access the
SYSTEM screen.
a
c
fig.ScrSystem.eps
a.V-LINK SOURCE CHANNEL SELECT popup button
2.
This accesses the V-LINK SOURCE CHANNEL SELECT
popup, where you can select the channel that corresponds to
each source.
Press [F4 (REMOTE)].
fig.ScrSysRemote.eps
b.MaxLev knob
This specifies the level when the source level is at the
maximum (100%), in a range of -Inf dB–+10.0 dB.
c.MinLev knob
This specifies the level when the source level is at the
minimum (0%), in a range of -Inf dB–+10.0 dB.
The REMOTE popup will appear.
3.
Move the cursor to the Dev ID knob and specify the device
ID.
5.
Move the cursor to the V-LINK SOURCE CHANNEL SELECT
popup button for the desired source, and press [ENTER].
fig.ScrSysVlnkSrcSel.eps
Press [F3 (V-LINK)].
A
fig.ScrSysRmtVLnkGuide.eps
AB
4.
B
C
C
The V-LINK tab will appear.
A.V-LINK button
Turns the V-LINK function on/off.
B.Dev ID knob
This specifies the device ID of the M-380 in a range of 1–32.
This setting is common to the MIDI tab, the USB MIDI tab,
and the V-LINK tab.
A.Current V-LINK source channel indication
This indicates the current V-LINK source channel.
B.Applicable V-LINK source indication
This indicates the V-LINK source to which the settings of the
V-LINK SOURCE SELECT popup will apply.
C.SOURCE CHANNEL select buttons
These buttons select the channel that will correspond to the
source.
167
Remote
The V-LINK SOURCE CHANNEL SELECT popup will appear.
M-380_e1.book 168 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Remote
In the V-LINK SOURCE CHANNEL SELECT popup, the
function buttons perform the following operations.
[F1 (CH1–24)]
[F2 (CH25–48)]
[F6 (SELECT NONE)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
6.
3.
A
Displays CH1–CH24 as the
SOURCE CHANNEL select buttons.
Displays CH25–CH48 as the
SOURCE CHANNEL select buttons.
Clears the source channel selection.
Closes the popup.
B C
Move the cursor to the desired channel, and press [ENTER]
to select it.
The USB MIDI tab will appear.
If you’re using a stereo source, specify one of the stereo-linked
channels.
7.
Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the V-LINK SOURCE CHANNEL
SELECT popup.
8.
Move the cursor to MaxLev in the desired SOURCE field,
and use the value dial to specify the maximum level of the
channel.
9.
Press [F2 (USB MIDI)].
fig.ScrSysRemoteUSBGuide.eps
A.Dev ID knob
This specifies the device ID of the M-380 in a range of 1–32.
This setting is common to the MIDI tab, the USB MIDI tab,
and the V-LINK tab.
B.RECEIVE select buttons
These buttons select the items that USB MIDI will receive.
Move the cursor to MinLev in the desired SOURCE field,
and use the value dial to specify the minimum level of the
channel.
FADER, MUTE Change (CC)
SCENE Change (PC)
10. Move the cursor to the V-LINK button and press [ENTER] to
turn it on.
Sys Ex
MMC
USB MIDI settings
C.SEND select buttons
These buttons select the items that USB MIDI will transmit.
To make USB MIDI settings, use the USB MIDI tab of the REMOTE
popup.
1.
FADER, MUTE Change (CC)
In the SETUP section, press [SYSTEM] to access the
SYSTEM screen.
SCENE Change (PC)
fig.ScrSystem.eps
Remote
Sys Ex
2.
Press [F4 (REMOTE)].
The REMOTE popup will appear.
168
Fader and mute changes
(control changes)
Scene changes
(program changes)
System exclusive
MMC for the USB memory
recorder
Fader and mute changes
(control changes)
Scene changes
(program changes)
System exclusive
4.
Move the cursor to the Dev ID knob and specify the device
ID.
5.
Move the cursor to the RECEIVE select buttons for each
item that you want USB MIDI to receive, and press [ENTER]
to select the button.
6.
Move the cursor to the SEND select buttons for each item
that you want USB MIDI to transmit, and press [ENTER] to
select the button.
M-380_e1.book 169 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Remote
RS-232C settings
Always make sure to switch off the M-380’s power before you
change the setting of the MIDI/RS-232C select switch.
The RS-232C tab of the REMOTE popup is used to make RS-232C
settings.
1.
B.RS-232C rate select buttons
These buttons specify the RS-232C communication speed.
Choose the setting that matches the speed setting on your
computer. Make sure to switch OFF the M-380’s power before
operating the MIDI/RS-232C select switch.
In the SETUP section, press [SYSTEM] to access the
SYSTEM screen.
fig.ScrSystem.eps
2.
4.
In the MIDI/RS-232C select indication, verify the status of
the rear panel MIDI/RS-232C select switch.
5.
Move the cursor to the RS-232C rate select button that
matches the communication speed of your computer, and
press [ENTER] to select the button.
Press [F4 (REMOTE)].
fig.ScrSysRemote.eps
The REMOTE popup will appear.
3.
Press [F4 (RS-232C)].
fig.ScrSysRS232CGuide.eps
A
B
Remote
The RS-232C tab will appear.
A.MIDI/RS-232C selection indication
This shows the status of the rear panel MIDI/RS-232C select
switch.
The functionality of the selected connector(s) is active.
MIDI
RS-232C
MIDI is selected.
RS-232C is selected.
169
M-380_e1.book 170 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Other settings and functions
This chapter explains other settings and functions.
Viewing system information
and making basic mixer
settings
Accessing the SYSTEM screen
1.
In the SETUP section, press [SYSTEM].
The SYSTEM screen will appear.
The MIXER CONFIG field of the SYSTEM screen is used to view
system information and make basic mixer settings.
fig.ScrSystemGuide.eps
A
B
C
1.
In the SETUP section, press [SYSTEM].
The SYSTEM screen will appear.
fig.ScrSysMixConfGuide.eps
B A C D
In the SYSTEM screen you can view or edit various types of information.
A.MIXER CONFIG field
Here you can view system information and make basic mixer
settings. (p. 170)
A.INFORMATION area
This area shows the firmware version and the state of the
internal lithium battery.
B.BRIGHTNESS field
Here you can adjust the brightness of the panel, and display. (p. 171)
C.FADER TOUCH SENSE field
Here you can adjust the touch sensitivity of the faders. (p. 171)
B.INTERNAL SAMPLING FREQ select buttons
These buttons select the sampling frequency at which the M380 will operate.
In the SYSTEM screen, the function buttons perform the
following operations.
[F1 (INIT)]
[F2 (REAC
CONFIG)]
[F3 (LOAD/
SAVE)]
Other settings and functions
[F4 (REMOTE)]
[F5 (DATE
TIME)]
[F6 (USB
MEMORY)]
[F7 (SYSTEM
UPDATE)]
[F8 (LOCK
CONSOLE)]
Accesses the INITIALIZE popup, where you can initialize the
mixer settings.
Accesses the REAC CONFIG
popup, where you can make
REAC settings.
Accesses the LOAD/SAVE
popup, where you can load or
save mixer settings.
Accesses the REMOTE popup,
where you can make remote settings.
Accesses the DATE&TIME popup, where you can specify the
date and time.
Accesses the USB MEMORY
popup, where you can manage
USB memory.
Updates the system program.
p. 172
Locks the console to prohibit
operation.
p. 179
D.LCR SETUP popup button
This indicates the AUX that is used by the LCR SYSTEM as
MAIN C. Move the cursor here and press [ENTER] to access
the LCR SETUP popup.
p. 162
p. 173
p. 166
p. 175
p. 176
SYSTEM UPDATE is for future system program updates. For
details on the system update procedure, refer to the operating
instructions provided with the updater.
170
C.LCR SYSTEM button
This button turns the LCR SYSTEM on/off. A check mark is
shown when the setting is on.
For more information about the LCR SYSTEM button and the
LCR SETUP popup button, refer to .p. 135
2.
View the system information in the INFORMATION area.
The INFORMATION area shows the following items.
System Version
Panel Version
Fader Version
Lithium Battery
System firmware version
Panel firmware version
Version of the fader firmware
Status of the internal lithium battery
If the Battery indication shows OK, the internal lithium battery
voltage is satisfactory.
If this shows LOW or NG, the voltage is low. Replace the
internal lithium battery as described in “About the internal
lithium battery” (p. 19).
M-380_e1.book 171 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Other settings and functions
3.
Use the INTERNAL SAMPLING FREQ select buttons to
select either 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz as the sampling frequency
at which the M-380 will operate.
fig.ScrSetFreqConf.eps
Adjusting the fader touch
sensitivity
To adjust the touch sensitivity of the faders, use the FADER TOUCH
SENS field of the SYSTEM screen.
1.
Access the SYSTEM screen.
fig.ScrSysTouchGuide.eps
A
A message will ask you to confirm that you want to change the
sampling frequency.
Press [F8 (SET)] to switch to the sampling frequency you
selected in step 3.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the change will be cancelled.
The internal word clock setting also determines the sampling
frequency of the M-380’s DIGITAL OUT connector and the
sampling frequency for recording and playback on the USB
memory recorder.
Adjusting the brightness of the
panel and display
The BRIGHTNESS field of the SYSTEM screen is used to adjust the
brightness of the panel, and display.
1.
Access the SYSTEM screen.
A.SENS knob
This adjusts the touch sensitivity of the faders.
2.
Move the cursor to the SENS knob, and use the value dial to
adjust the touch sensitivity of the faders.
Higher values produce greater sensitivity.
fig.ScrSysBrightGuide.eps
A
B
If this is set to 0, fader touch sensitivity will be off.
If you turn [TOUCH SELECT] on in the CHANNEL EDIT
section, you’ll be able to select a channel by touching its fader.
If a channel is not selected when you touch its fader, increase
the setting of the SENS knob.
If the faders are too sensitive, turn down the SENS knob.
A.PANEL knob
This adjusts the brightness of the panel buttons and meters.
B.DISPLAY knob
This adjusts the brightness of the display.
2.
Move the cursor to the PANEL knob, and use the value
knob to adjust the brightness of the panel buttons and
meters.
Higher values produce greater brightness.
3.
Move the cursor to the DISPLAY knob, and use the value
dial to adjust the brightness of the display.
Higher values produce greater brightness.
171
Other settings and functions
Depending on the environment in which you’re using the M380, fader touch sensitivity may not operate correctly, and the
fader motor may operate incorrectly while you’re operating the
fader. If this occurs, use the M-380 with the SENS knob set to 0
so that touch sensitivity is turned off.
M-380_e1.book 172 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Other settings and functions
5.
Initializing the mixer settings
1.
When you press [F8 (INIT)], the section you selected in step
3 will be initialized.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled.
In the SETUP section, press [SYSTEM].
fig.ScrSystem.eps
If you attempt to initialize the scenes or libraries when a locked
scene or library exists, the following caution message will
appear.
fig.ScrInitLockedCaut.eps
If you press [F6 (DON’T INIT)], the locked data will not be
initialized; only the data that was not locked will be initialized.
The SYSTEM screen will appear.
2.
Press [F1 (INIT)].
The INITIALIZE popup will appear.
fig.ScrInitGuide.eps
A
A.Initialize section select buttons
These buttons select the section(s) to be initialized.
3.
Use the initialize section select buttons to select the
section(s) that you want to initialize.
You can select the following sections.
MIXER PARAMETER
SYSTEM SETTING
SCENE MEMORY
ALL LIBRARY
USER PREFERENCE
The mixer parameters will be initialized.
The system settings will be initialized.
The scene memory will be erased.
All user libraries will be initialized.
The user preferences will be initialized.
SYSTEM SETTING includes the following items.
•The M-380’s sampling frequency setting
Other settings and functions
•Panel, and display brightness settings
•Fader touch sensitivity setting
•REAC settings
•Remote settings
4.
Press [F8 (OK)].
fig.ScrInitConf.eps
A message will ask you to confirm that you want to initialize
the settings.
172
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the initialization operation will be
cancelled.
If you press [F8 (INIT)], all data (including the locked data) will
be initialized.
M-380_e1.book 173 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Other settings and functions
Saving and loading mixer
settings
You can use USB memory to save or load mixer settings as a project
file. The LOAD/SAVE popup of the SYSTEM screen is used to save
or load mixer settings.
LOAD/SAVE popup
[F1 (LOAD)]
[F2 (SAVE)]
[F3 (NAME EDIT)]
[F4 (DELETE)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Loads the project file that is selected in the list.
Saves the current mixer settings as
a project file to USB memory.
Opens the NAME EDIT popup
where you can edit the name of the
project file selected in the list.
Deletes the project file that is selected in the list.
Closes the popup.
p. 174
p. 173
p. 174
p. 175
fig.ScrSysLoadSaveGuide.eps
1
2
Saving mixer settings to USB
memory
1.
In the SETUP section, press [SYSTEM].
fig.ScrSystem.eps
1.
Project file list
This lists the project file that are saved in USB memory.
2.
LOAD SECTION select buttons
Use these buttons to select the section(s) for which you want to
load mixer settings.
The SYSTEM screen will appear.
2.
Press [F3 (LOAD/SAVE)].
fig.ScrSysLoadSave.eps
You can select the following sections.
Mixer parameters
System settings
Scene memories
Input patchbay library
Output patchbay library
Channel library
AUX/MAIN library
Gate/Expander library
Compressor library
Limiter library
EQ library
Effect library
GEQ library
M-48 Library
User preference
The LOAD/SAVE popup will appear.
3.
The libraries that can be selected by the LOAD SECTION select
buttons are USER libraries.
In the LOAD/SAVE popup, the function buttons perform the
following operations.
Press [F2 (SAVE)].
The PROJECT SAVE popup will appear.
4.
Use the name edit field to edit the name of the project files.
For details on name editing, refer to “Editing a name” (p. 39).
173
Other settings and functions
MIXER PARAMETER
SYSTEM SETTING
SCENE MEMORY
IN PATCH LIBRARY
OUT PATCH LIBRARY
CH LIBRARY
AUX/MAIN LIBRARY
GATE LIBRARY
COMP LIBRARY
LIMITER LIBRARY
EQ LIBRARY
FX LIBRARY
GEQ LIBRARY
M-48 LIBRARY
USER PREFERENCE
M-380_e1.book 174 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Other settings and functions
5.
Press [F8 (SAVE)] to execute the Save; a “now processing”
message will indicate the progress of the operation. When
saving is completed, the progress indication will close.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled.
5.
Do not disconnect the USB memory or switch off the M-380’s
power while data is being saved to USB memory. Doing so may
destroy the data saved in USB memory.
Mixer settings are saved in the “RSS/M-400/PROJ” folder of
the USB memory. All settings except for user settings are saved.
A message will ask you to confirm that you want to load the
mixer settings.
6.
It’s a good idea to save your mixer settings, since in the unlikely
event that the M-380 should malfunction, this will allow you to
move your settings to a backup M-380 unit and continue
operating.
Loading mixer settings from USB
memory
In the SETUP section, press [SYSTEM].
Press [F8 (LOAD)] to execute the Load; a “now processing”
message will indicate the progress of the operation. When
loading is completed, the progress indication will close.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled.
Do not disconnect the USB memory or switch off the M-380’s
power while data is being loaded from USB memory. Doing so
may destroy the data saved in USB memory.
Renaming a project file
1.
1.
Press [F1 (LOAD)].
fig.ScrLoadConf.eps
Access the SYSTEM screen.
fig.ScrSystem.eps
fig.ScrSystem.eps
The SYSTEM screen will appear.
2.
2.
Press [F3 (LOAD/SAVE)].
fig.ScrSysLoadSave.eps
Press [F3 (LOAD/SAVE)].
Other settings and functions
fig.ScrSysLoadSave.eps
The LOAD/SAVE popup will appear.
The LOAD/SAVE popup will appear.
3.
Move the cursor to the project file list, and select the file
that you want to load.
3.
Move the cursor to the project file list, and select the project
file that you want to rename.
4.
Press [F3 (NAME EDIT)].
fig.ScrNameEdit.eps
4.
Move the cursor to the LOAD SECTION select buttons, and
select the sections that you want to load.
The NAME EDIT popup will appear.
174
M-380_e1.book 175 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Other settings and functions
5.
Use the name edit field to edit the name of the project files.
You can specify a name of up to eight characters.
For details on name editing, refer to “Editing a name” (p. 39).
6.
Press [F8 (OK)] to finalize the name you edited and close
the popup.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the name edit will be cancelled and
the popup will close.
Date and time settings
Use the DATE&TIME popup of the SYSTEM screen to set the date
and time.
1.
In the SETUP section, press [SYSTEM].
fig.ScrSystem.eps
Delete a project file
1.
Access the SYSTEM screen.
fig.ScrSystem.eps
The SYSTEM screen will appear.
2.
Press [F5 (DATE TIME)].
The DATE&TIME popup will appear.
fig.ScrSysDateTimeGuide.eps
2.
A
B
C
E
F
G
Press [F3 (LOAD/SAVE)].
fig.ScrSysLoadSave.eps
D
The LOAD/SAVE popup will appear.
3.
Move the cursor to the project file list, and select the project
file that you want to delete.
4.
Press [F4 (DELETE)].
A.HOUR knob
This specifies the current hour in a range of 0–23.
B.MINUTE knob
This specifies the current minute in a range of 0–59.
A message will ask you to confirm the delete file operation.
5.
Press [F8 (DELETE)] to carry out the delete operation.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled.
Other settings and functions
C.SECOND knob
This specifies the current second in a range of 0–59.
D.FORMAT select buttons
These buttons select the format of the date.
You can choose one of the following formats.
MM/DD/YYYY
DD/MM/YYYY
YYYY/MM/DD
Month/Date/Year
Date/Month/Year
Year/Month/Date
E.YEAR knob
This specifies the year in a range of 2000 to 2099.
F.MONTH knob
175
M-380_e1.book 176 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Other settings and functions
This specifies the month in a range of 1–12.
G.DATE knob
This specifies the date in a range of 1–31.
fig.ScrSysUSBMemGuide.eps
A
B
In the DATE&TIME popup, the function buttons perform the
following operations.
[F6 (SET)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Finalizes the specified date and time.
Closes the popup.
3.
Use the HOUR, MINUTE, and SECOND knobs to specify the
time.
4.
Use the FORMAT select buttons to select the date format.
5.
Use the YEAR, MONTH, and DATE knobs to specify the
date.
6.
Press [F6 (SET)] to finalize the setting.
Managing USB memory
The USB MEMORY popup of the SYSTEM SCREEN is used to
perform USB memory management.
Do not disconnect the USB memory or switch off the M-380’s
power while data is being saved to USB memory or being
loaded from it. Doing so may destroy the data saved in USB
memory.
Accessing the USB MEMORY popup
1.
In the SETUP section, press [SYSTEM].
fig.ScrSystem.eps
A.USB memory information
This area shows information about the USB memory.
The following information is shown.
Format
Volume Size
Free Size
B.File list
This area shows the files in the USB memory.
If you move the cursor to a folder and press [ENTER], you’ll
move to the level below that folder. If you move the cursor to
“..” and press [ENTER], you’ll move to the level above the
current folder.
In the USB MEMORY popup, the function buttons perform the
following operations.
[F1 (FORMAT)]
[F2 (MAKE FOLDER)]
[F3 (NAME EDIT)]
[F4 (COPY)]
[F5 (PASTE)]
[F6 (DELETE)]
Other settings and functions
[F7 (SPEED TEST)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
The SYSTEM screen will appear.
2.
Press [F6 (USB MEMORY)].
The USB MEMORY popup will appear.
176
Type of format
Total capacity of USB memory
Available space in USB memory
Formats the USB memory.
Creates a folder in the list.
p. 177
p. 177
Accesses the NAME EDIT
popup, where you can edit
the file name.
Copies the file at the cursor
position in the list.
Pastes the copied file into
the list.
Deletes the file at the cursor position in the list.
Tests the speed of USB
memory.
Closes the popup.
p. 177
p. 178
p. 178
p. 178
M-380_e1.book 177 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Other settings and functions
4.
Use the name edit field to edit the name.
Formatting USB memory
1.
For details on name editing, refer to “Editing a name” (p. 39).
Access the USB MEMORY popup.
fig.ScrSysUSBMem.eps
5.
Press [F8 (OK)] to create the folder and close the popup.
Pressing [F7 (CANCEL)] will cancel the operation and close the
popup.
Editing the file or folder name
1.
Access the USB MEMORY popup.
fig.ScrSysUSBMem.eps
2.
Press [F1 (FORMAT)].
fig.ScrFormatConf.eps
A message will ask you to confirm that you want to format the
USB memory.
3.
Press [F8 (FORMAT)] to carry out the Format operation.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled.
A progress message will indicate the state of formatting.
2.
In the file list, move the cursor to the desired file or folder.
3.
Press [F3 (NAME EDIT)].
fig.ScrNameEdit.eps
When the “Completed” indication appears, formatting is complete.
Do not disconnect the USB memory or switch off the M-380’s
power while USB memory is being formatted.
The NAME EDIT popup will appear.
Creating a folder
1.
4.
Access the USB MEMORY popup.
Use the name edit field to edit the name. You can specify a
name of up to twelve characters.
fig.ScrSysUSBMem.eps
Even if the original name exceeded twelve characters, the name
after editing will not exceed twelve characters.
5.
Press [F8 (OK)] to finalize the name you edited and close
the popup.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the name edit will be cancelled and
the popup will close.
2.
In the file list, move to the level at which you want to create
a folder.
3.
Press [F2 (MAKE FOLDER)].
fig.ScrNameEdit.eps
The MAKE FOLDER popup will appear.
177
Other settings and functions
For details on name editing, refer to “Editing a name” (p. 39).
M-380_e1.book 178 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Other settings and functions
Copying a file
1.
Access the USB MEMORY popup.
Deleting a file
1.
Access the USB MEMORY popup.
2.
In the file list, move the cursor to the file you want to delete.
3.
Press [F6 (DELETE)].
fig.ScrSysUSBMem.eps
A message will ask you to confirm the Delete operation.
Press [F8 (DELETE)] to carry out the Delete operation.
2.
In the file list, move the cursor to the desired file.
You can’t copy a folder.
3.
Press [F4 (COPY)].
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled.
Testing the speed of USB memory
Here’s how to test your USB memory’s reading and writing speed to
verify whether it can be used by the USB memory recorder for
playback and recording.
1.
Access the USB MEMORY popup.
2.
Press [F7 (SPEED TEST)].
A “now processing” message will appear, and the USB memory
will be tested. When the test is completed, the results will be
displayed.
A message will ask you to confirm the Copy operation.
Press [F8 (COPY)] to carry out the Copy operation. The file you
selected in step 2 will be copied to the clipboard.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled.
4.
In the file list, move to the level at which you want to paste
the copied file.
5.
Press [F5 (PASTE)].
fig.ScrPasteConf.eps
Playing
Speed
Recording
Speed
A message will ask you to confirm the Paste operation.
Press [F8 (PASTE)] to carry out the Paste operation.
3.
Indicates whether the USB memory can be
used for playback by the USB memory recorder. If this is OK, the memory can be used.
Indicates whether the USB memory can be
used for recording by the USB memory recorder. If this is OK, the memory can be used.
Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the popup.
Other settings and functions
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled.
You can’t paste while you playing/recording the USB memory
recorder.
If the test result is “NG” (Not Good), we do not recommend
that you use this USB memory with the USB memory recorder.
In order for the speed of USB memory to be tested, the USB
memory must have several MB of free space.
178
M-380_e1.book 179 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Other settings and functions
Console Lock
You can lock the console to prevent it from being operated. If a
password has been specified for the current user settings, you will
need to enter the password in order to unlock the console.
Unlocking the console
1.
When the console is locked, press [ENTER].
fig.ScrSysLockCons.eps
If you turn off the power while the console is locked, the
console lock setting will be defeated the next time you turn on
the power.
Locking the console
1.
Access the SYSTEM screen.
fig.ScrSystem.eps
fig.ScrUserPasswd.eps
If a password has been specified for the current user settings,
the ENTER PASSWORD popup will appear.
Enter the user password and press [F8 (OK)].
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled.
2.
Press [F8 (LOCK CONSOLE)].
2.
The console will be unlocked.
fig.ScrUserPasswd.eps
If a password has been specified for the current user settings,
the ENTER PASSWORD popup will appear.
Enter the user password and press [F8 (OK)].
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled.
fig.ScrSysLockCons.eps
Other settings and functions
The console will be locked.
179
M-380_e1.book 180 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Other settings and functions
Help function
The Help function explains how to use the M-380.
The Help contents are provided only in English.
Using the Help function
Help shortcuts
By holding down [HELP] and pressing a top panel button, you can
access the Help content related to that button.
You can use the following buttons as Help shortcuts.
• [EFFECTS]
• [METER]
• [SYSTEM]
• [PATCHBAY]
1.
Press [HELP].
• GROUP section [DCA]
fig.ScrHelpContGuide.eps
• GROUP section [MUTE]
A
• COMP section [DISP]
• GATE section [DISP]
• EQ section [DISP]
• AUX SENDS section [DISP]
• SCENE section [DISP]
• USER section [DISP]
• RECORDER section [DISP]
• TALKBACK/OSC section [DISP]
• MONITOR section [DISP]
The HELP CONTENTS popup will appear.
A.CONTENTS list
This lists the Help contents.
In the HELP CONTENTS popup, the function buttons
perform the following operations.
[F1 (OPEN)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
2.
Displays the content selected in the list.
Closes the popup.
In the CONTENTS list, select the desired content and press
[F1 (OPEN)].
Other settings and functions
fig.ScrHelp.eps
The HELP popup will appear.
Use the up/down cursor buttons or the value dial to scroll the
display.
Press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the HELP popup.
180
M-380_e1.book 181 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Other settings and functions
System settings
Initializing the M-380’s internal
memory
The following items will be initialized, returning them to the factory
settings.
Clearing the ADMIN password
If you’ve forgotten the ADMIN password, you can use the following
procedure to clear the ADMIN password.
If you want to reset the password, you can do so after this procedure
as described in “Changing the password of user settings” (p. 150).
1.
• System settings
• Mixer parameters
• Scene memories
In the SETUP section, hold down [SYSTEM] and turn the
power on.
The M-380 will start up in SYSTEM CONFIG MODE, and the
SYSTEM CONFIG screen will appear.
fig.SystemConfig.eps
• All USER library data
• User settings
When you initialize the internal memory, all data that had been
saved in memory will be lost.
If you want to keep this data, you must save it to USB memory
as a project file (p. 173) and user file (p. 149) to USB memory.
1.
In the SETUP section, hold down [SYSTEM] and turn the
power on.
The M-380 will start up in SYSTEM CONFIG MODE, and the
SYSTEM CONFIG screen will appear.
2.
fig.SystemConfig.eps
Press [F2 (Clear Password)].
A message will ask you to confirm that you want to clear the
ADMIN password.
fig.ClearAdminPwdConfirm.eps
2.
Press [F1 (Factory Initialize)].
A message will ask you to confirm the initialization.
fig.FactoryInitConfirm.eps
Press [F8 (CLEAR)].
The ADMIN password will be cleared.
4.
Turn off the power.
You can also clear the ADMIN password by holding down both
the [DISP] button of the USER section and the [SOLO CLEAR]
button of the MONITOR section while you switch on the
power.
Other settings and functions
3.
3.
Press [F8 (INIT)].
Initialization will begin.
Do not turn off the power until the initialization is completed.
4.
Turn off the power.
181
M-380_e1.book 182 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Other settings and functions
[F1 (Set -InfdB Position)]
Fader calibration
If the fader positions are no longer aligned with the index markings
of the top panel, you can use the Fader Calibration function to
correct the misalignment.
1.
[F2 (Set -20dB Position)]
[F3 (Set 0dB Position)]
In the SETUP section, hold down [SYSTEM] and turn the
power on.
The M-380 will start up in SYSTEM CONFIG MODE, and the
SYSTEM CONFIG screen will appear.
[F4 (Set 10dB Position)]
[F5 (Init Position)]
fig.SystemConfig.eps
[F6 (TOUCH SELECT)]
[F7 (SELECT All Fader)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
4.
2.
Press [F3 (Fader Calibrate)].
The FADER CALIBRATION popup will appear.
Sets the current top panel position of the selected fader to -Inf
dB.
Sets the current top panel position of the selected fader to -20
dB.
Sets the current top panel position of the selected fader to 0 dB.
Sets the current top panel position of the selected fader to 10
dB.
Initializes the calibration setting
of the selected fader.
Turns on/off the function that
uses fader touch sensitivity to
add a check mark to the fader select button.
Adds or clears the check mark
for all fader select buttons.
Closes the FADER CALIBRATION popup.
Add a check mark to the fader select button of the fader you
want to adjust.
You can also use the top panel [SEL] buttons to add or clear the
check mark for the fader select buttons.
fig.FaderCalibration.eps
C
5.
Move the selected fader to the position you want to specify.
You can specify the following four points.
•10 dB (all the way up)
A
•0 dB
•-20 dB
•-Inf dB (all the way down)
We recommend that you adjust all of the above four points for
each fader that has drifted out of calibration.
Other settings and functions
B
6.
Press the function button that corresponds to the location
at which you set the fader.
A. Fader select buttons
Use these buttons to select the fader that you want to calibrate.
Position
Function button
10 dB (all the way up)
[F4 (Set 10dB Position)]
B.Fader indication
These indicate the internal fader positions and volume (dB).
When a fader responds to touch, the fader knob in the screen
will turn red.
0 dB
[F3 (Set 0dB Position)]
-20 dB
[F2 (Set -20dB Position)]
-Inf dB (all the way down)
[F1 (Set -InfdB Position)]
C.TOUCH SENS knob
Use this to adjust the degree of fader touch sensitivity.
This is linked with the setting of the FADER TOUCH SENS
field in the SYSTEM screen.
A message will ask you to confirm the fader position you
specified.
fig.FaderCalibrationConfirm.eps
In the FADER CALIBRATION popup, the function buttons
perform the following operations.
7.
182
Press [F8 (SET)].
The fader position will be specified for the selected fader.
M-380_e1.book 183 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Other settings and functions
If the relationship of -Inf dB < -20 dB < 0 dB < 10 dB is not
maintained, the setting will be ignored when you press [F8
(SET)].
8.
Press [F8 (CLOSE)].
The FADER CALIBRATION popup will close.
9.
Turn off the power.
Other settings and functions
183
M-380_e1.book 184 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
The sources 1–40 being input via REAC are mixed by the M-48’s 40channel mixer. Settings and operation of the 40-channel mixer are
shared between the mixing engineer and the musician.
What is the M-48 live
personal mixer?
The M-48 is a live personal mixer that allows each musician to create
their own monitor mix. By unifying the professional monitor mix
created by the mixing engineer with the personal mix created by
each musician, the M-48 provides a monitoring environment that’s
ideal for the musician.
fig.M48_Mix1.eps
The 40 digital audio source channels being input via REAC to
the M-48 are referred to as sources 1–40.
Settings by the mixing engineer
These settings are made by the mixing engineer from the M-380 or
the PC.
40-channel
Digital Source
from REAC
Line out
1.
Source level and pan settings
These settings specify the LEVEL, PAN, and AUX switch
settings for sources 1–40 (p. 193).
2.
Source assign settings
These settings assign sources 1–40 to sixteen groups for
operation on the M-48 (p. 196).
Phones
LIVE PERSONAL MIXER
M-48
The M-48 provides a REAC port that is able to receive up to 40
channels of digital audio via REAC. The digital audio sources are
mixed by the internal 40-channel mixer for monitoring via
headphones or monitor speakers.
Settings by the mixing engineer
These operations are performed by the musician on the M-48 unit.
Settings and operations for the 40channel mixer
3.
fig.M48_Mix2.eps
Group mix
VOLUME, PAN, REVERB SEND, and 3-BAND EQ can be
adjusted for each group created by the source assignment
settings.
Settings by the mixing engineer
Source level/pan settings
1
2
40
AUX
AUX
AUX
PAN
PAN
PAN
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
2
The group mix can also be viewed and edited from the M-380 or
PC (p. 198).
Source assign settings
Group
1 2 3 4
Source
1
16
1
2
3
4
Two sets of outputs
40
fig.M48_OutDgm.eps
AMBIENT
MIC
(Control from M-380 or PC)
AMBIENT
MIC
A/D
MIN MAX
AUX IN
MAIN AUX REVERB
LR
AUX IN
A/D
LR
MIN MAX
40-channel mixer
MAIN
LR
Source
Level
SIG
REAC
Source
Pan
1 PHONES
AUX REVERB
LR
BASS
SOURCE 1
TREBLE
LIMITER
VOLUME
OFF MAX
MIN MAX
EQ
SOLO
PHONES OUT
METER
GAIN REDUCTION
Source
Aux
ATT
MAX 0dB
PAN
-
+
-
+
1
D/A
MUTE
LEVEL
2
SOURCE 2
Group
Solo
Group
Volume
Group
EQ
SOURCE 40
AUX
SW
Group
Pan
REVERB UNIT
REVERB
REVERB
SEND
2 LINE OUT
Group
Reverb Send
PHONES L
PHONES R
LINE OUT
MAIN L
SOURCE
MAIN R
SELECT
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
LR
AUX L
AUX R
LR
MAIN AUX REVERB
(Control from M-380 / PC)
LR
MAIN
3
Group mix
184
MUTE
MONO
D/A
L/R
MIN MAX
(Control from M-380 / PC)
REC
LR
AUX REVERB
The M-48 provides two sets of output: PHONES and LINE OUT.
1.
Operations performed by the musician
VOLUME
LOW PASS
PHONES
REVERB, AMBIENT MIC, and AUX IN are mixed into the
MAIN bus, then BASS, TREBLE, and LIMITER are applied to
the mix which is then output from these ports. This is used for
headphones or in-ear monitoring.
M-380_e1.book 185 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
2.
LINE OUT
As the LINE OUT source, you can choose either PHONES (the
signal immediately before PHONES VOLUME), MAIN bus, or
AUX bus. This is used for a floor monitor or for two-channel
recording. Since a low-pass filter is provided on LINE OUT, it
can also be used to output just the low-frequency range to a
floor monitor or tactile transducer.
Connection examples
Here are some examples of connecting M-48 units to an M-380 that is
being used as an FOH console or as a monitor console.
fig.M48ConnectExs.eps
Connect M-48 units to the M-380
(setup as the FOH console)
Memory functionality
The M-48 has 16 memories, and allows mixer settings to be stored or
recalled.
Memories 1–16 can be manipulated from the M-48 itself or from the
M-380 or PC.
S-4000S
M-48
M-48
M-48
(SPLIT)
(SPLIT)
(SPLIT)
SLAVE
S-1608
SLAVE
S-4000D
Connecting M-48 units to
the M-380
fig.V-Mix_M48.eps
M-48
M-48
M-48
FOH CONSOLE
(SPLIT)
(SPLIT)
(SPLIT)
POWER
fig.M48ConnectExs.eps
POWER
POWER
Connect M-48 units to the M-380
(setup as the monitor console)
S-1608
S-4000D
M-48
M-48
M-48
(SPLIT)
(SPLIT)
(SPLIT)
SLAVE
S-1608
REAC B
MASTER
SLAVE
S-4000D
S-1608
M-380
SLAVE
S-1608
SLAVE
Use the REAC B port to connect M-48 units to the M-380. A
separately available S-4000D splitter and power distributor is
required in order to connect M-48 units.
The output from the M-380’s REAC B port is distributed via the S4000D. You can connect up to four S-4000D units serially and
support up to twenty-four
M-48 units.
FOH CONSOLE
MONITOR CONSOLE
The mixing engineer can make settings for each M-48 unit from the
M-380.
185
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
If an M-48 unit is connected to the M-380’s REAC A port or
SPLIT/BACKUP port, it will not be possible to set or manage
the M-48 from the M-380.
M-380_e1.book 186 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
Editing and managing M-48
units
Specifying the outputs from
the M-380 to the M-48 unit
Each musician will be able to use their M-48 with greater comfort
and convenience if the mixing engineer has made the appropriate
settings for each M-48. In particular, the mixing engineer should
consult with each musician when assigning sources to groups. Each
musician can decide what sources they want assigned to which
knobs (groups).
Use the REAC B output patchbay to specify the outputs from the M380 to the M-48.
1.
In the SETUP section, press [PATCHBAY] to access the
PATCHBAY screen.
fig.ScrPatchbay1.eps
The following settings are made by the mixing engineer.
• Specifying the outputs from the M-380 to the M-48 unit
Editing screen:PATCHBAY screen (p. 186)
• Editing the M-48’s unit name
Editing screen:M-48 MANAGER popup (p. 187)
• Making preference settings for an M-48 unit
Editing screen:M-48 PREFERENCES popup (p. 191)
• Setting the level, pan, and AUX switch for each source
(Source Level/Pan setting)
Editing screen:M-48 SOURCE LEV/PAN popup (p. 193)
2.
• Assigning sources to groups (Source Assign settings)
Editing screen:M-48 SOURCE ASSIGN popup (p. 196)
Press [F2 (OUTPUT)] or [F4 (REAC B)] to view the REAC B
output patchbay.
fig.ScrPatchbay2.eps
The following settings and management functionality for the M-48
are also provided.
• Viewing the connected M-48 units
Editing screen:M-48 MANAGER popup (p. 187)
• Checking and adjusting the musician’s mix (Group Mix)
Editing screen:M-48 GROUP MIX popup (p. 198)
• Muting the output of an M-48 unit
Editing screen:M-48 MANAGER popup (p. 189)
• Disabling memory operations from the M-380 (MEMORY
SAFE function)
Editing screen:M-48 MANAGER popup (p. 189)
• Copying M-48 settings
3.
Use the patchbay grid to select the channels that will be
output to the M-48.
For example, you might make settings as follows.
Editing screen:M-48 COPY popup (p. 200)
• M-48 memory operations
Editing screen:M-48 MEMORY popup (p. 201)
• Using the M-48 library
Editing screen:M-48 LIBRARY popup (p. 203)
REAC B
Channel
Purpose
1–6 OUT
AUX9–AUX14
S-1608 stage outputs
7–8 OUT
MAIN L, MAIN R
9–40 OUT
CH1–CH32 direct out
M-48 sources
• Saving/loading USB memory
Editing screen:M-48 LOAD/SAVE popup ()p. 205
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
• Synchronizing scene memories with M-48 memories
Editing screen:SCENE screen (p. 125)
By using direct out from the PRE EQ or PRE FADER positions,
you can create a mix in which the M-48’s source level/pan
settings are independent of the M-380.
Where the settings are stored
The M-48’s settings are stored in each M-48 unit itself. The M-380 can
load and manage the settings of each connected M-48 unit.
There are two ways to store the M-48’s settings on an external device.
• Store the settings in the M-380’s M-48 library (p. 204)
• Save the settings to USB memory (p. 206)
186
If you use direct out from the POST FADER position, each
source will be output at the level determined by the M-380’s
channel fader. In this case the actual LEVEL setting of the M-48
source is controlled by the M-380 fader.
In addition to input channel direct outs, you can use a variety of
outputs as sources for the M-48.
M-380_e1.book 187 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
• By patching the AUX, MATRIX, or MAIN outputs you can use
group mixes or the house mix as a source for the M-48.
• By patching TALKBACK you can establish smooth
communication with the musicians.
These output settings are shared by all REAC devices that are
connected to REAC B.
Example) When the S-1608 and M-48 are connected to REAC B
fig.V-Mix_M48_2.eps
Mix REAC B OUT 1–40 Output REAC B OUT 1–8
Viewing the connected M-48
units
You can use the M-48 MANAGER popup to view a list of the M-48
units connected to the M-380's REAC B port.
Accessing the M-48 MANAGER
popup
1.
In the MONITOR section, press [DISP] to access the
MONITOR screen.
fig.ScrMonitor2.eps
M-48
S-1608
S-4000D
OUTPUT
REAC B
2.
Press [F8 (M-48 MANAGER)].
The M-48 MANAGER popup will appear.
fig.ScrM48Manager_Guide.eps
A
B
M-380
• REAC B OUT 1–8 are output from OUTPUT 1–8 of the S-1608.
• Of the 40 sources the M-48 receives via REAC B OUT, sources
1–8 are the same as OUTPUT 1-8 of the S-1608.
A.Number of M-48 units
This indicates the number of M-48 units that are connected to
the M-380’s REAC B port.
The items shown in the list and the function of the [ENTER]
button are as follows.
187
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
B.M-48 list
This lists the M-48 units that are connected to the M-380’s
REAC B port.
You can move the cursor to an item in the list and press
[ENTER] to edit that item.
M-380_e1.book 188 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
Item
NO.
UNIT
NAME
MEMORY
NO.
MEMORY
SAFE
MUTE
Explanation
Indicates the order in
the list
Indicates the unit
name
Indicates the current
memory number
If this is checked,
MEMORY SAFE is activated; recall/store
operations from the
M-380 will be prohibited
If this is checked, the
M-48’s output will be
muted
Function of [ENTER]
Accesses the ARRANGE UNIT popup
Accesses the NAME
EDIT popup
Accesses the M-48
MEMORY popup
Check/uncheck
Editing the M-48’s unit name
A unit name of up to eight characters can be assigned to each M-48.
If you’re managing multiple M-48 units, use these names to quickly
distinguish between the units.
With the factory settings, the unit name will be “NO NAME.”
1.
Check/uncheck
In the M-48 MANAGER popup, the function buttons perform
the following tasks.
Button
Operation
See
page
Clears output muting for all
[F1 (MUTE CLEAR)]
p. 189
M-48 units. This will be on
(light blue) if there are any
M-48 units whose output is
muted.
[F2 (SETUP)]
Accesses the M-48 SETUP
p. 190
popup, where you can make
settings for the M-48 unit at
the cursor location.
[F3 (COPY)]
Accesses the M-48 COPY
p. 200
popup, where you can copy
settings from the M-48 unit
at the cursor location to another M-48 unit.
[F4 (LIBRARY)]
Accesses the M-48 LIBRARY
p. 203
popup, where you can recall/store library data for the
M-48 unit at the cursor location.
[F5 (LOAD/SAVE)]
Accesses the M-48 LOAD/
p. 205
SAVE popup, where settings
of the M-48 at the cursor location can be saved to USB
memory or loaded from USB
memory.
[F7 (UPDATE)]
Updates the M-48’s system
program.*
Closes the popup
[F8 (CLOSE)]
2.
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
M-48 UPDATE is for future updates of the system program. For
details on performing the update, refer to the explanation provided
with the updater.
You can assign a USER button to access this popup (p. 154).
188
In the M-48 list, move the cursor to the UNIT NAME of the
desired M-48 and press [ENTER].
fig.ScrM48UnitName.eps
The NAME EDIT popup will appear.
3.
Edit the name in the name field.
If you turn [F6 (BLINK LEDs)] on, all LEDs of the target M-48
will flash. You can use this to identify a specific unit.
4.
Press [F8 (OK)] to finalize the name and close the popup.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled and
the popup will close.
Changing the order of a unit in the
M-48 list
1.
*
Access the M-48 MANAGER popup (p. 187).
fig.ScrM48Manager.eps
Access the M-48 MANAGER popup (p. 187).
fig.ScrM48Manager.eps
M-380_e1.book 189 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
2.
In the M-48 list, move the cursor to the NO. field of the
desired M-48 and press [ENTER].
fig.ScrM48Arrange.eps
Disabling memory operations from
the M-380 (MEMORY SAFE function)
1.
Access the M-48 MANAGER popup (p. 187).
fig.ScrM48Manager.eps
The ARRANGE UNIT popup will appear.
3.
Use the value dial to specify the desired order for that
M-48 unit.
4.
Press [F8 (OK)].
The M-48 list will be reordered so that the selected M-48 is in
the place you specified in step 3, and the popup will close.
If you press [F7 (CANCEL)], the operation will be cancelled and
the popup will close.
The M-380 will show the connected M-48 units in the M-48 list
in the order in which the units are detected; the displayed order
is remembered so that this order can be reproduced the next
time the power is turned on.
This operation will update the display priority order as well as
the order in the M-48 list.
2.
In the M-48 list, move the cursor to the MEMORY SAFE field
of the desired M-48 and press [ENTER] to add a check mark.
M-48 units with a check mark will not accept Store or Recall
operations from the M-380.
When you’re managing multiple M-48 units, this allows you to
prevent unintended memory operations, or to exclude specific
M-48 units when synchronizing scene memories with M-48
memories.
Muting the output of an M-48 unit
1.
Access the M-48 MANAGER popup (p. 187).
fig.ScrM48Manager.eps
2.
If any of the M-48 units in the M-48 list have been muted, the M48 MANAGER popup’s [F1 (MUTE CLEAR)] indication will be
on.
189
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
In the M-48 list, move the cursor to the MUTE field of the
desired M-48 and press [ENTER] to add a check mark.
The PHONES and LINE OUT outputs of the checked M-48
unit(s) will be muted.
M-380_e1.book 190 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
Making settings for an M-48
unit
D. GROUP MIX (VOLUME)
fig.ScrM48GrpMix0_Guide.eps
Group
name
Volume
knob
Accessing the M-48 SETUP popup
1.
This is an overview of the group mix volumes.
a.Group name
Access the M-48 MANAGER popup (p. 187).
This indicates the group name. If you move the cursor here
and press [ENTER], the NAME EDIT popup will appear,
allowing you to edit the group name. You can enter a group
name of up to six characters.
fig.ScrM48Manager.eps
b.Volume knob
This adjusts the group’s volume in a range of -Inf dB – +20.0
dB.
If no index markings are shown for a knob, this means that no
source has been assigned to that group.
2.
In the M-48 list, move the cursor to the desired target
M-48 unit and press [F2 (SETUP)].
The M-48 SETUP popup will appear.
In the M-48 SETUP popup, the function buttons perform the
following tasks.
fig.ScrM48Setup_Guide.eps
A
B
Button
Operation
[F1 ( PREV UNIT)]
Changes the target M-48 unit.
The target for the settings will
change according to the order
of the M-48 list in M-48 MANAGER.
[F2 (NEXT UNIT )]
C
[F3 (SOURCE LEV/PAN)] Accesses the M-48 SOURCE p. 193
LEV/PAN popup, where you
can set the source level and
pan.
D
A.Target M-48 indication
This indicates the M-48 unit that is the target of the settings.
This shows the same item as the M-48 list of the M-48
MANAGER popup.
B.Version number
This indicates the version of the target M-48 unit.
System
System program version
Panel
Panel program version
[F4 (SOURCE ASSIGN)] Accesses the M-48 SOURCE
ASSIGN popup, where you
can specify source assignments.
p. 196
[F5 (GROUP MIX)]
Accesses the M-48 GROUP
MIX popup, where you can
make group mix settings.
p. 198
[F6 (PREF)]
Accesses the M-48 PREFER- p. 191
ENCES popup, where you can
make preference settings.
[F7 (SOLO CLEAR)]
Clears all group solo settings.
If a group is being soloed, this
will be on (blue).
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Closes the popup.
C.SOURCE LEVEL
fig.ScrM48SrcLev0.eps
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
See
page
This is an overview of the source levels. The approximate
levels of sources 1–40 are shown. You can also use the value
dial to adjust the level.
You can assign a USER button to access this popup (p. 154).
5.
View the settings of the target M-48 unit.
You can use [F1 ( PREV UNIT)] or [F2 (NEXT UNIT )] to
move to a different unit.
190
M-380_e1.book 191 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
Making preference settings for an
M-48 unit
1.
Access the desired M-48 SETUP popup (p. 187).
fig.ScrM48Setup.eps
D.MEMORY operation select buttons
These buttons restrict memory operations performed from the
M-48’s panel.
Disable RECALL button
If this is checked, the [RECALL] button will
be disabled.
Disable STORE
button
If this is checked, the [STORE] button will be
disabled.
E.LINE OUT SOURCE select buttons
These buttons select one of the following as the LINE OUT
source.
2.
Press [F6 (PREF)].
Selection
Explanation
MAIN
BUS
Output the signal of the MAIN BUS.
AUX BUS
Output the signal of the AUX bus (the mix of the
sources whose AUX switch is turned on in the
source level/pan settings, ☞ p. 193).
PHONES
Output the signal from before the PHONES VOLUME.
fig.ScrM48Pref.eps
You’ll need to exercise due caution in order to prevent feedback
if you select “PHONES,” since the signal from the ambient
microphone will also be included in the output.
The M-48 PREFERENCES popup will appear.
3.
Make the desired preference settings.
F.LINE OUT LPF (low pass filter)
This is the LPF setting for the line out.
fig.ScrM48Pref_Guide.eps
B
C
D
A
E
F
G
A.Target unit indication
This indicates the M-48 that is the target of the M-48
PREFERENCES popup.
B.SOLO mode selection buttons
These buttons select the solo operation.
The solo modes and their operations are as follows.
Operation
ADD ON
Multiple groups can be soloed. Soloed groups will
be mixed for monitoring.
LAST
Only the last soloed group will be monitored.
Explanation
OFF
The LPF will not be used.
80Hz
The frequency region below 80 Hz will be passed.
120Hz
The frequency region below 120 Hz will be
passed.
Note that the level of the output from Line Out will change
significantly if you switch the LPF from a setting of “80Hz” or
“120Hz” to “OFF.” Be sure to exercise due caution so that the
signal sent to the equipment connected to Line Out, or to your
ears, is not at an excessively high level.
The LPF is a 12 dB/octave filter that passes the region below the
specified frequency.
G.LINE OUT MODE select button
If the MONO button is checked, a monaural mix will be
output from the line out.
C.LAYER select clears SOLO button
This specifies that when the layer is switched, the solo settings
of the now-hidden layer will automatically be cleared.
191
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
Mode
Selection
M-380_e1.book 192 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
Returning the preference settings
to the default state
1.
Access the desired M-48 SETUP popup (p. 187).
Assigning group names for an M48 unit
1.
Access the desired M-48 SETUP popup (p. 187).
fig.ScrM48Setup.eps
fig.ScrM48Setup.eps
2.
2.
Press [F6 (PREF)].
fig.ScrM48Pref.eps
In the GROUP MIX (VOLUME) area, move the cursor to the
desired group name and press [ENTER].
fig.ScrM48GrpName.eps
The NAME EDIT popup will appear.
3.
The M-48 PREFERENCES popup will appear.
3.
Use the name edit field to edit the name.
Press [F7 (RESET)].
4.
Press [F8 (OK)] to finalize the edited name and close the
popup.
fig.ScrM48Pref_Conf.eps
Pressing [F7 (CANCEL)] will cancel the operation and close the
popup.
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the operation.
4.
Press [F8 (RESET)] to return the preference settings to their
default state.
Pressing [F7 (CANCEL)] will cancel the operation.
The preference settings will be set to the following values.
Parameter
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
SOLO
MEMORY
LINE OUT
192
Values
MODE
ADD ON
LAYER select clears SOLO
No
Disable RECALL button
No
Disable STORE button
No
SOURCE
MAIN BUS
LPF
OFF
MONO
OFF
M-380_e1.book 193 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
Setting the level, pan, and
AUX switch for each source
(Source Level/Pan setting)
The following outputs cannot be operated in the M-380
LAYOUT tab because they do not appear in the M-380’s top
panel fader module section.
• MAIN L, MAIN R, MAIN MONO
• MONITOR L, MONITOR R
• REC L, REC R
M-48 SOURCE LEV/PAN popup
This popup lets you set the source level and pan. Set the LEVEL,
PAN, and AUX switch for each source 1–40. Two views are
provided; the SOURCE LAYOUT tab and the M-380 LAYOUT tab.
• OSCILLATOR
• TALKBACK
fig.ScrM48SrcLev_Guide.eps
1
• SOURCE LAYOUT tab
2
fig.ScrM48SrcLev1.eps
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
This shows the sources arranged in order of their number (the
order in the M-380’s REAC B output patchbay).
1.
Target M-48 indication
This shows the unit name of the M-48 that is the target of the M48 SOURCE LEV/PAN.
2.
MONITOR
In this section you can make adjustments for monitoring the
mix of sources 1–40 on the M-380.
• M-380 LAYOUT tab
fig.ScrM48SrcLev2.eps
• ATT knob
This adjusts the monitor level in a range of -Inf dB – +10.0 dB.
If you turn [F6 (MONITOR)] on, the M-380’s monitor output
will output the mix of sources 1–40.
This shows the sources as they are seen from the M-380’s fader
module section. This display will change according to the M380’s channel layer.
Nothing is shown at the position of sources that are not patched
to the REAC B output.
The setting of the ATT knob only affects monitoring on the M380. It does not affect the setting of the M-48.
• Meter
This indicates the monitor output level.
3.
In the SOURCE LAYOUT tab, the names of sources for which
nothing is being output from the M-380’s REAC B are not
shown; the background will be gray. In the M-380 LAYOUT tab,
channels not being output to the M-380’s REAC B will have a
gray background.
4.
Number indication
In the SOURCE LAYOUT tab, this indicates the source number.
In the M-380 LAYOUT tab, this indicates the M-380’s channel
number (see exceptions to the left).
193
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
If the same channel is being output multiple times to REAC B,
only the lowest-numbered output will be operable.
Source name indication
This indicates the name of the source. The source name is used
as the M-380’s channel name or output name.
M-380_e1.book 194 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
5.
6.
AUX button
If this is on, the post-fader signal will be mixed to the AUX bus.
(Refer to p. 191 for enabling the AUX output mode.)
Meter
This indicates the input level of the source.
Accessing the M-48 SOURCE LEV/
PAN popup
1.
Access the desired M-48 SETUP popup (p. 190).
fig.ScrM48Setup.eps
7.
PAN knob
This adjusts the source’s panning in a range of L63–C–R63.
8.
Fader
This adjusts the source’s level in a range of -Inf dB – +10.0 dB.
9.
Group
Shows a group to which a source is assigned.
If a source is not assigned to any groups, that shows "--."
2.
Press [F3 (SOURCE LEV/PAN)].
fig.ScrM48SrcLev1.eps
“Assigning sources to groups (Source Assign settings)” (p. 196)
In the M-48 SOURCE LEV/PAN popup, the function buttons
perform the following tasks.
Button
Operation
See
page
[F1 (SOURCE LAYOUT)] Switches to the SOURCE LAYOUT tab.
[F2 (M-380 LAYOUT)]
Switches to the M-380 LAYOUT
tab.
[F3 (COPY MIX LEVEL)]
Accesses the COPY MIX LEVEL p. 195
popup, where you can copy the
M-380’s mix levels to sources.
[F5 (SOURCE ON FADER)]
If this is on, you’ll be able to use p. 194
the top panel faders to adjust
the source levels.
[F6 (MONITOR)]
If this is on, the M-380’s monitor p. 194
output will output the mix of
sources 1–40. *1
[F7 (RESET)]
Resets the source level/pan set- p. 195
tings.
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Closes the popup.
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
*1 This function cannot be used in M-380RCS (software that remotely
controls the M-380 from a PC).
The M-48 SOURCE LEV/PAN popup will appear.
3.
Verify that the desired M-48 is shown in the target unit
indication.
If the wrong unit is selected, press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the
popup; then re-select the target and return to step 2.
4.
Use [F1 (SOURCE LAYOUT)] or [F2 (M-380 LAYOUT)] to
select the display that you prefer.
Editing the source level/pan
settings
1.
Access the desired M-48 SOURCE LEV/PAN popup (p. 194).
fig.ScrM48SrcLev1.eps
In the SOURCE LEVEL/PAN popup, the mix of sources 1–40 is
monitored using the DSP resources of the 31-band realtime
analyzer. This means that while the M-380 is displaying the
SOURCE LEVEL/PAN popup, the analyzer levels are not
shown in the M-380RCS’s METER screen or GEQ EDIT popup.
fig.RCSOccupyRTA.eps
194
2.
Move the cursor to the faders and pan knobs of sources 1–
40, and use the value dial to edit the values.
3.
If you want to hear the mix of sources 1–40 via the
M-380’s monitor output, turn [F6 (MONITOR)] on.
M-380_e1.book 195 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
4.
If you want to use the M-380’s top panel faders to control
the levels, turn [F5 (SOURCE ON FADER)] on.
The display in the M-380 LAYOUT tab will switch in tandem
with the M-380’s channel layer buttons.
Resetting the source level/pan
settings
1.
Copying the M-380’s mix levels to
the source levels
Here’s how you can copy the M-380’s mix levels (the levels from
channels to MAIN or to an AUX) to the level of the corresponding
source.
1.
Access the desired M-48 SOURCE LEV/PAN popup (p. 194).
fig.ScrM48SrcLev1.eps
Access the desired M-48 SOURCE LEV/PAN popup (p. 194).
fig.ScrM48SrcLev1.eps
2.
Press [F3 (COPY MIX LEVEL)].
fig.ScrM48CopyMix_Guide.eps
2.
Press [F7 (RESET)].
fig.ScrM48SrcLevClr_Conf.eps
A
B
3.
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the operation.
The COPY MIX LEVEL popup will appear.
Press [F8 (RESET)] to reset the source level/pan settings
and close the popup.
The parameters of each source will be set to the following
values.
A.Mix level select buttons
These select the mix from which the levels will copied: AUX1–
AUX16 or MAIN L/R.
Parameter
Value
AUX switch
ON
PAN
C
LEVEL
-Inf dB
Pressing [F7 (CANCEL)] will cancel the operation and close the
popup.
If you select MAIN L/R, the sends from AUX to MAIN will also
be included.
B.Copy PAN (All center on MONO MIX) button
If this is on, the send pan will also be copied.
If you use the mix level select buttons to select a mono mix, the
pan settings will be in the center.
3.
Use the mix level select buttons to select the mix levels that
you want to copy.
195
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
If you also want to copy the pan, turn the Copy PAN (All
center on MONO MIX) button on.
M-380_e1.book 196 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
4.
Press [F8 (OK)].
This indicates the group to which the source at the cursor
location is assigned.
fig.ScrM48CopyMix_Conf.eps
B.Target M-48 indication
This indicates the unit name of the M-48 that is the target of
the M-48 SOURCE ASSIGN popup.
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the copy
operation.
C.Assignment grid
This grid lets you assign sources to groups (Knobs 1–16).
fig.ScrM48AsgnGrid_Guide.eps
Group indication
In this example, the MAIN L/R mix is being copied.
5.
Press [F8 (COPY)]; the mix levels you selected in step 3 will
be copied to the levels of the corresponding sources, and
the popup will close.
Pressing [F7 (CANCEL)] will cancel the operation.
Assigning sources to groups
(Source Assign settings)
This assigns source 1 through 40 to group 1 through 16 for operating
the M-48 panel. You make assignments to the groups using the M-48
SOURCE ASSIGN popup.
Accessing the M-48 SOURCE
ASSIGN popup
1.
Access the desired M-48 SETUP popup (p. 190).
Source indication Assignment symbol
•Source indication
This indicates the number and name of each source.
•Group indication
This indicates the number and name of each group (Knob).
•Assignment symbol
This symbol is shown at the intersection of each currently
assigned source and group.
To change an assignment, move the cursor to the location where
the desired source and group intersect, and press [ENTER].
A source can be assigned only to one group. You cannot assign
the same source to multiple groups.
fig.ScrM48Setup.eps
Sources that are not assigned to a group cannot be controlled
from the M-48’s panel. If you don’t want these sources to be
output from the M-48, use the source level/pan settings (p. 193)
to set their level to -Inf dB.
In the M-48 SOURCE ASSIGN popup, the function buttons
perform the following tasks.
2.
Press [F4 (SOURCE ASSIGN)].
The M-48 SOURCE ASSIGN popup will appear.
Button
Operation
[F1 (LAYER 1-8)]
Displays groups 1–8.
[F2 (LAYER 9-16)]
Displays groups 9–16.
[F7 (CLEAR ALL)]
Clears the source assignment
settings.
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Closes the popup.
See
page
fig.ScrM48SrcAsgn_Guide.eps
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
B
A
C
A.Current Assign indication
196
p. 197
M-380_e1.book 197 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
2.
In some cases you may want to set a source level up even
though it is not assigned to a group (knob) for a particular M-48.
1.
2.
3.
For talkback communication
The mixing engineer can have talkback as one of the 40
sources, leaving the source level up but not assigned to a
particular group (knob). This way the talkback signal is not
controlled by any of the M-48 knobs yet still can be heard
by the musician.
To provide simple control
E.g., The mixing engineer can provide just vocal control for
a vocalist via source assignment. All other sources are not
assigned to any groups (knobs) and can be provided as a
fixed mix. The vocalist just adjusts the volume of their
Press [F7 (CLEAR ALL)].
fig.ScrM48SrcAssignClr_Conf.eps
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the operation.
3.
Press [F8 (CLEAR)]; the source assignments will be cleared
and the popup will close.
Pressing [F7 (CANCEL)] will cancel the operation.
Verify that the desired M-48 unit is shown in the target unit
indication.
If the wrong unit is selected, press [F8 (CLOSE)] to close the
popup, re-select the desired target unit, and return to step 2.
Setting the source assignments
1.
Access the M-48 SOURCE ASSIGN popup (p. 196)
fig.ScrM48SrcAssign.eps
2.
In the assignment grid, move the cursor to the location
where the desired source and group intersect, and press
[ENTER] to make an assignment symbol appear.
A source can be assigned only to one group. You cannot assign
the same source to multiple groups.
Clearing the source assignments
Access the M-48 SOURCE ASSIGN popup (p. 196).
197
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
1.
fig.ScrM48SrcAssign.eps
M-380_e1.book 198 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
Checking and adjusting the
musician’s mix (Group Mix)
C.NAME
This indicates the group name.
You can move the cursor here and press [ENTER] to access the
NAME EDIT popup.
Accessing the M-48 GROUP MIX
popup
1.
D.SOLO button
This turns solo on/off for each group.
Access the desired M-48 SETUP popup (p. 190).
E.EQ graph
This indicates the approximate response of the group’s EQ.
fig.ScrM48Setup.eps
You can move the cursor here and press [ENTER] to turn the
EQ indication on/off.
F.REVERB SEND knob
This adjusts the group’s reverb send in a range of -Inf dB –
+10.0 dB.
G.PAN knob
This adjusts the group’s pan in a range of L63–C–R63.
2.
This pan setting is a relative adjustment to the pan specified by
the source level/pan settings. In some cases, the M-48’s source
pan may reach the maximum or minimum value before this
value reaches the maximum or minimum value.
Press [F5 (GROUP MIX)].
The M-48 GROUP MIX popup will appear.
fig.ScrM48GrpMix1_Guide.eps
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
• When the EQ setting display is shown
This volume setting is a relative adjustment to the level
specified by the source level/pan settings. In some cases, the M48’s source level may reach the maximum or minimum value
before this value reaches the maximum or minimum value.
The following knobs are shown if the EQ setting indication is
displayed.
fig.ScrM48GrpMix2_Guide.eps
I.HI GAIN knob
This adjusts the HI gain in a range of -15.0 dB – +15.0 dB.
A
B
C
E
I
J
K
L
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
H.VOLUME knob
This adjusts the group’s volume in a range of -Inf dB – +20.0
dB.
A.Target M-48 indication
This indicates the unit name of the M-380 that is the target of
the M-48 GROUP MIX popup.
B.Group number
This indicates the group number.
198
J.MID GAIN knob
This adjusts the MID gain in a range of -15.0 dB – +15.0 dB.
K.MID FREQ knob
This adjusts the MID center frequency in a range of 20 Hz–20.0
kHz.
L.LO GAIN knob
This adjusts the LO gain in a range of -15.0 dB – +15.0 dB.
In the M-48 GROUP MIX popup, the function buttons perform
the following tasks.
M-380_e1.book 199 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
Button
Operation
[F1 (LAYER 18)]
[F2 (LAYER 916)]
[F3 (EDIT EQ)]
Switches the group layer.
[F5 (REVERB
ON)]
[F6 (SOLO
CLEAR)]
[F7 (RESET)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
See
pag
e
Turning this on will switch to the
EQ setting display.
Turns the reverb on/off.
Clears solo settings for all groups.
This will be on if any groups are
soloed.
Returns the group mix to the default state.
Closes the popup.
3.
p.
199
Access the desired M-48 GROUP MIX popup (p. 198).
fig.ScrM48GrpMix1.eps
2.
Press [F7 (RESET)].
fig.ScrM48GrpMixClr_Conf.eps
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the operation.
Checking and adjusting the group
mix
1.
2.
Press [F8 (RESET)]; the group mix will be reset to the
default settings.
This operation will not change the group names.
Pressing [F7 (CANCEL)] will cancel the operation.
The parameters of each group will be set to the following
values.
Parameter
Value
VOLUME
0.0 dB
PAN
C
REVERB SEND
-Inf dB
HI GAIN
0.0 dB
MID GAIN
0.0 dB
MID FREQ
1.00 kHz
LO GAIN
0.0 dB
SOLO
OFF
Use [F1 (LAYER 1-8)] or [F2 (LAYER 9-16)] to choose the
group you want to view, and note the group mix settings.
Turning [F3 (EDIT EQ)] on will switch to the EQ setting
indication, allowing you to view the EQ values.
3.
If necessary, move the cursor to a parameter and use the
value dial to edit the value.
Resetting the group mix to the
default settings
1.
Access the desired M-48 GROUP MIX popup (p. 198).
199
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
fig.ScrM48GrpMix1.eps
M-380_e1.book 200 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
Button
[F1 (MARK ALL)]
Copying M-48 settings
1.
Access the M-48 MANAGER popup (p. 187).
[F2 (CLEAR
MARKS)]
fig.ScrM48Manager.eps
[F5 (PASTE)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
2.
In the M-48 list, move the cursor to the desired copy-source
M-48 unit, and press [F3 (COPY)].
The M-48 COPY popup will appear.
Operation
Adds a check mark to all DEST fields
of the copy-destination list.
Clears the check marks from all
DEST fields of the copy-destination
list. This indication will be on if any
DEST fields have check marks.
Executes the copy.
Closes the popup.
3.
Verify that the copy-source unit indication shows the
desired M-48 unit.
If the wrong copy-source unit is selected, press [F8 (CLOSE)] to
close the popup, return to step 2, and select the desired copy
source.
4.
In the copy-destination list, add a check mark to the desired
copy-destination M-48 units.
Press [ENTER] to assign or clear a check mark.
fig.ScrM48Copy_Guide.eps
A
B
C
You can use [F1 (MARK ALL)] or [F2 (CLEAR MARKS)] to
assign or clear check marks for all DEST fields in the copydestination list.
5.
Use the copy parameter select buttons to select the
parameters that you want to copy.
6.
Press [F5 (PASTE)].
fig.ScrM48Copy_Conf.eps
A.Copy-source unit indication
This indicates the copy-source M-48 unit.
B.Copy-destination list
Specify the copy-destination M-48 unit(s) in this list.
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the copy
operation.
The list shows the following items.
Item
Explanation
DEST
Press [ENTER] to add or clear the check
mark. A check mark indicates that the
unit is selected as a copy destination.
NO.
Indicates the number in the list.
UNIT NAME
Indicates the unit name.
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
C.Copy parameter select buttons
Use these to select the parameters to be copied. Parameters for
which there is a check mark will be copied.
Item
Explanation
SOURCE LEV/PAN Source level/pan settings
SOURCE ASSIGN
Group assignment settings
PREFERENCES
Preference settings
GROUP MIX
Group mix
In the M-48 COPY popup, the function buttons perform the
following tasks.
200
7.
Press [F8 (PASTE)].
The copy will be executed, and a message indicating the
processing status will appear. This message will close when
copying is completed.
Pressing [F7 (CANCEL)] will cancel the operation.
M-380_e1.book 201 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
fig.ScrM48Memory_Guide.eps
M-48 memory operations
A
B
You manipulate M-48 memory using the M-48 MEMORY popup.
Accessing the M-48 MEMORY
popup
1.
Access the M-48 MANAGER popup (p. 187).
fig.ScrM48Manager.eps
A.Target unit indication
This indicates the M-48 that is the target of memory
operations.
B.Memory list
This lists the memories of the target M-48 unit. The current
memory number is shown in green.
The list shows the following items.
2.
In the M-48 list, move the cursor to the desired M-48
MEMORY NO., and press [ENTER].
The M-48 MEMORY popup will appear.
There are two views: the SELECTED UNIT tab and the ALL
UNITS tab.
• SELECTED UNIT tab
fig.ScrM48Memory.eps
In this tab you can manipulate the memories of the M-48 unit
that is selected in the M-48 list.
• ALL UNITS tab
fig.ScrM48MemoryAll.eps
Explanation
NO.
Indicates the memory number.
NAME
Indicates the memory name. *
*This is not shown in the ALL UNITS tab.
In the M-48 MEMORY popup, the function buttons perform the
following tasks.
Button
Operation
See
page
[F1 (SELECTED UNIT)] Shows the SELECTED
UNIT tab.
[F2 (ALL UNITS)]
Shows the ALL UNITS
tab.
[F3 (NAME EDIT)] *1 *2
Accesses the NAME
EDIT popup where you
can edit the memory
name.
[F4 (RECALL)] *2
p. 202
Recalls the memory number selected in the list.
[F5 (STORE)] * 2
p. 202
Accesses the M-48 MEMORY STORE popup,
where you can store to
the memory number selected in the list.
[F6 (CLEAR)] *2
p. 202
Returns the contents of
the memory selected in
the list to the default
state.
[F7 (MEMORY SAFE)] *1 Turns MEMORY SAFE
on/off for the target M-48
unit.
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Closes the popup.
*1 Not shown in the ALL UNITS tab.
*2 Not available if [F7 (MEMORY SAFE)] is on.
201
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
In this tab you can manipulate the memories of all M-48 units
(except for units whose MEMORY SAFE function is on).
Item
M-380_e1.book 202 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
Storing the M-48’s current memory
1.
Access the M-48 MEMORY popup (p. 201).
Recalling a memory to the M-48
1.
Access the M-48 MEMORY popup (p. 201).
fig.ScrM48Memory.eps
fig.ScrM48Memory.eps
2.
2.
Select the desired memory in the memory list.
If the ALL UNITS tab is shown, all M-48 units will be affected
by this operation (except for units whose MEMORY SAFE
function is on).
3.
Press [F5 (STORE)].
fig.ScrM48MemStore.eps
If the ALL UNITS tab is shown, all M-48 units will be affected
by this operation (except for units whose MEMORY SAFE
function is turned on).
3.
Press [F4 (RECALL)].
fig.ScrM48MemRecall_Conf.eps
The M-48 MEMORY STORE popup will appear.
4.
Select the desired memory in the memory list.
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the recall
operation.
Edit the name in the name edit field, and press
[F8 (STORE)].
fig.ScrM48MemStore_Conf.eps
In this example, memory number 3 is being recalled.
You cannot execute this operation for units whose MEMORY
SAFE function is turned on.
4.
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the store
operation.
Pressing [F7 (CANCEL)] will cancel the operation.
In this example, the current memory is being stored to memory
number 3.
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
You cannot execute this operation for units whose MEMORY
SAFE function is turned on.
5.
Clearing the contents of an M-48
memory
1.
Press [F8 (STORE)].
The M-48’s current memory settings will be stored to the
memory you selected in step 2, and the popup will close.
Pressing [F7 (CANCEL)] will cancel the operation.
202
Press [F8 (RECALL)].
The memory you selected in step 2 will be recalled to the M-48’s
current memory, and the popup will close.
Access the M-48 MEMORY popup (p. 201).
fig.ScrM48Memory.eps
M-380_e1.book 203 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
2.
Select the desired memory in the memory list.
fig.ScrM48Library_Guide.eps
C
B
A
If the ALL UNITS tab is shown, all M-48 units will be affected
by this operation (except for units whose MEMORY SAFE
function is turned on).
3.
Press [F6 (CLEAR)].
fig.ScrM48MemClr_Conf.eps
A.Target unit indication
This indicates the M-48 unit to which operations in the M-48
LIBRARY popup will apply.
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the operation.
B.Library list
This lists the library items for the target M-48.
The following items are shown in the list.
In this example, memory number 3 is being cleared.
4.
Item
Explanation
You cannot execute this operation for units whose MEMORY
SAFE function is turned on.
NO.
Indicates the library item number.
NAME
Indicates the library item name.
Press [F8 (CLEAR)]; the contents of the memory you
selected in step 2 will be cleared, and the memory will be
initialized.
STATUS
This will indicate LOCK if the library item is
locked.
C.Recall parameter select buttons
These buttons select the parameters that will be recalled from
the library. Parameters with a check mark will be recalled.
Pressing [F7 (CANCEL)] will cancel the operation.
Using the M-48 library
The current settings of the M-48 can be organized in the form of a
“Library,” and saved on the M-380.
Accessing the M-48 LIBRARY
popup
1.
Item
Explanation
SOURCE LEV/PAN
Source level/pan settings
SOURCE ASSIGN
Group assign settings
PREFERENCES
Preference settings
GROUP MIX
Group mix
In the M-48 LIBRARY popup, the function buttons perform the
following tasks.
Access the M-48 MANAGER popup (p. 187).
Operation
2.
In the M-48 list, move the cursor to the desired M-48 unit
and press [F4 (LIBRARY)].
The M-48 LIBRARY popup will appear.
*
See
page
[F3 (NAME EDIT)]
Accesses the NAME EDIT popup,
where you can edit the name of a library item. *
[F4 (RECALL)]
Recalls the library item selected in p. 204
the list.
[F5 (STORE)]
Accesses the LIBRARY STORE
p. 204
popup, where you can store to the
library item selected in the list. *1
[F6 (CLEAR)]
Clears the library item selected in
the list. *
[F7 (LOCK)]
Locks/unlocks the library item selected in the list.
[F8 (CLOSE)]
Closes the popup.
p. 204
Cannot be used if the selected library item is locked.
203
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
Button
fig.ScrM48Manager.eps
M-380_e1.book 204 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
s
s
Storing to the M-48 library
1.
Access the M-48 LIBRARY popup (p. 203).
fig.ScrM48Library.eps
Recalling settings from the M-48
library
1.
Access the M-48 LIBRARY popup (p. 203).
fig.ScrM48Library.eps
2.
In the library list, select the store-destination number.
3.
Press [F5 (STORE)].
2.
In the library list, select the library item that you want to
recall.
3.
Use the recall parameter select buttons to select the
parameters that you want to recall.
4.
Press [F4 (RECALL)].
fig.ScrM48LibStore.eps
fig.ScrM48LibRecall_Conf.eps
The LIBRARY STORE popup will appear.
4.
Edit the name in the name edit field, and press
[F8 (STORE)].
fig.ScrM48LibStore_Conf.eps
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the recall
operation.
In this example, library item number 2 is being recalled.
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the store
operation.
5.
In this example, the settings are being stored to library item
number 2.
Press [F8 (RECALL)]; the recall operation will be executed,
and a status message will indicate the progress of the
operation.
When the recall is completed, the message will disappear.
Pressing [F7 (CANCEL)] will cancel the operation.
5.
Press [F8 (STORE)]; the store operation will be executed,
and a status message will indicate the progress of the
operation.
When the store operation is completed, the message will
disappear.
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
Pressing [F7 (CANCEL)] will cancel the operation.
The confirmation message in step 4 will not appear if the user
preference CONFIRMATION select button “SCENE/LIB
STORE” is unchecked.
204
The confirmation message in step 4 will not appear if the user
preference CONFIRMATION select button “SCENE/LIB
RECALL” is unchecked.
Clearing an M-48 library item
1.
Access the M-48 LIBRARY popup (p. 203).
fig.ScrM48Library.eps
M-380_e1.book 205 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
2.
In the library list, select the library item that you want to
clear.
3.
Press [F6 (CLEAR)].
fig.ScrM48LibDel_Conf.eps
Saving/loading USB
memory
This loads or stores all data saved in M-48 units as M-48 project files
on USB memory.
Accessing the M-48 LOAD/SAVE
popup
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the operation.
1.
Access the M-48 MANAGER popup (p. 187).
fig.ScrM48Manager.eps
In this example, library item number 2 is being cleared.
4.
Press [F8 (CLEAR)].
The library item you selected in step 2 will be cleared.
Pressing [F7 (CANCEL)] will cancel the operation.
2.
Press [F5 (LOAD/SAVE)].
The M-48 LOAD/SAVE popup will appear.
fig.ScrM48LoaSave_Guide.eps
B
A
A.Target unit list
This list shows the M-48 units to which the load or save
operation will apply.
The list shows the following items.
Explanation
MARK
Add check marks to this column if you
want to load or save data for multiple M48 units. Pressing [ENTER] will add or remove the check mark.
NO.
Indicates the number in the list.
UNIT NAME
Indicates the unit name.
B.Project file list
This lists the M-48 project files that have been saved to USB
memory. You can specify the save-destination folder for the
project file, or specify the project file that you want to load.
In the M-48 LOAD/SAVE popup, the function buttons perform
the following tasks.
205
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
Item
M-380_e1.book 206 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
Button
Operation
[F1 (MARK ALL)]
Adds a check mark to all
MARK fields of the target
unit list.
Clears the check marks
from all MARK fields of
the target unit list. This will
be on if any MARK fields
are checked.
Creates a folder in the
project file list.
Accesses the NAME EDIT
popup where you can edit
the name of the file or folder.
Loads the project file selected in the project file list.
Saves the data of the target
unit.
Deletes the selected file or
folder from the project file
list.
Closes the popup.
[F2 (CLEAR MARKS)]
[F3 (MAKE FOLDER)]
[F4 (NAME EDIT)]
[F5 (LOAD)]
[F6 (SAVE)]
[F7 (DELETE)]
[F8 (CLOSE)]
See
page
4.
The M-48 SAVE popup will appear.
p. 177
If you selected a single M-48 unit in step 2, specify a file name.
If you added a check mark to multiple M-48 units in step 2,
specify a folder name. A new folder with the specified name
will be created, and a separate project file for each M-48 unit
will be saved in that folder. The name of each project file will
consist of the “number in the list” + “unit name.”
p. 207
p. 206
p. 207
5.
Edit the name in the name edit field, and press [F8 (SAVE)].
fig.ScrM48Save_Conf.eps
Saving an M-48 project to USB
memory
1.
Press [F6 (SAVE)].
fig.ScrM48Save.eps
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the save
operation.
Access the M-48 LOAD/SAVE popup (p. 205).
fig.ScrM48LoadSave.eps
The amount of time required for the save procedure to be
carried out will vary depending on the number of M-48 units
you’ve selected in step 2.
Pressing [F7 (CANCEL)] will cancel the operation.
6.
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
2.
In the target unit list, select the M-48 unit whose project you
want to save.
If you want to save the projects for multiple M-48 units, press
[ENTER] to add or clear the check marks in the appropriate
MARK fields.
By pressing [F1 (MARK ALL)] or [F2 (CLEAR MARKS)] you
can add or clear the check marks in all MARK fields of the
target unit list.
3.
In the project file list, move to the location in the folder
hierarchy in which you want to save the data.
By selecting a folder and pressing [ENTER], you can move
downward into that folder. By selecting “..” and pressing
[ENTER] you can move back to the folder above the current
one.
Pressing [F3 (MAKE FOLDER)] will create a new folder.
206
When you press [F8 (SAVE)], a message indicating the
status of the save procedure will appear.
When saving is finished, the “Completed” message will appear.
Press [F8 (OK)] to close the message.
Do not disconnect the USB memory or switch off the M-380’s
power while data is being saved to USB memory. Doing so may
damage the data saved on USB memory.
M-380_e1.book 207 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
Loading an M-48 project from USB
memory
1.
Access the M-48 LOAD/SAVE popup (p. 205).
Deleting a project file or folder
1.
Access the M-48 LOAD/SAVE popup (p. 205).
fig.ScrM48LoadSave.eps
fig.ScrM48LoadSave.eps
2.
2.
In the project file list, select the project file that you want to
load.
By selecting a folder and pressing [ENTER], you can move
downward into that folder. By selecting “..” and pressing
[ENTER] you can move back to the folder above the current
one.
In the project file list, select the project file that you want to
delete.
This operation cannot delete files or folders other than M-48
project files or folders.
A folder must be empty before it can be deleted.
3.
In the target unit list, select the M-48 unit into which you
want to load the project.
If you want to load the project into multiple M-48 units, press
[ENTER] to add or clear the appropriate check marks.
3.
Press [F7 (DELETE)].
fig.ScrDelete_Conf.eps
By pressing [F1 (MARK ALL)] or [F2 (CLEAR MARKS)] you
can add or clear the check marks in all MARK fields of the
target unit list.
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the operation.
4.
Press [F5 (LOAD)].
fig.ScrM48Load_Conf.eps
4.
Press [F8 (DELETE)] to delete the file or folder.
Pressing [F7 (CANCEL)] will cancel the operation.
A confirmation message will ask you to confirm the load
operation.
Loading will require approximately one minute for each unit.
The total amount of time required for loading will depend on
the number of M-48 units you selected in step 3.
Pressing [F7 (CANCEL)] will cancel the operation.
Press [F8 (LOAD)]; the load operation will be executed, and
a message will indicate the processing status.
When loading is finished, the “Completed” message will
appear.
Press [F8 (OK)] to close the message.
Do not disconnect the USB memory or switch off the M-380’s
power while data is being loaded from USB memory. Doing so
may damage the data saved on USB memory.
207
Management of the M-48 live personal mixer
5.
M-380_e1.book 208 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Appendix
User button functions
FUNCTION
NONE
SCENE
PARAM1
PREV RECALL
NEXT RECALL
DIRECT RECALL
UNDO RECALL
PREV
NEXT
RECALL
STORE
SCENE QUICKVIEW POPUP
PARAM2
-
OSCILLATOR
MONITOR
OSC ON
SOURCE SELECT
M-48 MANAGER
AUX1–16,
MAIN L/R,
REC L/R
-
M-48 SETUP
1–24
BYPASS FX
BYPASS GEQ
EDIT FX
FX1 L–FX4 R
GEQ1–GEQ4
FX1–FX4
EDIT GEQ
GEQ1–GEQ4
EFFECT
TAP TEMPO
LED
Unlit
Lit while held
Lit while held
Lit while held
Lit if UNDO is available
Lit while held
Lit while held
Lit while held
Lit while held
Lit when the specified
screen is displayed
ON: lit, OFF: unlit
Lit if assignment is
identical
Explanation
Lit when the specified
screen is displayed
Lit when the specified
screen is displayed
ON: lit, OFF: unlit
ON: lit, OFF: unlit
Lit when the specified
screen is displayed
Lit when the specified
screen is displayed
Blinks in time with the
tempo
ON: lit, OFF: unlit
Lit while held
Lit while held
Accesses the M-48 MANAGER popup (p. 187)
MUTE GROUP
METER
1-8
PEAK CLEAR
CHANGE METER POINT
CH SELECT
PREVIOUS
INPUT CH,
AUX/MAIN
-
NEXT
-
Lit while held
+48V SW
-
Lit while held
PAD SW
-
Lit while held
PHASE SW
-
Lit while held
GATE SW
-
Lit while held
COMP SW
-
Lit while held
SET UNITY
-
Lit while held
PREV SONG
NEXT SONG
PLAY/STOP
-
REC
-
Unlit
Unlit
During playback/recording: lit
During recording: lit,
during recording standby: blink
CH EDIT
Appendix
RECORDER
208
Lit while held
Recalls the scene of the previous number
Recalls the scene of the next number
Recalls the scene of the specified number
Cancels the scene recall
Moves to the previous scene number
Moves to the next scene number
Recalls the scene of the current number
Stores the scene of the current number
Accesses the SCENE QUICKVIEW popup (p. 128).
Oscillator on/off
Changes the monitor source to the specified
source
Accesses the M-48 SETUP popup (p. 190)
(PARAM2 specifies the number in the M-48 list.)
Turns Bypass on/off for the specified FX
Turns Bypass on/off for the specified GEQ
Accesses the FX EDIT popup (p. 102)
Accesses the GEQ EDIT popup (p. 106)
Setting the tempo (P.103)
Turns the specified mute group on/off
Clears the meter peak hold and Over indications
The level detection point of the specified meter
will be changed each time you press the button.
Selects the channel that precedes the current channel
Selects the channel that follows the current channel
While the button is held, [SEL] operates as an
ON/OFF switch
While the button is held, [SEL] operates as an
ON/OFF switch
While the button is held, [SEL] operates as an
ON/OFF switch
While the button is held, [SEL] operates as an
ON/OFF switch
While the button is held, [SEL] operates as an
ON/OFF switch
Hold down the button and press [SEL] to set the
fader of the corresponding channel to 0.0 dB
Selects the previous WAV file
Selects the next WAV file
Plays the selected WAV file
Puts the USB memory recorder into recording
standby
M-380_e1.book 209 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Appendix
Error message list
Message
xxx is directory.
xxx is used for EXT FXx
Do you want to disable it?
Cannot operate the USB memory.
It exceeds the power capability.
Directory is not empty.
Internal battery is low.
Internal data were damaged.
M-380 starts with initialized setting.
Invalid USER NAME.
Media is abnormal.
Media not formatted.
MIDI/RS-232C Rx Error
Framing.
MIDI/RS-232C Rx Error
Buffer Full.
Passwords do not match.
REAC x Error
Fan Stop.
REAC x Error
Temp High.
REAC x Error
Packet.
REAC x Error Packet. (I/O unit Rx)
REAC x: Wrong sampling frequency.
The data is locked
The internal FAN has stopped.
This operation is not allowed.
USB MIDI Rx Error
Buffer Full.
Now Playing/Now Recording
Explanation
You attempted to copy the xxx directory of the USB memory.
Port xxx is being used by EXT FXx. Do you want to disable EXT FXx?
The device connected to the USB MEMORY connector used more than the maximum allowable electrical current.
You attempted to delete a non-empty directory in USB memory.
The internal lithium battery has run down.
Data was initialized because the internal memory data was lost when the internal lithium battery was
depleted or was replaced.
You attempted to assign a blank user name.
The USB memory has malfunctioned.
The USB memory has not been formatted.
An inappropriate signal is being input to MIDI/RS-232C.
Too much data is being received via MIDI/RS-232C.
The two passwords you entered to change the user password do not match.
The cooling fan of the input/output unit connected to REAC x has stopped.
The temperature of the input/output unit connected to REAC x has become abnormally high.
A reception error occurred at the M-380’s REAC x port.
A reception error occurred at the input/output unit connected to the REAC x port.
A REAC device whose sampling frequency is not supported by the M-380 is connected to REAC x.
You attempted to edit a locked scene or library item.
The cooling fan located on the bottom panel has stopped.
You attempted to perform an operation that is prohibited by your user settings.
Too much data is being received via USB MIDI.
You attempted to copy a file in USB memory while the USB memory recorder was playing or recording.
Appendix
209
M-380_e1.book 210 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Appendix
Troubleshooting
Can’t input successfully from REAC;
noise is heard
Overall operation
If REAC devices are connected incorrectly or if the REAC mode
setting is incorrect, it will not be possible to input from REAC, and
noise may be heard.
No sound
● A device is not powered on.
● An input/output unit is not connected correctly.
● The devices are not connected correctly.
● The volume of a connected amp or other device is lowered.
In this case, first check the connections between the M-380 and the
input/output units.
• Make sure that the input/output units are connected to the
correct REAC port
• Make sure that the REAC mode of the input/output units is
correct
● A volume level setting is lowered.
• Channel fader
After changing the REAC mode of an input/output unit, you
must cycle the power to that input/output unit.
• MAIN fader, AUX faders
• MONITOR LEVEL knob
Then initialize the REAC connection.
• PHONES LEVEL knob
• MAIN or AUX channel attenuator
1.
Disconnect the REAC cable, and wait for about five
seconds.
2.
Reconnect the REAC cable.
● Output patchbay settings are incorrect.
● The MUTE ALL OUTPUTS button is turned on for a connected
input/output unit.
Sound is not being input
● A device is not powered on.
● An input/output unit is not connected correctly.
● The devices are not connected correctly.
● Input patchbay settings are incorrect.
● The channel fader is lowered.
● The channel is muted.
● The channel’s MAIN switch is off.
● To clear the ADMIN password, switch on the M-380’s power
while holding down the [DISP] button in the USER section and the
[SOLO CLEAR] button in the MONITOR section.
Top panel faders do not work
● SENDS ON FADER is turned on.
● The DCA fader to which the channel belongs is lowered.
● The M-380 is in a mode where the faders are used to control the
GEQ.
The preamp of a specific channel is
not shown
● The USER layer mode (p. 153) is enabled.
● The input is not patched in the input patchbay.
● The input that is patched in the input patchbay does not have a
preamp.
Sound is noisy or distorted
● The preamp gain is inappropriate
The sound will be distorted if the preamp gain is too high. The
proportion of noise will be greater if the preamp gain is too low.
● The channel’s dynamics, EQ, etc. are overloading.
Appendix
You’ve forgotten the ADMIN
password
Check the overload indication or level meter in the CHANNEL
DISPLAY to see if any section is overloading. If you find a section
that’s overloading, adjust the parameters for it.
Fader touch sensitivity does not work
● CHANNEL DISPLAY [TOUCH SELECT] is turned off.
● The fader touch sensitivity is not adjusted appropriately.
“Adjusting the fader touch sensitivity” (p. 171)
You experience a “sticking”
sensation when operating the
faders
● The ground is not connected (p. 33)
If the ground is not connected, the fader touch sensitivity will
not operate correctly, and the fader motor may malfunction
when you operate a fader.
● The fader touch sensitivity is not working correctly
Depending on the environment in which you’re using the M380, the fader touch sensitivity may not operate correctly,
possibly causing the fader motor to malfunction when you
operate a fader.
If this occurs, use the M-380 with the touch sensitivity set to 0
210
M-380_e1.book 211 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Appendix
(p. 171) so that touch sensitivity is disabled.
Can’t read or write USB memory
● The USB memory is not formatted
● The USB memory is formatted as other than FAT (e.g., NTFS or
HFS)
● The USB memory does not have sufficient free space
Remote
Can’t control an external device
REAC indicator
The REAC A port, REAC B port, and SPLIT/BACKUP port provide
a REAC indicator that shows the REAC communications status.
The following table shows the meaning of the REAC indicator status.
Status
Lit
Blinking
Unlit
Meaning
REAC communication is established
REAC communication is taking place
No communication
If REAC connection is unsuccessful, check the following points.
•
Make sure that all REAC devices are powered on.
● The settings of the external device are incorrect.
•
Check the Cat5e cable connections.
● The external device is not connected correctly.
•
Make sure that the Cat5e cables are not damaged.
● The cable is broken.
•
Verify that you’re using the appropriate type of cables. (See
“About cables” (p. 14))
● The RS-232C baud rate is not set correctly.
•
If you’re using a switching hub, is it operating?
● The M-380 is not set to transmit messages.
•
If you’re using a switching hub, is it connected correctly?
•
If you’re using a switching hub, does it have the correct
specifications? (See “Requirements for switching hubs”
(p. 212))
● The MIDI OUT setting is set to THRU.
Can’t control the M-380 from an
external device
● The settings of the external device are incorrect.
● The external device is not connected correctly.
● The cable is broken.
● The RS-232C baud rate is not set correctly.
● The M-380 is not set to receive messages.
Other
Insufficient volume from a device
connected to the output jacks
● You’re using a cable that contains a built-in resistor.
Data disappeared from USB memory
● You switched off the power or disconnected the USB memory
while writing or reading USB memory.
Settings don’t change when you
recall a scene
● The recall is being filtered by the RECALL PARAMETER and
GLOBAL SCOPE settings.
Appendix
211
M-380_e1.book 212 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Appendix
Pin configuration diagrams
Cat5e Ethernet cables
(RJ45 EtherCon type connectors)
Cat5e crossover cables
(REAC cables SC-W100S)
fig.PinCat5eCross.eps
TX+
TX+
TX-
TX-
RX+
RX+
RX-
Requirements for switching
hubs
Switching hubs used to connect REAC devices must meet the
following conditions.
•
We recommend a switching hub that supports 1000BASE-T
(IEEE 802.3ab, Gigabit Ethernet)
•
100BASE-TX interface must be supported (IEEE 802.3u,
Fast Ethernet)
•
Full duplex communication (simultaneous bidirectional
communication) must be supported
Caution when using a switching hub
•
The network propagation time between REAC devices is
approximately 375 microseconds, but if the signal passes
through a switching hub, there will be approximately 200
microseconds of delay for each unit.
•
Up to four switching hubs can be connected in series.
•
Connect REAC devices to a switching hub that supports
100BASE-TX.
•
Carefully read the owner’s manual of the switching hub you
use.
RX-
Audio jacks (XLR)
INPUT and OUTPUT
Balanced connections are recommended.
If you use unbalanced connections, connect the cold and ground.
•
Balanced connection
fig.XLRJack.eps
HOT
•
GND
COLD
Unbalanced connection
fig.XLRJack2.eps
HOT
GND
Appendix
INPUT jacks provide phantom power (+48V/14mA).
212
M-380_e1.book 213 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Appendix
Main specifications
M-380: MIXING CONSOLE
Number of Channels
48 in, 18 BUS, 8 MATRIX, 58 out
AD/DA Conversion
Sample Rate: 48.0 kHz or 44.1 kHz
Signal Processing: 24 bits
Internal processing
56 bits
Frequency Response
CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks (1 to 8): -2 dB / +0 dB (20k ohms load, +4 dBu)
PHONES jack: -3 dB / +0 dB (40 ohms load, 130 mW)
* Sample Rate: 48.0 kHz or 44.1 kHz
* Input Connector: CONSOLE INPUT (Pad: ON, Input gain: +4 dBu, 20 Hz to 20 kHz)
Total Harmonic Distortion + Noise
CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks (1 to 8): 0.05 % (typ., +4 dBu)
PHONES jack: 0.05 % (typ., 40 ohms load, 130 mW)
* Sample Rate: 48.0 kHz or 44.1 kHz
* Input Connector: CONSOLE INPUT (Pad: ON, Input gain: +4 dBu, 20 Hz to 20 kHz)
Dynamic Range
CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks (1 to 8): 110 dB (typ.)
* Sample Rate: 48.0 kHz or 44.1 kHz
* Input Connector: CONSOLE INPUT (Pad: ON, Input gain: +4 dBu)
[email protected] 1 kHz
CONSOLE INPUT jacks (1 to 8): -80dB (Pad: ON, Input gain: +10 dBu, typ.)
CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks (1 to 8): -100 dB (typ.)
* Sample Rate: 48.0 kHz or 44.1 kHz
Nominal Input Level (Variable)
CONSOLE INPUT jacks (1 to 8): -65 to -10 dBu (Pad: OFF) or -45 to +10 dBu (Pad: ON)
STEREO IN jacks (L / R): -18 to 0 dBu
TALKBACK MIC IN jack: -50 to -10 dBu
Pad
20 dB ON / OFF
Input Impedance
Appendix
CONSOLE INPUT jacks (1 to 8): 14 k ohms
STEREO IN jacks (L / R): 10 k ohms
TALKBACK MIC IN jack: 41 K ohms
Non Clip Maximum Input level
CONSOLE INPUT jacks (1 to 8): +8 dBu (Pad: OFF) or +28 dBu (Pad: ON)
STEREO IN jacks (L / R): +18 dBu
TALKBACK MIC IN jack: +8 dBu
213
M-380_e1.book 214 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Appendix
Nominal Output Level
CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks (1 to 8): +4 dBu (Load impedance: 10 k ohms)
Output Impedance
CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks (1 to 8): 600 ohms
PHONES jack: 100 ohms
Recommended Load Impedance
CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks (1 to 8): 10 k ohms or greater
PHONES jack: 8 ohms or greater
Non Clip Maximum Output level
CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks (1 to 8): +22 dBu (1 kHz, 10 k ohms load)
PHONES jack: 150 mW + 150 mW (1 kHz, 40 ohms load, typ.)
Residual Noise Level (IHF-A, typ.)
-88 dBu (All faders: Min)
-80 dBu (Main Fader: Unity, Channel faders: Unity only one CONSOLE IN channel, Preamp gain: Min)
-61 dBu (Main Fader: Unity, Channel faders: Unity only one CONSOLE IN channel, Preamp gain: Max)
-73 dBu (All faders: Unity, Preamp gain: Min, S-1608 + S-4000S-3208, Total 48CH)
-41 dBu (All faders: Unity, Preamp gain: Max, S-1608 + S-4000S-3208, Total 48CH)
* Input 150 ohms terminate
* Output Connector: CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks (1 to 8)
* Sample Rate: 48.0 kHz or 44.1 kHz
Equivalent Input Noise Level (E.I.N.)
-126 dBu (Main Fader: Unity, Channel faders: Unity only one CONSOLE IN channel, Preamp gain: Max)
* Output Connector: CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks (1 to 8)
* Sample Rate: 48.0 kHz or 44.1 kHz
Network Latency
2.8 mS (typ.) *1
* Total System Latency of audio signal from S-1608 inputs to outputs via M-380’s REAC ports (A or B).
* Sample Rate: 48.0 kHz
* Effects : No insert effects
Connectors
CONSOLE INPUT jacks (1 to 8): XLR-3-31 type (balanced, phantom power)
TALKBACK MIC IN jack: XLR-3-31 type (balanced, phantom power)
STEREO IN jacks (L / R): RCA phono type
CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks (1 to 8): XLR-3-32 type (balanced)
PHONES jack: Stereo 1/4 inch phone type
DIGITAL OUT jacks x 2: Optical type, Coaxial type
REAC ports x3: RJ-45 EtherCon type
Appendix
RS-232C connector: 9-pin D-sub type
MIDI connectors (OUT/THRU, IN): 5-pin DIN type
USB connectors: USB Type A and Type B
Grounding terminal
AC INPUT connector
* XLR type: 1 GND, 2 HOT, 3: COLD
* phantom power: DC+48V(unloaded maximum), 14mA(maximum load) (All XLR type inputs)
214
M-380_e1.book 215 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Appendix
Display
800 x 480 dots Wide VGA backlit TFT color screen
Power Supply
AC 115 V, AC 117 V, AC 220 V, AC 230 V, AC 240 V (50/60 Hz)
Power Consumption
75 W
Dimensions
Desktop: 482.0 (W) x 581.3 (D) x 220.6 (H) mm
Desktop: 19(W) x 22-15/16(D) x 8-11/16(H) inches
Rack mount: 482.0 (W) x 231.3 (D) x 550.9 (H) mm
Rack mount: 19(W) x 9-1/8(D) x 21-11/16(H) inches
Weight
14.0 kg
30 lbs 14 oz
Operation Temperature
+5 to +40 degrees Celsius
+41 to +104 degrees Fahrenheit
Accessories
Power Cord
REAC Connector Covers x 3
Ferrite Core x 4
Channel number sticker
Owner’s Manual
Options
Stage unit: S-1608
40CH I/O MODULAR RACK: S-4000S-3208
FOH unit: S-0816
Live Personal Mixer: M-48
REAC Splitter & Power Distributor: S-4000D
REAC Optical Converter: S-OPT
100 m Cat5e Cable with Neutrik(R) EtherCon(R) Plug: SC-W100S (100 m)
20 m Cat5e Cable with Neutrik(R) EtherCon(R) Plug: SC-W20F (20 m)
100 m Cat5e Cable with Neutrik(R) EtherCon(R) Plug and reel: W100S-R (100 m)
* 0dBu = 0.775Vrms
* In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice.
*1: When a REAC Splitter S-4000D or a switching hub is used in-line with REAC cables, the network latency will increase by the
amount of processing delay introduced by the splitting device itself.
Appendix
The actual delay is dependant upon the specifications of the splitting device, though the maximum delay amount for a single
splitting device should be about 200 microseconds.
215
M-380_e1.book 216 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Appendix
Dimensions
231.3
430
220.
6
482
465
15°
563.
8
581.
3
(532.8)
550.9
101.6
177.8
532.8
177.8
37.8
(231.3)
78.3
Appendix
Dimensions are shown in millimetres.
216
M-380_e1.book 217 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Effect types
Value:
Reverb
-36.0–0.0 dB
LO FREQ DAMP FREQ
Frequency at which the low-frequency region of the reverb sound
begins to be attenuated
St.REVERB (Stereo Reverb)
Value:
fig.AlgoStRev.eps
DRY
Input L
Output L
20 Hz–2.00 kHz
HI FREQ DAMP GAIN
High-frequency attenuation of the reverb sound
Stereo
Reverb
Value:
4 Band EQ
-36.0–0.0 dB
HI FREQ DAMP FREQ
Input R
DRY
Output R
This is a stereo-in, stereo-out reverb. It adds reverberation without
impairing the position of the sound image that’s been set for the
stereo input, by panning or other means.
Frequency at which the high-frequency region of the reverb sound
begins to be attenuated
Value:
200 Hz–20.00 kHz
HI CUT FREQ
Reverb
Frequency at which the high-frequency region of the reverb sound
will be cut
TYPE
Value:
Type of reverb
WET (Wet Level)
Value
ROOM1:
Typical room reverb
ROOM2:
Room reverb with a softer tone than ROOM1
HALL1:
Typical hall reverb
HALL2:
Hall reverb with a softer tone than HALL1
PLATE:
Plate reverb
SIZE (Room size)
Size of the room or hall
Value:
5–40 m
TIME (Reverb time)
Length of the reverberation
Value:
0.1–32.0 s
200 Hz–20.00 kHz
Level of the reverb sound
Value:
-INF–+6.0 dB
DRY (Dry Level)
Level of the original sound
Value:
-INF–+6.0 dB
BAL (Balance)
L/R output level balance of the reverb
Value:
L63-C-R63
EQ
EQ SW (EQ switch)
PreDly (Pre-delay time)
Turns the EQ on/off
Time until the reverb is heard
Value:
Value:
EQ ATT (EQ attenuator)
0–200 ms
OFF, ON
ER Lev (Early reflection level)
Attenuator for the EQ
Level of the early reflections
Value:
Value:
LOW TYPE
-INF–0.0 dB
-42.0–+6.0 dB
Filter type for the Lo band (*1)
Amount of scattering for the early reflections
Value:
Value:
0–100
PEAK, LSV, HSV, LPF1, HPF1, LPF2, HPF2, BPF,
BEF, THRU
Density
LO GAIN
Density of the reverb sound
Gain of the Lo band (*1)
Value:
Value:
0–100
-15.0–+15.0 dB
LO FREQ DAMP GAIN
LO FREQ
Low-frequency attenuation of the reverb sound
Center frequency of the Lo band (*1)
Value:
20 Hz–20.00 kHz
217
Appendix
Diffus (Diffusion)
M-380_e1.book 218 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Appendix
LO Q
HI Q
Steepness of the frequency response curve at the Lo band center
frequency (*1)
Steepness of the frequency response curve at the Hi band center
frequency (*1)
Value:
Value:
0.36–16.00
LO-MID TYPE
Filter type for the Lo-Mid band (*1)
Value:
PEAK, LSV, HSV, LPF1, HPF1, LPF2, HPF2, BPF,
BEF, THRU
(*1) Depending on the Type setting of each band, there are certain
combinations for which the Freq, Gain, and Q values will have no
effect, as listed below.
PEAK (Peaking)
LO-MID GAIN
Creates a hill or valley in the region of FREQ.
Gain of the Lo-Mid band (*1)
Freq: Valid
Value:
-15.0–+15.0 dB
Gain: Valid
Q: Valid
LSV (Low Shelving)
LO-MID FREQ
Boosts/cuts the region below FREQ
Center frequency of the Lo-Mid band (*1)
Freq: Valid
Value:
20 Hz–20.00 kHz
LO-MID Q
Value:
0.36–16.00
HI-MID TYPE
Filter type for the Hi-Mid band (*1)
Value:
Gain: Valid
Q:-
HSV (High Shelving)
Boosts/cuts the region above FREQ
Steepness of the frequency response curve at the Lo-Mid band center
frequency (*1)
PEAK, LSV, HSV, LPF1, HPF1, LPF2, HPF2, BPF,
BEF, THRU
HI-MID GAIN
Freq: Valid
Gain: Valid
Q:-
LPF1 (Low-Pass Filter 1)
Passes the frequency region below FREQ
Freq: Valid
Gain:-
Q:-
HPF1 (High-Pass Filter 1)
Passes the frequency region above FREQ
Freq: Valid
Gain:-
Q:-
Gain of the Hi-Mid band (*1)
LPF2 (Low-Pass Filter 2)
Value:
A sharper response curve than LPF1
-15.0–+15.0 dB
HI-MID FREQ
Freq: Valid
Gain:-
Q: Valid
Center frequency of the Hi-Mid band (*1)
HPF2 (High-Pass Filter 2)
Value:
A sharper response curve than HPF1
20 Hz–20.00 kHz
Freq: Valid
HI-MID Q
Gain:-
Q: Valid
BPF (Band Pass Filter)
Steepness of the frequency response curve at the Hi-Mid band center
frequency (*1)
Passes the frequency region around FREQ.
Value:
Freq: Valid
0.36–16.00
HI TYPE
Appendix
0.36–16.00
S
Gain:-
Q: Valid
BEF (Band Eliminate Filter)
Filter type for the Hi band (*1)
Removes the frequency region around FREQ
Value:
Freq: Valid
PEAK, LSV, HSV, LPF1, HPF1, LPF2, HPF2, BPF,
BEF, THRU
Passes all frequency regions
Gain of the Hi band (*1)
-15.0–+15.0 dB
HI FREQ
Center frequency of the Hi band (*1)
Value:
218
Q: Valid
THRU (Thru)
HI GAIN
Value:
Gain:-
20 Hz–20.00 kHz
Freq:-
Gain:-
Q:-
M-380_e1.book 219 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Appendix
REVERB+GATE
Types of sound
fig.AlgoRevwGate.eps
fig.RevExp01.eps
DRY
Input L
early reflections
Output L
4 Band EQ
Reverb
Gate
Key-In
reverberation
Input R
DRY
Output R
This is a mono-in, stereo-out reverb. It provides a gate that can be
used for gating or ducking, allowing you to cut the reverb during its
decay, or to cut the reverb when the level of the original sound is
high.
direct sound
source
Reverb
listener
The sound you normally hear is divided into three types: “direct
sound,” “early reflections,” and “reverberation.” The “direct
sound” is the sound that reaches the listener directly from the
source. “Early reflections” are sounds that have reflected one to
several times from the walls or other surfaces of the room.
“Reverberation” is sound that has reflected many times before
reaching the listener.
SIZE (Room size)
Size of the room or hall
Value:
TIME (Reverb time)
Length of the reverberation
Value:
How sound and time are related
fig.RevExp02.eps
5–40 m
0.1–32.0 s
PreDly (Pre-delay time)
Time until the reverb is heard
level
Value:
0–200 ms
ER Lev (Early reflection level)
direct sound
Level of the early reflections
Value:
early reflections
-INF–0.0 dB
Diffus (Diffusion)
reverberation
pre-delay
time
reverb time
The reflected sounds reach the listener in the following order.
The pre-delay is the time from when the direct sound is heard
until the reverb arrives. The reverb time is the duration until the
reverb disappears.
Amount of scattering for the early reflections
Value:
0–100
Density
Density of the reverb sound
Value:
0–100
LO FREQ DAMP GAIN
Low-frequency attenuation of the reverb sound
Tonal character of reverb
If you want to produce soft-sounding reverb, lower the HI FREQ
DAMP FREQ. If you want to produce crisp-sounding reverb,
raise the LO FREQ DAMP FREQ.
-36.0–0.0 dB
LO FREQ DAMP FREQ
Frequency at which the low-frequency region of the reverb sound
begins to be attenuated
Value:
20 Hz–2.00 kHz
HI FREQ DAMP GAIN
High-frequency attenuation of the reverb sound
Value:
-36.0–0.0 dB
219
Appendix
The tonal character of reverb is affected by the material of the
walls and other reflective surfaces. This is because the
reflectivity of the surfaces will affect the proportion of high and
low frequencies that are reflected. You can use the DFP (Damp
Filter) to vary this property of the sound. The high-frequency
range or low-frequency range of the reverb will be attenuated as
you decrease the value of the HI FREQ DAMP GAIN or LO
FREQ DAMP GAIN parameters, respectively.
Value:
M-380_e1.book 220 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Appendix
HI FREQ DAMP FREQ
LO-MID FREQ
Frequency at which the high-frequency region of the reverb sound
begins to be attenuated
Center frequency of the Lo-Mid band (*1)
Value:
200 Hz–20.00 kHz
HI CUT FREQ
Frequency at which the high-frequency region of the reverb sound
will be cut
Value:
200 Hz–20.00 kHz
20 Hz–20.00 kHz
LO-MID Q
Steepness of the frequency response curve at the Lo-Mid band center
frequency (*1)
Value:
0.36–16.00
HI-MID TYPE
WET (Wet Level)
Filter type for the Hi-Mid band (*1)
Level of the reverb sound
Value:
Value:
-INF–+6.0 dB
PEAK, LSV, HSV, LPF1, HPF1, LPF2, HPF2, BPF,
BEF, THRU
DRY (Dry Level)
HI-MID GAIN
Level of the original sound
Gain of the Hi-Mid band (*1)
Value:
Value:
-INF–+6.0 dB
Center frequency of the Hi-Mid band (*1)
EQ SW (EQ switch)
Value:
Turns the EQ on/off
HI-MID Q
Value:
OFF, ON
EQ ATT (EQ attenuator)
Attenuator for the EQ
Value:
-42.0–+6.0 dB
LOW TYPE
PEAK, LSV, HSV, LPF1, HPF1, LPF2, HPF2, BPF,
BEF, THRU
LO GAIN
-15.0–+15.0 dB
LO FREQ
20 Hz–20.00 kHz
LO Q
Steepness of the frequency response curve at the Lo band center
frequency (*1)
Value:
Filter type for the Lo-Mid band (*1)
PEAK, LSV, HSV, LPF1, HPF1, LPF2, HPF2, BPF,
BEF, THRU
LO-MID GAIN
Gain of the Lo-Mid band (*1)
Value:
220
0.36–16.00
HI TYPE
Value:
PEAK, LSV, HSV, LPF1, HPF1, LPF2, HPF2, BPF,
BEF, THRU
HI GAIN
Value:
-15.0–+15.0 dB
HI FREQ
Value:
20 Hz–20.00 kHz
HI Q
Steepness of the frequency response curve at the Hi band center
frequency (*1)
Value:
0.36–16.00
0.36–16.00
LO-MID TYPE
Value:
Value:
Center frequency of the Hi band (*1)
Center frequency of the Lo band (*1)
Value:
Steepness of the frequency response curve at the Hi-Mid band center
frequency (*1)
Gain of the Hi band (*1)
Gain of the Lo band (*1)
Value:
20 Hz–20.00 kHz
Filter type for the Hi band (*1)
Filter type for the Lo band (*1)
Value:
-15.0–+15.0 dB
HI-MID FREQ
EQ
Appendix
Value:
-15.0–+15.0 dB
(*1) Depending on the Type setting of each band, there are certain
combinations for which the Freq, Gain, and Q values will have no
effect, as listed below.
PEAK (Peaking)
Creates a hill or valley in the region of FREQ.
Freq: Valid
Gain: Valid
Q: Valid
M-380_e1.book 221 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Appendix
LSV (Low Shelving)
RANGE
Boosts/cuts the region below FREQ
Range of the gate
Freq: Valid
Value:
Gain: Valid
Q:-
HSV (High Shelving)
-80.0 –0.0 dB
ATK (Attack time)
Boosts/cuts the region above FREQ
Attack time of the gate
Freq: Valid
Value:
Gain: Valid
Q:-
0.0–800.0 ms
LPF1 (Low-Pass Filter 1)
REL (Release time)
Passes the frequency region below FREQ
Release time of the gate
Freq: Valid
Value:
Gain:-
Q:-
0–8000 ms
HPF1 (High-Pass Filter 1)
HOLD (Hold time)
Passes the frequency region above FREQ
Hold time for the gate
Freq: Valid
Value:
Gain:-
Q:-
0–8000 ms
LPF2 (Low-Pass Filter 2)
A sharper response curve than LPF1
Freq: Valid
Gain:-
Q: Valid
HPF2 (High-Pass Filter 2)
A sharper response curve than HPF1
Freq: Valid
Gain:-
Q: Valid
BPF (Band Pass Filter)
Passes the frequency region around FREQ.
Freq: Valid
Gain:-
Q: Valid
BEF (Band Eliminate Filter)
Removes the frequency region around FREQ
Freq: Valid
Gain:-
Q: Valid
THRU (Thru)
Passes all frequency regions
Freq:-
Gain:-
Q:-
GATE
GT SW (GATE switch)
Turns the gate on/off
Value:
OFF, ON
GT MODE (Gate mode)
Value
Sound lower than the THRESHOLD level will be
attenuated by the amount specified by RANGE
DUCK:
Sound that exceeds the THRESHOLD level will
be attenuated by the amount specified by
RANGE
Appendix
GATE:
THRE (Threshold level)
Threshold level of the gate
Value:
-80.0 –0.0 dB
221
M-380_e1.book 222 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Appendix
Delay A/B
Delay
DELAY UNIT
Specifies the units for delay
As delay units, you can use msec, Meter, Feet, Frame (24, 25,
29.97, 30fps), or Note. The M-380’s delay is based on msec units,
and simply changing the delay unit parameter will not change
the delay time in msec units. This means that after changing the
delay unit, there may be a discrepancy between the msec value
and the value that is displayed in the specified units. If this
occurs, the value is shown in green. To correct this discrepancy,
please re-specify the delay time.
The relationship between Meter, Feet, Frame, and msec is
shown below. (Rounded values are shown as the calculated
results.)
Meter
[msec] = Delay [Meter] x 1000 / 343.59 [Meter/sec]
Feet
[msec] = Delay [Feet] x 1000 / 1127.26 [Feet/sec]
Frame (24, 25, 29.97, 30fps)
[msec] = Delay [Frame] x 1000 / FrameRate
If you specify Note as the delay unit, the delay time will be
determined by the relation between Tempo and Note. In some
cases, the relation between Tempo and Note may mean that the
result would exceed the maximum allowable delay time. If this
occurs, the value is shown in red.
The Note values are as follows.
Off, 1/64T, 1/64, 1/32T, 1/64D, 1/32, 1/16T, 1/32D, 1/16, 1/
8T, 1/16D, 1/8, 1/4T, 1/8D, 1/4, 1/2T, 1/4D, 1/2, 1/1T, 1/2D,
1/1
T signifies Triplet, and D signifies Dotted. For example, 1/4
means quarter note, 1/4T means quarter-note triplet, and 1/4D
means dotted quarter note.
DRY
Output A
Delay
FB
Time between the original sound and when the delay is heard
Value:
0.0–1350 ms
FB (Feedback)
Amount of delayed sound returned to the input of the delay.
The feedback level specifies the amount of sound that is returned.
Increasing this setting will increase the number of delay repetitions.
Value:
0–100
LO FREQ DAMP GAIN
Low-frequency attenuation of the delay sound
Value:
-36.0–0.0 dB
LO FREQ DAMP FREQ
Frequency at which the low-frequency region of the delay sound
begins to be attenuated
Value:
20 Hz–2.00 kHz
HI FREQ DAMP GAIN
High-frequency attenuation of the delay sound
Value:
-36.0–0.0 dB
HI FREQ DAMP FREQ
Frequency at which the high-frequency region of the delay sound
begins to be attenuated
Value:
200 Hz–20.00 kHz
PRE DPF
DPF
WET POSITION
DRY
Output B
Delay
FB
POST DPF
This is a dual-mono delay.
POST DAMP:Takes the wet sound from after the damp filter.
the signal after passing through the damp filter
is used as the wet signal. In this case, the damp
filter is applied to all of the delay sound.
WET (Wet Level)
PRE DPF
DPF
Value
PRE DAMP: Takes the wet sound from before the damp filter.
The signal before passing through the damp
filter is used as the wet signal. In this case, the
damp filter is applied only to the delay feedback.
POST DPF
Appendix
TIME
The wet position specifies how the delay’s wet signal is related to the
position of the DPF (Damp Filter).
fig.AlgoDualDelay.eps
Input B
msec, Meter, Feet, Frame (24, 25, 29.97, 30),
Note)
WET POSITION
DELAY x2
Input A
Value:
WET POSITION
Level of the delay sound
Value:
-INF–+6.0 dB
DRY (Dry Level)
Level of the original sound
Value:
222
-INF–+6.0 dB
M-380_e1.book 223 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Appendix
HI FREQ DAMP FREQ
LONG DELAY
Frequency at which the high-frequency region of the delay sound
begins to be attenuated
Ωig.AlgoLongDelay.eps
DRY
Input L
Output L
Value:
200 Hz–20.00 kHz
WET (Wet Level)
L
Level of the delay sound
Value:
Delay
DRY (Dry Level)
FEEDBACK
LEVEL
Level of the original sound
DPF
R
Input R
-INF–+6.0 dB
DRY
Value:
Output R
This is a mono-in, stereo-out long delay.
-INF–+6.0 dB
M.TAP DELAY (Multi Tap Delay)
fig.AlgoMTPDly.eps
Delay
DRY
Input L
DELAY UNIT
Pan 1
Specifies the units for delay
Value:
Output L
Pan 2
msec, Meter, Feet, Frame (24, 25, 29.97, 30), Note)
L TIME
Time from the original sound until the left-channel delay is heard
Value:
Pan 12
0.0–2700 ms
Multi Tap Delay
R TIME
DPF
Time from the original sound until the right-channel delay is heard
Value:
FEEDBACK
LEVEL
0.0–2700 ms
FEEDBACK TIME (Feedback time)
Input R
Time until the delayed sound is returned to the input of the delay
This is a mono-in, stereo-out twelve-stage tap delay.
Value:
Amount of delayed sound returned to the input of the delay.
The feedback level specifies the amount of sound that is returned.
Increasing this setting will increase the number of delay repetitions.
Delay
DELAY UNIT
Specifies the units for delay
Value:
0–100
msec, Meter, Feet, Frame (24, 25, 29.97, 30),
Note)
LO FREQ DAMP GAIN
DELAY 1–12 TIME
Low-frequency attenuation of the delay sound
Time from the original sound until the delay is heard
Value:
Value:
-36.0–0.0 dB
0.0–2700 m
DELAY 1–12 LEVEL
Frequency at which the low-frequency region of the delay sound
begins to be attenuated
Level of the delay sound
Value:
Appendix
LO FREQ DAMP FREQ
Value:
Output R
0.0–2700 ms
FEEDBACK LEVEL (Feedback level)
Value:
DRY
-INF–+6.0 dB
20 Hz–2.00 kHz
DELAY 1–12 PAN
HI FREQ DAMP GAIN
Panning of the delay sound
High-frequency attenuation of the delay sound
Value:
Value:
-36.0–0.0 dB
L63-C-R6
FEEDBACK TIME (Feedback time)
Time until the delayed sound is returned to the input of the delay
Value:
0.0–2700 ms
223
M-380_e1.book 224 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Appendix
FEEDBACK LEVEL (Feedback level)
MODULATION WAVE
Amount of delayed sound returned to the input of the delay.
The feedback level specifies the amount of sound that is returned.
Increasing this setting will increase the number of delay repetitions.
Waveform used for modulation
Value:
0–100
Value:
MODULATION RATE
Value:
LO FREQ DAMP GAIN
0.1–10.0 Hz
Low-frequency attenuation of the delay sound
MODULATION DEPTH
Value:
Depth of modulation
-36.0–0.0 dB
Value:
LO FREQ DAMP FREQ
0–100
MODULATION PHASE
Frequency at which the low-frequency region of the delay sound
begins to be attenuated
Phase difference between modulation L and R
Value:
Value:
20 Hz–2.00 kHz
-180–180 deg
HI FREQ DAMP GAIN
L TIME
High-frequency attenuation of the delay sound
Time from the original sound until the left-channel delay is heard
Value:
Value:
-36.0–0.0 dB
0.0–1000 ms
HI FREQ DAMP FREQ
R TIME
Frequency at which the high-frequency region of the delay sound
begins to be attenuated
Time from the original sound until the right-channel delay is heard
Value:
FB (Feedback)
200 Hz–20.00 kHz
WET (Wet Level)
Value:
Value:
-INF–+6.0 dB
Value:
DRY (Dry Level)
Amount of delayed sound returned to the input of the delay of the
opposite side
-INF–+6.0 dB
Value:
X.MOD DELAY
(Cross-modulation Delay)
DRY
Output L
FB
PRE DPF
Delay L
DPF
XFB
WET
POSITION
POST DPF
Value:
Frequency at which the low-frequency region of the delay sound
begins to be attenuated
PRE DPF
DRY
-36.0–0.0 dB
LO FREQ DAMP FREQ
WET
POSITION
FB
Input R
LO FREQ DAMP GAIN
Low-frequency attenuation of the delay sound
POST DPF
Modulation
DPF
Delay R
0–100
Cross feedback will feed back the effect sound to the opposite
input (left or right).
fig.AlgoXModDelay.eps
Input L
0–100
XFB (Cross feedback)
Level of the original sound
Value:
0.0–1100 ms
Amount of delayed sound returned to the input of the delay.
The feedback level specifies the amount of sound that is returned.
Increasing this setting will increase the number of delay repetitions.
Level of the delay sound
Appendix
SIN, SQR, EXP+, EXP-
Output R
Value:
20 Hz–2.00 kHz
This is a stereo-in, stereo-out cross-modulation delay.
HI FREQ DAMP GAIN
Delay
High-frequency attenuation of the delay sound
Value:
DELAY UNIT
Specifies the units for delay
Value:
msec, Meter, Feet, Frame (24, 25, 29.97, 30), Note)
HI FREQ DAMP FREQ
Frequency at which the high-frequency region of the delay sound
begins to be attenuated
Value:
224
-36.0–0.0 dB
200 Hz–20.00 kHz
M-380_e1.book 225 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Appendix
WET POSITION
XMIX (Cross mix)
The wet position specifies how the delay’s wet signal is related to the
position of the DPF (Damp Filter).
Mix amount for the opposite-side chorus
Value
PRE DAMP: Takes the wet sound from before the damp filter.
The signal before passing through the damp
filter is used as the wet signal. In this case, the
damp filter is applied only to the delay feedback.
POST DAMP:Takes the wet sound from after the damp filter.
the signal after passing through the damp filter
is used as the wet signal. In this case, the damp
filter is applied to all of the delay sound.
-100–100
DIR SW (Direct switch)
Turns the unprocessed sound on/off
Value:
OFF, ON
EFF SW (Effect switch)
Turns the effect sound on/off
Value:
OFF, ON
St.FLANGER (Stereo Flanger)
WET (Wet Level)
Level of the delay sound
Value:
Value:
fig.AlgoStFlang.eps
-INF–+6.0 dB
DIR SW
Input L
DRY (Dry Level)
Output L
FB
EFF SW
Level of the original sound
Value:
-INF–+6.0 dB
Flanger L
Modulation
XFB
Flanger R
EFF SW
St.CHORUS (Stereo Chorus)
FB
fig.AlgoStCho.eps
Input L
DIR SW
Output L
Input R
DIR SW
Output R
This is a stereo-in, stereo-out flanger. It lets you apply flanging
without impairing the position of the sound image that’s been set for
the stereo input, by panning or other means.
EFF SW
Chorus L
XMIX
Flanger
Chorus R
EFF SW
RATE
Flanger rate
Input R
DIR SW
Output R
This is a stereo-in, stereo-out chorus. It lets you apply chorus
without impairing the position of the sound image that’s been set for
the stereo input, by panning or other means.
DEPTH
0–100
Manual
RATE
Center frequency at which the flanger effect is applied
Chorus rate
Value:
0–100
LFO PHASE
Phase difference between L and R for the LFO (Low-Frequency
Oscillator)
Chorus depth
0–100
Value:
-180–180 deg
PreDly (Pre-delay)
FB (Feedback)
Time until the chorus sound is output
Amount of flanger sound that is returned to the input of the flanger
Value:
Value:
0–100 ms
-100–100
225
Appendix
0.1–10.0 Hz
DEPTH
Value:
0.01–10.0 Hz
Flanger depth
Value:
Chorus
Value:
Value:
M-380_e1.book 226 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Appendix
XFB (Cross feedback)
DEPTH
Amount of flanger sound that is returned to the opposite-side input
of the flanger
Phaser depth
Value:
-100–100
0–100
Manual
LEVEL
Center frequency at which the phaser effect is applied
Flanger level
Value:
Value:
Value:
0–100
0–100
LFO PHASE
DIR SW (Direct switch)
Turns the unprocessed sound on/off
Phase difference between L and R for the LFO (Low-Frequency
Oscillator)
Value:
Value:
OFF, ON
-180–180 deg
EFF SW (Effect switch)
FB (Feedback)
Turns the effect sound on/off
Amount of phaser sound that is returned to the input of the phaser
Value:
Value:
OFF, ON
-100–100
XFB (Cross feedback)
Feedback means returning the effect sound back into the
input. The feedback level specifies the amount of sound that
is returned. Cross-feedback is when the effect sound is
returned back to the opposite-side (left or right) input. The
cross-feedback level specifies the amount of sound that is
returned. In modulation-type effects, raising the feedback
value will make the sound richer and more spacious.
Negative values will invert the phase.
Amount of phaser sound that is returned to the opposite-side input
of the phaser
Value:
-100–100
LEVEL
Phaser level
Value:
0–100
MODE
Type of phaser
St.PHASER (Stereo Phaser)
Value:
DIR SW (Direct switch)
fig.AlgoStPhase.eps
Input L
DIR SW
Output L
Turns the unprocessed sound on/off
Value:
FB
Turns the effect sound on/off
Value:
XFB
Phaser R
EFF SW
FB
Appendix
DIR SW
Output R
This is a stereo-in, stereo-out phaser. It lets you apply a phaser effect
without impairing the position of the sound image that’s been set for
the stereo input, by panning or other means.
Phaser
RATE
Phaser rate
Value:
226
0.01–10.0 Hz
OFF, ON
EFF SW (Effect switch)
EFF SW
Phaser L
Input R
4STAGE, 8STAGE
OFF, ON
M-380_e1.book 227 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Appendix
Pitch shift
Channel strip
P.SHIFTER x2 (Pitch Shifter x2)
CH STRIP x2 (Channel Strip x2)
fig.AlgoDualPS.eps
fig.AlgoDualChStrip.eps
DRY
Input A
Output A
Input A
Gate
Compressor
Enhancer/
De-esser
4 Band EQ
Delay
Compressor
Enhancer/
De-esser
4 Band EQ
Delay
Pitch Shifter
DRY
Input B
Output A
Output B
Input B
Gate
Pitch Shifter
Output B
This is a dual-mono pitch shifter.
Pitch Shift A/B
MODE
This is a dual-mono channel strip. It provides gate, compressor,
enhancer/de-esser, EQ, and delay.
GATE A/B
Value
MONO VOIC: This mode is suitable for a monophonic voice
GATE SW (GATE switch)
MONO INST: This mode is suitable for a monophonic
instrument
Turns the gate on/off
POLY FAST, POLY MID, POLY SLOW:
These modes are suitable for polyphonic
instruments
MODE (Gate mode)
The difference between Poly Fast, Poly Mid, and Poly Slow is in
the length of time (delay) it takes before the pitch-shifted sound
is produced.
Poly Fast offers a shorter time until the pitch-shifted sound is
heard, but the pitch-shifted sound will be less stable.
Poly Slow takes a longer time until the pitch-shifted sound is
heard, but the pitch-shifted sound will be more stable.
Poly Mid has a response time for the pitch-shifted sound that is
between Poly Fast and Poly Slow.
Amount of pitch shift (in semitone steps)
-12–12
EXPANDER, GATE, DUCKING
THRE (Threshold level)
Threshold level
Value:
-80.0–0.0 dB
RATIO
Expander ratio
Value:
1.00:1–INF:1
KNEE
Value:
HARD, SOFT1–SOFT9
RANGE
Range of GATE or DUCKING
FINE
Amount of pitch shift (in one-cent steps)
Value:
Value:
OFF, ON
Expander knee
COARSE
Value:
Value:
-100–100
Value:
-INF–0.0 dB
ATK (Attack time)
Attack time
WET (Wet Level)
Level of the pitch-shifted sound
Value:
Value:
0.0–800.0 ms
Appendix
Use the Coarse setting to specify the approximate pitch, and
make fine adjustments using Fine.
REL (Release time)
Release time
Value:
0–8000 ms
-INF–+6.0 dB
HOLD (Hold time)
DRY (Dry Level)
Level of the original sound
Value:
GATE or DUCKING hold time
Value:
0–8000 ms
-INF–+6.0 dB
227
M-380_e1.book 228 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Appendix
COMPRESSOR A/B
COMP SW (Compressor switch)
Turns the compressor on/off
Value:
OFF, ON
THRE (Threshold level)
Threshold level of the compressor
Value:
-40.0–0.0 dB
FREQ (Frequency)
Frequency above which is handled as the high-frequency region
Value:
200 Hz–20.0 kHz
MIX (Enhancer mix)
Enhancer mix level
Value:
0.0–12.0 dB
THRE (De-esser threshold)
Threshold level for the de-esser
RATIO
Value:
-36.0–0.0 dB
Compression ratio
Value:
1.00:1–INF:1
KNEE
EQ SW (EQ switch)
Compressor knee
Value:
HARD, SOFT1–SOFT9
ATK (Attack time)
Compressor attack time
Value:
0.0–800.0 ms
REL (Release time)
Compressor release tim
Value:
EQ A/B
0–8000 ms
Turns the EQ on/off
Value:
EQ ATT (EQ attenuator)
Attenuator for the EQ
Value:
Value:
-40.0–+40.0 dB
Filter type for the Lo band (*1)
Value:
Turns compressor auto gain on/off
LO FREQ
ENHANCER/DE-ESSER A/B
-15.0–+15.0 dB
Center frequency of the Lo band (*1)
Value:
20 Hz–20.00 kHz
LO Q
ENHANCER/DE-ESSER SW
(Enhancer/De-esser switch)
Steepness of the frequency response curve at the Lo band center
frequency (*1)
Turns the enhancer/de-esser on/off
Value:
Value:
Appendix
Gain of the Lo band (*1)
Value:
OFF, ON
PEAK, LSV, HSV, LPF1, HPF1, LPF2, HPF2, BPF,
BEF, THRU
LO GAIN
AUTO GAIN
Value:
-42.0–+6.0 dB
LOW TYPE
GAIN
Compressor gain
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
0.36–16.00
LO-MID TYPE
MODE (Gate mode)
Filter type for the Lo-Mid band (*1)
Value
Value:
ENHANCER: Enhances the harmonic content of the sound,
giving the sound greater clarity. If the highfrequency region is weak, it will be strengthened.
The DE-ESSER threshold setting is not used
DE-ESSER: Restrains the sibilants, softening the sound. If
the high-frequency region is excessive, it will be
moderated. The ENHANCER sensitivity and
ENHANCER mix level are not used.
SENS (Enhancer sensitivity)
Enhancer sensitivity
Value:
228
0–100
PEAK, LSV, HSV, LPF1, HPF1, LPF2, HPF2, BPF,
BEF, THRU
LO-MID GAIN
Gain of the Lo-Mid band (*1)
Value:
-15.0–+15.0 dB
LO-MID FREQ
Center frequency of the Lo-Mid band (*1)
Value:
20 Hz–20.00 kHz
M-380_e1.book 229 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Appendix
LO-MID Q
HSV (High Shelving)
Steepness of the frequency response curve at the Lo-Mid band center
frequency (*1)
Boosts/cuts the region above FREQ
Value:
0.36–16.00
Freq: Valid
Gain: Valid
Q:-
LPF1 (Low-Pass Filter 1)
HI-MID TYPE
Passes the frequency region below FREQ
Filter type for the Hi-Mid band (*1)
Freq: Valid
Value:
PEAK, LSV, HSV, LPF1, HPF1, LPF2, HPF2, BPF,
BEF, THRU
HPF1 (High-Pass Filter 1)
Freq: Valid
Gain of the Hi-Mid band (*1)
Gain:-
Q:-
LPF2 (Low-Pass Filter 2)
-15.0–+15.0 dB
A sharper response curve than LPF1
HI-MID FREQ
Freq: Valid
Center frequency of the Hi-Mid band (*1)
Value:
Q:-
Passes the frequency region above FREQ
HI-MID GAIN
Value:
Gain:-
20 Hz–20.00 kHz
Gain:-
Q: Valid
HPF2 (High-Pass Filter 2)
A sharper response curve than HPF1
HI-MID Q
Freq: Valid
Gain:-
Q: Valid
Steepness of the frequency response curve at the Hi-Mid band center
frequency (*1)
BPF (Band Pass Filter)
Value:
Passes the frequency region around FREQ.
0.36–16.00
Freq: Valid
HI TYPE
Gain:-
Q: Valid
Filter type for the Hi band (*1)
BEF (Band Eliminate Filter)
Value:
Removes the frequency region around FREQ
PEAK, LSV, HSV, LPF1, HPF1, LPF2, HPF2, BPF,
BEF, THRU
HI GAIN
Freq: Valid
Gain:-
THRU (Thru)
Gain of the Hi band (*1)
Passes all frequency regions
Value:
Freq:-
-15.0–+15.0 dB
HI FREQ
Center frequency of the Hi band (*1)
Value:
20 Hz–20.00 kHz
HI Q
Gain:-
Q:-
Delay A/B
DELAY UNIT
Specifies the units for delay
Steepness of the frequency response curve at the Hi band center
frequency (*1)
Value:
Q: Valid
0.36–16.00
Value:
msec, Meter, Feet, Frame (24, 25, 29.97, 30), Note)
DELAY SW (Delay switch)
Turns the delay on/off
Value:
(*1) Depending on the Type setting of each band, there are certain
combinations for which the Freq, Gain, and Q values will have no
effect, as listed below.
TIME
Time between the original sound and when the delay is heard
Value:
PEAK (Peaking)
OFF, ON
0.0–1350 ms
FB (Feedback)
Freq: Valid
Amount of delayed sound returned to the input of the delay.
The feedback level specifies the amount of sound that is returned.
Increasing this setting will increase the number of delay repetitions.
Gain: Valid
Q: Valid
LSV (Low Shelving)
Boosts/cuts the region below FREQ
Freq: Valid
Gain: Valid
Q:-
Value:
0–100
LO FREQ DAMP GAIN
Low-frequency attenuation of the delay sound
Value:
-36.0–0.0 dB
229
Appendix
Creates a hill or valley in the region of FREQ.
M-380_e1.book 230 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Appendix
LO FREQ DAMP FREQ
Frequency at which the low-frequency region of the delay sound
begins to be attenuated
Value:
20 Hz–2.00 kHz
HI FREQ DAMP GAIN
GEQ
Dual GEQ
fig.AlgoDualGEQ.eps
Input A
High-frequency attenuation of the delay sound
Value:
Output A
DRY
31 Band GEQ
-36.0–0.0 dB
PRE DPF
Delay
HI FREQ DAMP FREQ
FB
DPF
WET POSITION
POST DPF
Frequency at which the high-frequency region of the delay sound
begins to be attenuated
Value:
200 Hz–20.00 kHz
Input B
Output B
DRY
31 Band GEQ
WET POSITION
Value
PRE DAMP: Takes the wet sound from before the damp filter.
The signal before passing through the damp
filter is used as the wet signal. In this case, the
damp filter is applied only to the delay feedback.
POST DAMP:Takes the wet sound from after the damp filter.
the signal after passing through the damp filter
is used as the wet signal. In this case, the damp
filter is applied to all of the delay sound.
FB
WET POSITION
POST DPF
GEQ A/B
ATT (Attenuator)
Attenuator for the GEQ
Value:
-42.0–+15.0 dB
20 Hz Gain–20 kHz Gain
Level of the delay sound
Gain of each band
Value:
Value:
DRY (Dry Level)
DPF
This is a dual-mono 31-band GEQ. A delay is provided after the
GEQ.
WET (Wet Level)
-INF–+6.0 dB
PRE DPF
Delay
The wet position specifies how the delay’s wet signal is related to the
position of the DPF (Damp Filter).
-15.0–+15.0 dB
Delay A/B
Level of the original sound
Value:
-INF–+6.0 dB
DELAY UNIT
Specifies the units for delay
Value:
msec, Meter, Feet, Frame (24, 25, 29.97, 30), Note)
DELAY SW (Delay switch)
Turns the delay on/off
Value:
OFF, ON
TIME
Time between the original sound and when the delay is heard
Value:
0.0–1350 ms
Appendix
FB (Feedback)
Amount of delayed sound returned to the input of the delay.
The feedback level specifies the amount of sound that is returned.
Increasing this setting will increase the number of delay repetitions.
Value:
0–100
LFD GAIN (LF damp gain)
Low-frequency attenuation of the delay sound
Value:
230
-36.0–0.0 dB
M-380_e1.book 231 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Appendix
LFD FREQ (LF damp frequency)
Frequency at which the low-frequency region of the delay sound
begins to be attenuated
Value:
20 Hz–2.00 kHz
HFD GAIN (HF damp gain)
High-frequency attenuation of the delay sound
Value:
Roland vintage effects
SRV-2000
(DIGITAL REVERB SRV-2000)
fig.ScrSRV2000.eps
-36.0–0.0 dB
HFD FREQ (HF damp frequency)
Frequency at which the high-frequency region of the delay sound
begins to be attenuated
Value:
200 Hz–20.00 kHz
WET POSITION
The wet position specifies how the delay’s wet signal is related to the
position of the DPF (Damp Filter).
Value
PRE DAMP: Takes the wet sound from before the damp filter.
The signal before passing through the damp
filter is used as the wet signal. In this case, the
damp filter is applied only to the delay feedback.
POST DAMP:Takes the wet sound from after the damp filter.
the signal after passing through the damp filter
is used as the wet signal. In this case, the damp
filter is applied to all of the delay sound.
This is a mono-in, stereo-out reverb that models the Roland SRV-2000
MIDI digital reverb. It provides two modes: REVERB mode in which
it operates as a conventional reverb, and NON LNR (non-linear) mode
in which the reverb sound is cut off according to the gate time setting.
MIX BALANCE
Balance between the direct sound and reverb sound
Value:
0–100
WET (Wet Level)
REVERB
Level of the delay sound
MODE
Value:
-INF–+6.0 dB
Switches between REVERB mode and NON LNR mode
DRY (Dry Level)
Value:
Level of the original sound
PRE DELAY
Value:
-INF–+6.0 dB
REVERB, NON LNR
Time until the reverb sound is output
Value:
0–160 ms (REVERB mode)
0–120 ms (NON LNR mode)
REV TIME (Reverb Time)
Length of the reverb sound
Value:
0.1–99 s (REVERB mode)
-.9–99 s (NON LNR mode)
The lower and upper limits of the value will differ depending
on the REV SEL setting (in REVERB mode).
REV TIME
Lower limit
Upper limit
P-A, P-B, H37, R37
0.5
99
H32, R32
0.4
90
H26, R26
0.3
70
H22, R22
0.2
50
H15, R15
0.1
30
R7.0
0.1
6.0
R1.0
0.1
1.0
R0.3
0.1
0.5
Appendix
REV SEL
231
M-380_e1.book 232 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Appendix
LOW FREQUENCY
For negative (-) values, the reverberation will gradually become
louder (negative values are shown as -.9, for example).
Cutoff frequency for the LO EQ
Value:
0.04–1.00 kHz
HF DAMP (Hi Frequency Damp)
LOW BOOST/CUT
Proportion by which the high-frequency range is attenuated (only in
REVERB mode)
Amount of boost/cut for the LO EQ
Value:
Value:
-24– +12 dB
0.05–1.00
GATE TIME
FURTHER
Time from when the reverb sound begins until the sound is cut off
(only in NON LNR mode)
REV DENSITY (Reverb Density)
Value:
Density of the reverb sound (only in REVERB mode)
10–450 ms
Value:
REV SEL (Reverb Select)
Type of reverb (only in REVERB mode)
Two types of PLATE reverb, A or B
H37, H32, H26, H22, H15:
HALL reverb
Number indicates the room size (in meters)
R37, R32, R26, R22, R15, R7.0, R1.0, R0.3:
ROOM reverb
umber indicates the room size (in meters)
Value:
0–9
ATK TIME (Attack Time)
Attack time for the early reflections
Value:
0–9
DENSITY
Density of the early reflections
OUTPUT
Value:
Output level of reverb sound
Value:
ATK GAIN (Attack Gain)
Attack gain for the early reflections
Value
P-A, P-B:
0–9
0–99
0–9
LEVEL
Level of the early reflections
EQ
Value:
HI Q
Steepness of the HI EQ frequency response curve
Value:
0–99
SDE-3000 x2
(DIGITAL DELAY SDE-3000)
0.2–9.0
fig.ScrSRV2000.eps
HI FREQUENCY
Center frequency for the HI EQ
Value:
0.80–9.99 kHz
HI BOOST/CUT
Amount of boost/cut for the HI EQ
Value:
-24– +12 dB
MID Q
Steepness of the MID EQ frequency response curve
Appendix
Value:
0.2–9.0
MID FREQUENCY
Center frequency for the MID EQ
Value:
0.25–9.99 kHz
MID BOOST/CUT
Amount of boost/cut for the MID EQ
Value:
232
-24– +12 dB
This is a delay that models the Roland SDE-3000 digital delay. The
original unit was mono-in, mono-out, but this modeling provides a
dual-mono configuration with two such units in parallel. The MOD
LINK Sw allows you to use this as a stereo-in, stereo-out unit.
The SDE-3000 was released in 1983, and was used in numerous
recording studios and PA systems around the world.
EFFECT Sw (Effect Switch)
Specifies whether to output the effect sound
Value:
OFF, ON
M-380_e1.book 233 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Appendix
DIRECT Sw (Direct Switch)
TIME
Specifies whether to output the direct sound
Time from original sound to when delay sound is heard (the value in
parentheses is when the TIME x2 Sw is on)
Value:
OFF, ON
SYNC Sw (Sync Switch)
Specifies whether to synchronize with tempo (when this is on, the
time is specified as a note value)
Value:
OFF, ON
MOD LINK Sw (Modulation Link Switch)
Value:
The upper limit of the value will differ depending on the EXP
A/B value. The following table shows the TIME range when
EXP A/B is 1.00 and when it is 1.60.
EXP A/B
Specifies whether the modulation of the two SDE-3000 units will be linked
Value:
Specifies whether to invert the phase of the modulation for channel B
(the lower SDE-3000)
NORM, INV
1.00
0–1500 ms
0–3000 ms
1.60
0–2400 ms
0–4800 ms
Amount of delay sound returned to the delay’s input
Value:
Expands the TIME of channel A by up to 1.60 times
OUT
1.00–1.60
EXP B (Expand B)
Expands the TIME of channel B by up to 1.60 times
Value:
When the TIME x2
Sw is on
FEEDBACK
EXP A (Expand A)
Value:
1.00–1.60
TIME range
When the TIME x2
Sw is off
OFF, ON
CH-B MOD (CH-B Modulation)
Value:
0–1500 ms (When SYNC Sw is OFF)
OFF, 1/64T–1/1 (When SYNC Sw is ON)
0–99
Output level of the delay sound
Value:
0–99
MODULATION
MOD Sw (Modulation Switch)
Just as in the original unit, the EXP A/B setting will change the
sampling frequency of processing. For inputs other than an
electric guitar or electric bass, beating may be generated. If this
occurs, lower the value to a point where beating does not occur.
Modulation on/off
Value:
OFF, ON
RATE
Modulation oscillator frequency
DELAY
Value:
0–99
FILTER Sw (FILTER Switch)
DEPTH
Changes the frequency response of the delay sound
Modulation depth
Value:
Value:
OFF, ON
0–99
TIME x2 Sw (Time x 2 Switch)
Value
OFF:
TIME range 0–1500 ms (when EXP A/B 1.00)
Frequency response 10 Hz–17 kHz (+0.5 dB/-3 dB)
ON:
TIME range 0–3000 ms (when EXP A/B 1.00)
Frequency response 10 Hz–8 kHz (+0.5 dB/-3 dB)
DELAY PHASE Sw (Delay Phase Switch)
Value:
Appendix
Reverse/normal phase for the delay sound (useful in conjunction
with modulation)
OFF, ON
FEEDBACK PHASE Sw (Feedback Phase Switch)
Reverse/normal phase for the delay sound feedback
Value:
OFF, ON
233
M-380_e1.book 234 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Appendix
Value:
RE-201 (SPACE ECHO RE-201)
0–100
BASS
fig.ScrSRV2000.eps
Low-frequency tone of the tape echo sound
Value:
0–100
TREBLE
High-frequency tone of the tape echo sound
Value:
0–100
TAPE
PAN HEAD SHORT
This is a delay that models the Roland RE-201 Space Echo. The
original was mono-in, mono-out, but this modeling adds PAN
HEAD SHORT/MIDDLE/LONG settings and a REVERB STEREO
Sw, allowing you to use it as a mono-in, stereo-out effect.
The RE-201 was a very popular product that was produced from1974
to 1987.
EFFECT Sw (Effect Switch)
Specifies whether the effect sound will be output
Value:
OFF, ON
DIRECT
0–100
MODE SELECTOR
Combination of the three playback heads and reverb
1–11, REVERB ONLY
The mode selector position corresponds to the playback head
and reverb as follows.
Mode
REPEAT
REVERB ECHO
REV
selector
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ONLY
position
S ●
●
●
● ●
Playback
M
●
●
●
● ●
●
head
L
● ●
●
● ● ●
Reverb
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
*
Settings indicated by ● are valid.
Appendix
REPEAT RATE
Tape speed
Value:
0–100
INTENSITY
Number of times the delay sound will repeat
Value:
0–100
ECHO VOL (Echo Volume)
Volume of the tape echo sound
234
L63–C–R63
PAN HEAD MIDDLE
Panning of the middle playback head
Value:
L63–C–R63
PAN HEAD LONG
Panning of the long playback head
Value:
L63–C–R63
Adds distortion typical of a tape
Value:
0–100
WOW and FLUTTER RATE
ECHO
Value:
Value:
TAPE DIST (Tape Distortion)
Level of the original sound
Value:
Panning of the short playback head
Speed of pitch modulation caused by tape aging and uneven rotation
Value:
0–100
WOW and FLUTTER DEPTH
Depth of pitch modulation caused by tape aging and uneven
rotation
Value:
0–100
REVERB
REVERB STEREO Sw (Reverb Stereo Switch)
Specifies whether the reverb sound will be output in stereo
Value:
OFF, ON
REVERB VOL (Reverb Volume)
Level of the reverb sound
Value:
0–100
M-380_e1.book 235 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Appendix
SBF-325
(STEREO FLANGER SBF-325)
SPH-323 x2
(PHASE SHIFTER SPH-323)
fig.ScrSRV2000.eps
fig.ScrSRV2000.eps
This is a stereo-in, stereo-out flanger that models the Roland SBF-325
Stereo Flanger.
FEEDBACK
This is a phase shifter that models the Roland SPH-323 Phase Shifter.
The original was mono-in, mono-out, but this modeling is a dualmono design with two units in parallel. The MOD LINK Sw allows
you to use this as a stereo-in, stereo-out effect.
Amount of flanger sound returned to the input (valid only if
EFFECT MODE is set to FLANGER)
CENTER FREQ (Center Frequency)
Value:
Center frequency at which the phaser effect is applied
0.0–10.0
EFFECT MODE
Value:
0–100
RESONANCE
Value
FLANGER II: Stereo mode flanger
Boosts the region around the center frequency specified by CENTER
FREQ
FLANGER III:Cross-mix mode flanger
Value:
FLANGER I: Monaural mode flanger
OFF:
Modulation off
CHORUS:
Chorus
0.0–10.0
SHIFT MODE
Specifies the number of stages for the phaser
CH-B MOD (CH-B Modulation)
Value:
Specifies whether the channel B flanger effect will be inverted
EFFECT Sw (Effect Switch)
Value:
NORM, INV
8STAGE, 4STAGE
Specifies whether the effect sound will be output
CH-A
Value:
Specifies whether the channel A flanger sound will be phasereversed
DIRECT Sw (Direct Switch)
Value:
Specifies whether the original sound will be output
NORM, INV
Value:
CH-B
Specifies whether the channel B flanger sound will be phase-reversed
Value:
NORM, INV
Specifies whether the effect sound will be output
Value:
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
LEVEL
Output level
Value:
EFFECT Sw (Effect Switch)
OFF, ON
0–100
MOD LINK Sw (Modulation Link Switch)
DIRECT Sw (Direct Switch)
Value:
Specifies whether the original sound will be output
CH-B MOD (CH-B Modulation)
Value:
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
LEVEL
Specifies whether the phase of the modulation for channel B (the
lower SPH-323) will be inverted
Output level
Value:
Value:
NORM, INV
0–100
235
Appendix
Specifies whether the modulation of the two SPH-323 units will be
linked
M-380_e1.book 236 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Appendix
MODULATION
LFO1 DEPTH
LFO1 modulation depth
Value:
SDD-320
(DIMENSION D SDD-320)
fig.ScrSRV2000.eps
0.0–10.0
LFO1 RATE
LFO1 modulation rate
Value:
0–100
LFO2 DEPTH
LFO2 modulation depth
Value:
0.0–10.0
LFO2 RATE
LFO2 modulation rate
Value:
0–100
This is a stereo-in, stereo-out chorus that models the Roland SDD320 Dimension D.
The SDD-320 was released in 1979, and became standard equipment
in many recording studios.
DIMENSION MODE
Specifies how the chorus changes
Value:
OFF, 1, 2, 3, 4, 1+4, 2+4, 3+4
1+4, 2+4, and 3+4 can be selected by pressing [F1 (1+4)], [F2
(2+4)], or [F3 (3+4)], respectively.
INPUT MODE
Input signal stereo/mono setting
Value:
MONO, STEREO
EFFECT Sw (Effect Switch)
Specifies whether the effect sound will be output
Value:
OFF, ON
DIRECT Sw (Direct Switch)
Specifies whether the original sound will be output
Value:
OFF, ON
LEVEL
Output level
Appendix
Value:
236
0–100
M-380_e1.book 237 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Index
Symbols
+48V .......................................................................... 46, 95
Numerics
31-band GEQ ........................................................ 104, 106
4 band EQ ................................... 42, 44, 48, 55, 57, 59, 84
8-band parametric EQ ........................................ 107–108
A
AC INPUT connector .................................................... 33
Admin ........................................................................... 146
ALL/CLR buttons ......................................................... 38
Analyzer ................................................................. 96, 109
ATT .............................................. 42, 46, 55–56, 58, 66, 68
Attenuator .................................. 42, 46, 55–56, 58, 66, 68
Auto gain ........................................................................ 79
AUX send ........................... 42, 45, 48, 55, 57, 60, 87, 140
AUX SENDS area .......................................................... 26
AUX1-12 layer button ................................................... 24
AUX13-16/MTX layer button ..................................... 23
DCA1-8 on fader .......................................................... 114
Delay ............................................................................. 222
Delay unit ..................................................................... 222
DELAY x2 ..................................................................... 222
DIGITAL DELAY SDE-3000 ...................................... 232
DIGITAL OUT jacks ...................................................... 32
DIGITAL REVERB SRV-2000 .................................... 231
DIMENSION D SDD-320 ........................................... 236
Direct out point ........................................................ 42, 48
DISP button (AUX SENDS area) ................................. 26
DISP button (COMP area) ............................................ 25
DISP button (EQUALIZER area) ................................. 26
DISP button (GATE area) ............................................. 25
DISP button (MONITOR section) ............................... 29
DISP button (TALKBACK/OSC section) .................. 28
DISP button (USB MEMORY RECORDER section) . 27
DISP button (USER section) ......................................... 27
Display ............................................................................ 27
DUAL GEQ .................................................................. 230
Dynamics ........................................................................ 73
B
E
Backup Connection ..................................................... 158
Backup connections with the S-4000S ...................... 161
Balance .............................................. 55, 57, 61, 66, 68, 70
Band pass ........................................................................ 84
BATTERY slot ................................................................ 33
Broadcast console setup ............................................. 160
Effect insert ............................................. 42, 55, 59, 66, 69
Effects ...................................................................... 98, 217
EFFECTS button ............................................................ 27
ENTER button ................................................................ 28
EQUALIZER area .......................................................... 26
Error message ........................................................ 41, 209
Ethernet switching hub .............................................. 157
EXIT button .................................................................... 28
EXT insert ....................................... 42, 55, 59, 66, 69, 111
External effects ............................................................. 111
External insert ................................ 42, 55, 59, 66, 69, 111
C
Caution message ........................................................... 41
CH DISP button ............................................................. 24
CH STRIP x2 ................................................................ 227
CH1-12 layer button ...................................................... 24
CH13-24 layer button .................................................... 24
CH25-36 layer button .................................................... 24
CH37-48 layer button .................................................... 24
CHANNEL EDIT section ............................................. 24
Channel indication ........................................................ 36
Channel name .......................................................... 51, 63
Channel strip ................................................................ 227
Check buttons ................................................................ 38
Color label ................................................................ 51, 63
COMP area ..................................................................... 25
Compressor .................................................. 42, 44, 47, 78
Confirmation message .................................................. 41
CONSOLE INPUT jacks ............................................... 31
CONSOLE OUTPUT jacks ........................................... 31
Cooling vent ................................................................... 33
Cross-modulation Delay ............................................ 224
Cursor ............................................................................. 37
Cursor buttons ............................................................... 28
D
Date and time ............................................................... 175
Date/time indication .................................................... 36
DCA button .................................................................... 29
DCA group ................................................................... 114
F
Fader .................................................. 23–24, 38, 42, 55, 66
Fader calibration .......................................................... 182
Fader module section .................................................... 23
Fader touch sense ................................................ 170–171
Fader Version ............................................................... 170
Ferrite core ................................................................ 14, 16
Filter .............................................................. 42, 44, 47, 84
FILTER area .................................................................... 25
Firmware Version ........................................................ 163
FOH console setup ...................................................... 159
Folder ............................................................................ 177
Formatting .................................................................... 177
Four-band EQ ............................ 42, 44, 48, 55, 57, 59, 84
FREQ knob (EQUALIZER area) .................................. 26
FREQ knob (FILTER area) ............................................ 25
Function button ............................................................. 37
Function button section ................................................ 27
FX insert .................................................. 42, 55, 59, 66, 69
G
Gain ..................................................................... 43, 46, 95
GAIN knob ..................................................................... 25
GAIN knob (EQUALIZER area) ................................. 26
237
M-380_e1.book 238 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Index
GATE area ...................................................................... 25
Gate/expander ............................................ 42, 44, 47, 73
GATE/EXPANDER popup ......................................... 74
GEQ ............................................................................... 230
GEQ insert .................................................... 55, 59, 66, 69
GEQ on fader ............................................................... 108
Global Scope ........................................................ 125, 131
Grounding terminal ...................................................... 33
Group Mix .................................................................... 198
GROUP section .............................................................. 29
Guest ............................................................................. 146
H
HELP button .................................................................. 28
Help function ............................................................... 180
Help shortcuts .............................................................. 180
Hi pass ............................................................................ 84
History ............................................................................ 51
Home screen .................................................................. 35
METER button ............................................................... 27
Metering .......................................................................... 94
MIC LEVEL knob .......................................................... 28
MIDI ...................................................................... 165–166
MIDI connectors ............................................................ 32
Modulation ................................................................... 225
Monitor ......................................................................... 122
Monitor console setup ................................................ 160
MONITOR section ......................................................... 29
Multi Tap Delay ........................................................... 223
Mute ............................................................ 42, 55, 66, 189
MUTE button ........................................................... 23, 29
Mute group ................................................................... 117
N
Notch ............................................................................... 84
O
Initializing ............................................................ 172, 181
Input patchbay ......................................................... 42, 91
Input/output units ....................................................... 14
OL (Overload) .................................. 46–48, 58–59, 68, 84
ON button (EQUALIZER area) ................................... 26
ON button (FILTER area) ............................................. 25
ON/OFF buttons ........................................................... 38
Oscillator ............................................................... 119, 121
Output patchbay .................................................... 92, 140
K
P
Key-in ............................................................ 74, 76, 78, 80
Knob ................................................................................ 38
P.SHIFTER x2 ............................................................... 227
PAD ........................................................................... 46, 95
PAN ..................................................................... 42, 44, 49
PAN area ........................................................................ 26
PAN knob ....................................................................... 26
Panel Version ............................................................... 170
Password ...................................................... 146, 150, 181
Patchbay .............................................................. 42, 91–92
PATCHBAY button ....................................................... 28
Personal mixer ............................................................. 184
Phase ................................................................... 42, 46, 95
PHASE SHIFTER SPH-323 ......................................... 235
PHONES jack ................................................................. 29
PHONES LEVEL knob ................................................. 29
Pitch shift ...................................................................... 227
Popup access buttons .................................................... 38
Popup indication ........................................................... 37
Power cord ..................................................................... 14
Power cord clamp ................................................... 17, 33
Power cord hook ..................................................... 17, 33
POWER switch ............................................................... 32
Preamp ...................................................................... 43, 46
PREAMP area ................................................................ 25
I
L
Layer section .................................................................. 23
LCR ................................................................................ 139
LCR system .................................................. 134–135, 170
LEVEL knob ................................................................... 29
Limiter ........................................................... 55, 57, 59, 82
Link ....................................................... 50, 62, 71, 99, 104
List ................................................................................... 38
Lithium battery ...................................................... 19, 170
Live personal mixer .................................................... 184
Lo pass ............................................................................ 84
LONG DELAY ............................................................. 223
M
M.TAP DELAY ............................................................ 223
M-380RCS ..................................................................... 165
M-48 ............................................................................... 184
M-48 library .................................................................. 203
M-48 memory ............................................................... 201
M-48 preferences ......................................................... 191
Main display area .......................................................... 36
Main fader module ....................................................... 24
MAIN level indication .................................................. 36
MAIN send ..................................................................... 55
Main switch .................................................................... 42
MATRIX .......................................................................... 66
MATRIX send .............................................. 55, 58, 60, 89
Memory safe ................................................................ 189
Meter ......................................................................... 23, 94
238
Q
Q ..................................................................... 48, 59, 84–85
Q knob ............................................................................. 26
R
Radio buttons ................................................................. 38
RE-201 ........................................................................... 234
REAC ..................................................................... 157, 162
M-380_e1.book 239 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Index
REAC A port .................................................. 31, 157, 163
REAC B port ................................................... 31, 158, 163
REAC caps ...................................................................... 16
REAC CONFIG popup ....................................... 162–164
REAC Connector covers ............................................... 14
REAC connector covers ................................................ 16
REAC ports .................................................................... 31
REAC splitting ............................................................. 157
REAC Version .............................................................. 163
Rear panel ....................................................................... 30
Recall Filter ........................................................... 125, 127
Recording to a PC ........................................................ 162
Redundant REAC connections .................................. 158
Remote .......................................................................... 165
REMOTE popup .......................................................... 166
Reverb ........................................................................... 217
REVERB+GATE ........................................................... 219
Roland vintage effects ................................................ 231
RS-232C ................................................................. 165, 169
RS-232C connector ........................................................ 32
RS-232C/MIDI select switch ....................................... 32
Stereo Phaser ................................................................ 226
Stereo Reverb ............................................................... 217
Stereo-linking ..................................................... 50, 62, 71
Sub-display area ............................................................ 37
SYSTEM button ............................................................. 28
System config mode ............................................ 181–182
System Version ............................................................ 170
T
Talkback ................................................................ 119–120
TALKBACK button ....................................................... 28
TALKBACK MIC IN jack ............................................. 32
TALKBACK/OSC section ............................................ 28
Tap ................................................................................. 103
Tempo ........................................................................... 103
Theft prevention lock .................................................... 33
To MAIN ......................................................................... 61
Top display area ............................................................ 36
Top panel ........................................................................ 22
Touch select .................................................................. 171
TOUCH SELECT button .............................................. 24
S
U
S-0816 FOH unit ............................................................ 14
S-1608 stage unit ............................................................ 14
S-4000S ............................................................................ 14
S-4000-SP ...................................................................... 157
SBF-325 .......................................................................... 235
Scene indication ............................................................. 36
Scene memory .............................................................. 125
SCENE MEMORY section ............................................ 29
Screen controller section .............................................. 28
Screen name ................................................................... 36
SDD-320 ........................................................................ 236
SDE-3000 x2 .................................................................. 232
SEL button ................................................................ 23–24
Select buttons ................................................................. 38
Sends on fader ............................................................... 45
SENDS ON FADER button .......................................... 27
SETUP section ................................................................ 28
SHIFT button ................................................................. 28
Solo ................................................................................ 124
SOLO button ............................................................ 23–24
SOLO CLEAR button .................................................... 29
Source Assign settings ................................................ 196
Source Level/Pan setting ........................................... 193
SPACE ECHO RE-201 ................................................. 234
SPH-323 x2 ................................................................... 235
SPLIT/BACKUP port ................................... 31, 157, 164
SRV-2000 ....................................................................... 231
St.CHORUS .................................................................. 225
St.FLANGER ................................................................ 225
St.PHASER ................................................................... 226
St.REVERB .................................................................... 217
Stereo Chorus ............................................................... 225
Stereo Flanger .............................................................. 225
STEREO FLANGER SBF-325 ..................................... 235
STEREO IN jacks ........................................................... 32
USB connector ................................................................ 31
USB memory .......................................................... 20, 176
USB MEMORY connector ............................................ 29
USB memory cover ....................................................... 20
USB memory recorder ................................................ 141
USB MEMORY RECORDER section .......................... 27
USB MIDI .............................................................. 165, 168
User ............................................................................... 146
USER button ................................................................... 27
User button ........................................................... 154, 208
User fader ..................................................................... 152
USER layer button ......................................................... 23
User level .............................................................. 146, 151
User preferences .......................................... 146, 152, 155
USER section .................................................................. 27
User setting indication .................................................. 36
User settings ................................................................. 146
V
Value dial ........................................................................ 28
V-LINK .................................................................. 165, 167
W
Wait message ................................................................. 41
WAV files ...................................................................... 141
X
X.Mod DELAY ............................................................. 224
239
M-380_e1.book 240 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Screen index
A
H
ALL CH SEND POINTS popup .................................. 88
ARRANGE UNIT popup ........................................... 189
AUX SENDS popup ...................................................... 87
AUX/MAIN COPY popup .......................................... 63
AUX/MAIN LIBRARY popup .................................... 64
HELP CONTENTS popup ......................................... 180
HELP popup ................................................................ 180
C
CAUTION message ...................................................... 41
CH COPY popup ........................................................... 52
CHANGE PASSWORD popup ................................. 150
CHANNEL DISPLAY screen (AUX channel) ... 58, 138
CHANNEL DISPLAY screen (Input channel) .. 46, 138
CHANNEL DISPLAY screen (MAIN C channel) ... 138
CHANNEL DISPLAY screen (MAIN L/R channel) 58
CHANNEL DISPLAY screen (MATRIX channel) .... 68
CHANNEL LIBRARY popup ...................................... 53
COMP LIBRARY popup .............................................. 81
COMPRESSOR OVERVIEW popup ........................... 80
COMPRESSOR popup .................................................. 78
CONFIRMATION message ......................................... 41
COPY MATRIX MIX popup ........................................ 72
COPY MIX LEVEL popup ......................................... 195
CREATE NEW USER popup ..................................... 148
D
DATE&TIME popup ................................................... 175
DCA GROUP ASSIGN popup .................................. 115
DCA GROUP screen ................................................... 114
E
EFFECTS screen (EXT FX 1–4 tab) ............................ 112
EFFECTS screen (EXT FX 5–8 tab) ............................ 112
EFFECTS screen (FX 1–4 tab) ....................................... 99
EFFECTS screen (GEQ 1–4 tab) ................................. 104
ENTER PASSWORD popup .............................. 147, 179
EQ LIBRARY popup ..................................................... 86
EQUALIZER popup ..................................................... 84
ERROR message ............................................................ 41
EXT FX INSERT SELECT popup .............................. 113
F
FADER CALIBRATION popup ................................
FX DESTINATION SELECT popup .........................
FX EDIT popup ............................................................
FX INSERT/SOURCE SELECT popup ....................
FX LIBRARY popup ....................................................
182
100
102
100
102
G
GATE/EXP LIBRARY popup ..................................... 77
GATE/EXPANDER OVERVIEW popup .................. 76
GATE/EXPANDER popup ......................................... 74
GEQ EDIT popup ........................................................ 106
GEQ INSERT SELECT popup ................................... 105
GEQ LIBRARY popup ................................................ 109
GLOBAL SCOPE popup ............................................ 131
GROUP ASSIGN popup .............................................. 54
240
I
INITIALIZE popup ..................................................... 172
INPUT PATCHBAY LIBRARY popup ....................... 92
K
KEY-IN SELECT popup ......................................... 76, 80
L
LCR SETUP popup ..................................................... 136
LIBRARY popup ............................................................ 39
LIBRARY STORE popup .............................................. 40
LIMITER LIBRARY popup .......................................... 83
LIMITER popup ............................................................ 82
LOAD/SAVE popup .................................................. 173
M
M-48 COPY popup ...................................................... 200
M-48 GROUP MIX popup .......................................... 198
M-48 LIBRARY popup ............................................... 203
M-48 LOAD/SAVE popup ........................................ 205
M-48 MANAGER popup ........................................... 187
M-48 MEMORY LIST popup ..................................... 133
M-48 MEMORY popup .............................................. 201
M-48 MEMORY STORE popup ................................. 202
M-48 PREFERENCES popup ..................................... 191
M-48 SAVE popup ...................................................... 206
M-48 SETUP popup .................................................... 190
M-48 SOURCE ASSIGN popup ................................. 196
M-48 SOURCE LEV/PAN popup ............................. 193
MAKE FOLDER popup .............................................. 177
MATRIX SENDS popup ............................................... 89
MATRIX SOURCE SELECT popup ............................ 72
METER screen (Analyzer tab) ..................................... 96
METER screen (LAYER VIEW tab) ............................. 95
METER screen (METER tab) ........................................ 94
METER screen (NAME LIST tab) ................................ 97
METER SETUP popup .................................................. 96
MONITOR screen ........................................................ 123
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN popup ................................ 117
MUTE GROUP screen ................................................ 117
N
NAME EDIT popup ...................................................... 39
NAME EDIT popup (Channel name) ......................... 51
O
OUTPUT PATCHBAY LIBRARY popup ................... 93
P
PATCHBAY screen ....................................................... 90
PROJECT SAVE popup .............................................. 173
R
REAC CONFIG popup (REAC A tab) ...................... 163
REAC CONFIG popup (REAC B tab) ...................... 163
M-380_e1.book 241 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
Screen index
REAC CONFIG popup (SETUP tab) ........................
REAC CONFIG popup (SPLIT tab) ..........................
RECALL PARAMETER EDIT popup ......................
RECORDER DESTINATION SELECT popup ........
RECORDER screen .....................................................
RECORDER SOURCE SELECT popup ....................
REMOTE popup (MIDI tab) ......................................
REMOTE popup (RS-232C tab) .................................
REMOTE popup (USB MIDI tab) .............................
REMOTE popup (V-LINK tab) .................................
162
164
127
143
141
143
166
169
168
167
S
SAVE CURRENT USER popup ................................ 149
SCENE LIST EDIT popup .......................................... 129
SCENE screen .............................................................. 125
SCENE STORE popup ................................................ 126
SYSTEM CONFIG screen ........................................... 181
SYSTEM screen .................................................... 170–172
T
TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR screen ................. 120–121
TEMPO popup ............................................................. 103
U
USB MEMORY popup ................................................ 176
USER BUTTON ASSIGN popup ............................... 154
USER FADER ASSIGN popup .................................. 153
USER LEVEL popup ................................................... 151
USER PREFERENCE popup ...................... 152, 154–155
USER screen ................................................................. 147
V
V-LINK SOURCE CHANNEL SELECT popup ...... 167
W
Wait message ................................................................. 41
241
M-380_e1.book 242 ページ 2009年8月28日
金曜日
午後8時5分
For China
For the USA
Model Name :
Type of Equipment :
Responsible Party :
Address :
Telephone :
M-380
Digital Mixer
Roland Systems Group U.S.
425 Sequoia Drive, Suite 114, Bellingham, WA 98226
(360) 594-4282
Block Diagram (LCR SYSTEM: ON)
MAIN
LR
TO REAC A OUT
AUX
SOLO
1 2 (C) 16 L R
16 INPUTS
S-1608 INPUT
GAIN
PEAK
SIG
+48V
POST ATT
INPUT
PATCHBAY
A/D
REAC A
INPUT
8 INPUTS
S-0816
INPUT1–8
PHANTOM
GAIN
PRE FADER
CH 1–48
PREAMP
POST ATT
GATE IN GATE OUT COMP OUT
GR
32
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
33
PHASE
FADER BAL
ATT
FILTER
GATE/
EXP
MUTE
OUTPUT LEVEL
MONITOR/
To another
M-400/M-380 BROADCAST
GEQ
INSERT
C SW
MUTE FADER
LR SW
PAN
4BAND
EQ
COMP
PHANTOM
GAIN
TO
GATE
KEY-IN
+48V
REAC B
INPUT
A/D
GATE
KEY-IN
1
SI-AES4
AES/EBU
CENTER
TO
COMP
KEY-IN
LCR
MAIN SW
PAN
(LCR)
Up to 24 GATE / EXP units are available.
Up to 24 COMP units are available.
33
From another FOH 40 Channel split out
(For REAC A only)
M-400/M-380
MAX 40 OUTPUTS
SO-DA4
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
POST FADER
SW
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
POST FADER
SW
SEND
AUX
LINK
D/A
TO AUX 1, 3...7
PAN
MAIN
OUT R
SEND
TO AUX 2, 4...8
MAIN
OUT C
SPLIT/
BACKUP
OUT
8
1
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
POST FADER
AUX SEND 1–16
REAC A
OUT
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
POST FADER
SEND
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
POST FADER
SEND
AUX
LINK
SW
MTX
LINK
SW SEND
D/A
TO MTX 2, 4...8
PAN
SOLO
S-0816 OUTPUT 16 OUTPUTS
TO SOLO
40
S-1608 OUTPUT 8 OUTPUTS
40
SW SEND
TO AUX
1, 3...15
SRC
OUTPUT 1–8
TO MTX 1, 3...7
PAN
SO-AES4
AES/EBU
9
MATRIX SEND 1–8
COMP
KEY-IN
32
SRC
S-4000S OUTPUT
AUX SEND 1–16
40
SI-AD4
MAIN
OUT L
LIMITER
POST FADER
GR
EXT FX
FX
INSERT INSERT
MAX 40 INPUTS
POST FADER
4BAND
EQ
ATT
A/D
S-4000S
PRE EQ
EXT FX
FX
INSERT INSERT
1
PEAK
SIG
+48V
OUTPUT
PATCHBAY
MAIN L, R, C
INPUT1–16
PHANTOM
REAC A INPUT
REAC B INPUT
Total 32 channel
Total 32 channel
SW
OUTPUT 1–16
TO MONITOR SELECT
TO REC SELECT
TO AUX
2, 4...16
D/A
GAIN
PHANTOM
+48V
CONSOLE INPUT 1–8
PFL(L)
AFL(L)
PFL(R)
AFL(R)
A/D
GAIN
STEREO INPUT L, R
AFL SW
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
POST FADER
A/D
AUX 1–16 (One of the AUX is used as MAIN C)
S-4000S OUTPUT
SOLO
POST ATT
DIRECT OUT
POINT
PRE EQ
MAX 40 OUTPUTS
OUTPUT LEVEL
SO-DA4
D/A
FX
EXT FX
INSERT INSERT
FADER BAL
MUTE
4BAND
EQ
ATT
TO MAIRIX 1–8,
TO OUTPUT PATCHBAY
POST FADER
PRE FADER
GEQ
INSERT
SO-AES4
AES/EBU
AUX 1–16
OUT
LIMITER
MAIN SEND
SRC
C SW
OSC
LEVEL
OSCILLATOR
FX 1 OUT L / R
FX 2 OUT L / R
FX 3 OUT L / R
OSC
LEVEL
PINK NOISE
WHITE NOISE
SINE WAVE
FX 4 OUT L / R
OSC
ON
TO EXTARNAL FX
TO MAIN L
1
REAC B
OUT
TO MAIN C
TALKBACK
LEVEL
TALKBACK
ON
OUTPUT 1–8
D/A
PAN
(LCR)
CENTER
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
POST FADER
MAIN L, R, AUX 1–16,
MATRIX 1–8 SW
SW
A/D
S-0816 OUTPUT 16 OUTPUTS
MTX
LINK
SW SEND
OUTPUT 1–16
TO MTX 1, 3...7
PAN
D/A
SW SEND
TO MAIRIX 1–8
TO MTX 2, 4...8
TO OUTPUT PATCHBAY
SOLO
S-4000S OUTPUT
TO SOLO L
EFFECTS
FX
INPUT
SELECT
CH 1 FX INSERT OUT
CH 48 FX INSERT OUT
IN LEVEL
FX 1
OUT LEVEL
TO MONITOR SELECT
TO REC SELECT
TO FX SOURCE SELECT
Same as the above
31 BAND GEQ
To MAIN L FX INSERT IN
To MAIN R FX INSERT IN
To MAIN C FX INSERT IN
FX 3
Same as the above
FX 4
To INPUT PATCHBAY
Same as the above
IN LEVEL
AUX 1 GEQ INSERT OUT
AUX 16 GEQ INSERT OUT
GEQ 1
OUT LEVEL
CH SELECT
Same as the above
DIRECT OUT 1
EXTERNAL FX
GEQ 4
EXT
INSERT
OUT
CH 1 EXT FX INSERT OUT
CH 48 EXT FX INSERT OUT
AUX 1 EXT FX INSERT OUT
AUX 16 EXT FX INSERT OUT
MATRIX 1 EXT FX INSERT OUT
MATRIX 8 EXT FX INSERT OUT
MAIN L EXT FX INSERT OUT
MAIN R EXT FX INSERT OUT
MAIN C EXT FX INSERT OUT
SEND
LEVEL
EXT FX 1–8
RETURN
LEVEL
RETURN
LEVEL
OPTICAL
TO SOLO R
FROM CH B
Same as the above
DIGITAL OUT
TO MONITOR SELECT
TO REC SELECT
TO MTX 2, 4...8
USB MEMORY RECORDER
MONITOR
REC
SELECT
SOLO
LEVEL
AUX 1 OUT
MONITOR
SELECT
AUX 1 OUT
MONITOR
LEVEL
AUX 16 OUT
MAIN OUT LR
MAIN OUT C
To AUX 1 EXT FX INSERT IN
To AUX 16 EXT FX INSERT IN
MAIN OUT LCR
MAIN MONO OUT
To MATRIX 1 EXT FX INSERT IN
To MATRIX 8 EXT FX INSERT IN
To MAIN L EXT FX INSERT IN
To MAIN R EXT FX INSERT IN
To MAIN C EXT FX INSERT IN
COAXIAL
TO SOLO L
TALKBACK
OSCILLATOR
To CH 1 EXT FX INSERT IN
To CH 48 EXT FX INSERT IN
SEND
LEVEL
MATRIX 1–8
OUT
SOLO
MTX
LINK
PAN
MATRIX 1–8 SOLO
EXT
INSERT
IN
CONSOLE INPUT 1–8
CONSOLE OUTPUT 1–8
D/A
GEQ
INSERT
TO MTX 2, 4...8
To MAIN L GEQ INSERT IN
To MAIN R GEQ INSERT IN
To MAIN C GEQ INSERT IN
Same as the above
MUTE
FROM CH A
SW SEND
GEQ 3
MAIN L GEQ INSERT OUT
MAIN R GEQ INSERT OUT
MAIN C GEQ INSERT OUT
POST FADER OUTPUT LEVEL
PRE FADER
EXT FX
FX
FADER
BAL
INSERT INSERT
To MATRIX 1 GEQ INSERT IN
To MATRIX 8 GEQ INSERT IN
Same as the above
TO MTX 1, 3...7
TO MTX 2, 4...8
SRC
ATT
To AUX 1 GEQ INSERT IN
To AUX 16 GEQ INSERT IN
GEQ 2
MATRIX 1 GEQ INSERT OUT
MATRIX 8 GEQ INSERT OUT
MATRIX SEND
(FROM AUX 1–16)
DIRECT OUT 48
GEQ
OUTPUT
SELECT
31 BAND GEQ
TO MTX 1, 3...7
TO MTX 2, 4...8
AUX 1–16 SEND (FROM MAIN)
MAIN L SOLO
MAIN R SOLO
MAIN C SOLO
MAIN SEND (FROM AUX 1–16)
AUX 1–16 SOLO
GEQ
INPUT
SELECT
MATRIX SEND
(FROM MAIN)
POST ATT
To MATRIX 1 FX INSERT IN
To MATRIX 8 FX INSERT IN
FX 2
AUX 1 OUT
AUX 16 OUT
SO-AES4
AES/EBU
MATRIX 1–8
To AUX 1 FX INSERT IN
To AUX 16 FX INSERT IN
31 BAND GEQ
MAIN L FX INSERT OUT
MAIN R FX INSERT OUT
MAIN C FX INSERT OUT
D/A
To CH 1 FX INSERT IN
To CH 48 FX INSERT IN
31 BAND GEQ
MATRIX 1 FX INSERT OUT
MATRIX 8 FX INSERT OUT
MAX 40 OUTPUTS
SO-DA4
TO SOLO R
FX
OUTPUT
SELECT
EFFECT
AUX 1 FX INSERT OUT
AUX 16 FX INSERT OUT
S-1608 OUTPUT 8 OUTPUTS
TO MAIN R
MATRIX SEND 1–8
TALKBACK
LEVEL
+48V
TALKBACK MIC
LCR
LR SW
MAIN SW
TO MAIRIX 1–8
TO OUTPUT PATCHBAY
TALKBACK
GAIN
SEND PAN
40
PLAY L / R
PHANTOM
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
POST FADER
MAIN L, R, AUX 1–16,
MATRIX 1–8 SW
SW
SOLO
LOGIC
MONITOR
LEVEL
AUX 16 OUT
MAIN OUT L
MAIN OUT R
MAIN OUT C
MAIN OUT L+C
MAIN OUT R+C
MAIN MONO OUT
MATRIX 1 OUT
MATRIX 8 OUT
REC
LEVEL
DIRECT OUT
1–48
OSCILLATOR
USB
MEMORY
REC
LEVEL
TALKBACK
USB MEMORY
RECORDER
TO INPUT
PATCHBAY
REC
OUT L, R
TO MONITOR
SELECT
MONITOR OUT L
MONITOR OUT R
PHONES
LEVEL
MATRIX 1 OUT
MATRIX 8 OUT
REC OUT LR
LR
MAIN
1 2 (C) 16 L R
AUX
SOLO
D/A
PHONES
OUT
Block Diagram (LCR SYSTEM: OFF)
MAIN AUX SOLO
LR 12
TO REAC A OUT
16 L R
16 INPUTS
S-1608 INPUT
GAIN
PEAK
SIG
+48V
8 INPUTS
INPUT1–8
PHANTOM
GAIN
REAC A
INPUT
PREAMP
POST ATT
GATE IN GATE OUT COMP OUT
32
GR
33
GATE/
EXP
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
PHASE
ATT
FILTER
FADER BAL
OUTPUT LEVEL
MONITOR/
To another
M-400/M-380 BROADCAST
MUTE
4BAND
EQ
ATT
POST FADER
POST FADER
GEQ
INSERT
PHANTOM
GAIN
TO
GATE
KEY-IN
+48V
REAC B
INPUT
A/D
FADER
MUTE
MAIN
SW
PAN
4BAND
EQ
COMP
SI-AES4
AES/EBU
TO
COMP
KEY-IN
GATE
KEY-IN
1
AUX SEND 1–16
COMP
KEY-IN
SW
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
POST FADER
32
SRC
AUX
LINK
SEND
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
POST FADER
SW
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
POST FADER
SW
D/A
AUX
LINK
SEND
SPLIT/
BACKUP
OUT
8
1
TO AUX 1, 3...7
PAN
TO AUX
1, 3...15
From another FOH 40 Channel split out
(For REAC A only)
M-400/M-380
SW
TO AUX 2, 4...8
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
POST FADER
PAN
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
POST FADER
Up to 24 COMP units are available.
SEND
MONO
OUT
REAC A
OUT
D/A
SW SEND
SEND
TO AUX
2, 4...16
TO MTX 2, 4...8
SOLO
TO SOLO
S-0816 OUTPUT 16 OUTPUTS
MAIN
OUT R
OUTPUT 1–16
TO MONITOR SELECT
TO REC SELECT
PFL(L)
AFL(L)
PFL(R)
AFL(R)
GAIN
+48V
CONSOLE INPUT 1–8
A/D
GAIN
STEREO INPUT L, R
AFL SW
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
POST FADER
S-1608 OUTPUT 8 OUTPUTS
40
TO MTX 1, 3...7
PAN
40
PHANTOM
SRC
OUTPUT 1–8
MTK
LINK
SW SEND
SO-AES4
AES/EBU
9
-6 dB
MIX
MATRIX SEND 1–8
Up to 24 GATE / EXP units are available.
33
MAX 40 OUTPUTS
SO-DA4
40
SI-AD4
S-4000S OUTPUT
MAIN
OUT L
LIMITER
AUX SEND 1–16
EXT FX
FX
INSERT INSERT
MAX 40 INPUTS
PRE FADER
GR
A/D
S-4000S
PRE EQ
EXT FX
FX
INSERT INSERT
CH 1–48
1
PEAK
SIG
+48V
POST ATT
INPUT
PATCHBAY
A/D
S-0816
OUTPUT
PATCHBAY
MAIN L, R
INPUT1–16
PHANTOM
REAC A INPUT
REAC B INPUT
Total 32 channel
Total 32 channel
D/A
SOLO
S-4000S OUTPUT
AUX 1–16
MAX 40 OUTPUTS
SO-DA4
DIRECT OUT
POINT
POST ATT
TO MAIRIX 1–8,
TO OUTPUT PATCHBAY
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
EXT FX
FX
INSERT INSERT
A/D
POST FADER
FADER BAL
MUTE
4BAND
EQ
ATT
D/A
OUTPUT LEVEL
SO-AES4
AES/EBU
GEQ
INSERT
SRC
AUX 1–16
OUT
LIMITER
MAIN SEND
OSC
LEVEL
OSCILLATOR
FX 1 OUT L / R
FX 2 OUT L / R
FX 3 OUT L / R
FX 4 OUT L / R
OSC
LEVEL
PINK NOISE
WHITE NOISE
SINE WAVE
OSC
ON
MAIN L, R, AUX 1–16,
MATRIX 1–8 SW
SW
TO EXTARNAL FX
TO MAIRIX 1–8
TO OUTPUT PATCHBAY
TALKBACK
GAIN
TALKBACK
LEVEL
TALKBACK
LEVEL
+48V
TALKBACK MIC
SW
SEND
PAN
1
TO MAIN L, R
REAC B
OUT
TALKBACK
ON
MAIN L, R, AUX 1–16,
MATRIX 1–8 SW
SW
A/D
D/A
MATRIX SEND 1-8
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
POST FADER
MTX
LINK
SW SEND
TO MTX 1, 3...7
+
S-0816 OUTPUT 16 OUTPUTS
OUTPUT 1–16
SW SEND
TO MTX 2, 4...8
D/A
SOLO
TO MAIRIX 1–8
TO SOLO L
TO OUTPUT PATCHBAY
TO SOLO R
EFFECTS
FX
INPUT
SELECT
CH 1 FX INSERT OUT
CH 48 FX INSERT OUT
IN LEVEL
FX 1
OUT LEVEL
S-4000S OUTPUT
TO MONITOR SELECT
TO REC SELECT
TO FX SOURCE SELECT
FX
OUTPUT
SELECT
MAX 40 OUTPUTS
SO-DA4
D/A
To CH 1 FX INSERT IN
To CH 48 FX INSERT IN
MATRIX 1–8
SO-AES4
AES/EBU
EFFECT
AUX 1 FX INSERT OUT
AUX 16 FX INSERT OUT
To AUX 1 FX INSERT IN
To AUX 16 FX INSERT IN
31 BAND GEQ
31 BAND GEQ
MATRIX 1 FX INSERT OUT
MATRIX 8 FX INSERT OUT
Same as the above
FX 3
MAIN L FX INSERT OUT
MAIN R FX INSERT OUT
Same as the above
AUX 1 OUT
AUX 16 OUT
Same as the above
31 BAND GEQ
To MAIN L FX INSERT IN
To MAIN R FX INSERT IN
FX 4
IN LEVEL
AUX 1 GEQ INSERT OUT
AUX 16 GEQ INSERT OUT
GEQ 1
MATRIX SEND
(FROM AUX 1–16)
TO MTX 1, 3...7
TO MTX 2, 4...8
OUT LEVEL
CH SELECT
GEQ 2
DIRECT OUT 1
EXTERNAL FX
EXT
INSERT
OUT
MATRIX 1 EXT FX INSERT OUT
MATRIX 8 EXT FX INSERT OUT
MAIN L EXT FX INSERT OUT
MAIN R EXT FX INSERT OUT
TO MONITOR SELECT
TO REC SELECT
TO MTX 2, 4...8
USB MEMORY RECORDER
REC
SELECT
AUX 1 OUT
RETURN
LEVEL
RETURN
LEVEL
MAIN OUT L
MAIN OUT R
MONITOR
SELECT
REC
LEVEL
DIRECT OUT
1–48
OSCILLATOR
USB
MEMORY
REC
LEVEL
TALKBACK
MONITOR
LEVEL
AUX 16 OUT
MAIN OUT L
MAIN OUT R
TO INPUT
PATCHBAY
SOLO
LOGIC
MONITOR
LEVEL
MATRIX 1 OUT
MATRIX 8 OUT
REC
OUT L, R
TO MONITOR
SELECT
MONITOR OUT L
MAIN MONO OUT
To AUX 1 EXT FX INSERT IN
To AUX 16 EXT FX INSERT IN
MATRIX 1 OUT
MONITOR OUT R
PHONES
LEVEL
MATRIX 8 OUT
To MATRIX 1 EXT FX INSERT IN
To MATRIX 8 EXT FX INSERT IN
To MAIN L EXT FX INSERT IN
To MAIN R EXT FX INSERT IN
USB MEMORY
RECORDER
MAIN MONO OUT
AUX 1 OUT
To CH 1 EXT FX INSERT IN
To CH 48 EXT FX INSERT IN
EXT FX 1–8
FROM CH B
Same as the above
SOLO
LEVEL
EXT
INSERT
IN
SEND
LEVEL
DIGITAL OUT
AUX 16 OUT
CONSOLE INPUT 1–8
SEND
LEVEL
OPTICAL
TO SOLO R
MONITOR
To MAIN L GEQ INSERT IN
To MAIN R GEQ INSERT IN
CH 1 EXT FX INSERT OUT
CH 48 EXT FX INSERT OUT
AUX 1 EXT FX INSERT OUT
AUX 16 EXT FX INSERT OUT
COAXIAL
TO SOLO L
TALKBACK
OSCILLATOR
GEQ 3
GEQ 4
MATRIX 1–8
OUT
SOLO
MTX
LINK
PAN
MATRIX 1-8 SOLO
To MATRIX 1 GEQ INSERT IN
To MATRIX 8 GEQ INSERT IN
Same as the above
CONSOLE OUTPUT 1–8
D/A
GEQ
INSERT
TO MTX 2, 4...8
Same as the above
MAIN L GEQ INSERT OUT
MAIN R GEQ INSERT OUT
MUTE
FROM CH A
SW SEND
To AUX 1 GEQ INSERT IN
To AUX 16 GEQ INSERT IN
Same as the above
POST FADER OUTPUT LEVEL
PRE FADER
EXT FX
FX
FADER
BAL
INSERT INSERT
DIRECT OUT 48
GEQ
OUTPUT
SELECT
SRC
ATT
To INPUT PATCHBAY
31 BAND GEQ
MATRIX 1 GEQ INSERT OUT
MATRIX 8 GEQ INSERT OUT
TO MTX 1, 3...7
TO MTX 2, 4...8
AUX 1–16 SEND (FROM MAIN)
MAIN L SOLO
MAIN R SOLO
MAIN SEND (FROM AUX 1–16)
AUX 1-16 SOLO
GEQ
INPUT
SELECT
MATRIX SEND
(FROM MAIN)
POST ATT
To MATRIX 1 FX INSERT IN
To MATRIX 8 FX INSERT IN
FX 2
S-1608 OUTPUT 8 OUTPUTS
OUTPUT 1–8
40
PLAY L / R
PHANTOM
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
POST FADER
REC OUT L
REC OUT R
LR 12
16 L R
MAIN AUX SOLO
D/A
PHONES
OUT
For EU Countries
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture.
CAUTION
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the
product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to
constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
ATTENTION: RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the product.
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING - When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with a dry cloth.
Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including
amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with
one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two
blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the
third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug
does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the apparatus.
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified
by the manufacturer.
12. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
unused for long periods of time.
13. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing
is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any
way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid
has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus,
the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does
not operate normally, or has been dropped.
For the U.K.
WARNING:
THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED
IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE.
GREEN-AND-YELLOW: EARTH, BLUE: NEUTRAL, BROWN: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the
letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or GREEN-AND-YELLOW.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Danger of explosion if battery is
incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer.
Discard used batteries according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Apparatus containing
Lithium batteries
ADVARSEL!
VARNING
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved
fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af
samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til
leverandøren.
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en
ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av
apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt
fabrikantens instruktion.
ADVARSEL
VAROITUS
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av
batteri.
Benytt samme batteritype eller en
tilsvarende type anbefalt av
apparatfabrikanten.
Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til
fabrikantens instruks joner.
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on
virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan
laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo
valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
For EU Countries
This product complies with the requirements of EMCD 2004/108/EC and LVD 2006/95/EC.
For the USA
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
For Canada
NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
AVIS
CAUTION: Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with same or equivalent type.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
For C.A. US (Proposition 65)
WARNING
This product contains chemicals known to cause cancer, birth defects and other reproductive harm, including lead.
2
Information
When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as shown below.
AFRICA
CENTRAL/LATIN
AMERICA
ALGERIA / LIBYA / TUNISIA
Roland Iberia, S.L.
Paseo García Faria, 33-35
08005 Barcelona SPAIN
TEL: 93 493 91 00
BRAZIL
Roland Brasil Ltda.
Rua San Jose, 211
Parque Industrial San Jose
Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL
TEL: (011) 4615 5666
SOUTH AFRICA
Paul Bothner(PTY) Ltd.
Royal Cape Park, Unit 24
Londonderry Road, Ottery 7800
Cape Town, SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (021) 799 4900
ASIA
INDONESIA
PT. Citra IntiRama
JL. Cideng Timur No. 15J-15O
Jakarta Pusat
INDONESIA
TEL: (021) 632-4170
CHINA
Roland Shanghai Electronics Co.,Ltd.
5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road
Shanghai 200090, CHINA
TEL: (021) 5580-0800
Roland Systems Group U.S.
425 Sequoia Drive Suite 114,
Bellingham, Washington,
98226 USA
TEL: 360-594-4282
EUROPE
AUSTRIA/BELGIUM/
FRANCE/GERMANY/
HOLLAND/
LUXEMBOURG/
PORTUGAL/SPAIN/
SWITZERLAND
Roland Iberia, S.L.
Paseo García Faria, 33-35
08005 Barcelona SPAIN
TEL: 93 493 91 00
TAIWAN
ROLAND TAIWAN
ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.
Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung Shan
N.Road Sec.2, Taipei, TAIWAN, R.O.C.
TEL: (02) 2561 3339
MuTek
Dorozhnaya ul.3,korp.6
117 545 Moscow, RUSSIA
TEL: (095) 981-4967
FINLAND
Roland Scandinavia As, Filial
Finland
Vanha Nurmijarventie 62
01670 Vantaa
Finland
TEL: (0)9 68 24 020
HUNGARY
Roland East Europe Ltd.
2045 Torokbalint, FSD Park, building 3.
TEL: (23) 511011
NORWAY
Roland Scandinavia Avd.
Kontor Norge
Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95
Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo
NORWAY
TEL: 2273 0074
POLAND
ROLAND POLSKA SP. Z O.O.
ul. Kty Grodziskie 16B
03-289 Warszawa, POLAND
TEL: (022) 678 9512
SLOVAKIA
DAN Acoustic s.r.o.
Povazská 18.
SK - 940 01 Nové Zámky
TEL: (035) 6424 330
MIDDLE EAST
BAHRAIN / CYPRUS /
JORDAN / IRAQ / ISRAEL /
LEBANON / OMAN / QATAR /
KUWAIT / SAUDI ARABIA /
SYRIA / U.A.E / YEMEN
Roland Iberia, S.L.
Paseo García Faria, 33-35
08005 Barcelona SPAIN
TEL: 93 493 91 00
ART-CENTAR
Degenova 3.
HR - 10000 Zagreb
TEL: (1) 466 8493
Roland Scandinavia A/S
SWEDISH SALES OFFICE
Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.
S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN
TEL: (0)8 702 00 20
IRAN
MOCO INC.
No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave.,
Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad
Tehran, IRAN
TEL: (021)-2285-4169
UKRAINE
EURHYTHMICS Ltd.
P.O.Box: 37-a.
Nedecey Str. 30
UA - 89600 Mukachevo, UKRAINE
TEL: (03131) 414-40
UNITED KINGDOM/
IRELAND
Roland (U.K.) Ltd.
Atlantic Close, Swansea Enterprise Park,
Swansea
SA7 9FJ,
UNITED KINGDOM
TEL: (01792) 702701
OCEANIA
AUSTRALIA/
NEW ZEALAND
Roland Corporation
Australia Pty.,Ltd.
38 Campbell Avenue
Dee Why West, NSW 2099
AUSTRALIA
For Australia
TEL: (02) 9982 8266
For New Zealand
TEL: (09) 3098 715
CZECH REP.
CZECH REPUBLIC
DISTRIBUTOR s.r.o
Voctárova 247/16
CZ - 180 00 PRAHA 8,
CZECH REP.
TEL: (2) 830 20270
ROMANIA
FBS LINES
Piata Libertatii 1,
535500 Gheorgheni, ROMANIA
TEL: (266) 364 609
Owner’s Manual
SWEDEN
CROATIA
KOREA
KOREA AVICS CO., LTD.
Unit B-2208, Woolimblue9,
#240-21, Yeomchang-dong,
Gangseo-gu, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 02-322-3264
RUSSIA
Roland Scandinavia A/S
Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,
DK-2100 Copenhagen
DENMARK
TEL: 3916 6200
NORTH AMERICA
CANADA
Roland Canada Ltd.
(Head Office)
5480 Parkwood Way, Richmond B. C.,
V6V 2M4 CANADA
TEL: (604) 270 6626
Roland Canada Ltd.
(Toronto Office)
170 Admiral Boulevard
Mississauga ON L5T 2N6 CANADA
TEL: (905) 362 9707
Owner’s Manual
Roland Shanghai Electronics Co.,Ltd.
(BEIJING OFFICE)
10F. No.18 3 Section Anhuaxili
Chaoyang District Beijing
100011 CHINA
TEL: (010) 6426-5050
Other CENTRAL/ LATIN
AMERICA
DENMARK
U. S. A.
SINGAPORE/
MALAYSIA
Roland Asia Pacific Sdn. Bhd.
45-1, Block C2, Jalan PJU 1/39,
Dataran Prima, 47301 Petaling Jaya,
Selangor, MALAYSIA
TEL: 3-7805-3263
Roland Systems Group U.S.
425 Sequoia Drive Suite 114,
Bellingham, Washington,
98226 USA
TEL: 360-594-4282
As of Aug.1,2009 (RSS)
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “IMPORTANT
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” (p. 2), “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” (p. 3–5), and
“IMPORTANT NOTES” (p. 6–7). These sections provide important
information concerning the proper operation of the unit. Additionally, in
order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature
provided by your new unit, Owner’s manual should be read in its entirety.
The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference.
Copyright © 2009 ROLAND CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form
without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement